Padala Rama Reddi

AP Engineers Hub
 THE
ANDHRA PRADESH

DETAILED STANDARD
SPECIFICATIONS
AND
General Principles of
Engineering Contracts
By
Padala Rarna Reddi
Padala Srinivasa Reddy

lV'ith a Foreword By
Hon'ble Justice Alladi Kuppuswamy
Chief Justice (Retd.), High Court of A.P.

Thideenth Edition

2012
 THE ANDHRA PRADESH
DETAILED STAN DARD SPEC IFICATION S &
General Principles of Engineering Contracts

General Contents

Title Pages
General Contents
Foreword

Authors' Note 7

Authors' Note to Fifth Edition 9

Detailed Contents 13

The Andhra Pradesh Preliminary Specifications 33

The Andhra Pradesh Standard Specifications 103

Appendix (Code for E.P.C. Contracts) 664-A

lnstructions relating to EPC System 873

General principles of Engineering Contracts 665

Subject lndex 911

E)(ECUTIVE El\lGI¡lEER, ROAI)S & BUII.DIlllG

DIPT,
Ph: 77991 39399, [email protected].

' wnhighways.blcgspot.in
Justice Alladi Kuppuswami 3 -6-2261 l, Himayatnagar,
Chief Justice, (Retd.) Hyderabad - 500 029.
High Court òf Andhra Pradesh.

FOREIITORD

Iam glad to learn that Sri Padala Rama Reddi has compiled the
'Works
Andhra Pradesh Public Code which is being brought out in three
volumes containing the A.P. Public Works Department Code, A.P. Public
Works Accounts Code and the A.P. Detailed Standard Specihcations
respectively.

He has been responsible in the past for getting published a number

of Codes and Manuals like the Andhra Pradesh Education Code, Andhra
Pradesh Civil Services Code, Andhra Pradesh Co-operative Law Manual and
Andhra Pradesh Gram Panchayats Manual, etc.

These three volumes will be welcome additions to such publications.

The Conhactors and their Engineers on the one hand and the Departmental
Officers and Engineers qn the other are equally interested in having an upto
date compilation of the various rules, executive instructions, case law, etc.,
relating to a nbmber of matters connected with publio works. In the absence
of a complete code containing the rules and instructions it will be practically
impossible to carry out any undertaking relating to public works. The
authors have taken immense pains to collect all the material.
I have no doubt that these volumes will be extremely useful not only
to the Contractors and their Engineers as well as the Departmental Officers
but also to the Lawyers who assist the Contractors and Department and who
have also to appear sometimes before the Arbitrators and the Courts in
proceedings arising out of arbitration.

ALLADI KUPPUSWAMI
 THE ANDHRA PRADESH
PRELIMINARY SPECIFICATIONS
DETAILED CONTENTS

Specification Name of Specification Page

No. No.

A. — Preface
1. Intent and reference to A.P.S.S. 37
2. Applicability of the A.P.S.S. 37
3. Contractor to sign in the Divisional (or the Sub-Divisional)
copy of the A.P.S.S. 37
4. Term “Specification” apart from “Standard Specification” 38
5. Sub-Specifications 38
6. Additions and alterations to the standard specifications
in the A.P.S.S. 38
7. Powers of Superintending Engineers and Executive Engineers
to supplement or alter the A.P.S.S. 38
8. Definition of terms 38
9. Evidence of Experience 39
10. Legal address — Notices 39

B. — Statement of approximate quantities in Schedule A

11. Quantities approximate and contractor to verify the nature

and amount of work 39
12. Approximate not to mean deviation from drawings
and specifications 40
13. To compare tenders 40

C. — Drawings and Specifications

14. Purpose 40
15. Conformance 40
16. Variations by way of modifications, omissions or additions 41
17. Copies of drawings and specifications 41
18. Signed drawings — No authority to the contractor 41
19. Finished sizes 41
14 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

Specification Name of Specification Page

No. No.

D. — Materials and Workmanship

20. To be the best quality 41

21. Conventions for proportions 42
22. Measurement and mixing 42
23. Data 42
24. Lay-out of material stacks 42
25. Source of purchase of materials and stores 42
26. Contractor liable for materials supplied by the Government 42
27. Test inspection and rejection of defective materials and work 42
28. Defects, shrinkage, etc., after completion 44
29. Executive Engineer’s decision 44
30. Dismissal of Workmen 44
31. Contractor’s maistri or agent and Contractor’s staff 44
32. Government maistries or agents 45

E. — Included in the Contract Rates

33. Defining Contract Schedule Rates 45

34. Carriage 45
35. Construction Plant 46
36. Scaffolding instructions 46
37. Temporary instructions 47
38. Water and lighting 47
39. Latrines for Work-people 47
40. Sun protection, keeping dry and pumping 47
41. Tools and seigniorage 47
42. Setting out works 48
43. Cleaning up during progress and for delivery 48

F. — Responsibilities and Liabilities of the Contractor

44. Observance of Laws — Local regulations & notices — Attachments 48

45. Accidents — Hoarding, Lightings, Observations — Watchmen 48
46. Blasting 50
47. Protection of adjoining and existing premises 50
48. Permit other Workmen— Co-operation — Afford facilities 50
49. Holes for water service, gas, electrical and sanitary fittings 50
Specification Name of Specification Page
No. No.

50. Contractor’s risk and insurance 50

51. Holidays 51

G. — Miscellaneous

52. Sand and gravel 51

53. Old curiosities 51
54. Assignment or sub-letting 51
55. Specialists 51
56. Ratification of the orders of the Executive Engineer 51
57. Order book 51

H. — Date of commencement, completion, delays, extensions,

suspension of work and forfeiture

58. Date of commencement and completion 52

59. Delays and extension of time 52
60. Delays in commencement or progress or neglect of work
and forfeiture of earnest money, security deposit and
withheld amounts 74
61. Suspension of the works by the Contractor 75

I. — Particulars of Payment

62. Payment on lump-sum basis or by final measurement

or unit prices 76
63. Payment for additions and deductions for omissions 77
64. No payment for unsanctioned extras 78
65. Accounts, receipts and vouchers 78
66. Fraud, wilful neglect or default 78
67. Unfixed materials 78
68. Payments and certificates 78
69. Interest on money due to the contractor 79
70. Acceptance of Final measurements 91
71. Recovery of money from contractor in certain cases 91
72. Contractor dying, becoming insolvent, insane or imprisoned 93

J. — Arbitration and Claims of Contractors

on Arbitration Cases

73. Arbitration 94
 Preface 37

PRELIMINARY SPECIFICATIONS
A. — Preface

P.S. 1. Intent and reference to Andhra Pradesh Standard Specifications :— It

is intended by these Andhra Pradesh Standard Specifications to describe—

(a) the character of the materials to be used;

(b) the method of execution of work; and

(c) the contractor’s responsibilities and liabilities to the Public, Government, and
his workmen and general contract conditions which are to be accepted by every
contractor who executes work entrusted to him by the Public Works Department of
Andhra Pradesh.

Whenever the term “Standard Specification” or the abbreviation “A.P.S.S.” is

used in estimates or contract documents, it shall refer to the relevant specification in the
Andhra Pradesh Standard Specifications book and its addenda volume.

P.S. 2. Applicability of the Andhra Pradesh Standard Specifications :—It

shall be unnecessary to include in any contract documents a specification for any item of
work which is defined in the tender notice or in the contract schedule of work to be done,
by a standard specification number. The fact that the item is defined as standard
specification shall mean that the contractor is to execute the work according to such
standard specification, modified as may be necessary by an addendum specification for
that particular item of work.

This preliminary specification shall apply to all agreements entered into by

contractors with the Public Works Department and shall form an inseparable condition of
contract, and it shall not be necessary to append a copy of the same to agreement.

P.S. 3. Contractor to sign in the Divisional or the Sub-Divisional copy of the

A.P.S.S. :—Every contractor who executes work for the Public Works Department shall
carefully study the standard specification for all items of work which are included in the
schedule for work to be done as standard specifications and his obligations under the
“Preliminary Specification” which apply to all agreements, and he shall sign in the
Divisional office copy of the A.P.D.S.S. (or the Sub-Divisional copy if so arranged by the
Executive Engineer) as evidence that he understands clearly the conditions of contract
governing his agreement and accepts the same.

It shall not be necessary for the contractor to sign the Divisional office copy of the
A.P.S.S. for every contract awarded to him, but his signature there in will be evidence
that he accepts the conditions of contract (which includes the standard specifications) as
detailed in the A.P.D.S.S. for every contract into which he enters. I shall also be the
contractor’s responsibility by frequent perusal of the Divisional office (or the Sub-
Divisional office) copy to become conversant with sanctioned alterations or additions
made to the A.P.S.S. as soon as they are made. A separate volume of addenda to the
A.P.D.S.S. will be maintained in each Division (or Sub-
38 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

Division office as the case may be) in which will be entered all sanctioned corrections
and additions. This must also be studied and signed by every contractor before executing
an agreement. Interleaving correction slips will not be made for this purpose. The
contractor should purchase a book of the A.P.D.S.S. for his reference while executing
work.

P.S. 4. Term “Specification” apart from “Standard Specification” :—

Whenever the term “Specification” is used in contract documents apart from “Standard
Specification”, it shall mean the specification or plan prepared for the particular item
referred to in the document, for the instruction of the contractor in executing that item of
work.

P.S. 5. Sub-Specifications :—Works of a similar nature having many common

clauses in their specifications are grouped under one specification number with a
“General”, preface thereto, and the sub-specifications are therefore given an alphabetical
affix.

P.S. 6. Additions and alterations to the standard specifications In the

A.P.S.S.:—Which do not involve legal implications will be approved by the Chief
Engineer (General) in consultation with the other Chief Engineers. Additions and
alterations to the preliminary specifications and standard forms in the A.P.S.S. will be
approved by the Government.

P.S. 7. Powers of Superintending Engineers and Executive Engineers to

supplement or alter the A.P.S.S. :—Superintending and Executive Engineers may alter
the standard specifications for any particular contract, which is within their respective
powers of sanction —, when such alteration is found necessary, by attachment of a
correction sheet to the contract form, bearing the standard specification number, the
corrections, and the signature of the Superintending or the Executive Engineer, as the
case may be, together with the signature of the contractor. Similarly, additional
specifications for items for which there are no standard specifications will be made by
attachment to the contract documents of addendum specification sheets bearing the
signature of the Superintending or the Executive Engineer as the case may be and the
signature of the contractor.

P.S. 8. Definition of terms :—Wherever the words defined in this clause or

pronouns used in their stead occur in contract documents (which includes the A.P.S.S.),
they shall have the meanings here given.

(a) Executive Engineer :—Wherever the term Executive Engineer is used, it shall
be understood to refer the Executive Engineer for the time being in charge of the
concerned work under execution or such other departmental assistants or subordinates to
whom the Executive Engineer may have delegated certain duties, acting severally within
the scope of the particular duty entrusted to them.

(b) No delegation by Executive Engineer, Superintending Engineer or higher

authority which affects agreement. it is, however, to be distinctly understood that the
Executive Engineer or the Superintending Engineer or the higher authority who is vested
with the powers of acceptance of the particular agreement under reference will make no
delegation of powers to such assistant or subordinates which in any way affects the
agreement and its contracts condition when such agreement is to be or has been accepted
by the Executive Engineer or by the other higher
 Statement of Approximate Quantities in Schedule A 39

authority respectively. The duties of such assistants or subordinates will be solely duties
of supervision to ensure compliance with contract conditions.

(c) Contractor :—Wherever the term “Contractor” is used, it shall be understood

to refer to the particular person, firm or corporation with whom an agreement has been
made by the Executive Engineer or higher authority as the case may be, for executing
work defined in the concerned agreement, and for purposes of instructions regarding
compliance with contract conditions, it shall include the contractor’s authorized agent,
who is maintained on the work by the contractor. When two or more contractors are
engaged on installation or construction work in the same vicinity, the Executive Engineer
shall be authorized to direct the manner in which each shall conduct the work so far as it
affects other contractors.

Note :—The terms Sub-Divisional Officer, Assistant Engineer, Executive

Engineer, Superintending Engineer and Chief Engineer used in the following clauses
shall, where the context so requires, be construed as including officers of the
corresponding grade in the Highways Department.

P.S. 9. Evidence of Experience :—Tenderers shall, if required, present

satisfactory evidence to the Executive Engineer that they have been regularly engaged in
constructing such works as they propose to execute and that they are fully prepared with
the necessary capital, machinery and materials to begin the work promptly and to conduct
it as required by the A.P.S.S. and the other specifications for the particular work tendered
for, in the event of their tender being accepted.

P.S. 10. Legal address — Notices :—Tenderers should gave in their tender, their
place of residence and postal address. The delivering at the above named place or posting
in a post box regularly maintained by the Post Office Department or sending by letter
registered for acknowledgement of any notice, letter or other communication to the
contractor shall be deemed sufficient service thereof upon the contractor in writing as
may be changed at any time by an instrument executed by the contractor, and delivered to
the Executive Engineer.

Nothing contained in the agreement and its contract conditions shall be deemed to
preclude or render inoperative the service of any notice, letter, or other communication
upon the contractor personally.

B. — Statement of approximate quantities in Schedule A

PS. 11. Quantities approximate and contractor to verify the nature and
amount of work :—The quantities mentioned in tender notices and given in agreement
(Schedule A) are worked out from the relevant drawings in Public Works Department
Office and may or may not be the actuals required for execution. The Executive Engineer
does not expressly or by implication agree that the actual amount of work to be done will
correspond therewith but reserves the right to increase or decrease the quantity of any
class or portion of the work as he deems necessary. Provided there is no change in the
over all scope of the work.
(Amended by G.O.Ms.No. 1007, Tr. Roads & Blds. (c) Dept., Dt. 5-11-1976)

Tenderers must satisfy themselves by a personal examination of the site of the

proposed work, by examination of the plans and specifications and by other
40 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

means as they prefer as to the accuracy and sufficiency of the statement of quantities and
all conditions affecting the work and shall not at any time after the submission of their
tender, dispute or complain of such statement of qualities, not assert that there was any
misunderstanding in regard to the nature or amount of the work to be done nor in
consequence apply for extension of time for completion beyond the agreement date.

P.S. 12. Approximate not to mean deviation from drawings and

specifications:—The declaration of the approximate nature of the statement of quantities
in Schedule A does not, however, in any way imply that the quantities will be increased
for departure by the contractor from strict compliance with sanctioned drawings and
specifications to suit his own given convenience or reduce
costs.

P.S. 13. To compare tenders :—The quantities in Schedule A are for a uniform
comparison of lump-sum tenders.

C. — Drawings and Specifications

P.S. 14. Purpose :—The contract drawings if any read together with the contract
specification are intended to show and explain the manner of executing the work and to
indicate the type and class of material to be used.

P.S. 15. Conformance :—(a) The works shall be carried out in accordance with
the directions and to the reasonable satisfaction of the Executive Engineer, in accordance
with the drawings and specifications which form part of the contract and in accordance
with such further drawings, details and instructions, supplementing or explaining the
same as may from time to time be given by the Executive Engineer.

(b) If the work shown on any such further drawings or details, or other work
necessary to comply with any such instructions, directions or explanations, be in the
opinion of the contractor, of a nature which the schedule rate in the contract does not
legitimately cover, he shall before proceeding with such work, give notice in writing to
this effect to the Executive Engineer. In the event of the Executive Engineer and the
contractor failing to agree as to whether or not there is any excess rate to be fixed and the
Executive Engineer deciding that the contractor is to carry out the said work, the
contractor shall accordingly do so, and the question whether or not there is any excess,
and if so the amount thereof, shall, failing agreement, be settled by an arbitrator as
provided in the arbitration clause, unless the subject is one which is left to the sole
discretion of the Executive Engineer under the clauses of his preliminary specification,
and the contractor shall be paid accordingly.

(c) It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to give timely notice to the
Executive Engineer, regarding anything shown on the drawings and not mentioned in the
specifications, or mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the drawings, or any
error or discrepancy in drawings or specifications and obtain his orders thereon Figured
dimensions are to be taken and not those obtained from scaling the drawings. In any
discrepancy between drawings and specifications, the latter shall prevail. In any such case
or in case any feature of the work is not
 Materials and Workmanship 41

fully described and set forth in the drawings and specifications, the contractor shall
forthwith apply to the Executive Engineer for such further instructions, drawings, or
specifications as he requires, it being understood that the subject is to be dealt with under
building procedure of best modern practice. The Executive Engineer will furnish the
further instructions, drawings, or specifications, if in his opinion, they are required by
competent workmen, for the proper execution of the work.

P.S. 16. Variations by way of modifications, omissions or additions :- (a) For

all modifications, omissions from or additions to the drawings and specifications, the
Executive Engineer will issue revised plans, or written instructions or both and no
modification, omission or addition shall be made unless so authorized and directed by the
Executive Engineer in writing.

(b) The Executive Engineer shall have the privilege of ordering modifications,
omissions or additions at any time before the completion of the work and such orders
shall not operate to annul those portions of the specifications with which said changes do
not conflict.

P.S. 17. Copies of drawings and specifications :—One copy of the available
drawings and specifications for (apart from the A.P.S.S. a copy of which the contractor
should purchase for his reference) shall be furnished free of cost to the contractor for his
own use. Such copies and copies of supplementary details furnished by the Executive
Engineer shall be kept on the work until the completion thereof, and the Executive
Engineer shall at all times have access to them.

P.S. 18. Signed drawings — No authority to the contractor :—No signed

drawing shall be taken as in itself an order for variation, unless either it is entered in the
agreement schedule of drawings under proper attestation of the contractor and the
Executive Engineer, or unless it has been sent to the contractor by the Executive
Engineer, with a covering letter confirm that the drawing is an authority for variation for
the contract under reference.

P.S. 19. Finished sizes :—The whole of the specified or figured dimensions or
drawings are to be finished sizes, after dressing or planning or cutting, subject however to
the condition that, unless marked “nett,” 1.5 mm will be allowed for planning for each
planed finished surface of wood-work, when the contractor is permitted to use carefully
sawed market size cut scantlings. This allowance will only be permitted in the case of
Sections 15mm thick or over. The figure dimensions of masonry walls and reinforced
concrete are exclusive of the thickness of plaster or skirtings or cement or wall linings,
unless otherwise specifically stated.

D. — Materials and Workmanship

P.S. 20. To be the best quality :—All materials, articles and workmanship shall
be the best of their respective kinds for the class of work described in the contract
specification and schedule, materials being obtained from sources approved by the
Executive Engineer. The word “best”, as used in these specifications shall mean, that in
the opinion of the Executive Engineer there is no superior quality of material or finish or
articles on the market and that there is no better class of workmanship available for the
nature of the particular item described in the contract schedule. The contractor shall, upon
the request of the. Executive Engineer, furnish him with the vouchers to prove that the
materials are such as are specified.
42 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

Samples of materials shall be furnished at the contractor’s expense to the

Executive Engineer when called for in the tender notice or ordered to be furnished by the
Executive Engineer prior to execution of any work.

P.S. 21. Conventions for proportions :—Wherever the proportions are written
by figures without further descriptions and there the meaning is otherwise clear as to
which figures is intended to apply to each material, then the usual conventions will be
understood to apply

For example :

1:2 means 1 lime (or cement in accordance with the context) and 2 sand.

1:2:4 means 1 lime (or cement in accordance with the context), 2 sand, and 4
broken stone (or other aggregate in accordance with the context).

P.S. 22. Measurement and mixing :—In the case of loose materials such as lime,
sand, cement broken stone, surki, mortar, etc., the proportions demanded by the
specifications must be measured in properly constructed measuring boxes, or in such
other manner as shall be instructed by the Executive Engineer. Measurement is not to be
done in loose heaps when intimate mixtures such as mortar, concrete, etc., are to be
formed. The mixing must always be done on closely constructed platforms so that there
will be no leakage of any of the materials through the floor of the platform and also so
that no foreign material can be incorporated during the mixing. These platforms must be
approved by the Executive Engineer. The cost of such measuring boxes and platforms
and all the work referred to herein shall be borne by the contractor.

P.S. 23. Data :—The materials and labour utilized in the execution work by the
contractor shall not be less than that given in the A.P.P.W.D. standard data for the
relevant item.

P.S. 24. Lay-out of material stacks :—The contractor shall deposit materials for
the purpose of the work on such parts only of the ground as may be approved by the
Executive Engineer. He shall submit, for the approval of the Executive Engineer, before
starting work, a detailed site survey clearly indicating positions and areas where materials
shall be stacked and sheds built.

P.S. 25. Source of purchase of materials and stores :—The Executive Engineer
shall, during the progress of the work, have power to cause the contractor to purchase and
use such materials, or supplies from Government brick-fields, stores or other sources as
may be specified in the contract, for the purposes therein specified.

P.S. 26. Contractor liable for materials supplied by the Government :— The
contractor shall be responsible for all materials and other articles and things which may
be supplied by Government from the time he takes delivery thereof and shall use them
only for the purposes of this contract and shall make good any loss, damage, wastage or
undue wear and tear that may take place from whatever cause and pay to Government, for
such loss, damage, wastage or undue wear and tear such sum as the Executive Engineer
may determine.

P.S. 27. Test inspection and rejection of defective materials and work :—
(a) The contractor shall provide proper facilities at all times, for the testing
 Materials and Workmanship 43

of materials and inspection of the work by the Executive Engineer and the Executive
Engineer shall accordingly also have access at all times to the place of storage or
manufacture where materials are being made for use under the contract to determine that
manufacture is proceeding in accordance with the drawings and specifications.

(b) The contractor shall, upon demand, also forward for the Executive Engineer’s
inspection, test certificates supplied by the vendors, when he is purchasing consignments
of cement, steel and other materials in respect of which such certificates are usually
available.

(c) The Executive Engineer shall have power to reject at any stage, any work
which he considers to be defective in quality of material or workmanship and he shall not
be debarred from rejecting wrought materials by reason of his having previously passed
them in an unworked condition. Any portion of the work or materials rejected or
pronounced to be inferior or not in accordance with the drawings and specifications, shall
be taken down and removed from the work-site at the contractor’s expense, within 24
hours after written instructions to that effect have been given by the Executive Engineer.
Replacement shall at once be made in accordance with the specifications and drawings, at
the contractor’s expense.

In case of default on the part of the contractor to carry out such orders, the
Executive Engineer shall have power to employ and pay other persons to carry out the
orders at the contractor’s risk and all expenses consequent thereon and incidental thereto
shall be borne by the Contractor.

In lieu of rejecting work not done in accordance with the contract, the Executive
Engineer may allow such work to remain, and in that case shall make such allowance for
the difference in value, as in his opinion may be reasonable.

(d) Works opened for inspections :—The contractor shall at the request of the
Executive Engineer, within such time as the Executive Engineer shall name, open for
inspection any work covered up; and should the contractor refuse or neglect to comply
with such a request, the Executive Engineer may employ workmen to open the same. If
the said work has been covered up in contravention of the Executive Engineer’s
instructions, or if on being opened up, it be found not in accordance with the drawings
and specifications or the written instructions of the Executive Engineer the expenses of
opening it and covering it up again, whether done by the contractor or such workmen,
shall be borne by, or recovered from the contractor. If the work has not been covered up
in contravention of such instructions, or if on being opened up it be found to be in
accordance with the drawings and specifications or the written instructions of the
Executive Engineer, then the expenses aforesaid shall be borne by Government and shall
be added to the contract sum, provided always that in the case of foundations, or any
other urgent work so opened up and requiring immediate attention, the Executive
Engineer shall, within reasonable time after the receipt of a notice from the contractor
that the work has been so opened, make or cause the inspection thereof to be made and at
the expiration of such time if such inspection shall not have been made, the contractor
may cover up the, same and shall not be required to open it up again for inspection except
at the expense of Government.
44 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

P.S. 28. Defects, shrinkage, etc., after completion :—Any defects, shrinkage or
other faults which may appear within six months from the completion of the works
arising, in the opinion of the Executive Engineer, from faulty materials or workmanship
not in accordance with the drawings and specifications or the instructions of the
Executive Engineer, shall, upon the directions in writing of the Executive Engineer and
within such reasonable time shall as be specified therein, be amended and made good by
the contractor at his own cost, unless the Executive Engineer shall decide that the
contractor ought to be paid for the same at the rates agreed or such reduced or other rates
as the Executive Engineer may fix and in case of default, the Executive Engineer may
employ and pay other persons to amend and make good such defects, shrinkage or other
faults or damage and all expenses consequent thereon and incidental thereto shall be
borne by the contractor.

[In the event of Government taking over portions of the works as and when they
are completed, the liability of the contractor shall be limited to the period of six months
from the date of taking over the portion or portions of the work, provided that the portion
or portions taken over has no connection with the remaining portions of the main work
and is independent of it].
[Subs. by G.O.Ms.No. 1007, Tr., R. & B.(Cl) Dept., Dt. 5-11-1976]

P.S. 29. Executive Engineer’s decision :—To prevent disputes and litigation, it
shall be accepted as in inseparable part of the contract that in matters regarding materials,
workmanship, removal of improper work, interpretation of the contract drawings and
contract specifications, mode of procedure, and the carrying out of the work, the decision
of the Executive Engineer shall be final and binding on the contractor, and in any
technical question which may arise touching the contract, the Executive Engineer’s
decision shall be final and conclusive.

[In the case of any difference between Executive Engineer and contractor on
matters regarding materials, workmanship, removal of improper work, interpretation of
contract drawings and contract specifications, mode of procedure and the carrying out of
work, the contractor shall have a right of appeal to the next higher authority viz., the
Superintending Engineer of the Circle, and the decision of the latter shall be final and
conclusive].
[Added by G.O.Ms.No. 1007, Tr.,Rds., & Blds. (Cl) Dept., Dt. 5-11-1976]

P.S.30. Dismissal of Workmen :—The contractor shall, on the request of the

Executive Engineer, immediately dismiss from the works any person employed thereon
who may, in the opinion of the Executive Engineer, be incompetent or misconduct
himself, and such person shall not be again employed on the works without the written
permission of the Executive Engineer, but the contractor may appeal to the
Superintending Engineer of the Circle against such dismissal.

P.S. 31. Contractor’s maistri or agent and Contractor’s staff :—The

contractor shall, in his own absence keep constantly on the works a competent maistri or
agent, and any directions or explanations given by the Executive Engineer or his
representatives to such maistri or agent shall be held to have been given to the contractor.

The contractor shall further provide all staff which is necessary for the
supervision, execution and measurement of the work to ensure full compliance with the
terms of the contract.
 Included in the Contract Rates 45

P.S. 32. Government maistries or agents :—The Government may be

represented on the works by an agent, clerk of the works, or maistri who is not borne on
the official list of officers and subordinates of the Public Works Department. He (if
appointed) shall, in the absence of the Executive Engineer, furnish the contractor with the
Executive Engineer’s or his representative’s instructions and directions as to the progress
and execution of the works and the contractor shall duly comply with such instructions
and directions and shall, on the written requisition of the maistri, clerk of works or agent,
stay the further progress of any portion of the works which in his judgment is being
constructed with unsound or improper materials or workmanship, until the opinion and
determination of the Executive Engineer shall be obtained thereon, but such maistri, clerk
of works or agent, is to have no power whatever to order any extra works or deviation
from the specifications and drawings.

E. — Included in the Contract Rates

The items mentioned in this Section ‘E’ are to be provided by the contractor and
are therefore to be allowed for in his contract rates for the various items of work in the
contract schedule, notwithstanding any contrary manual procedure claimed by the
contractor, unless there are definite superseding instructions in the specifications relating
to the contract in question.

P.S. 33. Defining Contract Schedule Rates :—The rate entered in a contract
schedule for any class of work shall be for finished work in site and shall include all
contingent expenses whether direct construction expenses involved in the building in
place in accordance with the drawings and specifications, or whether they be expenses
imposed by an outside authority such as a local body Such contingent expenses shall not
entitle the contractor to claim an extra in respect thereof.

P.S. 34. Carriage :—(a) Rates for finished work shall always include the cost of
conveyance and all leads, lifts, loading, unloading and stacking in the manner and at the
place ordered by the officer in immediate charge of the work, unless circumstances
necessitate provisions for a separate schedule item, in which case such will be specified
in the tender notice or schedule. When materials are supplied by Government, the place
of supply shall be specified in the Descriptive Specification Sheet mentioned in the
Tender Notice and no extra payment will be stacking. If the place of supply is not so
specified, the parties intending to tender should obtain the information from the
Executive Engineer before tendering. Otherwise, the absence of information in regard to
place of supply will not entitle the contract to any extra payment.

(b) Whether the term “carriage” or “conveyance” is used in a schedule item, it

shall, in the absence of other schedule provision or modifying description in the
specification, be taken to include all leads, lifts, loading, unloading and stacking in
uniform stacks to the satisfaction, of the Executive Engineer, with careful attention to
close packing in the case of materials which are to be measured in stacks as a basis of
payment for finished work.

Note :—In the case of important leads and lifts as may occur in River
Conservancy and other such works, where lifts over flood banks and long leads
46 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

may be involved, it is usual to make separate schedule item provision with a specification
defined the exact work to be done for each tendered rate.

Payment for carriage will ordinarily be by bulk or weight at a mileage rate

between specified places and on the basis of the method adopted in the standard schedule
of rates for carriage of materials. The distance will be measured by the nearest practicable
and cheapest route, whether metalled or unmettalled road or cart- track.

(c) When carts or vehicles of any sort are engaged by the day, the quantity of
material to be converted, the distance to be travelled and the number of trips to be made
shall, if he considers it necessary, be fixed by the Executive Engineer.

(d) The contractor is responsible for making good all loss in transporting material
entrusted to him or his agents, whether caused by wastage, breakage, theft, or any other
cause.

(e) No payment shall, in any case, be made for the return trip with carts empty.
Where there are loads also for the return trip, the agreement rates should allow for the
reduced cost thereby on each set of materials so conveyed..

P.S. 35. Construction Plant :—The contractor shall include in his tendered price,
and shall provide and install all necessary construction plant and shall use such methods
and appliances for the performance of all the operations connected with the work
embraced under the contract as will secure a satisfactory quality of work and rate of
progress which, in the opinion of the Executive Engineer, will ensure the completion of
the work within the time specified. If at any time before the commencement, or during
the progress of the work, or any part of it, such methods or appliances appear to the
Executive Engineer to be insufficient or inappropriate for securing the quality of the work
required, or the said rate of progress, he may order the contractors to increase their
efficiency, or to improve their character, and the contractor shall comply with such
orders; but the failure of the Executive Engineer to demand such increase of efficiency or
improvement shall not relieve the contractor from his obligation to secure the quality of
work and the rate of progress required by the contract, and the contractor alone shall be
responsible for the efficiency and safety of his plant, appliances and methods.

[If the department intends to supply any tools and plant to the contractor on hire,
the details of such tools and plant, the hire charges leviable and the terms of hiring them
should invariably be specified in the tender schedules and in the agreement, and the same
should not be varied during the contract period. If, however, the department is not able to
supply any of the tools and plant indicated in the agreement, the contractor shall claim no
compensation but can only claim reasonable extension of contract tine. If any other tools
and plant, that are available with the department but are no indicated in the agreement,
are supplied to the contractor during the course of the work, the hire charges and
conditions of hire prevailing in the department at the time of actual supply shall be
applicable].
[Subs. by G.O.Ms.No. 1007, Tr., R&B (C) Dept., Dt. 5-11.1976]

P.S. 36. Scaffolding instructions :—All requisite scaffolding shall be provided at

the contractor’s expense and shall be double, i.e., it must have two sets of upright
supports. Care must be taken to ensure the safety of the workpeople and
 Included in the Contract Rates 47

the contractor must comply with such instructions as the Executive Engineer may issue to
ensure such safety. The contractor will be entirely responsible for any damage or injuries
to persons or property resulting from ill-erected scaffolding, defective la4ders, or -
otherwise arising out of his default in this respect.

P.S. 37. Temporary instructions :—The contractor shall erect and maintain at
his own cost temporary weather-proof sheds at such places and in a manner approved by
the Executive Engineer for keeping materials under cover. The contractor shall also
provide and maintain at his own expense such temporary fences, guards, bridges and
roads as may be necessary for the execution of his contract work or for safeguarding or
accommodating the public. If the Executive Engineer shall order any departure from any
arrangements made by the contractor, the contractor shall comply with such orders as the
Executive Engineer may issue to safeguard or accommodate the public. Sheds for
housing workmen shall be provided at the contractor’s expense, if in the opinion of the
Executive Engineer such are necessary or desirable.

P.S. 38. Water and lighting :—The contractor shall pay fees and provide water
and light as required from Municipal mains or other sources, and shall pay all charges
therefor (including storage tanks, meters, etc.) for the use of the works and workmen,
unless otherwise arranged and decided on, in writing, with the Executive Engineer. The
water for the works shall be, so far as practicable, free from earthy, vegetable, or organic
matter, and from salts or other substances likely to interfere with the setting of mortar or
otherwise prove harmful to the work.

P.S. 39. Latrines for Work-people :—The contractor shall provide and erect,
prior to the commencement of work, sufficient latrines for the use of the work people,
male and female, and shall keep the same disinfected and clear at all time during progress
of the works, and shall remove the same, disinfect the ground and make good all damage
on the completion of the work.

P.S. 40. Sun protection, keeping dry and pumping :—The contractor shall at
his own expense arrange all requisite protection of the work and materials against sun or
rain effects and shall keep all portions of the work free from water to the satisfaction of
the Executive Engineer and shall use his own plant for the purpose, unless otherwise
specifically provided in the contract specifications.

P.S. 41. Tools and seigniorage :—The contractor shall, unless otherwise
specially stated in the tender notice and subsequently on this basis in the contract be
responsible for the payment wherever payable of all import duties, tolls, octroi duties,
seigniorages, quarry fees, etc., on all materials and articles that he may use.

The contractor shall be solely responsible for the payment of sales tax under the
provisions of the Andhra Pradesh General Sales Tax Act, as in force for the time being
and the rates for the various items of work shall remain unaffected by any change that
may be made from time to time in the rate at which such tax is payable.

Notwithstanding anything contained in Section 10 of the Indian Tariff Act of

1894 the rates for items involving the use or supply of articles obtained by the contractor
from outside India shall remain unaffected by any charges that may be introduced in the
Customs duties.
48 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

Note :—For works carried out on behalf of the Government of India seigniorage
fees, etc., referred to in this clause will have to be levied in every case.

P.S. 42. Setting out works :—The contractor shall be responsible-for the correct
setting out of all works, providing at his own cost all labour3 materials and staff required
for so doing.

P.S. 43. Cleaning up during progress and for delivery :—All rubbish shall be
burnt or removed from the site as it accumulates. All floors, stairs, landings, doors,
windows, surface and soil drains shall be cleaned down and put in a thoroughly complete,
clean, sound and workman like state to the satisfaction of the Executive Engineer before
the work is finally handed over, all rubbish and surplus materials not required by the
Executive Engineer having first been removed by the contractor. The contractor shall
give notice in writing to the Executive Engineer when the work is so ready to be handed
over, and shall be responsible for its maintenance until it is taken over by the Executive
Engineer.

[The Executive Engineer should take over the work within one month of such
notice from the contractor, if the work has been satisfactorily completed in terms of the
agreement].
[Added by G.O.Ms.No. 1007, Tr., Roads and Blds. (Cl) Dept., Dt. 5-1 1-1 976]

F. — Responsibilities and Liabilities of the Contractor

Explanation :—This section sets forth some responsibilities which the contractor
shall assume in addition to those mentioned in other sections of this “Preliminary
Specifications” under every contract which he enters into, with the Andhra Pradesh
Public Works Department and he should therefore calculate his unit prices for schedule
items of work accordingly.

P.S. 44. Observance of Laws — Local regulations and notices —

Attachments:—The contractor shall conform to the regulations and bye-laws of any
local authority and/or of any water or lighting companies with whose systems the
structure is proposed to be connected and shall, before making any variations from the
drawings or specifications that may be necessitated by so conforming, give to the
Executive Engineer written notice, specifying the variations proposed to be made and the
reasons for making them, and apply for instructions thereon. In case the contractor shall
not receive such instructions within seven days, he shall proceed with the work,
conforming to the provision; regulation or bye-law in question; and any variations in the
drawings or specifications so necessitated shall be dealt with under clause 63. The
contractor shall give all notices required by the said Acts, regulations or bye-laws and
pay all fees in connection therewith, unless otherwise arranged and deciding on in writing
with the Executive Engineer. He shall also ensure that no attachments are made against
materials or work forming part of or for the use of the contract. In every case referred to
in this clause the contractor shall protect and indemnify Government against any claim or
liability arising from or based on the violation of any such law, ordinance, regulation,
order, decree, or attachment whether by himself or by his employees.

P.S. 45. Accidents — Hoarding, Lightings, Observations — Watchmen :—

(a) When excavations have been made or obstacles have been put in public
+
 Responsibilities and Liabilities of the Contractor 49

through fares or in places where there is any likelihood of accidents, the contractors shall
comply with any requirement of law on the subject, and shall provide suitable hoarding,
lighting and watchmen as necessary.

[(b) it shall be the Contractor’s sole responsibility to protect the Public and his
employees against accident from any cause and he shall indemnify Government against
any claims for damages for injury to person or property, resulting from any such
accidents, and shall where the provisions of the Workmen’s Compensation Act, 1923,
apply, take steps to properly insure against any claims 3hereunder. The contractor shall
execute the ‘Indemnity pond’ in the prescribed form noted below for the payment of
claims coming under (a) Workmen’s Compensation Act, 1923, (b) Minimum Wages Act,
1948, (c) Payment of Wages Act, 1936, (d) Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition)
Act, 1970 and all other such Acts in force and that may be enacted from time to time
during the currency of the agreement.

The following Indemnity Bond is to be executed by the Contractor while entering

into an agreement in respect of contract Works:

Indemnity Bond

Name of the Works:

Agreement No.

I, …………………………………. Contractor, s/o ……………………………..

Aged ………….. Resident of …………………………………………………………….
do hereby bind myself to pay all the claims which may come (a) under Workmen’s
Compensation Act, 1923, with any statutory modification thereof and rules thereunder or
otherwise for or in respect of any damage or compensation payable in connection with
any accident or injury sustained, (b) under Minimum Wages Act, 194, (c) under Payment
of Wages Act, 1936, (d) under the Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act, 1970
by any workmen engaged for the performance of the business relating to the above
contract i.e. …………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………
failing such payment of claims of workmen engaged in the above work I abide in
accepting for the recovery of such claims affected from any of my assets with the
Department.] (Subs. by G.O.Ms. No. 85, TR & B (B.I.(2) Dept. Dt. 12-2-1986)

(c) On the occurrence of an accident which results in the death of any of the
workmen employed by the contractor or which is so serious as to be likely to result in the
death of any such workmen, the contractor shall, within 24 hours of the happening of
such accident, intimate in writing to the concerned Section Officer of the Public Works
Department, the fact of such accident. The contractor shall indemnify Government
against all loss or damage sustained by Government resulting directly or indirectly from
his failure to give intimation in the manner aforesaid including the penalties or fines if
any payable by Government as a consequence of Government’s failure to give notice
under the Workmen’s Compensation Act or otherwise confirm to the provisions of the
said Act in regard to such accident.

(d) In the event of an accident in respect of which compensation may become

payable under the Workmen’s Compensation Act, VIII of 1923 whether by the contractor
or by the Government as principal it shall be lawful for the
50 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

Executive Engineer to retain out of monies due and payable to the contractor such sums
of money as may, in the opinion of the said Executive Engineer, be sufficient to meet
such liability. The opinion of the Executive Engineer shall be final in regard to all matters
arising under this clause.

P.S. 46. Blasting :—Blasting executed by contractors in connection with

Government works shall be carried out in the manner described under “Blasting
operations - Instructions to contractors” of the A.P.S.S.

P.S. 47: Protection of adjoining and existing premises :—The contractor is to

protect the whole of the adjoining and, where necessary, the existing premises, and all
works and all fittings to all buildings on and adjoining the site against structural and
decorative damage caused by the execution of these works and make good in all respects
all such damage done or occurring to the same, and leave such reinstatement in perfect
order. He is also to make good any damage done in the execution of the work to existing
public or private footways or roadways.

P.S. 48. Permit other Workmen — Co-operation — Afford facilities :— The

Executive Engineer shall have full empower to send workmen upon the premises to
execute fittings and other works not included in the contract, for whose operations the
contractor is to afford every reasonable facility during ordinary working hours, provided
that such operations shall be carried on in such a manner as not to impede the progress of
the work included in the contract, but the contractor is not to be responsible for any
damage which may happen to or to be occasioned by any such fittings or other works,
provided he complies with the Executive Engineer’s Instructions in connection therewith,
and provided that the damage is not caused by himself or his workmen.

The contractor shall, to all times, co-operate, assist, attend on, and afford facilities
for such specialist as may be employed by the Executive Engineer or other works in
connection with the building, allowing them, free of charge, the use of all plant, light and
water installed in the works. The contractor shall also cause such special work or protect
it as instructed to avoid injury during progress of the works. For failure so to protect, the
contract or must make good any damage caused.

P.S. 49. Holes for water service, gas, electrical and sanitary fittings :— The
contractor shall leave all holes in masonry and floors for the insertion of water services,
gas and electrical connections and sanitary fittings in the exact positions indicated by the
Executive Engineer during the progress of the work. These holes must be properly built
up, in a workman like manner, at the contractor’s cost, as soon as the fittings have been
installed, in cases where the installations are made during the construction of the building
and where, in the opinion of the Executive Engineer, delays in settlement of accounts will
not thereby occur.

P.S. 50. Contractor’s risk and Insurance :—The work executed by the
contractor under the contract shall be maintained at the contractor’s risk until the work is
taken over by the Executive Engineer. The contractor shall accordingly arrange his own
insurance against fire and other usual risks during such period unless otherwise specified:

Provided however that the contractor shall not be liable for all or any loss or
damage occasioned by or arising out of acts of God, and in particular unprecedented
 Miscellaneous 51

flood, volcanic eruption, earthquake or other convulsion of nature, invasion, the act of
foreign enemies hostilities or warlike operations (before or after declaration of war)
rebellion, military or usurped power.

P.S. 51. Holidays :—No work shall be done on Sundays without the written
permission of the Executive Engineer or of the officer in charge of the work, and the
contractor shall comply with the provisions of the Factories Act, in and so far as the same
are applicable.

G.—Miscellaneous

P.S. 52. Sand and gravel :—The contractor shall not make any excavation upon
the site for the purpose of obtaining gravel, sand or soil other than that shown on or
implied by the drawings, except with the previous permission of the Executive Engineer.

P.S. 53. Old curiosities :—All old curiosities, relics, coins, minerals, etc., found
in excavating or pulling down, shall be the property of the Government and be handed
over to the Executive Engineer. Should any ancient masonry, or other old work of interest
be opened up, the Executive Engineer’s attention shall be called to the same before
demolition or removal.

P.S. 54. Assignment or sub-letting :—The contractor shall not, without the
written consent of the Executive Engineer) assign the contract nor sublet any portion of
the same. Ordinarily no sub-letting will be permitted, but in case such should be
permitted by the Executive Engineer, it shall in no way free the contractor from any of
his responsibilities under any clause of his Preliminary Specification or of the “Articles
of Agreement”.

P.S. 55. Specialists :—The Executive Engineer shall, during the progress of the
work, have power to select, nominate or recommend tradesmen or specialists to supply
material or execute such portion of the work as he may consider desirable in the interests
of the Government.

[P.S. 56. Ratification of the orders of the Executive Engineer :—Should the
acceptance of the tender be beyond the authorized powers of the Executive Engineer ad
laid down in the Public Works Department Code, the orders and decision of such
Executive Engineer with regard to extension of time for completing the contract or the
termination of the contract or of the employment of specialists for certain portions of the
work as described in the previous clause will be subject to the ratification of the higher
authority who entered into the agreement].
[Amended by G.O.Ms.No. 1007, Tr. Roads & Buildings (C) Dept., Dt. 5-11-1976]

P.S. 57. Order book :—An order book shall be kept at the Public Works
Department office on the site of the work. As far as possible, all orders regarding the
work are to be entered in this book. All entries shall be signed and dated by the Public
Works Department Officer in direct charge of the work and by the contractor or by his
representative. In important cases, the Executive Engineer or the Superintending
Engineer will countersign the entries which have been made. The order book shall not be
removed from the work, except with the written permission of the Executive Engineer.
52 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

H. — Date of commencement, completion, delays, extensions,

suspension of work and forfeiture
P.S. 58. Date of commencement and completion:— On notification of
possession of the site (or premises) being given to the contractor by letter registered for
acknowledgement as provided in paragraph 10 Supra, he shall forthwith begin the work,
shall regularly and continuously proceed with them, and shall complete the same (except
for painting or other work which, in the opinion of the Executive Engineer, it may be
desirable to delay) by the date of completion as defined in “Articles of Agreement”,
subject, nevertheless, to the provisions of extension of time mentioned in the next clause.
The contractor shall under no circumstances be entitled to claim any damages from
Government if he incurs any expense or liabilities to payment under the contract before
the date of commencement defined above. The contractor shall have the right to withdraw
from the contract and obtain refund of his security deposit is such intimation of handling
over the site is delayed more than two months from the date of acceptance of the
agreement by competent authority.

P.S. 59. Delays and extension of time :—No claim for compensation on account
of delays or hindrances to the work from any cause whatever shall lie, except, as
hereinafter defined. Reasonable extension of time will be allowed by the Executive
Engineer or by the officer competent to sanction the extension for unavoidable delays,
such as may result from causes, which, in the opinion of the Executive Engineer, are
undoubtedly beyond the control of the contractor. The Executive Engineer shall assess
the period of delay or hindrance caused by and written instructions issued by him, at
twenty five per cent in excess of the actual working period so lost.

In the event of the Executive Engineer failing to issue necessary instructions and
thereby causing delay and hindrance to the contractor, the latter shall have the right to
claim an assessment of such delay by the Superintending Engineer of the Circle whose
decision will be final and binding. The contractor shall lodge in writing with the
Executive Engineer a statement of claim for any delay or hindrance referred to above,
within fourteen days from its commencement, otherwise no extension of time will be
allowed.

Whenever authorized alterations or additions made during the progress of the

work are of such a nature in the opinion of the Executive Engineer as to justify an
extension of time in consequence thereof, such extension will be granted in writing by the
Executive Engineer or other competent authority when ordering such alterations of
additions.

_____

JUDGMENT
P.S. 59. BARS A CLAIM FOR COMPENSATION ON ACCOUNT OF
ANY DELAYS CAUSED BY THE DEPARTMENT

The Hon’ble Mr. Justice Jeevan Reddy

and
The Hon’ble Mr. Justice Neeladri Rao
 Date of commencement, completion, delays, extensions, etc. 53

1989 (2) ALT 372 (D.B.)

[C.M.A.No. 684/85 & C.R.P. 1581/85, Dt. 24-3-1989]
State of A.P. Petitioner.
vs.
M/s. Associated Engineering Enterprises, Hyderabad. Respondent.

Judgment
(Judgment of the Bench delivered by Jeevan Reddy, J.)

1. The appeal and the Civil Revision Petition arise from a common judgment and
order of the learned Subordinate Judge, Rajahmundry, marking the award a rule of the
Court and dismissing the petition filed by the appellant — State for setting aside the
award.

2. An agreement was entered into between the State of Andhra Pradesh and the
respondent-contractor for execution of the work of constructing approaches the rail-cum-
road bridge across Godavari, at Rajahmundry. The agreement is dated 17-6-1970, and the
value of the work is Rs. 70,29,925/-. A period of 42 months was stipulated for
completing the work, i.e., on or before 21-12-1973. The respondent actually completed
the work by 10-12-1974, after the period of contract was extended twice. The first letter
of the contractor requesting for extension was addressed on 17-12-1973. Extension was
granted upto 31-5-1974. By another letter, dated 22-7-1974 the contractor requested
another extension till the end of August, 1974. It was granted subject to imposition of
penalty of Rs. 50/- per day, after 1-9-1974.

3. After the work was completed, disputes arose between the parties with respect
to the amount payable to the respondent. They were referred to the sole arbitration of the
Superintending Engineer, R & B, Cuddapah Circle, in accordance with the agreement.
The arbitrator made his award on 25-3-1981. Apart from interest and costs, the
respondent had preferred eight claims. The arbitrator awarded some or other amount
under each claim. Claim No. 9 related to interest. The arbitrator awarded interest as the
rate of 15% per annum from the date of award, till the date of payment. So far as costs
are concerned (claim No. 10), he directed the parties to bear their own costs.

4. The award is a non-speaking one. It does not give reasons for the several
amounts awarded under each of the claims. It reads as follows:—

“Now, I, Sri P. Vishnu Rao, Superintending Engineer, (R&B), Cuddapah

Circle, Cuddapah, having taken upon myself the burden of reference and having
examined and considered the statements of parties and arguments produced before
me and having heard the parties, do hereby make and publish this day my award
in writing of and concerning the matter referred to me.

Claim No. 1 :—This includes:

(a) Compensation for delay in handing over site on Kovvur side involving
Rs. 1,61,790.93 towards escalation in price index and Rs. 1,65,
54 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

150-00 towards establishment and over-head charges. Total Rs. 3,26,940.93, and (b)
Compensation by way of reimbursement for extra expenditure incurred to an extent of
Rs. 14,330-00 for removal and re-erection of the sheds, fencing etc., of railway
contractors, Rs. 2,000-00 for removal of caving in earth and forming temporary roads,
and Rs. 30,000-00 towards compensation paid to owners of buildings, huts, etc., in the
area dismantling the same on Rajahmundry side.

Award :—I award the respondents shall pay to the claimants Rs. 2,81,800-00
(Rupees two lath eighty one thousand eight hundred only) towards this claim.

Claim No. 2 :—This includes:

(a) Rs. 45,000-00 towards refund of recovery made, and

(b) Rs. 38,000-00 towards reimbursement of expenditure incurred regarding load

testing. Total Rs. 83,000-00.

Award :—I award that the respondents shall pay to the claimants under (a) and
(b), a total sum of Rs. 83,000-00 (Rupees eighty three thousand only) towards this claim.

Claim No. 3 :—this comprises of Rs. 22,441-00 towards cost of excavation of

excess depth in foundations of Rajahmundry.

Award :—I award that the respondents shall pay the claimants Rs. 22,441-00
towards the claim. (Rupees twenty two thousand four hundred forty one only).

Claim No. 4 :—This comprises of Rs. 2,000-00 being the cost of expenditure
incurred for the footpath slab extension and coaxial centering.

Award :—I award that the respondents shall pay the claimants Rs. 2,000-00
(Rupees two thousand only) towards this claim.

Claim No.5 :—This comprises of Rs. 32,050-00 being payment to be made for
conveyance of excess earth to embankment.

Award :—I award that the respondents shall pay the claimants Rs. 32,050-00
(Rupees thirty two thousand and fifty only) towards this claim.

Claim No. 6 :—This comprises of waiver of refund of fines imposed to an extent

of Rs. 13,500-00.

Award :—I award that the respondents shall pay claimants Rs. 13,500-00 (Rupees
thirteen thousand five hundred only) towards this claim.

Claim No. 7 :—This comprises of Rs. 2,000-00 being the refund of fine imposed
for absence of Site Engineer on Rajahmundry side.

Award :—I award that the respondents shall pay the claimants Rs. 2,000-00
(Rupees two thousand only) towards this claim.

Claim No. 8 :—This comprises of Rs. 72,645-42 towards refund of recovery

made for excess steel consumed.
 Date of commencement, completion, delays, extensions, etc. 55

Award :—I award that the respondents shall pay the claimants Rs. 72,64542
(Rupees seventy two thousand six hundred and forty five and paise forty two only)
towards the claim.

Claim No.9 :—This comprises of Rs. 1,32,359-00 towards interest on amounts

claimed and disputed.

Award :—This claim is rejected. However, after careful consideration of all the
factors the claimants are awarded interest on the awarded amounts from the date of this
award, i.e., 25th March, 1981 till the date of payment of 15% (fifteen per cent) per
annum.

Claim No. 10 :—This refers to costs of the claimants in these proceedings.

Award :—Each party to the reference shall bear their costs. The claimants shall
bear the cost of the stamp-paper for this award of Rs. 200-00 (Rupees two hundred only).

This award is made, signed and published by me on this, the twenty fifth day of
March, one thousand nine hundred eighty one”.

O.S.No. 119/1981 was filed by the respondent contractor to make the award a rule
of the Court. The state filed O.P.No. 51/1981 to set aside the award under Section 30 of
the Arbitration Act. No evidence was adduced by either party before the learned
Subordinate Judge. After hearing the parties, the learned Subordinate Judge, as stated
above, made the award a rule of the Court, and dismissed the petition filed by the State
for setting it aside. The result is that the award in favour of the respondent in a sum of Rs.
5,09,436-42 Ps. with interest thereon at 15% per annum from the date of award, i.e., 25-
3-1981, till the date of payment or decree, is affirmed. The present appeal and Civil
Revision Petition are directed against the said judgment.

5. The learned Addl. Advocate-General, appearing for the State, disputed the
validity and legality of the award in so far as claims Nos. 1, 8 and 9 are concerned. He
did not dispute the amounts awarded under other claims.

6. The respondent claimed a total sum of Rs. 3,73,270-93 Ps., under claim No. 1,
which was divided into two sub-heads. They are:

(a) compensation for delay in handling over site on Kovvur side involving
Rs. 1,61,790-93 Ps. towards escalation in price index and Rs. 1,65,150-00 towards
establishment and over-head charges, making a total of Rs.
3,26,940-93 Ps.

(b) compensation by way of reimbursement for extra expenditure incurred

to an extent of Rs. 14,330-00 for removal and re-erection of sheds, fencing etc., of
railway contractors;

Rs. 2,000-00 for removal of caving in earth and forming temporary roads; and

Rs. 30,000-00 towards compensation paid to owners of buildings, huts, etc., in the
area dismantling the same on Rajahmundry side.
56 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

The arbitrator awarded a total sum of Rs. 2,81,800-00 under the claim without
specifying the amount under each of sub-heads or each of the items under each sub-bead.
Claim No. 8 is in a sum of Rs. 72,645-42. The respondent claimed refund of this amount
which was recovered from him towards excess steel consumed by him. The arbitrator
allowed the claim in full. Claim No. 9 pertains to grant of interest from the date of the
award till the date of realization.

7. For the sake of convenience we may take up claim No. 9 first. Following the
principle of the decision of the Supreme Court in Executive Engineer (Irrigation)
Galimala vs. Abnaduta Jena (AIR 1988, SC, 1520), it has been held by two Benches of
this Court in (i) C.M.A.No. 292/1938 disposed of on 15-11-1988 (consisting of Jeevan
Reddy & Y. Bhaskar Rao, JJ.) and (ii) C.M.A.No. 993/1984 and batch, disposed of on
17-3-1989 (consisting of Jeevan Reddy & V. Neeladri Rao, JJ.), that the arbitrator has no
power in law to award interest even for the period subsequent to the date of award. In this
case, the arbitrator has not awarded interest for the period prior to the date of reference,
nor has he awarded interest for the period the dispute was pending before him. He has
awarded interest only from the date of the award. Since the reference to arbitration in this
case is governed by Chapter II, i.e., without the intervention of the Court, the arbitrator
was not competent to award the said interest. It must, accordingly, he held that the award
of interest is incompetent and to that extent the award suffers from an error apparent on
the face of the record. The awards is liable to be set aside to the extent it allows claim
No.9.

8. We shall next take up claim No. 8. The respondent’s claim in this behalf is to
the following effect: According to the agreement, the steel required for the work was to
be supplied by the department at a recovery rate of Rs. 877-00 per Metric Tonne. The
agreement provided a margin of 5% wastage over the requirements as per schedule. Any
excess quantity of steel used over and above the said 5% wastage margin was to be
charged at the market value plus 10%, or the supply rate, whichever is higher. By the
time the work was completed, the respondent utilized 1550-251 Metric tonnes of steel.
The quantity actually used on the work was 1439-174 Metric Tonnes, accounting for an
excess issue of 1111-077 Metric Tonnes. The excess thus worked out to 6.93%. For the
excess wastage the Government recovered an amount of Rs. 72,645-42 Ps. This recovery
was protested by the respondent, who set out his case in his letter, dated 26-2-1975.
According to him 110-235 Metric Tonnes of steel was used for bolts and frames of the
centering erected for execution of RCC items and that it cannot be treated as wastage.
The wastage actually comes to 0-842 Metric Tonnes, which is negligible. However, the
Government neither responded to this representation nor did it refund the amount
recovered. The respondent, therefore, claimed refund of this amount.

9. In their counter the Govt. disputed the respondent’s claim. They denied that the
steel used for bolts and frames of the entering erected for RCC items is a bona fide use of
the steel supplied by the Government. If any such material is required the contractor has
to procure his own steel therefor. The matter was indeed considered by the Government,
which refused to accept any wastage beyond 5%.

10. Condition 5.0.4 of the relevant Section of the agreement reads as follows:-
 Date of commencement, completion, delays, extensions, etc. 57

“5.0. 4 :—Cement and steel will be supplied in sufficient quantity as when

required as is consistent with the out turn of the work. In case of non- availability
of these materials, the contractors shall make their own arrangements at their own
cost. The department shall not be held liable for any loss that is likely to be
caused to the contractor on account of delay in supply. In case of delay the
contractor shall be eligible only for suitable extension of time. The scrap or cut
pieces of steel left over shall not be taken back by the department. The loss, if
any, on account of these scrap or cut pieces shall be borne by the contractor. The
recovery of steel supplied by the Department shall be made for the quantities
issued. The rates to be quoted by the contractor shall be for the supply and
fabrication of steel including probable wastage upto 5% over the requirement as
per schedule.

Recovery for any excess quantity used over 5% wastage, shall be made at
the market value plus 10% or supply rate whichever is higher. The contractor
shall get binding wire required for use on the work at his own cost ....“.

The preceding conditions in the same Section says that the cement, steel, and
bitumen required for the work shall be supplied by the department at the specified rates,
and that the cost thereof shall be recovered from the contractor’s bills and other dues. The
contractor was obligated to use the material exclusively for the purpose of the work, and
to make good any loss, damage, or wastage that may take place from whatever cause.
Condition 5.0.5 states that “the recovery of steel supplied by the Department shall be
made for the quantities issued”. It says further that “the scrap or cut pieces of steel left
over shall not be taken back by the Department” and that “the loss, if any, on account of
these scrap or cut pieces shall be borne by the contractor”. It also provides that recovery
for any excess quantity used over and above 5% wastage shall be made at the rates
specified. Now, in the case before us there was no dispute as to the quantity issued. The
only dispute was whether the steel used for bolts and frames of the centring erected for
execution of RCC items should be treated as wastage, or should be treated as having been
utilized for the purpose of the work. In the absence of any specific provision in the
agreement that steel used for bolts and frames shall not be treated as steel used for the
purpose of the work, we are unable to say that the arbitrator was not competent to allow
the said claim of the contractor. In the absence of any specific provision in that behalf it
was open to the arbitrator to decide the issue taking an overall view of the several terms
and conditions of the agreement. We are, therefore, unable to say that the arbitrator acted
contrary to, or outside the terms of contract in allowing the said claim.

11. We shall not take up the main dispute between the parties. It centres round
claim No. 1. The respondent contractor’s claim under claim No. 1, stated briefly, is this:
Though the site for the approach on Rajahmundry side was handed over well in time
there was abnormal delay in handing over the site on Kovvur side. The respondent
addressed several letters to the appropriate authorities in this behalf, but to no effect.
These was a delay ranging between two months to 26 months in handing over the piers.
The particulars of delays and the compensation claimed by the respondent-contractor are
the following:-
58 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

Compensation Particulars

Date on
which Difference
Date on which Difference
site is to in price
Location site is actually Delay in cost
be index in
handed over Rs.
handed points
over
(a) K23 to K12 22-6-1970 End of 12/1970 6 months 12(7.7%) 11,057.80

K11 6/71 8/71 2 months 9(4.89%) 7,022.40

K10 6/71 10/71 4 months 14(7.4%) 10,627.00
K9 6/71 1/72 6 months 13(6.9%) 9,909.00
K8 6/71 4/72 10 months 19(9.79%) 14,059.30

1/72 to
complete
foundations and
K1 to K3 1/72 17 months 34(15.31%) 21,987.00
5/73 to do
substructure &
superstructure.

K4 & K3 1/72 9/73 21 months 39(17.18%) 24,672.00

K5 & K6 1/72 10/73 22 months 45(19.3%) 27,716.00
K7 1/72 2/74 26 months 60(24.19%) 34,739.00

(b) ADD 5% for Establishment and Overheads on Rs.33,03,000/- 1,65,150.00

ADD for removing and re-erecting sheds, fencing, etc., of Railway

(c) 14,330.00
contractors as per Annexure I.

(d) ADD for removing caves in earth and forming Temporary Road 2,000.00

ADD compensation paid to owners of buildings, huts, etc., in the area and
(e) 30,000.00
dismantling the same on the Rajahmundry side.
Rs. 3,73,270.00
OR
Rs. 3,73,271.00

The Government disputed the respondent’s claim. It relied upon the letters of the
respondent, dated 23-1-1970 and 13-3-1970, and the letter of the Chief Engineer, dated 8-
3-1970 in this behalf. Under these letters the time for delivering the sites/piers was
postponed. It was also stated that because of the said delay, the period of contract will be
extended by six months. The Government’s contention, therefore, is that there is no basis
of claiming any compensation on account of the delays in handling over the sites. It
submitted that there were several delays on the part of the contractor in carrying out the
work, and that he did not keep up to the schedule of work. Since no compensation was
contemplated either by the
 Date of commencement, completion, delays, extensions, etc. 59

agreement or by the letters aforesaid, it submitted, the contractor cannot claim any
compensation. Reliance was placed upon Section 55 of the Contract Act, and the several
terms and conditions of the agreement, including Clauses 58 and 59 of the A.P. Detailed
Standard Specifications (APDDS). It denied that the contractor paid any moneys to the
owners of the structures, as claimed by him, and submitted that he is not, therefore
entitled, to any compensation on that account also.

12. The agreement entered into between the parties contained, inter alia, clauses 4
and 5, which read :—

“(4) Time shall be considered as of the essence of the agreement and the
Contractor hereby agrees to commence the work as soon as the agreement is
accepted by the competent authority as defined by the Madras Public Works
Department Code and the site (or premises) is handed over to him as provided for
in the said conditions and agrees to complete the work within (42) Forty two
months from the date of such handling over of he site (or premises) and to show
progress as defined in the tabular statement, “Rate of progress” below, subject
nevertheless to the provisions for extension of time contained in Clause 59 of the
Standard Preliminary Specification.

(5) The said condition shall be read and construed as forming part of this
agreement and the parties hereto will respectively abide by and submit themselves
to the conditions and stipulations and perform the agreements on their parts,
respectively……..”.

The ‘Preliminary Specifications’ mentioned, in APDSS constitute the terms of

agreement between the parties, Clause 58 of Preliminary Specifications says that on
notification of possession or the site being given to the contractor, he shall begin the work
forthwith and shall regularly and continuously proceed with the work and complete the
same as provided in the agreement subject, nevertheless, to provision of extension of
time, mentioned in the next clause. Clause 59, which is relevant for our purposes, reads
thus:—

“59. Delays and extension of time :—x x x”

Clause 60 says that time shall be considered the essence of the contract, and if the
contractor is guilty of delay in commencing or carrying on the work and fails to improve
inspite of notice, it shall be lawful for the Executive Engineer to determine the contract,
which shall entail forfeiture of security deposit and other amounts. It shall open to the
Government to have the balance of the work carried out by another contractor at the risk
and cost of the contractor.

13. Before proceeding further, it would be appropriate to refer to certain other

relevant material. In his letter, dated 23-1-1970 the respondent-contractor wrote to the
Superintending Engineer, Eluru, stating inter alia : “12. We agree that compensation
need not be paid if the delay in handling over the site occupied by the Railway is not
more than 3 months”. It is clear that certain portions of the site which were to be handed
over to the respondent were occupied by the railway in connection with its own work; the
agreement between the parties was that as soon as the Railway vacated its occupation, the
site shall be handed over to the contractor within three months. The next letter is dated 8-
3-70 from the Chief
60 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

Engineer, PWD, Hyderabad, to the respondent, in which it was stated, inter alia, “12. (a)
: In your letter reference (3) cited (reference is to the respondent’s letter, dated 23-1-1970
referred to above), you have agreed for not claiming any compensation for the delay in
handing over site at piers 14 to 21 on Kovvur side beyond middle of 71” if the delay is
not more than 3 months. You are informed that the last 6 spans can be handed over in the
beginning of 1972 ……… This letter is rather ambiguous. It speaks of delivery of piers
14 to 21 “beyond middle of 1971”. Suffice it to note that as soon as the Railways
delivered possession of the said sites, they were to be handed over to the contractor
within three months.

14. The third letter is dated 13-3-1970 from the respondent to the Chief Engineer.
In this letter it was stated, inter alia, “(12)(a) : We note that the site for piers 14 to 21 on
Kovvur side will be handed over ii3 the beginning of 1972. Since there is a delay of 6
months in handing over the site, the time of completion of the work on Kovvur side will
have to be extended by 6 months ………… “ This letter shows that the site for piers 14 to
21 on Kovvur side was to be delivered in the beginning of 1972, which meant a delay of
six months over the time agreed earlier, and in lieu thereof it was agreed that the period
of contract shall be extended by six months.

15. Now, the contention of Sri P. Ramchandra Reddy, learned council for the
respondent-contractor, is that in as much as admittedly, there was delay in the handing
over the sites on Kovvur side, the cost of work went up and the contractor is entitled to be
compensated therefor. According to him, the consumer price-index went up by 24.19%
between June, 1971 and February, 1974. It is on this basis that he claimed Rs. 1,61,790/-
by way of compensation. To this he added establishment and overhead charges calculated
at the rate of 5% of the total cost of Viaduct on Kovvur side. Some other minor claims
were also made. Mr. Ramachandra Reddy says, because of the delay in handing over the
site, the period of contract had to be extended, which meant extra cost to the respondent,
and it must be paid for by the Government which is responsible for the delay. The
contention of the learned Addl. Advocate-General, on the other hand, is that no such
compensation is contemplated, or provided for, either by the contract, or by the
correspondence between the parties. Indeed, the letter of the respondent, dated 13-3-1970
clearly speaks of extension of the period of contract by six months in lieu of the delay in
handing over the site for piers 14 to 21. Even if there is any delay in handing over the
site, no claim for compensation can be made since any such claim is barred b Clause 59
of the APDSS. It is also submitted that the contract does not provide for any such
compensation, and hence the arbitrator, who had to operate within the four-corners of the
contract, had no power to award any compensation on this account.

16. The first aspect to be noticed in this behalf is that the contractor did not
choose to terminate the contract on account of the Government’s delay in handing over
the sites. He requested for, and agreed to extension of the period of contract, and
completed the work. It is not the respondent’s case that while agreeing to extension of the
period of contract he put the Government on notice of his intention to claim
compensation on that account. Section 55 of the Contract Act reads thus :—
 Date of commencement, completion, delays, extensions, etc. 61

“55. Effect of failure o perform at fixed time, in contract in which time

is essential :—When a party to a contract promises to do a certain thing at or
before a specified time, or certain things at or before specified times, and fails to
do any such thing at or before the specified time, the contract, or so much of it as
has not been performed, becomes voidable at the option of the promise, if the
intention of the parties was that time should be of the essence of the contract.

If it was not the intention of the parties that time should be of the essence
of the contract, the contract does not become voidable by the failure to do such
thing at or before the specified time; but the promisee is entitled to compensation
from the promisor for any loss occasioned, to him by such failure.

If, in case of a contract voidable on account of the promisor’s failure to

perform his promise at the agreed, the promisee accepts performance of such
promise at any time other than that agreed, the promisee cannot claim
compensation for any loss occasioned by the non-performance of the promise at
the time agreed, unless, at the time of such acceptance, he gives notice to the
promisor of his intention to do so”.

According to this Section it was open to the respondent to avoid the contract on
account of the Government’s breach of promise to deliver the sites at a particular time ;
but, he did not choose to do so, and accepted the delivery of sites. at a time other than
what was agreed upon between them earlier. If so, he is precluded from claiming
compensation for any loss occasioned by such delay, unless,, of course, at the time of
such delayed acceptance of the sites, he had given note to the Government of his
intention to claim compensation on that account. It must be remembered that this
provision of law was specifically referred to, and relied upon in the counter filed by the
Government to the respondent’s claim before the arbitrator. But, it is not brought to our
notice that the contractor bad given such a notice (contemplated by the last sentence in
Section 55). We must make it clear that we are not entering into the merits of the decision
of the arbitrator. What we are saying is that such a claim for compensation is barred by
law, except in a particular specified situation—and inasmuch as such a particular
specified situation is not present in this case, the claim for compensation is barred. It is
well settled that an arbitrator, while making his award, has to act in accordance with law
of the land, except in a case where a specific question of law is referred for his decision.

17. Even apart from Section 55, we are of the opinion that the arbitrator had no
power to award compensation as claimed by the respondent. Clause 59 of the APDSS
specifically bars such a claim. We have set out the clause in full hereinbefore. The
meaning of the said clause was considered by a Bench of this Court—of which one of us
(Jeevan Reddy, 3.) was a member—in A.A.O. No. 677/ 81 & C.R.P.No. 385/1982
disposed of on 19-4-82. It was held:

“Coming to Clause 59 of the preliminary specifications of “APDSS”, it

provides that neither party to the contractor shall claim compensation on account
of delays or hindrances to work from any cause whatever”. That
62 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

the delays and hindrances contemplated by Clause 59 include the stoppage,

hindrances and delays on the part of the department as well, is clear from the
following sentence in this first part of the said clause, viz., “the Executive
Engineer shall assess the period of delay or hindrances caused by any written
instructions issued by him, at 25% in excess of the actual work period so lost”.
Indeed, the second para of the clause also contemplates delays and hindrances
being caused on account of the failure of the Executive Engineer to issue
necessary instructions. In such a case, the contractor has a right to claim the
assessment of such delay by the Superintending Engineer of the Circle, whose
decision is declared to be final and binding on the parties. But, any such claim has
to be lodged in writing to the Executive Engineer within fourteen days of the
commencement of such delay, or hindrances, as the case may be. We find it
difficult, therefore, to say that Clause 59 has no application to the present case.
The words “from any cause whatever”, occurring Clause 59, are wide enough to
take in delays and hindrance of all types, caused by the department, or arising
from other reasons, as the case may be. Thus, by virtue of Clause 59, the
contractor is precluded from claiming any compensation on account of delays or
hindrances arising from any cause whatever, including those arising on account of
the acts or omissions of the departmental authorities ………….”.

In this context, we must refer to two conflicting decisions of this Court, though
they are not strictly relevant in the facts of this case. Since they are relied upon by the
parties before us, It would be appropriate to refer to them briefly. In these cases the
question arose whether a contractor is entitled to claim escalation charges on account of
delay on the part of the Government in handing over the site. The first decision is in Chief
Engineer, Panchayatraj Department vs. B. Balaiah, (1985 (1), APU 224). The Bench
held that inasmuch as the contract between the parties does not provide for payment of
escalation charges, awarding an amount on account of escalation charges is in excess of
the arbitrator’s jurisdiction, and is void. In the later decision of another Bench, in State of
A.P. vs. S. Shivaraj Reddy, (988(2), APLJ 465), a different view was taken. The claim in
this case pertained to the work done beyond the contract period. The Court held that the
contract or must be paid as per the standard specification rates, for the reason that the
Government had defaulted in handing over the site at the time agreed. It was held that
such a claim is not barred by Clause 59 of APDSS. When the decision of this Court in
C.M.A. No. 677/8 1 and C.R.P. No. 385/82, dated 19- 4-1982 was brought to the notice
of this Bench, it distinguished the same holding that was a case where the claim was for
compensation, whereas in the case before them the claim was not for compensation, but
for payment as per the standard specification rates for the reason that the site was not
handed over to the contractor at the agreed time. This is what the Bench said:

“In our view Section 59 has no application. It pertain to compensation. In

the present case, we are concerned with the rates for the work done. The
contractor is not claiming any compensation for loss or damage or loss of profit
which he would have made but for the delay committed by the department. What
is asked for here is that beyond the contractual date he must be paid as per the
standard specification rates as the site was not handed
 Date of commencement, completion, delays, extensions, etc. 63

over in time due to the fault of the department itself. We do not think P.S. 59 has
any application at all. The decision of the Division Bench referred to by the
learned Government Pleader has as relevance in the present context. In this
Division Bench case, the contractor having agreed for reduction of rates and
executing the final agreement, demanded escalation of rates complaining that the
department committed delays and defaults. The Government relied upon Clause
59 and Foot Note 7 of Schedule ‘A’ which prohibited payment of rates at the
enhanced rates even during the extended period. The Division Bench negatived
the claim of the contractor on the ground that the Foot Note 7 is clear to the effect
that the agreed rate should prevail even during the extended period of the
agreement. The judgment of the Division Bench was more based on the specific
prohibition contained in Foot Note 7 of Schedule ‘A’ of the agreement therein.
There is no such clause in the present agreement. It is not a case of escalation of
rates. Here the major portion of the site was handed over beyond the period of
agreement during which period the cost of labour and other materials have gone
up. Without the site was impossible for the contractor to complete the work and
what the Arbitrators have done is only to permit the contractor to claim the rates
prevalent as per the S.S.Rs. in force. In our view, it is not prohibited either under
the APDSS Rules or by any clause in the agreement ……………..”.

We must clarify that, so far as the case before us is concerned the claim of the
respondent-contractor is not for escalation of rates, nor is it a claim for payment of rates
as per the standard specification rates in force for the period beyond the originally agreed
contract period. If so, the decision in State of A.P. vs. S. Shivaraj Reddy (3 Supra) has no
application herein. In the case before us, the claim is a pure and simple claim for
compensation. The amount claimed has been worked out on the basis of the rise in
consumer price-index, and also on account of establishment and overhead charges. It
would, therefore, be a case squarely governed by the principle of the decision in A.A.O.
No. 677/81 & C.R.P. No. 385/82, dated 19-4-1982.

18. The learned Addl. Advocate-General also relied upon the decision of the
Supreme Court in Continental Construction Co., Ltd. vs. State of M.P., (1988 (3), SCC 82
; AIR 1988, SC 1166). In that. case the contract was entered into between the State of
Madhya Pradesh and the applicant before the Supreme Court, for construction of a bund.
The work could not be completed within the stipulated time because of the delays on the
part of the State in allotment of work and discharge of its obligations under the contract.
On account of this, the appellant incurred unforseen extra expenditure, which claim was
referred to arbitration. The State denied that there was any delay on its part. Apart from
that, it submitted that the appellant’s claim was barred by Clause 3.3.15 of the contract,
which read: “3.3.15: Clause 15 : Time limit for a unforeseen claims : Under no
circumstances whatever shall the contractor be entitled to any compensation from
Government on any account unless the contractor shall have submitted claim in writing to
the Engineer-in-charge within one month of the cause of such claim occurring ……… “.
The contractor did not avoid the contract on the ground of delays or defaults on the part
of the State. He contemplated the work. On these facts, the Supreme Court held:
64 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

“The arbitrator misconducted himself in allowing the claim without

deciding the objection of the State. In view of the specific clauses, the appellant
was not legally entitled to claim for extra cost. The decision of this Court in Seth
Thawardas vs. Union of India (AIR 1955, SC 468) is of no avail on this point. If
no specific question of law is referred, the decision of the arbitrator on that
question is not final however much it may be within his jurisdiction, and indeed
essential for him to decide the question incidentally. The arbitrator is not a
conciliator and cannot ignore the law or misapply it in order to do so what he
thinks is just and reasonable. The arbitrator is a tribunal selected by the parties to
decide their disputes according to law and so is bound to follow and apply the
law, and if he does not, he can be set right by the Court provided his error appears
on the face of the award. In this case, the contractor having contracted he cannot
go back to the agreement simply because it does not suit him to abide by it. The
decision of this Court in M/s. Alopi Prasad vs. Union of India (AIR 1960, SC
588) may be examined. There it was observed that a contract is not frustrated
merely because the circumstances in which the contract was made, altered. The
Contract Act does not enable a party to a contractor to ignore the express
covenants thereof, and the claim payment of consideration for performance of the
contract at rates different from the stipulated rates, on some vogue plea of equity.
The parties to an executory contract are often faced, in the course of carrying it
out, with a turn of events which they did not at all anticipate, a wholly abnormal
rise or fall in prices, a sudden depreciation of currency, an unexpected obstacle to
execution, or the like. There is no general liberty reserved to the Courts to absolve
a party from liability to perform his part of the contract merely because on
account of an uncontemplated turn of events, the performance of the contract may
become onerous ……….. ”.

When it was argued by the appellant that since the Award was a non- speaking
Award and no mistake of law was apparent on the face of the record, the Supreme Court
repelled the same holding that “this being a general question, in our opinion, the District
Judge rightly examined the question and found that the appellant was not entitled to claim
for extra cost in view of the terms of the contract and the arbitrator misdirected himself
by not considering this objection of the State before giving the award...”. Reference was
also made to the decision of the Privy Council in Champsey Bhara & Co. vs. Jivraj Ballo
Spinning & Weaving Co. Ltd. (AIR 1923, SC 6), where it was held that the award of an
arbitrator can be set aside on the ground of ah error apparent on the face of the record
only where the error is apparent either on the face of the award or from any document
incorporated in it. After referring to several authorities, the Supreme Court held that” the
District Judge was entitled to examine the contract in order to find out the legality of the
claim of the appellant regarding extra cost towards rise in price of material and labour”,
and observed further, “as was pointed out by the learned District Judge, Cls. 2.16 and 2.4
stipulated that the contractor had to complete the work inspite of rise in prices of
materials and also rise in labour charges at the rates stipulated in the contract. There was
a clear finding of the arbitrator that the contract was not rendered ineffective in terms of
Section 56 of the Contract Act due to abnormal
 Date of commencement, completion, delays, extensions, etc. 65

rise in prices of material and labour. This being so and the contractor having completed
the work, it was not open to him to claim extra cost towards rise in prices of material and
labour. The arbitrator misconducted himself in not deciding this specific objection raised
by the State regarding the legality of extra claim of the appellant ……………..”.

19. Applying the principal of the above decision to the facts of the case before us,
it must be held that Clause 59 bars a claim for compensation on account of any delays or
hindrances caused by the department. In such a case, the contractor is entitled only to
extension of the period of contract. Indeed, such an extension was asked for, and granted
on more than one occasion. (The penalty levied for completing the work beyond the
extended period of contract has been waived in this case). The contract was not avoided
by the contractor, but he chose to complete the work within the extended time. In such a
case, the claim for compensation is clearly barred by Clause 59 of the APDSS which is,
admittedly, a term of the agreement between the parties.

20. Mr. P. Ramachandra Reddy, learned counsel for the respondent- contractor,
however, relied upon certain decisions as laying down a contrary proposition, to which
we should now refer. The first decision relied upon is in P.M Paul vs. Union of India,
(1989(1), Scale 221). In this case, the appellant-contractor urged that there was delay on
the part of the respondent-Government in handing over the site, and that, on that account,
he has incurred extra cost which he must be reimbursed. His claim was rejected, as also
his request to refer the same to arbitration. Thereupon, it is said, the appellant-contractor
abandoned the work. The dispute was thereafter referred to the arbitrator. One of the
claims put forward by the appellant-contractor and allowed by the arbitrator related to the
loss caused to the contractor due to increase in prices of material, cost of labour and
transport during the extended period of contract. The respondent-State submitted that no
such claim is contemplated, or provided for, by the agreement between the parties and
hence the arbitrator was not competent to allow the said claim. The Supreme Court
observed that the dispute referred to the arbitrator, inter alia was as to who is responsible
for delay and what are the repercussions of the delay in completion of the work and how
to apportion the consequences of such responsibility. It was observed: “After discussing
the evidence and the submissions the arbitrator found that it was evident that there was
escalation and, therefore, he came to the conclusion that it was reasonable to allow 20%
of the compensation under Claim 1; he has accordingly allowed the same. This was a
matter which was within the jurisdiction of the arbitrator and hence, the arbitrator has not
misconducted himself in awarding the amount as he has done Once it was found that the-
arbitrator had jurisdiction to find that there was delay in execution-of the contract due to
the conduct of the respondent, the respondent, was liable for consequence of the delay,
namely, increase in prices. Therefore, the arbitrator had jurisdiction to go into this
question. He has gone into that question and has awarded as he did. Claim 1 is not
outside the purview of the contractor. It arises as an incident of the contract and the
arbitrator has jurisdiction ………….”. It must, however, be noticed that in this case the
contract did not contain a clause like contained in Clause 59 of the APDSS. Where a
similar clause was found as in the case Continental Construction Co. Ltd. vs. State of
Madhya Pradesh (4 Supra) the Supreme Court held clearly
66 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

that the arbitrator had no jurisdiction. It must be noted that the award in this case was a
speaking/reasoned award.

21. Mr. Ramachandra Reddy placed strong reliance upon the decision of the
Supreme Court in M/s. Sudarsan Trading Co. vs. The Government of Kerala & another,
(1989 (1), Scale 395) Three questions were considered in this case, namely, (i) when is an
award a speaking award; (ii) in the case of a non-speaking award, how and to what extent
can the Court go to determine whether there is an error apparent on the face of the award;
and (iii) to what extent can the Court examine the contract between the parties which is
not incorporated or referred to in the award? We are not concerned with the first question
in this case. The second and third questions are, however, relevant. On the second
question arising before it, the Supreme Court referred to the decision of the Privy Council
in Champsey Bhara & Co. vs. Jivraj Balloo Spinning & Weaving Co. Ltd. (5 Supra) and
held that an award can be set aside on the ground of an error apparent on the face of the
award only where the award, or any document incorporated therein contain some legal
proposition which constitutes the basis of the award, and which is erroneous. It was
observed that in the case of a non-speaking award it is not open to the Court to probe the
mental process of the arbitrator and speculate as to what impelled the arbitrator to arrive
at the conclusion which he did. In this connection, the Court referred to its earlier
decision in M/s. Alopi Parshad vs. Union of India, (AIR 1960, SC 588), wherein it was
held that an award can be set aside on the ground of an error apparent on the face of it,
when the reasons given for the decision either in the award or in any document
incorporated in it, are based upon a legal proposition which is erroneous. The other
principle enunciated in the said decision to the effect that “an award which ignores
express terms of the contract, is bad” was also affirmed. It was pointed out that the
ground of “error apparent on the face of the award” is distinct from the ground that the
arbitrator exceed his jurisdiction. It was pointed out that while in the latter case the Court
can look into the arbitration agreement to determine whether the arbitrator exceed his
jurisdiction, in the former case the Court must confine its attention only to the award and
to any other document or material incorporated therein. It was held that for determining
whether there is an error apparent on the face of the award the Court has no jurisdiction
to look beyond the award and the documents, if any, incorporated therein. Now, in the
case before us the question is not whether the award suffers from an error apparent on its
face, but whether the arbitrator has exceeded his jurisdiction in awarding compensation
when the agreement specifically prohibits the same. In such a case, it is open to the Court
to look to the terms of the agreement between the parties.

22. Mr. P. Ramchandra Reddy also relied upon the decisions of the Supreme
Court in State of Orissa vs. M/s. Lall Brothers (AIR 1988, SC 2018) and Neelkantan &
Brothers Construction vs. Superintending Engineer, National Highways, Salem, (AIR
1988, SC 2045) but which, in our opinion, are not quite relevant to the issue before us. In
the first case it was held that a non-reasoned Award, which awards a lumpsum without
specifying the amount awarded under each claim/count is still good between the parties.
It is not open to the Court it was held to set it aside by speculating as to the reasons which
must have impelled the arbitrator to
 Date of commencement, completion, delays, extensions, etc. 67

come to the conclusion which he did, nor is it permissible for the purpose to establish by
a process of inference and argument that the arbitrator he committed some mistake in
arriving at his conclusion. In the second case, it was held that a non-reasoned award
which contains no legal proposition which can be said to constitute the basis of the award
cannot be interfered with by the Court.

23. We are, therefore, of the opinion that the decisions relied upon by Mr.
Ramachandra Reddy do not lay down the proposition that where an award is questioned
on the ground that the arbitrator had no jurisdiction to entertain a claim by virtue of the
terms of the contract the court is precluded from looking to the terms of the contract. On
the contrary such a power is expressly recognized in one of the decision cited, viz.,
Sudarsan Trading Company vs. The Government of Kerala & another (7 supra). Further,
as held by the Supreme Court in Continental Construction Co., Ltd. vs. State of Madhya
Pradesh (4 supra), where the argument bars a particular claim, the arbitrator has no
jurisdiction to award any amount towards such a claim, and that any such award would be
incompetent and void.

24. There is yet another objection to the competency of the arbitrator to award any
amount under claim No. i, in this case. A would be evident from the claim of the
respondent-contractor (extracted herein before), the claim for compensation pertains
(except in this case of one pier/K7) to the period of contract. The period of contract
stipulated in the agreement expired on 21- 12-1973. Out of 9 items, mentioned in the
Table (containing particulars of compensation), 8 items pertain to the original period of
contract itself. Moreover, in the case, it was agreed between the parties even before the
formal agreement was executed that the period of contract shall be extended by six
months, which is evident from the respondent’s letter, dated 13-3-70 referred to above.
(The formal contract was executed in this case on 17-6-70). It must, therefore, be
assumed that in this case the period of contract expired on 21-6-74. In any event, even if
we take the original period of contract, the claim for compensation to a very major extent
pertains to the original period of contract. The question is whether any claim for
compensation is permissible for the original period of contract? It was held by a Bench of
this Court of which one of us (Jeevan Reddy, 3.) was a member in A.A.O.No. 786/1986,
dated 1-12- 1988, that such a claim is not permissible by virtue of Clause 59 of the
APDSS. We may also mention that in this decision the Bench distinguished another
decision of this Court in State of Andhra Pradesh vs. R. V. Rajaram, (1988(1), APLJ
536), where the contractor’s claim on account of statutory increase in the minimum
wages and other categories of labour was allowed by the arbitrator and upheld by the
Court. We need not, whoever, refer to the facts and principles of the said decision since
in the case before us the claim is not similar to the one in the said case. As already stated,
in the case before us the claim is squarely one for compensation which is worked out on
two bases, viz., (i) rise in consumer’s price-index, and (ii) establishment and overhead
charges and a large portion of the claim pertains to the original period of contract itself.

25. We may also state that it is not possible for us to apportion the amount
awarded for the original period of contract and the amount awarded for the extended
period, even assuming that the arbitrator was competent to make such an award for the
extended period of contract.
68 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

26. For the above reasons, we are of the opinion that the arbitrator exceeded his
jurisdiction in awarding the amount of Rs. 2,81,800/- under claim No. 1. The award of
the said amount is liable to be deleted from the Award.

27. Accordingly, the Civil Miscellaneous Appeal and the Civil Revision Petition
are allowed in part, the amount awarded by the arbitrator under claim No. 1 shall be
deleted. It is also held that the arbitrator had no power, in law to award interest for the
period commencing from the date of Award till the date of decree of the Civil Court.
However, the respondent-contractor shall be entitled to interest from the date of the
decree (i.e., from 19-2-1985) at the rate of 15% per annum till realization. We are
awarding interest at the rate of 15% per annum since that happens to be the rate which
was adopted by the arbitrator in the Award. There shall be no order as to costs.

____

JUDGMENT

CLAIM FOR COMPENSATION — WAWER OF RIGHT (P.S. 59)

BY THE DEPARTMENT

1996 (3) ALT 53 (D.B.)

The Hon’ble Mr. Justice P. Venkatarama Reddy

and
The Hon’ble Mr. Justice G. Bikshapathy

M. Gangareddy Petitioner.
vs.

State of A.P. Respondent.

Judgment

(Judgment of the Bench delivered by Venkatarama Reddy, J.)

Held:

In Prasad and Company’s case [1995 (3) ALT 537], the Division Bench, of
which one of us (Venkatarama Reddi, J.) was a member, held that escalation over and
above the agreed rates during the currency of the agreement period was clearly barred by
P.S. 59 of APDSS. In Ramalinga Reddy ‘s case (1994 (5) SCALE 67), the Supreme
Court had gone a step further and held that the claim for the payment of extra rate even
for the workdone beyond the agreement period was unsustainable in the light of the
specific prohibition contained in Clause 59. However, it is not discernible from the
Judgment whether the prolongation of the contract was for reasons attributable to the
contractor or on account of breach of contractual obligations by the employer as in the
instant case. Be that as it may, even assuming that Clause 59 would have in the normal
course come in the way of the petitioner claiming escalation in rates for the work done
beyond the contractual period, the special facts and circumstances of this case stand apart
and do not attract the bar of Clause 59. We agree with the learned counsel for the
contractor that the immunity conferred by the exclusionary clause 59 must be deemed to
have been waived and the Department is estopped from taking shelter under it. (Para 8)
 Date of commencement, completion, delays, extensions, etc. 69

On the facts of the case, it can be reasonably said that there was waiver f the right
to enforce Clause 59. Alternatively, we hold that the arbitrator’s finding that there was an
assurance to pay the extra rates cannot be said to be perverse or vitiated by an error of
law apparent on the face of the award. The assurance may not be direct or express but it
is possible to take the view that there was an implied promise to pay the extra rates for
the work done beyond the agreement period notwithstanding Clause 59. The promise had
emanated from a competent officer who signed the agreement itself. If the view taken by
the arbitrator is reasonably possible or plausible, we cannot interfere with the award on
the ground of error apparent on the face of the award. We, therefore, uphold the award in
regard to Claim No. 1 (e) and the learned Additional Judge, City Civil Court was justified
in confirming the award to this item. (Para 11)

Further see also S.E., Irrigation and another vs. M/s. Progressive Engineering
Co. Hyd and others, 1997 (2) ALT 701 (D.B.)

_____

JUDGMENT

PROHIBITION OF PAYMENT OF ANY AMOUNT OVER AND ABOVE THE

CONTRACTUAL RATE IS APPLICABLE TO COMPENSATION
BUT NOT IN THE RATES FOR THE WORK DONE

It was held by a Division Bench of A.P. High Court, in State of A.P. vs. S.S.
Reddy, reported in 1988(2), A.P.L.J., pages 465 to 469, consisting of Mrs. Justice
Amareswari and Bhaskar Rao, J., that Clause 59 pertains to compensation. If the present
case, we are concerned with the rates for the work done. The Contractor is not claiming
any compensation for loss or damage or loss of profit which he would have made but for
the delay committed by the department. What is asked for here is that beyond the
contractual date he must be paid as per the standard specification rates as the site was not
handed over in time due to the fault of the department itself. We do not think P.S. 59 has
any application at all.” (Para 9)

“The major portion of the site was handed over beyond the period of agreement
during which period the cost of labour and other materials have gone up. Without the site
it was impossible for the contractor to complete the work and what the Arbitrators have
done is only permit the contractor to claim the rates prevalent as per the S.S. Rs. in force.
In our view, it is not prohibited either under the A.P.D.S.S. Rules or by and clause in the
agreement”. (Para 9)

LAPSE ON THE PART OF THE DEPARTMENT IN NOT HANDING

OVER THE SITE TO THE CONTRACTOR TN FULL AT A TIME -
CONTRACTOR IS ENTITLED TO BE PAID AT THE STANDARD
SCHEDULE OF RATES TN FORCE

Held :—After the lapse of more than 2 years from the stipulated date of
completion namely, 13-11-1979, extension of time was granted by the department upto
September, 1982. This clearly shows that there was lapse on the part of the department in
not handing over the site to the Contractor in full at a time, since
70 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

there is an increase in the cost of labour, material and machinery during the period
beyond the agreement, the claimants are entitled to be paid at the standard schedule of
rates in force. (Para 12)

JUDGEMENT

(Judgment of the Bench delivered by Amareswari, J.)

1. These three appeals arise out of a common order of the IInd Additional Judge,
City Civil Court, Hyderabad, dated 27-12-1983. The matter arises under arbitration
proceedings.

2. O.S.No. 1557 of 1982 is filed under Sections 14 and 17 of the Arbitration Act
for making the award the rule of the Court and O.P.No. 377 of 1983 is filed under
Sections 30 and 33 of the Indian Arbitration Act for setting aside the award.

3. The Executive Engineer, Roads and Buildings Department entered into an

agreement with Shivraj Reddy, (3rd defendant in O.S.No. 1557 of 1982) on 14-7-1978
formation including metalling and Block topping of inner ring road at Uppal junction. As
disputes arose between the parties, the matter was referred to a panel of Arbitrator as per
the terms of the agreement. The Contractor made as many as 7 claims. The Arbitrators
allowed Claims 1(a) and 1(b) and rejected the other claims by their award, dated 13-9-
1982, Ex. A-i. Thereafter, the Arbitrators filed O.S.No.l557 of 1982 for making the award
the rule of the Court. The award is contested by the 1st and 2nd defendants.

4. The Contractor filed a written statement that the award should be made the rule
of the Court. The trial Court, after considering the material on record made the award the
rule of the Court and dismissed the O.P. filed by the 1st and 2nd defendants to set aside
the award.

5. Aggrieved thereby, the State preferred two appeals C.M.A. Nos. 470 and 471
of 1984 and Contractor preferred one C.M.A. No. 820 of 1984. The main contention of
the appellant-Government is that the Arbitrators exceeded their jurisdiction in accepting
claims 1(a) and 1(b) and the trial Court should have set aside the award to that extent.

6. In this case tenders were invited for the work in early 1977. Tenders were made
by the 3rd defendant on 2-5-1977 and the final agreement was concluded on 14-10-1978.
On 27-11-1978 the Department instead of handing over the entire site in one stretch, only
a portion was handed over to the Contractor with an assurance that the remaining portion
will be handed over shortly. The remaining site was handed over in bits on 23-7-1980 and
on 11-12-1981. That was more than 2 years from the stipulated date of completion on 26-
11-1979. The Contractor made a claim under head 1(a) for the work done upto the period
of agreed date of completion namely, 26-11-1979 for payment at the rates agreed to in
Schedule ‘A’ and for quantities of work done beyond the agreed date of 26-11.1979 upto
31-12-1981 at the standard specification rates in force during the period of execution plus
over all tender percentage amounting to Rs. 2,43,800/-. The Arbitrators accepted the
claim of the Contractor in this regard and granted rates as originally agreed for the work
done upto the period of originally agreed date of completion
 Date of commencement, completion, delays, extensions, etc. 71

and for the work done thereafter at the standard specification rates in force during the
period of execution of further work beyond the date of completion pins over all accepted
percentage.

7. The main submission of Miss. V. Lakshmi Devi, the learned Counsel for the
appellant is that Clause 59 of the Andhra Pradesh Detailed Standard Specification Rules
prohibits payment of any amount over and above the contractual rate. In support of this
contention, she relied upon a decision of the Division Bench of this Court in C.M.A.
No.677 of 1981 and C.R.P. No.385 of 1982, dated 19-4- 1982.

8. P.S. 59 of the Andhra Pradesh Detailed Standard Specifications is as follows:—

“P.s. 59. Delays and extension of time :—x x x ”

9. In our view P.S. 59 has no application. It pertains to compensation. In the

present case, we are concerned with the rates for the work done. The Contractor is not
claiming any compensation for loss or damage or loss of profit which he would have
made but for the delay committed by the department. What is asked for here is that
beyond the contractual date he must be paid as per the standard specification rates as the
site was not handed over in time due to the fault of the department itself. We do not think
P.S. 59 has any application at all. The decision of the Division Bench referred to by the
learned Government Pleader has no relevance in the present context. In this Division
Bench case, the contractor having agreed for reduction of rates and executing the final
agreement, demanded escalation of rates complaining that the department committed
delays and defaults. The Government relied upon Clause 59 and Foot Note 7 of Schedule
‘A’ which prohibited payment of rates at the enhanced rates even during the extended
period. The Division Bench negatived the claim of the Contractor on the ground that the
Foot Note 7 is clear to the effect that the agreed rate should prevail even during the
extended period of the agreement. The judgment of the Division Bench was more based
on the specific prohibition contained in Foot Note 7 of Schedule ‘A’ of the agreement
therein. There is no such clause in the present agreement. It is not a case of escalation of
rates. Here the major portion of the site was handed over beyond the period of agreement
during which period the cost of labour and other materials have gone up. Without the site
it was impossible for the contractor to complete the work and what the Arbitrators have
done is only to permit the contractor to claim the rates prevalent as per the S.S.Rs. in
force. In our view, it is not prohibited either under the APDSS Rules or by any clause in
the agreement.

10. In Chellappan vs. Kerala State Electricity Board, (2) AIR 1975, Supreme
Court, Page 230, it was held that the award can be set aside only when it is vitiated by an
error of law apparent on the face of the record.

11. In Jeevarai Bai vs. Chintamani Rao, (3) AIR 1965, Supreme Court, Page 214,
it was held that the Courts cannot interfere with the decision of the Arbitrators on the
ground that a different conclusion is possible. The adjudication by the Arbitrators must be
considered as binding for he is a Tribunal selected by the parties.
72 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

12. As per the agreement, the work has to be completed within 12 months from
the date of handing over the site. A portion of the site was handed over on 27-11-1978
and the remaining portion in bits on 23-7-1980 and 16-12-1981. After the lapse of more
than 2 years from the stipulated date of completion namely, 30-11-1979, extension of
time was granted by the department upto September, 1982. This clearly shows that there
was a lapse on the part of the department in not handing over the site to the Contractor in
full at a time, since there is an increase in the cost of labour, material and machinery
during the period beyond the agreement, the claimants are entitled to be paid at the
standard schedule of rates in force. The award of the arbitrators is just and reasonable and
it is not vitiated by an error of law apparent on the face of the record.

13. In the result, the appeals preferred by the State dismissed with costs.

14. In C.M.A.No. 820 of 1984 preferred by the Contractor, it is contented that the
decree is not in accordance with the award passed by the Arbitrators. We find substance
in this connection. While the judgment said that the award is made the rule of the Court,
the decree refers to only one relief viz., that the contractor should be paid at the standard
schedule of rates in force from December, 1979 to June, 1980, July, 1980 to June, 1981
and July, 1981 to September, 1982 plus the accepted over all tender percentage. The
decree does not refer to Claim No. 1(a) which was allowed by the Arbitrators namely that
for the work done upto the period of original agreed rate of completion, the Contractor is
entitled at the rates agreed to in Schedule ‘A’ including the work done in excess of the
quantities in Schedule ‘A’. Claim 1(b) which was also allowed by the Arbitrators says
that the Contractor is entitled for payment at the S.S.Rs. in force for the work done
beyond the original agreed date of completion during the period of execution of further
work plus over all accepted tender percentage. Hence the decree of the lower Court is
modified in terms of the award to the following effect:—

(1) The defendants 1 and 2 shall pay the contractor, 3rd defendant at he agreed
rates in Schedule ‘A’ including the work done in excess of the quantities in Schedule ‘A’

(2) The defendants 1 and 2 shall pay defendant No. 3 Contractor at the standard
schedule of rates-in force for the further work done beyond the originally stipulated date
of completion i.e., 30-11-1979 till the date of completion plus the accepted over all tender
percentage; and

(3) The amount deposited by the Department and withdrawn by the contractor
shall be adjusted in the final payment.

C.M.A. No. 820 of 1984 is allowed. No costs.

_____

JUDGMENT

CERTAIN CLAUSES OF P.S. 59 ARE ARBITRARY AND UNJUST

HON ‘BLE SRI JUSTICE K RAMASWAMY

W.P.No. 9797 of 1983, dated 25-1-1988 (Reported in 1988 (1) A.L.T. 461
 Date of commencement, completion, delays, extensions, etc. 73

V. Raghunadha Rao Petitioner

vs.

State of A.P. and others Respondents

Held :—The execution of the Government contracts has constitutional flavour

emanating from Articles 298 and 299 of the Constitution. Public law element imposes
limitation of imports and obligation upon the State’s executive power to conform to rule
of law. It cannot compel a citizen or person to forego the constitutional or statutory rights
as a condition to grant contracts. The conditions! covenants must satisfy the rigour of
Article 14 unless they are otherwise constitutionally authorized. Thereby the imposition
of the unconstitutional conditions is ultravires the executive power of the State. (Para 13)

Unless sufficient long time is given between the date of unilateral calling of the
tenders and the last date to submit tender, clause 11 remains to be a mere paper statement
affording no adequate opportunity to the intending contractor. Paragraph 2 of Clause II
by itself cannot be declared to be perse arbitrary but on a given facts and circumstances
and it has to be tested with reference to the timelag and relief given to the parties. (Para
41)

Limiting or self-relieving obligations on the part of the State are self- exculpatory
and breeding source to extra-constitutional behaviour. Omission to recompose a
contractor of the damages or loss suffered due to inaction, non- performance or under
performance or substantial unilateral variation of the terms of the contract are obnoxious
to justness, fairness, or reasonableness offending Article 14. Thus considered, the
opening part of first sub-clause of clause 59 and the supplementary specifications
(relieving the liability of the State) are arbitrary, unreasonable, unjust, unfair, and
unconscionable. (Para 42).

The Executive Engineer and the Superintending Engineer are the subordinates to
the State. Their decision shall not be made final and conclusive but must be left to a
decision, though may be raised at a later stage by an independent authority, viz., the
Court or an independent arbitrator or panel of arbitrators. No one shall be a Judge of his
own cause. Clause 29 of the specifications is not arbitrary but the exclusion of the
decisions of the authorities mentioned thereunder (Executive Engineer and
Superintending Engineer) from the purview of arbitration under Clause 73 is invalid
offending Articles 14 and 21. In matters relating to Government contracts fair procedure
is that the disputes shall be referred to an independent arbitrator or panel of arbitrators of
“their known integrity”. The procedure provided in Clause 73 to refer to an arbitrator or a
body of official arbitrators is an unfair procedure offending Article 21. (Paras 44 and 48)

Under Clause 62(b) power has been given to deduct part amounts pending
execution of the contract. It is an interim measure. Therefore it is not arbitrary. (Para 49)

The decision only applies to the petitioner’s contract and to the contracts to be
executed hereinafter. (Para 50)
74 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

P.S. 60. Delays in commencement or progress or neglect of work and

forfeiture of earnest money, security deposit and withheld amounts :—(a) Time shall
be considered as of the essence of the contract. If, at any time the Executive Engineer
shall be of the opinion that contractor is delaying commencement of the work or violating
any of the provisions of the contract or is neglecting or delaying the progress of the work
as defined by the tabular statement “Rate of progress” in the “Articles of agreement”, he
shall so advise the contractor in writing and at the same time, demand compliance. If the
contractor neglects to comply with such demand within seven days after receipt of such
notice, it shall then, or at any time thereafter, be lawful for the Executive Engineer to
determine the contract, which determination shall carry with it the forfeiture of the
Security deposit and the total of the amount withheld under Clause 68 below, together
with the value of such work as may have been executed and not paid for, or such
proportion of such total sums, as shah be assessed by the Executive Engineer.

[However, any authority higher in rank than the Executive Engineer may, in his
absolute discretion, waive or modify any penalty or forfeiture imposed by the Executive
Engineer, under the provisions of the clause].
[Added by G.O.Ms.No. 1007, Tr.Roads & Blds.(C1) Dept., Dt. 5-11-1976]

[(b) If, however, the Executive Engineer notwithstanding the failure of the
contractor to comply with the demand referred to in sub-clause (a) of this clause or
failure to maintain the “Rate of Progress” specified in the “Articles of Agreement” plus
any extension of time that may have been allowed to the contractor as defined in Clause
59, shall permit the contractor to proceed with the whole or part and continue and
complete the whole or such part of the work, such permission shall not be deemed to be a
waiver in any respect by the Executive Engineer of the right of forfeiture under this
clause:

Provided however that any such forfeiture under this sub-clause shall not exceed 5
per cent of the total of the contract amount:

Provided however that any authority higher in rank than the Executive Engineer
may in his absolute discretion waive or modify any penalty or forfeiture imposed by the
Executive Engineer under the provisions of this clause].
[Amended by Memo No. 972, Codn./74-5, P.W.D., Dt. 18-9-1974]

(c) It shall be a further right of the Executive Engineer, under this clause, at any
time the “Rate of Progress” in the agreement is not maintained, to give any part of the
work to any other contractor at his discretion, in order to maintain the “Rae of progress”
upon the completion of that part of the work that is withdrawn. the Executive Engineer
shall certify the amount of expenditure incurred by the department for getting it
completed by another contractor or contractors. Should the amount so certified be less
than the amount which would have been due to the contractor on the completion of that
part of the work by him, the difference shall not be paid to the contractor. [Should,
however the former exceed the latter, the difference shall be recovered from the
contractor by the Government, provided however that such a recovery shall not exceed
5% of the total contract amount.
[Subs. by G.O.Ms.No. 140, Tr.R & B(B. III), Dept., Dt. 1-7-1992]

[Note :—The contractor who makes a standing security deposit of Rs. 1,00,000
(Rs. one lakh) with the Chief Engineer under whom he wishes to tender
 Date of commencement, completion, delays, extensions, etc. 75

for works is eligible for concessional rates of Earnest money deposit and retention from
bills. However, for the purpose of forfeiture under the above clause, security deposit will
be reckoned at the normal rate, assuming that there is no standing security and not at the
concessional rate].
[Amended by G.O.Ms.No. 471, Tr., R.&B. (C) Dept., Dt. 7-10-1983]

Clarification

Execution of Balance work after determination of Contract under

Clause 60(c) of P.S. to A.P.D.S.S.

[Memo.No. 1778/C1/78-18, Tr.&R.B. (CI) Dept.. Dt. 10-8-1981]

Clarification has been made as to the mode of execution of balance Work and the
rate of which it may let out.

It is clarified that the Executive Engineer should have the right to allot the balance
work on nomination to any other contractor at his description in order to maintain the rate
and progress. No tenders need be invited so long as the Executive Engineer can get the
balance work executed satisfactorily at the rate in the agreement of the original
contractor. If the Executive Engineer is, however unable to find a contractor to execute
the balance work at the original agreement rate, he shall call for tenders at short notice
and obtain realistic rates. If the work so covered out and completed by the other
contractor or contractors involves any extra cost, the difference shall be received from the
original contractor under Clause 60(c) aforesaid provided, however, that such recovery
shall not exceed 5% of the total finished contract amount.

P.S. 61. Suspension of the works by the Contractor :—If, the contractor
(except on account of any legal restraint not occasioned by his own wilful act or default
or orders from Government preventing the continuance of act or default or orders from
Government preventing the continuance of the extension of time has been sanctioned by
competent authority) shall suspend the works, or sublet the work or a portion thereof
without sanction of the Executive Engineer, or in the opinion of the Executive Engineer,
shall neglect or fail to proceed with due diligence in the performance of his part of the
contract as laid down in the schedule rate of progress, or if he shall continue to default or
repeat such default in the respects mentioned in Clause 27 the Executive Engineer shall
have power to give notice in writing to the contractor requiring that the works be
proceeded with in accordance with the terms of the contract. Such notice shall not be
unreasonable, or vexatiously given, and must signify’ that it purports to be a notice under
the provisions of this clause, and must specify that act or default on the part of the
contractor upon which it is based. After such notice shall have been given, the contractor
shall not be at liberty to remove from the site or the works, or from the ground contiguous
thereto, any plant or materials belonging to him, which shall have been placed thereon for
the purpose of the work; and Government shall have a lien upon all such plant and
materials, to subsist from the date of such notice being given until the notice shall have
been complied with. The Government shall have power to post watchmen at the site of
the works and or the ground contiguous thereto in order to prevent the removal of any
plant or materials upon which the Government shall have a lien. If the contractor shall
fail, for fourteen days after such notice has been given, to comply with the same to the
satisfaction of the Executive Engineer as certified by him in writing, Government may
enter upon and take possession of the works and
76 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

site, and of all such plant and materials thereon (or any ground contiguous thereto) and all
such plant and materials as above mentioned shall thereupon be at the disposal of
Government absolutely, for the purpose of completing the work.

If Government shall exercise the above power to enter upon the works and take
possession of the works, plant and materials they may engage any other person to
complete the works, and exclude the contractor, his agents and servants from entry upon
or access to the same, except that the contractor or any person nominated by him may
have access at all reasonable times to inspect, survey and measure the works already
executed by him. And Government shall thereupon take such steps as they may consider
necessary for completing the works without undue delay or expense, using for that
purpose the plant and materials above mentioned and obtain such additional plant and
materials as the Executive Engineer shall decide is necessary for the due prosecution and
competition of the work. Upon the completion of the works, the Executive Engineer shall
certify the amount of the expenses properly incurred consequent on, and incidental to, the
default of the contractor as aforesaid and in having the works completed by other persons
having credited the contractor with the value of the materials utilized as aforesaid. Should
the amount so certified be less than the amount which would have been due to the
contractor on the completion of the works by him the difference shall not be paid to the
contractor by Government; should the amount of the former exceed the latter, the
difference shall be paid by the contractor to Government. Government shall not be liable
to make any payment to the contractor on account of the use of such plant for the
completion of the works under the provisions hereinbefore contained. Government may
at any time give notice in writing to the contractor to remove any of his plant or materials
from the site and not required for completion of the works. If such plant and or materials
are not removed within fourteen days after notice shall have been so given Government
may remove and sell the same, holding the proceeds less the cost of removal and sale, to
the credit of the contractor.

In case Government shall exercise the power contained in this clause and shall
complete the works by any other person as therein provided, the Executive Engineer,
after instituting such inquiries as he may deem fit, with or without notice to the
contractor, shall certify what amount (if any) had at the time of the Government
exercising such power as aforesaid, been reasonably earned or would reasonably accrue
to the contractor in respect of work then actually done by him in the premises and such
certificate shall be final and binding on the contractor.

Notwithstanding anything contained in Clause 50 above, when possession of the

work and site is taken by Government in exercise of the power contained in this clause
the portion of the work actually completed by the contractor in the premises shall be
maintained by Government as the risk and expense of the contractor until the whole of
the work is completed by other agency and possession thereof taken by Government.

I. — Particulars of Payment
P.S. 62. Payment on lump-sum basis or by final measurement or unit
prices:—(a) Payment for the work done by the contractor will be made on the basis of
the measurements recorded in the measurement books or level field books
 Particulars of Payment 77

by an officer not below the rank of the Supervisor and check measured by an officer not
below the rank of an Assistant Engineer. The measurements will be recorded at the
various stages of the work, while it is in progress, for the proper assessment of the
quantities of work, done and also after the work is completed or when the contract is
determined. The contractor or his authorized agent shall be present at the recording of
each set of measurement and check measurement and accept them, then and there, so as
to avoid disputes at a later stage. The set of measurements and check measurements may
also be taken by the Department even in the absence of the contractor or his authorized
agent, three days after the issue of a notice to the later, in writing of such intention by the
department.
[Subs. by G.O.Ms.No. 1007, Tr., Roads & Blds. (C1) Dept., Dt. 5-11-1976]

(b) In cases of over-payment or wrong payment made, if any, to the contractor

due to wrong interpretation of the provisions of the contract, the Andhra Pradesh
Standard Specification or otherwise, such unauthorized payment will be deducted in the
subsequent bills or final bill of the work, or failing that, from the bills under any other
contract with the Government or at any time thereafter, from his security deposits
available with the department.
[Subs. by G0.Ms.No. 1007, Tr., Roads & Blds. (Cl) Dept., Dt. 5-11-1976]

(c) It shall be accepted as a condition of the contract that a payment of the final
bill to the contractor less the withheld amount and his acceptance thereof shall constitute
a full and absolute release of Government from all further claims by the contractor under
the contract.

P.S. 63. Payment for additions and deductions for omissions:- The contractor
is bound to execute all supplemental items that are found essential, incidental and
inevitable during the execution of the work, at the rates to be worked out as detailed
below

[(a) For all items of work in excess of the quantities shown in Schedule A of the
tender the rates payable for such items shall be either the tender rates or the standard
schedule of rates for the items plus or minus the overall tender percentage accepted by
the competent authority whichever is less.

(b) For items directly deducible from similar items in the agreement, the rates
shall be derived by adding to or subtracting from the agreement rate of such similar item,
the cost of difference in quantity of material or labour between the new items and the
similar items in the agreement, worked out with reference to the Schedule of rates
adopted in the sanctioned estimate plus or minus the over all tender percentage].
[Subs. by G.O.Ms.No. 1007, Tr., Roads & Blds. (C) Dept., Dt. 5-11-1976]

(c) For new items which do not correspond to any items in the agreement, the
rates shall be the standard schedule rate plus or minus the overall tender percentage.

The terms ‘standard schedule of rates’ used in the above sub-clauses (a), (b) & (c)
means the schedule of rates on which the sanctioned estimate was prepared.

(d) In the event of the Executive Engineer and the Contractor failing to agree on a
rate for such additional work, the Executive Engineer may, at his opinion either :—
78 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

(i) employ other parties to carry out the additional work in the same
manner as provided for under Clause 48, or

(ii) the contractor shall execute the work upon written orders from the
Executive Engineer and the cost of labour and materials plus 10 per cent thereon shall be
allowed therefor, provided that the vouchers for the labour and materials employed shall
have been delivered to the Executive Engineer or his representative within seven days
after such work shall have been completed. If the Executive Engineer considers that
payment for such work on the basis of the vouchers presented is unduly high, he shall
make payment in accordance with such valuation as he considers fair and reasonable and
his decision to the matter shall be final, if the amount involved in additional payment is
Rs. 1,000 or less, for each occasion on which such additional works shall have been
authorized. If such amount exceeds Rs. 1,000, the contractor shall have the right to
submit the matter to arbitration under the provisions of the arbitration Clause 73.

(e) If, in the opinion of the Executive Engineer, a rate for the additional work is
not capable of being properly arrived at prior to execution of work, or if the work is not
capable of being properly measured, then the cost and payment thereof shall be dealt with
as provided for in the preceding sub-clause (d)(ii).

P.s. 64. No payment for unsanctioned extras :—It shall be distinctly understood
that no payment whatever will be made to the contractor for variations by way of extras
in cases where such variations have been made without the written sanction of the
Executive Engineer.

P.S. 65. Accounts, receipts and vouchers :—The contractor shall at any time,
upon the request of the Executive Engineer furnish him with all invoices, accounts,
receipts and other vouchers that he may require in connection with the contract.

P.S. 66. Fraud, wilful neglect or default :—No final or other certificate of
payment of completion, acceptance or settlement of account shall, in any circumstances,
relieve the contractor from his liability for any fraud or wilful neglect or default in the
execution of the contract or any wilful or unauthorized deviations from the drawings,
specifications, instructions and directions for the time being binding upon him.

P.S. 67. Unfixed materials :—No payment or advance will be made for unfixed
materials when the rates are for finished work in site.

P.S. 68. Payments and certificates :—Payment will be made to the contractor
under the certificate to be issued at reasonably frequent intervals by the Executive
Engineer or by the sub-divisional officer. Within fourteen days of the date of each
certificate, an intermediate payment will be made by the Executive Engineer or the sub-
divisional officer of a sum equal to 92 ½ per cent (96 ½ % in the case of contractors who
have lodged the standing security deposit of [Rs. 1,00,000) (Rs. 1-00 lakh)] of the value
of work, as so certified and the balance of 7½ percent, (3½% in the case of contractors
who have the standing security deposit) will be withheld and retained as a security for the
due fulfilment of the contractor. Under the certificate to be issued by the Executive
Engineer or the Sub-
 Particulars of Payment 79

Divisional Officer on the completion of the entire works the contractor will receive the
final payment of all the moneys due or payable to him under or by virtue of the contractor
except earnest money deposit retained as security and a sum equal to 2 ½ % of the total
value of the work done, provided there is no recovery from or forfeiture by the contractor
to be made under Clause 60. The amount withheld from the final bill will be retained
under “deposits” and paid to the contractor together with the earnest money deposit
retained as security after a period of six months as all defects shall have been made good
according to the true intent and meaning thereof. However in the case of works like
conveyance of materials, supply of materials, slit clearance where the fixation of
observation period is not necessary, the deposit amount could be refunded after the work
is completed in accordance with the terms of the agreement.
[Subs. by G.O.Ms.No. 471, Tr., Roads & Blds. (Cl) Dept., Dt. 7-10-1983]

No certificate of the Executive Engineer or the Sub-Divisional Officer shall be

considered conclusive evidence as to the sufficiency of any work or materials or
correctness of measurements to which it relates, nor shall it relieve the contractor from
his liability to make good defects as provided by the contractor. The contractor, when
applying for a certificate, shall prepare a sufficiently detailed bill, based on the original
figures of quantities and rates in the contract (Schedule A) to the satisfaction of the
Executive Engineer, to enable the Executive Engineer or the Sub-Divisional Officer to
check the claim and issue the certificate. The certificate as to such of the claims
mentioned in the application as are allowed by the Executive Engineer or the Sub-
Divisional Officer shall be issued within fourteen days of the application. No application
for a certificate shall be made within fourteen days of a previous application.

In calculating the amount of each item due to contractor in every bill submitted
for payment under this contract, fractions of below five paise shall be omitted and five
paise or over shall be reckoned as ten paise. In calculating the total on each bill
amounting to Rs. 25 or more under this contract, fractions of less than half rupee shall be
disregarded and half a rupee and over shall be reckoned as one rupee.

[The above clause will not apply to contracts entered into for designing,
manufacture, supply, erection, testing, etc. (mechanical contracts) where special
conditions are incorporated providing for retention of 10% of the contract value for
twelve months after the payment upto 90% on erection and testing].
[Inserted by G.O.Ms.No. 416, T., R. & B. (C) Dept., Dt. 27-12-1980]

P.S. 69. Interest on money due to the contractor :—(a) No omission by the
Executive Engineer or the Sub-Divisional Officer to pay the amount due upon certificates
shall vitiate or make void the contract, nor shall the contractor be entitled to interest upon
any guarantee fund or payments in arrear, nor upon any balance which may, on the final
settlement of his accounts, be found to be due to him.

(b) Whenever the withheld amount reaches Rs. 1,000 or a multiple thereof, the
contractor may, at his option, deposit with Executive Engineer Rs. 1,000 or a multiple
thereof, in any of the forms of interest bearing securities recognized for
80 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

the purpose by the Andhra Pradesh Public Works Accounts Code and subject to the
provisions therein contained, in which case in the equivalent withheld amount shall be
paid to him forthwith. The contractor will be permitted to exercise the option in this
clause, subject only to the condition that the rate of progress contained in the Articles of
Agreement is properly maintained.

JUDGMENT

CANNOT BE CONSTRUED AS A TOTAL PROHIBITION OF

PAYMENT OF INTEREST

1989(1) ALT 195

The Hon ‘ble Mr. Justice P. Kodandaramayya

Appeal No. 932 of 1986 and Memo. of Cross Objections, Dt. 5-2-1988

A.P.S.R.T.C. rep. by its General Manager

(Now re-designated as Managing Director)
Mushirabad, Hyderabad and others Appellant

vs.

P. Ramanareddi Respondent

Judgement

The Andhra Pradesh State Road Transport Corporation represented by its

Managing Director, the first defendant and its officers, defendants 2 and 3, are the
appellants in this appeal. The suit is laid for recovery of Rs. 81,018-93 Ps. towards the
work done for the Corporation for constructing a building and bus stand at Srikalahasthi,
Chittoor District.

2. The plaintiff case in short is that the plaintiff entered into an agreement Ex. A-i
on 19-11-1978 and the work was completed on 22-5-1980 and the amount due to him
under the work done by him and the deposits refundable to him were not paid even after
22-11-1980, six months’ period stipulated under the contract and with the details given in
the plaint the suit claim is made with interest. The defence is that the plaintiff failed to
comply with the terms of the contract and for recovery of amount due for two items 37
and 38 a separate suit was filed, by the plaintiff and the plaintiff refused to sign the final
bill and declined to accept the estimate-made by them and he is entitled to Rs. 21,401-48
Ps., towards the work done and Rs. 30,531/- towards deposits and a sum of Rs. 49,082-22
Ps., has to be adjusted from the bills and hence he is entitled to only a sum of Rs. 2,850-
25 Ps.

3. On this controversy, very strangely, the Court below framed a solitary issue,
whether the plaintiff is entitled to recover suit amount, from the defendants as prayed for.
This can hardly be described as a satisfactory method of framing issues. No doubt it
discussed the evidence in respect of each item claimed by the defendant for being
adjusted but took the view that the claim of the defendant constitutes set-off and in as
much as the Court-fee is not paid no claim can be sustained even in respect of the items
found due to the defendant which are liable to be deducted from the bill. However, in
view of the admission made by the
 Particulars of Payment 81

defendants that a sum of Rs. 51,922-48 Ps., is due negativing the claim of the plaintiff for
Rs. 49,082-22 Ps., decreed the suit for the said sum with interest at 12% p.a. from 22-1-
1980 upto the filing of the suit and also granted interest on Rs. 7 1,653-02 Ps., at 6% per
annum from the date of the suit till the date of realization. Against this decree and
judgment the present appeal is filed.

4. The learned counsel for the appellants, Sri K. Harinath, argued three questions
before me.

1. The view of the trial Court that the deductions sought from the bill
payable to the plaintiff constitute set off is incorrect and no Court-fee need be paid and
the claim of the defendants for adjustment of these items must be examined on merits.

2. Awarding of interest at 12% per annum from 22-1-1980 the date of

completion of contract is illegal and further awarding interest on interest is illegal.

3. He also canvassed the correctness of the finding of the trial Court on the
items claimed by the defendants.

5. It is true as per Section 8 of the Andhra Pradesh Court-fees and Suits Valuation
Act, 1956 (Act VII of 1956) a written statement pleading a set-off or counter-claim shall
be chargeable with fee in the same manner as plaint. It is necessary to examine whether
the present claim of deduction made by the defendants constitutes set-off. A perusal of
Ex. A-i shows the items supplied by the Corporation such as cement, steel and other
material had to be deducted in order to arrive at the total bill payable. They are virtually
in the nature of payments in kind. But they are not sums of money payable to the
defendants under the terms of the contract. If the total sum payable has to be arrived at on
the adjustment of these amounts, it does not amount to set-off and no Court-fee need be
payable. I may usefully refer to the following dicta of the Supreme Court in this regard
reported in M/s. Lakshmichand & Baichand vs. State of Andhra Pradesh, (1986(2), APLJ
45). No doubt in that case the question of Court-fee did not arise. It is also a case where
some amounts were deducted by the Government for the work done while upholding the
right of set-off. While dealing with the right of the defendant to claim set-off in the
execution proceedings under Order XXI, Rule 18 of the C.P.C., the Supreme Court
observed as follows with reference to Clause 68 of the contract which enables final
payment to be made to the contractor after taking into account the amount which had
been received by him earlier. They described such amount and the process of deduction
as adjustment. The passage runs thus

“So far as the first claim to adjustment is concerned, t1ie matter is covered
by Clause 68 of the contract. What was awarded to the contractor under the
decree was an amount relating to a part only of the work entrusted to him. The
contract was still in the process of execution. Any amount claimed by him for
such work was subject to a final settlement of account on the preparation of the
final bill. The right to payment depended on the terms of the contract. Any
payment made while the contract was still being worked out was in the nature of a
provisional payment. It is always subject to adjustment against amounts found due
against the contractor on preparation
82 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

of the final bill. Such adjustment was implied in the very terms of the contract.
Therefore, in regard to the adjustment claimed by the State Government on the
first count the High Court is right in our opinion, in holding that the amount
claimed by the State Government as determined on arbitration, was entitled to set
off against the decretal amount claimed by the contractor and that payment of the
decretal amount was to be subject to such adjustment.”

6. Though in this case the finding is in respect of set-off, the passage is relied
upon very rightly by the learned counsel to show that it is really in the nature of
adjustment. No doubt the Court is not concerned with reference to the Court fee payable
but only substantive right of set-off. It is necessary to remember that even if adjustment is
made if a dispute is raised about the right to adjustment, the Court may have to examine
it. It is not as if the adjustment pleaded will be accepted automatically or it must be one
which is indisputable. We are concerned with the problem of payment of Court-fee. The
Court is bound to make any enquiry and adjudicate the rights of the parties irrespective of
the plea raised by the plaintiff whether it is set-off or adjustment, but if it is an
adjustment, no Court-fee need be payable.

7. This view is fairly settled and there are decided judicial opinions on this
question. We have got a similar provision under the Central Court-fee Act, 1870. In
Schedule I, Item 1 which enjoins payment of Court-fee on plaint, written statement
pleading a set-off or counter-claim. Courts have examined this provision and ruled that
when the plea raised is only an adjustment or payment no Court fee need be payable. It is
necessary to distinguish set-off from adjustment. A Full Bench of this Court in
Boganandam Seshaiah vs. Budhi Veerabadrayya, (AIR 1972, A.P. 134; 1971(2), ALT
227 F.B.) defined set-off in the following terms

“The principle of set-off may be defined as the extinction of debts of

which two persons are reciprocal debtors to one another, by the credits of which
they are reciprocally creditors to one another.”

8. Stroud’s Judicial Dictionary defines set-off as

“(A) A legal set-off is : “where there are mutual debts between the
plaintiff and defendant, or if either party sue or be sued as executor or
administrator....one debt may be set against the other”.

The author relying on a dicta of Brett L.J., also says, “set-off’ and “counter-claim” confer
definite and independent remedies upon a defendant against the plaintiff. Thus it is seen,
‘set-off’ is a claim that arises under the same transaction which confers a right to recover
the same as an independent debt, but an adjustment or payment in respect of the amount
due to the plaintiff has extinguished the debt as the defendant is not claiming any right to
recover the amount but only seeking to establish that the claim of the plaintiff cannot be
arrived at without reference to the payment or adjustment already made.

9. It is unnecessary to multiply the authority on this question. A Division Bench

of the Orissa High Court in The Tata iron and Steel Co.Ltd. vs. R.N. Gupta, (AIR 1963,
Orissa 174), arising under the Central Court-fee Act rightly took the view holding that:
 Particulars of Payment 83

“A plea of satisfaction or extinguishment of a debt or a claim, set up

merely by way of defence is very different. A plea of payment necessarily refers
to a satisfaction or extinguishment of a debt effected prior to the stage of the
defence, whereas a plea of set-off is in the nature of a cross-claim and in effect it
prays for a satisfaction, or extinguishment of a claim, to be made in the future
‘after the date’ when the plea has been set up. If it were held to be merely a plea
regarding adjustment of accounts and no more, no Court-Fee would be payable on
the amount mentioned in such a plea”.

10. The above case also noticed earlier judgments in support of this view. Hence I
am clearly of opinion that the payment of adjustment is not set-off as the defendant has
no independent right to recover the amount without settling the claim of the plaintiff. It is
not a cross-claim though arising under the same transaction as in the case of set-off.

“A plea of satisfaction or extinguishment of a debt or a claim, set up

merely by way of defence is very different. A plea of payment necessarily refers
to a satisfaction or extinguishment of a debt effected prior to the stage of the
defence, whereas a plea of set-off is in the nature of a cross-claim and in effect it
prays for a satisfaction, or extinguishment of a claim, to be made in the future
‘after the date’ when the plea has been set up. If it were held to be merely a plea
regarding adjustment of accounts and no more, no Court-Fee would be payable on
the amount mentioned in such a plea”.

10. The above case also noticed earlier judgments in support of this view. Hence,
I am clearly of opinion that the payment of adjustment is not set-off as the defendant has
no independent right to recover the amount without settling the claim of the plaintiff. It is
not a cross-claim though arising under the same transaction as in the case of set-off.

11. Applying this principle to the facts of this case, it is clear Ex. A-1 envisages
that the Corporation should supply cement, steel and other material and the price must be
deducted in the bills payable to the plaintiff. The defendant has no right to recover as a
cross-claim though arising under the same transaction. He cannot plead that the plaintiff
must refund these amounts and he will pay the amount due to the plaintiff. On the other
hand, the amount paid by him should go towards the deduction of the claim made by the
plaintiff and hence in the absence of a right to recover as an independent debt due from
the plaintiff it clearly constitutes an adjustment or payment. Accordingly I am of the
opinion that the Court below misdirected itself in thinking that these deductions that have
to be made by the Corporation are in the nature of counter-claim and Court-fee requires
to be paid.

12. Fortunately the Court below alternatively examined each item claimed by the
defendant and rejected all the items except two items. But at the end of the judgment it
held that in view of the non-payment of Court-fee no claim made by the defendant can be
examined and hence I have new no examine the claim of the defendant on merits as I
hold that no Court-fee need be paid.

13. Now I shall deal with the merits of the case.

14. The defendant claimed as many as 8 items to be deducted out of the amounts
admitted by him due to the plaintiff. The first item is cement supplied
84 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

to the plaintiff. The defendant’s counsel made two alternative submissions. (1) The Court
below decreed only the amount admitted by the defendant i.e., Rs.51,932-43 Ps., but did
not deduct even 6.25 metric tons of cement admittedly deducted by the plaintiff in his
plaint while arriving at the total sum payable to him. Secondly the value of cement is not
125 bags as claimed by the plaintiff, but it must be 267 bags. This is refuted by the
learned counsel for the plaintiff stating no doubt the plaintiff deducted 6.25 metric tons of
cement in the plaint but on that basis total amount arrived at Rs.81,080-93 Ps. Unless the
Court examine these items and reject a part of the claim as untenable, the mere deduction
shown in the plaint at Rs.2,875-00 Ps., cannot constitute an admission. The alternative
argument was answered by him saying though the plaintiff deducted 6.25 metric tons on
the basis of his calculation, he claimed some illegal deductions made in the bill at Rs.
4,761-00 and that was accepted by the trial Court in which event the claim for 267 bags
of cement or the statement in the plaint for 6.25 metric tons is not fatal and the total
amount must be rejected. I am inclined to accept the submission on behalf of the plaintiff.
No doubt the plaintiff on the method of calculation arrived at sought to deduct 6.25
metric tons i.e., 125 bags but the Court did not examine the correctness of the figure
arrived by the plaintiff at Rs. 81,082-93 Ps. but proceeded to decree the suit claim on the
basis of the admission made by him. In view of the fact the plaintiff has claimed Rs.
4,761/- and the interest payable therein respect of the excess cement already used, he
might have shown the deduction for Rs. 6,25 Metric Tons or 125 bags. Both the counsel
did not take me to details of calculation adopted either by the plaintiff or the defendant.
The defendant’s counsel contended that the statement in the plaint constitutes an
admission whereas the plaintiff’s counsel contended that when the Court rejected the
plaintiff’s method of calculation the statement of deducting a portion of the cement used
by him cannot constitute an admission. In fact the Court also accepted the plea of the
plaintiff in this regard and said that DW-2 stated that the cost of 3866 bags of cement
given to the plaintiff was recovered by 11th bill itself and it also held that no evidence
has been produced to show that the plaintiff did not spend the cement of 3724 bags as per
the measurement in M.Book. The contention of the learned counsel for the defendant is
that though the plaintiff has used all 3991 bags his claim for the entire thing is illegal as
the estimated amount is less. The relevant clause in the agreement Ex. A-1 shows that the
plaintiff is entitled to use the cement required and hence the Court below also recorded a
finding that no evidence has been produced to show that the plaintiff did not use the
cement issued from the 1st bill to the 11th bill or subsequently except stating that the
measurements were noted in the M Book. Hence I am of the opinion that no separate
deduction towards the cement is warranted in view of the finding arrived at by the trial
Court.

15. The trial Court on the question of steel, recorded a finding that the defendants
are entitled to recover cost of excess steel 3.52 metric tons at Rs. 2,500-00 per metric ton
i.e., Rs. 8,800-00. It also held that a sum of Rs. 800-00 can be claimed by the defendant
for non engagement of technical agents. On these two items the learned counsel for the
plaintiff contended that if the Court-fee is paid, his claim can be allowed. But he did not
say how the finding is incorrect. In view of the fact that I have taken the view that the
Court-fee need not be paid, these two items must be allowed as deduction towards the bill
payable to the plaintiff.
 Particulars of Payment 85

16. The Court below also held seigniorage charge of Rs. 3,884-00 and also
Income-Tax of Rs. 428-00 cannot be deducted. When we look to the relevant clause 22 it
not only enables the defendant-Corporation to deduct that amount if it actually paid on
behalf of the plaintiff or if any outstanding income or other dues. If the plaintiff failed to
produce Income-tax clearance certificate, the Corporation is not entitled to deduct them
in the absence of any proof of payment made by them on behalf of the plaintiff.

17. The last item is damages claimed by them at Rs.16,130-84 Ps. The learned
counsel for the defendant vehemently argued that admittedly the plaintiff let out certain
items in the contract without performing them and they have to get it done by some other
person and the damages incurred by them must be allowed to be recovered from the bill
payable to the plaintiff. I must say there is no specific clause in the agreement enabling
the Corporation to deduct any amount towards damages. It is admitted by the defendant
that it is only under general law of damages. Assuming that the Corporation has a right, I
am clearly of the view that no one connected with the work entrusted was examined. The
actual amount spent is not forthcoming. But the learned counsel for the defendant argued
that this item was not disputed. I must say it is clearly an untenable contention. What was
urged by the defendant is that at the instance of the Corporation’s Engineer he released
certain items to the third parties. On the other hand he is disputing the plaintiff’s
statement that the defendant committed default. The fact that he released certain items for
being entrusted to third parties does not mean that be admitted the claim of the
defendants. I must hold that in the absence of any evidence of actual loss, - the claim for
damages at Rs. 16,130-84 Ps. is clearly untenable. In the result out of the total amount
found due and admitted by the defendant at Rs. 51,922-48 Ps. the two sums i.e., Rs.
8,800-00 and Rs.. 800-00 totalling Rs. 9,600-00 are liable to be deducted and the plaintiff
is entitled to the said amount.

18. On the question of interest I took the assistance of Sri J. Prabhakar and I place
on record of my appreciation for his able assistance to the Court. The argument of the
learned counsel is two fold. Under Clause 69 of the Andhra Pradesh Detailed Standard
Specifications which is made applicable to the contract in question, no interest is payable.
In view of that prohibition the decree regarding payment of interest is unsustainable.
Secondly even assuming that Clause 69 is not a bear or inapplicable for a claiming
interest as stated in the plaint, the provisions of the Interest Act, 1839 are not attracted to
the facts of the case. On the first part of the argument, he relied on the judgment of this
Court in Koppisetti Venkateswara Rao vs. Superintending Engineer, P.H. East Circle
(1986 (2), ALT 547), wherein Ramaswamy, 3., held that Clause 69 bars the claim for
interest. Sri Prabhakar brought to my notice the judgement of another single Judge,
Amareshwari, 3., who took a contrary view. In view of the judgement of the Supreme
Court in Hyderabad Municipal Corporation vs. M. Krishnaswami Mudaliar (AIR 1985,
SC 607) and State of Rajasthan vs. Raghubir Singh (AIR 1979, SC 852), 1 cannot give
effect to this agreement. Before I draw support from these two cases it is necessary to
refer to Clauses 68 and 69 of the Andhra Pradesh Detailed Standard Specifications. The
first paragraph of Clause 68 reads as follows:

“68. Payments and certificates :—Payment will be made to the

contractor under the certificate to be issued at reasonably frequent intervals
86 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

by the Executive Engineer or by the Sub-divisional Officer. Within fourteen days

of the date of each certificate, an intermediate payment will be made by the
Executive Engineer or the sub-divisional officer of a sum equal to 92 ½ %
(96 ½ % in the case of contractors who have lodged the standing security deposit
of [Rs. 1,00,000) (Rs. 1-00 lakh)] of the value of work, as so certified and the
balance of 7 ½ percent, (3 ½ % in the case of contractors who have the standing
security deposit) will be with-held and retained as a security for the due
fulfilments of the contractor. Under the certificate to be issued by the Executive
Engineer or the Sub-divisional Officer on the completion of the entire works the
contractors will receive the final payment of all the moneys due or payable to him
under or by virtue of the contractor except earnest money Deposit retained as
security and a sum equal to 2 ½ % of the total value of the work done, provided
there is no recover from or forfeiture by the contractor to be made under Clause
60. The amount withheld from the final bill will be retained under “deposits” and
paid to the contractor together with the earnest money deposit retained as Security
after a period of six months as all defects shall have been made good according to
the true intent and meaning thereof. However in the case of works like
conveyance of materials supply of materials, slit clearance where the fixation of
observation period is not necessary, the deposit amount could be refunded after
the work is completed in accordance with the terms of the agreement. [Subs. by
G.O.Ms.No. 471, Tr., R. & Bldgs. (C), Dept., Dt. 7-10-1983]

19. Clause 69 reads as follows:

“69. Interest on money due to the contractor :—(a) No omission by the

Executive Engineer or the sub-divisional officer to pay the amount due upon
certificates shall vitiate or make void the contract, nor shall the contractor be
entitled to interest upon any guarantee found or payments in arrear, nor upon any
balance which may, on the final settlement of his accounts, be found to be due to
him.

(b) Wherever the withheld amount reaches Rs. 1,000 or a multiple thereof,
the contractor may, at his option, deposit with Executive Engineer Rs. 1,000 or a
multiple thereof in any or the forms of interest bearing securities recognized for
the purpose by the Andhra Pradesh Public Works Accounts Code and subject to
the provisions therein contained in which case in the equivalent withheld amount
shall be paid to him forthwith. The contractor will be permitted to exercise the
option in this clause, subject only to the condition that the rate of progress
contained in the Articles of Agreement is properly maintained”.

20. A close reading of these two clauses discloses that in respect of each bill and
after obtaining the certificate an amount of 3 ½ % or 7 ½ %, as the case may be, can be
withheld. Further even after completion of the entire work, the contractor cannot receive
the earnest money deposit and also a sum equivalent to 2 ½ % of the total value of the
work done, and that will be payable only at the end of 6 months which is considered to be
observation period. By a reading of this clause we can easily follow the ambit of Clause
69 which envisages that no claim for interest can be entertained in respect of payment of
arrears or final settlement be
 Particulars of Payment 87

found to be due to the contractor. The balance of 3 ½ % or 7 ½ % that may be retained in

respect of each bill even after the completion of the work constitutes payment in arrears
and the earnest money deposit and also 2 ½ % of the total value of the work done is the
balance due on the final settlement of the amount found due to him. So the scope of
Clause 69 is to retain these sums even though the work was done completely. This is
exactly what was held in Hyd. Municipal Corporation’s case (supra) when a similar
clause was relied on to deny the claim of interest. The clause relied on by the Supreme
Court judgment is identical. It read thus

“The contractor shall not be entitled to interest, upon any payment in

arrears or upon any balance which may on final settlement of his accounts be
found due to him”.

Considering the scope and effect of this clause, it was observed:

“In our view the reliance on this clause is of no avail to the appellant for
the simple reason that this clause will be applicable provided the work was
completed according to the specifications and the time schedule fixed in the
original contract”.

Thus it is clear that notwithstanding the completion of the work as per the
specifications, the terms of the contract contemplates retention of the sum without paying
them immediately. In view of the liability of the contracting party to pay the amount
immediately on completion of the work, this clause contemplates retention of the money
even though the work is completed and it specifically negatives the claim for interest on
any such arrears due or on any amount deposited with the Department as earnest money
deposit or sum equal to 2 ½ % of the total value of the work done till the expiry of the
period of six months. Similarly in State of Rajasthan vs. Raghubir Singh, (AIR 1979, SC
852), the clause relied on to negative the claim of interest reads thus

“Neither the earnest money deposit nor the withheld amount shall bear any
interest”.

It was observed that:

“This sentence far from supporting the case of the appellant appears to
support the case of the plaintiff. The reference to “the withheld amounts” is to the
amounts representing five percent of the running bills. The provision that the
contractor is not entitled to interest on these withheld amounts appears to imply
that interest is claimable on other amounts due to the contractor”.

21. Thus it is clear that this Clause 69 is intended to really prevent any claim for
interest during the running period when final bills is not settled and also in respect of
earnest money deposit on the sum equal to 2 ½ % of the total value of the work done till
the expiry of the period of six months. This six months’ period is called ‘observation
period’ ; so that the Department can see whether the work was done satisfactorily or not.
Clause 69 cannot be construed as a total prohibition, but it operates a limited period of six
months from the date of the completion of the work and hence I negative this contention
that Clause 69 is a bar to claim interest.
88 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

22. It is fairly well settled that the claim for interest can either be under the
agreement, or under the usage of trade having force of law, or under the provisions of
substantive law or under the provisions of the Interest Act, 1839 or when the Court
exercises equitable jurisdiction as envisaged in the proviso to Sec. 1 of the said Act. Vide
Vithaldass vs. Rup Chand, (AIR 1967, SC 188). So far as the requirement of Interest Act
is concerned, the Supreme Court in Thawardas vs. Union of India, (AIR 1955, SC 468)
laid down five conditions :

1. the interest is not payable under any other law,

2. there must be a debt or a sum certain,

3. it must be payable at a certain time or otherwise,

4. these debts or sums must be payable by virtue of some written

instrument,

5. there must have been 34emand in writing stating that interest will be
demanded from the date of the demand.

23. The learned counsel for the defendant on the strength of this dicta urged that
the contract in question is such that no definite sum is due till it is settled by the parties or
by the Court and the claim of interest can only be made after the decree is passed.
Though the Interest Act 22 of 1839 is repealed by Act 14 of 1978, we are concerned with
the previous Act as substantive rights cannot be affected by the repeal of the Act as Sec. 6
of the General Clauses Act is made applicable. The learned counsel relied on a judgment
of the Division Bench of the Madras High Court in Sri Rajah Ravu Venkta
Kumaramahipati Surya Rao Bahadur Garu vs. Ballapragada Pallamraju, (XL MU 18 ;
1921, Mad. 76). There the claim for interest by a contractor who undertook a building
contract was negatived on the ground that no certain sum is due payable within the time
as contemplated under Section 1 of the Act apart from the infirmity in that case of want
of notice. It is necessary to refer the clause in that case.

“The contract provides that, “all work done by the contractor shall be paid
for by the Rajah according to the rates herein specified within a reasonable time
after it has been inspected and finally approved and passed”.

In that view it was held that the said provision is not one for payment of sum
certain or for the payment of such sum on certain date. I cannot give effect to the
submission of the learned counsel on the strength of this case. We have already noticed
Clauses 68 and 69 of the Andhra Pradesh Detailed Standard Specifications. There is a
clear obligation on the part of the authority to pass the bill and also make payment and
finally pay entire amount within six months after the completion of the work. “A sum
certain” within the meaning of Section 1 does not mean the sum must be calculated sum.
It is enough it is capable of being calculated. Let us look to Section 1 of the Interest Act.

“Power of the Court to allow interest :—It is, therefore hereby enacted
that, upon all debts or sums certain payable at a certain time or otherwise, the
Court before which such debts or sums may be recovered may,
 Particulars of Payment 89

if it shall think fit, allow interest to the creditor at a rate not exceeding the current
rate of interest from the time when such debts or sums certain were payable, if
such debts or sums be payable otherwise, than from the time when demand of
payment shall have been made in writing, so as to such demand shall give notice
to the debtor that interest will be claimed from the date of such demand until the
terms of payment; provided that interest shall be payable in all cases in which it is
now payable by law”.

24. It is true this provision envisages as held by the Supreme Court that sum must
be a certain sum and it is payable within a certain time and a demand thereof is made. It
is no doubt made payable under the contract which is an instrument within the meaning
of the Act. The word ‘certain sum’ occurring in the Act does not mean sum actually
calculated or ascertained sum. A sum (which) is capable of being ascertained is sufficient
to attract the section. Once the bill is prepared as per the measurements it is capable of
being ascertained. It is not a case where it depends upon the consent of the parties as
envisaged in 1921, Madras, 76 as a matter of objective verification ascertainable and
capable of being ascertained. Regarding time factor also it is payable on certain times as
the right of retaining the amount beyond six months after the completion of the work is
not envisaged on the terms of the contract and the liability to pay entire sum arises on the
expiry of six months’ period after completion of contract, and hence I am satisfied that all
the requirements of ‘sum certain’ and ‘payable before certain time’ and ‘making the
demand’ were satisfied. The plaintiff issued a notice under Ex. A-3 making the demand
and no reply was given to him. The fact that lesser amount was found due is not a ground
for rejecting the claim for interest. Once a sum is certain and payable at a particular time
and demand is made for that, the requirement of Section 1 of the Interest Act are satisfied
irrespective of the fact that Court came to a different conclusion about the actual amounts
payable. Hence I am clearly of the opinion that the interest is payable from 22-4-1982 till
the date o the suit. Regarding the rate once I hold Section 1 is attracted it is the current
rate of interest. The current rate of interest was considered by Courts as a fair and
reasonable rate in the absence of special circumstances. Hence I am of the opinion that
12% interest from the date of demand till the suit is just and proper. The suit is filed on 2-
2-1984 and pending to suit till the date of decree and from the date of decree till the date
of payment the plaintiff is entitled to only 6% interest as that period is governed by
Section 34, C.P.C.

25. In the result, the decree of the trial Court is modified directing that from a sum
of Rs. 51,932-48 Ps. a sum of Rs. 8, 925-00 should be deducted. The plaintiff is entitled
to interest at 12% p.a. from 22-4-1982 till 2-2-1984 on Rs. 43,007-48Ps. and on the same
amount he is entitled to interest at 6% per annum from the date of suit till the date of
decree and from the date of decree till the date of realization.

26. The appeal is allowed in part as indicated above with proportionate costs. The
cross-objections are not substantiated. Hence they are accordingly dismissed.
_____
 90 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

Case law
Interest pendente lite

In Executive Engineer (Irrigation) vs. Abhaduta Jena , (1988) 1 SCC 418 it was
held that the arbitrator to whom the reference is made without the intervention of the
Court, does not have jurisdiction to award interest pendente lite.

A Constitution Bench in Secretary, Irrigation Dept., Govt. of Orissa vs. G. C.

Roy, (1992) 1 SCC 508, AIR 1992 SC 732 overruling Abhaduta Jena case held:

“The arbitrator acted with jurisdiction in awarding pendente lite interest to the
contractor-respondent when the agreement was silent as to award of interest.

Where the agreement between the parties does riot prohibit grant of interest and
where a party claims interest and that dispute (along, with the claim for principal amount
or independently) is referred to the arbitrator, he shall have the power to award interest
pendente lite. This is for the reason that in such a case it must be presumed that interest
was an implied term of the agreement between the parties and therefore when the parties
refer all their disputes or refer the dispute as to interest as such to the arbitrator, he shall
have the power to award interest. This does not mean that in every case the arbitrator
should necessarily award interest pendente lite. It is a matter within his discretion to be
exercised in the light of all the facts and circumstances of the case, keeping the ends of
justice in view.

The following principles emerge:

(1) A person deprived of the use of money to which he is legitimately entitled has
a right to be compensated for the deprivation, call it, by any name. It may be called
interest, compensation or damages. This basic consideration is as valid for the period the
dispute is pending before the arbitrator as it is for the period prior to the arbitrator
entering upon the reference. This is the principle of S. 34, Civil Procedure Code and there
is no reason or principle to hold otherwise in the case of arbitrator.

(ii) An arbitrator is an alternative forum for resolution of disputes arising between

the parties. If so, he must have the power to decide all the disputes or differences arising
between the parties. If the arbitrator has no power to award interest pendente lite, the
party claiming it would have to approach the Court for that purpose, even though he may
have obtained satisfaction in respect of other claims from the arbitrator. This would lead
to multiplicity of proceedings.

(iii) An arbitrator is the creature of an agreement. It, is open to the parties to

confer upon him such powers and prescribe such procedure for him to follow, as they
think, fit, so long as they are not opposed to law. (The proviso to S. 41 and S. 3 of
Arbitration Act illustrate this point). All the same, the agreement must be in conformity
with law. The arbitrator must also act and make his award in accordance with the general
law of the land and the agreement.
 Particulars of Payment 91

(iv) Over the years, the English and Indian Courts have acted on the
assumption that where the agreement does not prohibit and a party to the
reference makes a claim for interest, the arbitrator must have the power to award
interest pendente lite.

(v) Interest pendente lite is not a matter of substantive law, like interest for
the period anterior to reference (pre-reference period). For, doing complete justice
between the parties, such power has always been inferred.

The decision in Abhaduta Jena case does not lay down good law on this
aspect. However, the present decision shall only be prospective in operation,
which means that this decision shall not entitle any party, nor shall it empower
any Court to reopen proceedings which have already become final. In other
words, the law declared herein shall apply only to pending proceedings.”

See also M. Ganga Reddy vs. State of A.P., 1996 (3) ALT 53 (DB)

_____

P.S. 70. Acceptance of final measurements :—The contractor agrees that before
payment of the final bill shall be made on the contract, he will sign and deliver to the
Executive Engineer either in the measurement book or otherwise demanded, a valid
release and discharge from any and all claims and demands whatsoever for all matters
arising out of, are connected with the contract; provided that nothing in this clause shall
discharge or release the contractor from his liabilities under the contract. He shall also
produce a certificate from the income tax authorities that all income tax payable by him
up-to-date has been duly paid in the case of contracts the value of which is over Rs.
10,000. It is further expressly agreed that Executive Engineer in supplying the final
measurement certificate, need not be found by the preceding measurements and
payments. The final measurements, if any, of the Executive Engineer shall be final,
conclusive and binding on the contractor.

P.S. 71. Recovery of money from contractor in certain cases :—In every case
which provision is made for recovery of money from the contractor, Government shall be
entitled to retain or deduct the amount thereof from any moneys that may be due or may
be due or may become due to the contractor under these presents and/or under any other
extract or contracts or any other account whatsoever.

_____

JUDGMENT

CLAIM BY CONTRACTOR FOR CERTAIN AMOUNT

1988 (1) ALT 736

The Hon ‘ble Mr. Justice M.N. Rao

C. Raghava Reddy Petitioner

vs.

Superintending Engineer, Irrigation

Circle No. 3, Nizamabad & another. Respondent
92 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

Order

1. The petitioner is a recognized Class I contractor. His tender for construction of

Masonry Blocks of spill way at left flank from Blocks 7 to 14 of Singoor Project was
accepted by the Superintending Engineer, ID., Irrigation Circle-3, Nizamabad, the first
respondent herein and an agreement was entered into on 5-9-1983 for execution of the
said work costing about Rs. 1,21,59,459/-. The agreement contemplated completion of
the work within eight months from the date of handing over of the site. The site was
handed over on 14.11-1983 and the work was to be completed by 23-5-1985. It so
happened that due to various reasons, the work could not be completed some of the main
reasons, according to the petitioner, are delay on the part of the Geologist to approve the
foundations, short supply of cement by the Department, deposit of heavy silt and slush
beyond the contemplation of the parties and out-break of cholera in the area affecting the
supply of labour, etc. The petitioner applied for extension of time for 4 months from 23-
5-1985. The Department granted extension of time only upto 30-6-1985 and subsequently
went on extending the contract period. The petitioner requested the Department to grant
enhanced rates in view of the steep escalation in the cost of material and labour after the
expiry of the original contract period. The Department did not agree. The petitioner,
therefore, stopped work from 4-1-1986.

2. The agreement provides for arbitration of disputes that arise under the contract.
The petitioner, therefore, filed O.S.No. 3 of 1986 in the Court of the Subordinate Judge,
Medak under Section 20 of the Arbitration Act for appointment of sole arbitrator. The
Executive Engineer, Singoor Project Division-2, the second respondent herein, addressed
all the Executive Engineers of Irrigation Department asking them to send him (Executive
Engineer) all the amounts payable to the petitioner under different bills pertaining to
different agreements. The petitioner, therefore, filed I.A.No. 106 of 1986 in O.S.No. 3 of
1986 seeking injunction restraining the respondents from stopping payments of bills or
any other amounts payable to him in respect of other contracts carried out by him. He
contended that he was entitled to get an amount of Rs. 33 lakhs from the Department and
the alleged claim of the Department in respect of the work in question for Rs. 12,58,300/-
was totally incorrect. The Civil Court, after hearing both sides, granted status quo. That
order was questioned by the petitioner in C.M.A. No. 1137 of 1986 in this Court. The
C.M.A. was dismissed by this Court taking the view that under Section 41(b) read with
Second Schedule of the Arbitration Act, an injunction restraining the Government from
withholding payments to the petitioner in respect of other contracts is not permissible
since the injunction cannot be said to be for the purpose of and in relation to the
proceedings before the Court.

3. The petitioner is seeking a, writ of Mandamus declaring that the action of the
respondents in seeking to withhold the amounts payable to him for the works executed
under agreements other than the agreement No. 10/83 is illegal and unconstitutional.

4. Sri V.R. Reddy, learned counsel for the petitioner, relying upon a decision in
M/s. Lakshmichand & Baichand vs. State of A.P., (AIR 1980, SC 20), contends that
unless the amount due from him is determined the respondents cannot take action to
withhold payments to him in respect of the other contracts carried
 Particulars of Payment 93

out. by him. On the other hand, the learned Government Pleader relying upon Cl. 71—of
the Andhra Pradesh Standard Specifications which reads

“71. Recovery of money from contractor in certain cases :—In every case
in which provision is made for recovery of money from the contractor,
Government shall be entitled to retain or deduct the amount thereof from any
moneys that may be due or may become due to the contractor under these presents
and/or under any other extract or contracts or any other account whatsoever”.

which formed part of the contract, contends that the Government is entitled to retain or
deduct the amounts from any moneys that may be due or may become due to the
contractor on any other account.

5. The question that fell for consideration before the Supreme Court
Lakshmichand & Baichand vs. State of A.P., (1 supra) is similar to the one that has now
arisen in this case. Dealing with the contentions based on C. 71, the Supreme Court
observed:

“In regard to the claim to adjustment on the second count the position is
more controversial. The claim is founded in the doctrine of equitable set off but
we do not find evidence before us to bring the case within the operation of the
doctrine. It is not a case where cross demands rise out of the same transaction or
the demands are so connected in their nature and circumstances that they can be
looked upon as part of one transaction. Nor can assistance be derived from Clause
71. The benefit of that provision can be claimed only if the amount sought to be
retained is an ascertained, sum, an amount which can be readily adjusted against
the amount payable under the other contract. Here, the amount sought to be
adjusted has yet to be determined as a liability against the contractor. It has been
disputed by the appellant. Accordingly Clause 71 cannot be invoked”.

The reasoning fully applies to the case on hand. Merely because the Government have
specified that a sum of Rs. 12,58,300/- was due from the petitioner, it would not become
a sum ascertained. In order to become an ascertained sum, there must be determination.
There was no determination in the present case. The petitioner wants the matter to be
decided by the arbitrator, his claim is that he is entitled for Rs. 33 lakhs from the
Government in respect of the contract in question and he is disputing that claim of the
Government that in respect of the very same contract, a sum of Rs. 12,58,300/. was due
from him. In the circumstances, invocation of Clause 71 is illegal.

6. For the foregoing reasons, the writ petition is allowed. A Mandamus will issue
directing the second respondent not to withhold the amounts payable to the petitioner for
the works executed under the agreements other than the agreement No. 10/83. There shall
be no order as to costs. Advocate’s fee Rs. 250/-.

_____

P.S. 72. Contractor dying, becoming insolvent, insane, or imprisoned :—In

the event of the death or insanity or insolvency or imprisonment of the contractor or
where the contractor being a partnership or firm becomes dissolved
94 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

or being corporation goes into liquidation, voluntary or otherwise, the contract may, at
the option of the Executive Engineer, be terminated by notice in writing posted at the site
of the works and advertised in one issue of the local District Gazette, and all accepted and
acceptance works shall forthwith be measured up and paid for at the rates provided in the
contract schedule where such apply, or otherwise, by the most recent schedule of rates of
the division approved by competent authority, to the person or persons entitled to receive
and give a discharge for the payment.

J. — Arbitration and Claims of Contractors on Arbitration Cases

P.S. 73. Arbitration :—In case of any dispute or difference between the parties to
the contract either during the progress or after the completion of the works or after the
determination, abandonment, or breach of the contract, as to the interpretation of the
contract, or as to any matter or thing arising there under except as to the matters left to
the sole discretion of the Executive Engineer under clauses 20, 22, 27 (C), 29, 36, 37 and
40 of the Preliminary Specifications or as to the withholding by the Executive Engineer
or payment of any bill to which the contractor may claim to be entitled, then either party
shall forthwith give to the other notice of such dispute or difference, and such dispute or
difference shall be and is hereby referred to the arbitration of the Superintending
Engineer of the nominated circle mentioned in the “Articles of Agreement” (hereinafter
called the “Arbitrator”) and the award or such Arbitrator shall be final and binding of the
parties unless contested by either party in a Court of law. Provided however that in cases
where the Executive Engineer has entered into the contract on behalf of the Governor, the
dispute or difference shall, in the first instant, be referred by or through the Executive
Engineer to the Superintending Engineers of the Circle, in which the work lies and his
decision thereon obtained before referring such dispute or difference to arbitration under
this clause. Progress of the work shall not be suspended or delayed on account of the
reference of any dispute or difference to the Superintending Engineer of the circle in
which the work lies or to arbitration under this clause. The decision of the Executive
Engineer or the Superintending Engineer of the Circle in which the work lies, as the case
may be on such dispute or difference shall be conclusive until reversed by the
Superintending Engineer or the arbitrator. Either party may within a period, which shall
be fixed by the arbitrator, file before the arbitrator a statement of the case and also all ‘the
documents relating to or having a bearing on the case. The arbitrator shall set that the
award is passed, if reasonably possible, within a period of four months from the date of
his entering upon the reference, but if any extension of that period is considered by him
to be necessary, either suo moto or on the application of either party to the reference, the
parties hereby agree and consent to such extension as the arbitrator may from time to
time consider reasonably necessary, and any such extension shall forthwith be
communicated by him in writing to each of the parties hereto. The arbitrator shall not be
bound to observe the ordinary rules of procedure applicable to trials before Judicial
tribunals not to hear to receive formal evidence but may pass on award on the documents
or statements of the case filed by both the parties under or on personal inspection. The
arbitrator shall have power to view the subject matter of the dispute with or without the
parties or their agents. The arbitrator shall also have power to open up, review and revise
any Certificate, opinion, decision, requisition or notice, save in regard to the matters
expressly excepted and to determine all
 Arbitration and Claims of Contractors on Arbitration Cases 95

matters in dispute which shall be submitted to him, and of which notice shall have been
given as aforesaid, in the same manner as if no such certificate, opinion, decision,
requisition or notice had been given upon every any such reference the costs of any
incidental to the reference and award respectively shall be in the discretion of the
arbitrator, subject to the condition that the amount of such cost to be divided to either
party shall not in respect of, i.e., monitory claim exceed the percentage set out below of
any such award irrespective of the actual fees, Costs and expenses incurred by either
party; provided that where a monitory claim is disallowed in full, the said percentage
shall be calculated on the amount of the claim. The arbitrator may determine the amount
of the costs to be awarded or direct the same to be taxed as between solicitor and client or
a party and shall direct by whom and to whom and in what manner the same shall be
borne and paid.

The percentage above referred to in this clause is 5 per cent on any such monitory
award which does not exceeds Rs. 10,000, 3 per cent on the next Rs.40,000 or any part
thereof, 2 per cent on the next Rs.50,000 or any part thereof and I per cent on any excess
over Rs. 1,00,000

Provided that Government shall not be liable to any claim in respect of any such
dispute or difference until liabilities, and the amount referred to is decided by the
arbitrator ;

Provided that payment to the contractor based on the arbitration award shall be
made only after acceptance of the award by the Chief Engineer if the value of the award
is less than Rs. 20,000/- be and the Government if the value is Rs. 20,000 above.

Note 1 :—Arbitration awards whose value is below Rs. 20,000:

The Chief Engineer is authorized to accept arbitration awards below Rs. 20,000 in
value. The Chief Engineer shall make a review of the arbitration award within 15 days of
service of the notice of the making of the awards in consultation with the local counsel
and if in his opinion the award has to be contested, he shall file an application in the
Court Within 30 days of service of the notice of making of the award for the filing of the
award and take steps to contest the award.

If, for any reason, the Chief Engineer considers it in advisable to act according to
the advice of the local counsel, he shall refer the matter to the Government for
examination within 15 days of the service of the notice of making of the award.

Arbitration Awards whose value is Rs 20,000 or above:

The Chief Engineer shall make a review of the arbitration awards whose value is
Rs. 20,000 and above and submit a report to the Government within 10 days of service of
the notice of the making of the award. In such case a summary of the case, a copy of the
agreement for the work, the facts pressed before the arbitrator by the parties along with
the recommendations of the Chief Engineer, should be furnished to the Government for
all appreciation of the case. The Government will then take a decision in consultation
with the law department whether the award should be accepted or not and communicate
the same within 25 days of service of the notice of making of the award so as to enable
the Chief Engineer either to take action on the basis of the award or to file an application
96 THE A.P. STANDAIW SPECIFICATIONS

in the Court within 30 days of service of the notice of the making of the award for filing
of the award and for contesting it.

Note 2 :—Applications of contractors seeking arbitration should bear a Court fee

stamp as per clause 10(K) of Schedule (II) to the Andhra Pradesh Court Fees and Suits
Valuation Act, 1956 but no stamp duty need be levied.

The awards passed by arbitrators shall be made on stamped paper the value of
which should according to the value of claim to which the award relates as per Article 12
of Schedule I-A to the Indian Stamp Act.

If the aggrieved party goes to a Court of law challenging the award, he should pay
the necessary Court fee.

[Note 3 :—Except as otherwise provided in the contract any disputes and

differences arising out of or relating to the Contract shall be referred to adjudication as
follows :

I. (i) Settlement of all Claims upto Rs. 50,000/- in value by way of Arbitration to
be referred as follows :

(a) Claims upto Rs. 10,000/- Superintending Engineer of

in value, another Circle in the Dept.

(b) Claims above Rs. 10,000/- Another Chief Engineer of

and upto Rs. 50,000/- in same Department.
value

The arbitration proceedings will be conducted in accordance with the provisions

of the Arbitration Act, 1940 as amended from time to time. The Arbitrator shall
invariably give reasons in the award.

II. Settlement of all Claims above Rs. 50,000/- in value:

All Claims above Rs. 50,000/- in value shall be decided by the Civil Court of
competent jurisdiction by way of a regular suit and not by arbitration.

A reference for adjudication under this Clause shall be made by either party to the
Contract within six months from the date of intimating the Contractor of the preparation
of final bill or his having accepted payment.

The relevant Clauses of Andhra Pradesh Detailed Standard Specifications stand

modified to the extent provided in this Clause].
[Added by G.O.Ms.No. 158, Tr. & B. (B. III), Dt. 13-7-1992]

_____

JUDGMENT

SPECIFIC ELIMINATION OF ARBITRATION CLAUSE

CLAUSE 73 WOULD BE INOPERATIVE

AIR 1989, Kerala 241

V. Siva Ramannair and N. Fathima Beevi, JJ.

 Arbitration and Claims of Contractors on Arbitration Cases 97

M/s. Leo Construction Contractors Appellant

vs.

Government of Kerala Respondent

Sivaraman Nair, J. :—The appellant is the Managing Partner of a registered firm

of contractors. He had filed O.S.No. 411 of 1981 under Sec. 20 of the Arbitration Act.
That suit was dismissed on the finding that the contract which the appellant had entered
into with the respondents did not provide for reference to the arbitrator. Hence this
appeal.

2. The appellant had submitted a tender for construction of a building for the
Government Secondary School, Quilandy, consequent on the acceptance of his tender, he
executed an agreement on 18-11-1978 with the second respondent. According to the
appellant, Cl. 14 of the Form of Tender and Cls. 24, 24(a) and 44 of Form No. 83 were
expressly made part of the agreement. These clauses were to the effect, that in case of any
dispute or difference that may arise in the working of the contract, the same should be
referred to arbitration before the Government Arbitrator, at the instance of either party.
Several disputes arose between the parties regarding execution of the work. It was
because his request for referring the dispute to the Arbitrator was not allowed that he
filed O.S.No. 411 of 1981.

3. In their written statement, the respondents submitted that condition No.

14 of the Form of Tender and Cls. 24 and 24(a) of Form No. 83 had been specifically
eliminated from the contract and the dispute could not be referred for Arbitration.
Reference was also made to Ext. B2 Government Order, Dt. 8-5-197 8 to the effect that
arbitration would be restricted only to works the estimated P.A.C. of which was Rs. 2
laths and below. They also contended that Art. 3 of the Agreement was deleted and the
appellant had endorsed such deletion. Consequence of such deletion, read in conjunction
with Ext. B2 Government Order, and the removal of Cls. 24 and 24(a) of Form No.83
was said to be to shut out Arbitration in the instant case, since, admittedly, the estimated
amount of contract exceeded Rs. 2 lakhs by over Rs. 2,40,000/-.

4. The trial Court considered the question whether the disputes were liable to be
referred for Arbitration under the terms of the contract. The trial Court found that Cl. 44
has the only effect of incorporating general conditions forming part of the contract
documents and that general Cl. 73 in Madras Detailed Standard Specifications which
necessarily formed part of the notice inviting tender and therefore of the agreement could
not survive the deletion of Cls. 3,24 and 24(a), which related specifically to arbitration.
Those clauses were scored off. The trial Court also found that in the light of the specific
deletion of Cls. 24 and 24(a), it was not reasonable to hold that Cl. 14 of the Tender Form
was incorporated in the agreement by virtue of the provisions of Cl. in Form No. 83. The
Court held further that the appellant having signed Form No. 83, from which Cl. 24 &
24(a) relating to Arbitration were deleted, could not be heard to seek arbitration in spite
of such deletion. Appellant submits, that Cl. 44 of Form No. 83 and Cl. 14 of the tender
notice do survive and such survival in the contract willingly entered into between the
parties do provide for a reference of dispute arising out of the contract to the Government
Arbitrator.
98 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

5. The very question as to whether the provision for arbitration as contained in the
Madras Detailed Standard Specifications, which are corporated as terms of the contract,
would enable a contractor to claim reference of disputes for arbitration notwithstanding
the deletion of clauses similar to Cls. 3, 24 and 24(a) had come up for consideration
before this Court in a number of decisions. State of Kerala vs. Joseph, 1983, Ker. LT 583,
a Division Bench of this Court held, that incorporation of the terms of M.D.S.S. had the
effect of providing for arbitration of disputes notwithstanding the specific deletion of
arbitration clauses in the agreement. A different view was taken in M.F.A. No. 158 of
1984. In yet another decision, State of Kerala vs. Siby Varghese, 1987 (1), Ker. LT 860,
another Division Bench adopted a slightly different view. In that decision, it was held in
unmistakable terms that the M.D.S.S. served an entirely different area and would not
supply or supplement provisions dealing with arbitration. A Full Bench of this Court
considered the divergetice of views expressed in the above decisions in the judgment in
M.F.A. Nos. 586 and 789 of 1987, 1988 (2), Ker. LT 768 ; (AIR 1989, Ker. 61) (FB), and
held that C1.73 of the M.D.S.S., which was to be read as part of the contract, was not
meant to render the deletion of Cls. 3, 24 and 24(a) of the contract ineffective. The Full
Bench, therefore, held that the effect of the deletion of those clauses was that not only the
arbitration clause, but the entire arbitration process itself was consciously annihilated.
The Full Bench also referred to G.O.Ms.No. 53/ 78/PW&E, Dt. 8-5-1978 (Ext. B2) and
held, that the order unmistakably indicated the intention of the Government to do away
with the provision for arbitration in contracts, the P.A.C. of which was more than Rs. 2
lakhs. The Full Bench concluded, that a situation in which Cls. 3 and 24 were deliberately
and consciously struck down, the entire arbitration provisions collapsed. We are bound
by the decision and have necessarily to dismiss this appeal.

6. We have to come to the said conclusion for yet another reason also. Art. 299 of
the Constitution of India deals with contracts made in the exercise of the executive power
of the Union or of a State. It provides for the manner in which the contract shall be
expressed to be made and executed on behalf of the President or the Governor. A contract
which does not comply with Art. 299 of the Constitution is not enforceable against the
executive Government. Art. 299 of the Constitution, dealing with the executive power of
the Union or a State in respect of contracts is in the following terms

“299. Contracts :—( 1) All contracts made in the exercise of the executive
power of the Union or of a State shall be expressed to be made by the President,
or by the Governor of the State, as the case may be, and all such contracts and all
assurances of property made in the exercise of that power shall be executed on
behalf of the President or the Governor by such persons and in such manner as he
may direct or authorize”.

Ext. B2 is an order of the executive Government and is expressed in the name of

the Governor as required by Art. 166 of the Constitution of India. That clearly and
unmistakably indicated that no contract with the Executive Government, comprehended
by Art. 299 of the Constitution of India, shall contain a provision for arbitration if the
estimated PAC was more than Rs. 2 lakhs. Even assuming that Cl.73 of the M.D.S.S.
should be read as part of the Form of contract, the
 Arbitration and Claims of Contractors on Arbitration Cases 99

existence of that condition which is contrary to the expressed intention of the executive
Government will be inoperative, because it will be contrary to the direction which the
Governor is competent to issue under Art.299 of the Constitution of India. A provision of
a contract which is contrary to the stipulations contained in directions issued by the
Governor under the above Article cannot be enforced against the executive Government.

7. Counsel for the appellant submitted that though the appellant had countersigned
the deletion of Cl. 3, he had not countersigned deletion of Cls. 24 and (a) of the
agreement. He submitted further, that according to Cl. 44 of the agreement, Cl. 14 of
Form No. 84 which provides for arbitration should be read into the contract. He,
therefore, submits that the finding of the trial Court is unsustainable. We have perused the
agreement, the tender notice and Cl. 14 of Form No. 84 dealing with specifications. What
we find is that Form No. 84 is not part of the tender notice and cannot therefore be read
into the contract by virtue of the provisions contained in Cl. 44 of the agreement.

8. In addition to the reasons stated by the Full Bench in the decision referred to
above, we hold that a provision for arbitration would not survive the promulgation of Ext.
B2 Order by the Governor in relation to the manner in which contracts shall be executed
on behalf of the executive Government. A term in a contract contrary to the directions
issued by the Governor is incapable of enforcement against the executive Government.

The appeal is, therefore, devoid of merits and is hereby dismissed. The parties
will suffer their respective costs.

_____

Claims of Contractors on Arbitration Cases

Claims of contractor on Arbitration cases — revised procedure — Orders
— Issued.

[G.O.Ms.No. 430, irrigation (irr. V) Dept., Dt. 24-10-1983]

Ref :—G.O.Ms.No. 876, PW., Dt. 31-7-1975.

Order :—In the G.O. read above, orders were issued introducing the system of
arbitration by a Panel of Arbitrators as detailed below:

Value of amount Panel of Arbitrations

1. Claims upto Rs.20,000/- in value. Superintending Engineer of another
Circle.
2. Claims of Rs.20,000/- above upto 1. Superintending Engineer of
Rs.1.00 lakh. another Circle.

2. Directors of Accounts/Dy.Chief
Accounts Officer.

3. Chief Engineer.
100 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

3. Claims of Rs.1.00 lakh above. 1. Chief Engineer.

2. Representative of the Finance and

Planning Dept. to be nominated and

3. Director of Accounts or Dy.Chief

Accounts Officer.

2. The question of the revising the above procedure has been receiving the
attention of Govt. for some time past. The Govt. after careful consideration of various
aspects of issues involved direct the procedure be revised as follows:

Value of amount Panel of Arbitrations

1. Claims upto Rs.10,000/- Superintending Engineer of another Circle

in the same Department.

2. Claims above 10,000/- and upto (a) Another Chief Engineer of the
Rs.50,000/- same Department.

(b) Where there is only one Chief

Engineer, in the Dept., the Chief
Engineer will submit proposals to
Govt. in the Administrative Dept.,
for nomination of another Chief
Engineers as Arbitrator by Govt.
3. x x x xxx

3. All claims above Rs. 50,000/- shall be decided by a Civil Court of competent
jurisdiction by way of a regular suit.]
(Amended by G.O.Ms.No. 160, Irrigation & CAD (PW) Dept., Dt. 1-6-1987)

4. Claim means all claims in that contract.

5. The orders referred to in paras 2 and 3 above shall be applicable to all the
agreements entered into by Government from the date of issue of this order and will be
applicable to all the Engineering Department, in the State Govt. referred in para (6)
Supra.

6. The Engineer-in-Chief is requested to submit necessary suitable draft

amendments to the codal provisions wherever necessary including amendment to the
A.P.D.S.S. urgently.

7. Government also direct that pending amendments to the codal provisions and
A.P.D.S.S. referred to in para (5) above, the Chief Engineers/Superintending Engineers
of Irrigation Department, and the Chief Engineers of other Departments, i.e., Panchayat
Raj, Roads and Buildings and Public Health Depts., Chief Engineer (Electrical) are
hereby directed to take necessary action in regard to incorporation of the revised
procedure referred to in paras 2 and 3 above in all the future agreements to be entered
into with the contractors with immediate effect.
 Arbitration and Claims of Contractors on Arbitration Cases 101

Claims of contractor on Arbitration cases — revised procedure — Orders—

Issued.

[G. O.Ms.No. 20. Irrigation & CAD (PW) Dept, Dt. 31-1-1989]

Order :—x x x x x

Except as otherwise provided in the contract, all disputes and differences arising
out of or relating to the contract shall be referred to adjudication as follows :—

(1) (i) Settlement of all claims upto Rs. 50,000/- in value and below by way of
arbitration to be referred as follows :—

(a) Claims upto Rs. 10,000/- Superintending Engineer of another

Circle, in the same Department.

(b) Claims above, 10,000/- and Another Chief Engineer of the same
upto Rs. 50,000/-. Department.

The arbitration proceedings will be conducted in accordance with the provisions

of the Arbitration Act, is to be prepared from time to time. The Arbitrator shall invariably
give reasons in the award.

(ii) Settlement of all claims above Rs. 50,000/- in value :—All claims above Rs.
50,000/- in value shall be decided by a Civil Court of competent jurisdiction by way of a
regular suit and not by arbitration.
_____

Claims of Contractors on Arbitration cases — Revised procedure — Orders —

Issued — Nomination of Chief Engineers in Irrigation and Projects in respect of
claims above Rs. 10,000/- upto Rs. 50,000/- orders — Issued.

[G. O.Ms.No. 456, irrigation (V) Department, Dt. 10-11-1983]

Ref :—G.O.Ms.No. 430, Irrigation, dated 24-10-1983.

Order :—In the G.O. read above, orders have been issued prescribing the revised
procedure on claims of contractors on Arbitration cases.

2. In of the orders issued in the GO. read above, Govt. direct that

I. In respect of claims upto Rs. 10,000/- the Engineer-in-Chief shall

nominate another Superintending Engineer of a circle as Arbitrator.

II. In respect of claims above Rs. 10,000/- upto Rs. 50,000/- the following
Chief Engineers are nominated as Arbitrators as indicated in columns (2) below:

Name of the Unit Arbitrator

(1) (2)
1. Chief Engineer, Major Irrigation Chief Engineer, Sriramsagar Project.

2. Chief Engineer, Medium and Chief Engineer, Srisailam Project.

Minor Irrigation.
102 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

3. Chief Engineer, Nagarjunasagar Chief Engineer, Medium & Minor

Project (Dam, Right & Left Irrigation.
Canals).
4. Chief Engineer, Srisailam Chief Engineer, Major Irrigation.
Project.

5. Chief Engineer, Sriramsagar Chief Engineer, Nagarjunasagar Project.

project.

6. Telugu Ganga Project Engineer-in-Chief.

(Including Somasila Project)

_____

ARBITRATION AWARDS — STAMP DUTY

Arbitration awards bearing Cost of stamped papers — Clarification.

[Memo.No. 176, - Codn/75-1, P. W.D., Dt. 5-3-1975]

An extract of item 12 in Schedule 1-A to the Indian Stamp Act is printed below:

Description of instrument Proper Stamp Duty

(1) (2)
12. Award

(a) Where the amount does not 3%

exceed Rs.1,000/-

(b) Where the amount exceeds 50 Rs.

Rs.1,000/- but does not
exceed Rs.5,000/-
and for every additional 2 Rs. subject to a maximum of Rs.200/-
Rs.1,000/- or part thereof in
excess of Rs.5,000/-

_____
 STANDARD
SPECIFICATIONS
 THE ANDHRA PRADESH
STAN DARD SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 1

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR MATERIALS

SpeciJication Name of SpeciJícatìon Page
^sr.
No. No. No.
l. 101 General t07
2. t02 Common Burnt Clay Brick 108

J. 103 Broken brick 109

4. 104 Surki lll

5. 105 Fly Ash tt2
6. 106 Rough Stones for Dry Packed Revetments and Approns l t3
7. t07 Stone for Masonry tt4
8. 108 Coarse Aggregate for Concrete ll5
9. 109 Marble t17
10. 110 Sand ll8
11. lll Lime 123

12. t12 Portland Cement l3l

13. ll3 Lime Mortar t32
14. tt4 Surki Mortar 134
15. 115 Cement Mortar r35
t6. il6 Cement Lime Mortar 136
17. ll7 Sebara Putty (Lime Putty) 136

18. 118 Pan Tiles 137

19. 119 Burnt Clay FIat Terracing Tiles 137

20. t20 Clay Roofing Tiles, Mangalore Pattern 137

21. l2t Glazed Tiles t4t

)) t22 Bitumen felts for water proofing and damp proofing 142
23. 123 Cuddapah/Shahabad Slabs 143

24. t24 Galvanized Steel Sheets (Plain or Comrgated) 144

106 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

25. 125 Un-reinforced Comrgated Asbestos Cement Sheets 145

26. 126 Steel for Reinforcement 146
27. 127 Steel for Structural Work 147

28. t28 Asbestos Cement Flat Sheets 148

29. 129 Vy'ater t49

30. 130 Teak Wood 150

31. t3l Bamboos l5l

32. 132 Ballies 152
33. 133 Steel Sheet Piling Sections 153

34. t34 Bitumen Emulsions for Roads (Anionic Type) 155

3s. 135 Cutback Bitumen 157

36, 136 Paving Bitumen 159

37. 137 Coal Tar Pitch 160

38. 138 Moorum l6l
 SECTION 1

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR MATERIALS

Specification No. 101
General
101.1. Stacking of Materials :-Materials normally measured in stack are
rough stone of all kinds, broken stone and broken brick of all the grades, moorum,
sand, quarry rubbish, surki and lime; (Vide instructions in clause 22 of Standard
Preliminary Specifications where the method of measurement for the purpose of
mixing for certain materials is defined).
l0l . I .I . Stacks shall be formed to regular shape and uniform cross section.

101.1.2. Materials shall be stacked on even ground which permits correct

and ready measurements from extemal inspection of the stack. Stacking shall not
be done in flood zones or in water logged areas.
101,1.3. Rough stone which is to be measured in stacks shall be packed
so closely as to give minimum quantity of voids possible, without actual dressing
of stone to fit interstices.
101.1.4. In cases where improper stacking is done by the contractor, the
Executive Engineer shall have the right to either reject the stacks partly or
completed and take action as provided for vide Clause 27(c) of the Standard
Preliminary Specifications in the case of rejected materials or he may order
complete restacking of the materials to specification at the contractor's expense,
or he may make an appropriate deduction towards improper stacking with its
attendant excess quantity of voids as he may decide in each case.
101.1.5. Unless otherwise specified templates shall be provided to.the
sizes and dimensions of the stone as may be specified at the contractor's expense'
The contractor shall make necessary allowance while stacking to ensure that the
specified stack dimensions are manufactured at the time of measurement and check-
measurement.

101.1.6. For road works aggregates obtained from different sources or for
different purposes or of different sizes shall be stacked separately.
101.1.6.1. The road materials shall be stacked entirely clear of the carriage
way, shoulders and the side drains, and as far as possible well behind the line of
avenue trees. The stacking shall be done on one side (left side) only unless
unavoidable.

101.1.6.2. Different materials required for each 200 metres length of road
shall be stacked as per the estimated quantities. Stacking shall begin at the point
farthest from the quarry and progress towards the quarry along with road.

101.1.6.3. Stackihg of materials on tops of high embankments, deep narrow

cuttings and decks of bridges and culverts shall be avoided. rWhere unavoidable
ll0 THE A.P, STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

103.2.2. The aggregate shall be well graded and shall pass in any direction
through 40 mm, IS : Sieve for ordinary concrete and through 20 mm. IS : Sieve
for Madras Terrace Roofing Concrete or such other size as may be specified vide
Standard Specification for broken stone coarse aggregate for concrete regarding
gauge.
103.2.3. Aggregate shall be screened over 4.75 mm. IS : Sieve to remove
rubbish and dust.
103.3. Stacking :

103.3.1. Broken brick shall be collected in regular stacks on a hard surface

or platferm so as to prevent admixture of clay, dust, vegetable and other foreign
matter.
103.3.2. The stacks of material shall be nearer to the place of use.

103.3.3. The stacks shall be completely formed throughout with well

formed slopes and to the given dimensions.
103.3.4. Broken brick shall be handled the least number of times before
being used in concrete.
103.4. Method of test for determination of water abso4tion of aggregate :

103.4.1, Apparatus:-The apparatus shall consist of a balance of capacity

not less than kg. readable and accurate to 0.5 gramme.
103.4.2. Sample:-A sample of not less than 3,000 gm. of the aggregate
shall be tested.
103.4.3. Procedure for 24 hours cold water ímmersion lest :
103,4.3.1, The sample shall be screened on l0 mm. IS : Sieve and washed
to remove finer particles and dust. This sample shall be dried in a ventilated even
at a temperature between 100"C and ll0"C till a.constant weight is obtained (Wl)
and -cooled approximately to room temperature.
103.4.3.2. The dried and cooled sample shall then be placed in a suitable
vested and covered with distilled water at a temperature between 22oC and 32oC
and kept immersed for 24 hours. Air entrapped ir. and bubbles on the surface of
the aggregate shall be removed, as the appear, by gentle agitation with a rod.
103.4.3.3, The sample shall then be taken.from the water and any water
visible on the su¡face shall be rapidly removed by.means of a damp cloth. The
surface dried sample shall then be immediately weighed (W2).
103.4.3.4. The percentage of water absorption of aggregate shall be
calculated as follows :

Water absorption percentage by weight : Wr-W,

x 1000
wl
'Where
Wr: Weight in grams of the sample after 24 hours of immersion
ln cold water.
W, : V/eight in grams of the dry sample.
S.S. IO4 MATERIALS IIl
103.5. Method of test for determination of water soluble matter of
aggregate :

103.5.1. About 100 grams of the representative sample shall be air dried
and ground, to pass 150 micron IS : Sieve. The material shall be stored in an air
tight bottle.
103.5.2. Twenty-five grams of the sample shall be weighed and transferred
to a 500 ml. beaker. 100 ml. of cold distilled water shall be added and the contents
stirred frequently for three hours. It shall be decanted (through a No.42 rvaEnan
filter paper or equivalent) into a 500 ml. graduated flask. the filtrate shall be
refiltered if necessary. The filter paper along with the sample retained on it shall
be returned to the breaker. 250 ml. distilled water shall be added and extraction
continued for another one and a half hours. The material on the filter paper shall
be washed three times with cold distilled water and filtered. The filtrate and the
washing shall be added to the first filtrate in the 500 ml. flask and made upto the
mark using distilled water. The flask shall be shaken well and 200 ml. pipetted
out, to a weighed platinum dish (or porcelain dish, glazed inside and outside). The
contents of the dish shall be evaporated to dryness and heated to constant weight
at 105"C to 110"C.

103.5.3. Result :-The percentage weight of the soluble salt shall be

calculated as follows :

Soluble salts, percent by woight : l0 W. Where : W = Weight in grams

of the dried material on the dish.

Specification No.104
Surki
104.1. Mânufacture :

I 04. 1 . I . The surki shall be obtained by calcining processed clay of approved

quality and at suitable temperature and grinding the resulting product to the required
fineness.

104.1.2. The clay shall be prepared with suitable additions of water into
a plastic mass weeding out gritty material, pebbles, sticks, etc.
(The method of manufacture of surki currently practised in India, is to burn
clay after moulding it into bricks or balls and then to powder it.)
104.1.3. The clay thus prepared shall be burnt at the temperahre suitable
to the type of clay used in the manufacture. The exact degree of burning for each
clay shall be determined after making necessary experiments with samples prepared
at different temperatures and ground to specified fineness.
104.1.4. The burnt clay shall be pulverized to the fineness specifîed in
clause 104.2.2.

104.2. Quality :

104.2.1. It shall be clean and free from admixture of foreign matter.

tt2 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

104.2.2. The material shall be ground to an impalpable dust and shall pass
through 75 microns or 0.075 mm IS : Sieve unless other size is prescribed by the
Executiw Engineer.
104.2.3. The soluble salt content shall not exceed 3 percent by weight.
104.3. Tests :

104.3.1. When three mortar cubes with a mix comprising one part of lime
surki mixture (l part hydrated lime and 2 parts of surki by weight blended
intimately) and 3 parts of standard sand by weight, when prepared cured and tested
in accordance with IS : 172l-1967 shall give an average compressive strength not
less than 4Okg./cm.
l0ß:2. Th¡ee mortar cubes with a mix comprising one part of cement
surki mixture (4 parts of ordinary cement ahd I part of surki by weight blended
intimately) and 3 parts of standard sand by weight, when prepared, cured and tested
in accordance with lS : L727-1967 shall satisfy the following requirements of
average compressive strength.
(a) At the age of 28 days : Not less than 80% of the shength of the
corresponding plain cemerit sand mortar cube prepared with one part cement and
three parts of standard sand and crued, at the age of 28 days.
(b) At the age of 20 days : Not less than the strength of the same (Cement
Surki sand mix at the age of 28 days).
104.4. Delivery :

104.4.1. Surki may be specified in bags (gunny, multiply paper or cloth)

bearing the manufacturer's name or registered trade mark. The gross weight of each
bag shall be 50 kg.
104.4.2. When supplied in bags the permissible tolerance on the weight of
surki shall be plus or minus 42.5 per cent per bag with an overall tolerance of plus
or minus 40.5 per cerit per wagon load of 20 to 25 tonnes.
104.5. Storage :

104.5.1. Surki shall be stored on a hard surface or platform so as to prevent

the admixture of clay, dust, vegetable and other foreign maffer and shall be
protected from rain and dampness.
Specification No.105
Fly Ash
105.1. General :-. Fly-ash is a finely divided residue resulting from the
combustion of pulverized coal and is transported by the flue gases from where it
is collected. It can be used as puzzolona, as an admixture for concrete or as fine
aggregate for mortar and concrete and shall conform to the following specifications :
(l) IS : 3812-Part-I-1966 Specification for "Fly ash-for use as puzzolona".
(2) IS : 3812-Part-II-1966 Specification for "Fly a.sFfor use as admixtur(
for Concrete".
S.S. 106 MATERIALS I 13

(3) IS :3812-Part-trll-1966 Specification for "Fly ash-for use as Fine

aggregate for Mortar and Concrete".
105.2. Storage :-Fly ash shall be stored in such a manner as to permit
easy access for proper inspection and identification of each consignment.
105.3. Delivery :-Supplies of fly-ash may be made in bulk or in bags
as mutually agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier.
105.4. Measurement and rate :-Fly ash shall be measured in tonnes
correct 0.01 of a tonne and paid per tonne.
Specification No. 106
Rough Stones for Dry Packed Revetments and Approns
106.1. Source :-The stone shall be supplied from the quarries specified.
106,2. Quality :-The stone shall be of approved quality, sound, hard,
dense and durable, free from segregation, seams, cracks, weathered portions and
other structural defects or imperfections tending to affect their soundness and
strength. Stone shall generally be freshly quarried with sharp edges and clean faces.
They shall be free from rounded, worn or weathered surfaces or skin or coating.
106.3. Size :

106.3.1. The sizes of the stone to be used for various thìcknesses of

revetments shall be as follows :-'
Unless otherwise specified, for revetments upto 450 mm. thickness of the
length of the stones shall be equal to the revetment thickness. For revetment over
450 mm. thick at least 50% of the stones shall be 450 mm. long. No stohe shall
have any dimension less than 150 mm. or less than 50% of the maximum dimension
of the stone.

106.3.2. The minimum volumes of the individual stones used for various
thickness of revetments shall be as follows :

Thickness of revelment Volume of stones

300 mm. 0.015 cu.m.

450 mm. 0.030 cu.m.
600 mm. 0.045 cu.m.

106.4. Stacking :-Stacking shall be done n conformity with clauses l0l

to 101.3 and at the location specified or ordered by the Executive Engineer.
106.5. Sample :-Sample of stones to be used in the work shall be got
approved by the Executive Engineer before the work is started.
106.6. Measurement & Rate :-Rough stones shall be measured from
well formed stacks with minimum voids.

IAPDSS - 8l
ll4 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

All liner measurements shall be in metres correct to 0.01 of a metre and

volumes worked out in cubic metres correct to 0.01 of a cu.m'
106.7. Rate :-The unit rate shall be per cu.m.

Specification No. 107

Stone for Masonry
107.1. Source :-The stone of the required quality shall be obtained from
the quarries specified.
107.2. Types :-The common types of natural stones which are generally
used are granite and other igneous rocks, lime stone (including marble), and stone
and laterite, etc., and shall be free from defects like decay, cavities, cracks, flaws,
sand, holes, soft seams, veins, patches of soft or loose materials or any other
deleterious materials like iron oxide, organic impurities, etc. They shall be free from
rounded, worn or weathered surfaces or skin or coating which prevents the
adherence of mortar.
107.3. Quality :-All stones used shall be clean of uniform colour and
texture, strong, hard and durable as indicated in clause 107'4.1'
107.4. Tests :
107.4.1. Strength:-The strength of stones shall be adequate to carry the
load imposed. The crushing strength of stone is given in Table 107-4.
TABLE 107.4
Crushing strength of stones as determined in accordance
with IS : ll2l-1974

S/.No. Type of stone Minimum crushing strength

kg/cm2
(1) Q) (3)

(i) Granite 1,000

(iD Basalt 400

(iii) Lime stone (Except very soft' stone) 200

(iv) Sand stone 300

(v) Marble 500

(vi) Laterite 30

lO7.4.2. Water Absorption :---Thø percentage of water absorption shall

þenerally not exceed 5 per cent by weight as determined in accordance with
lS : 1124-1974.
107.5. Measurement :-This shall conform to clause 106.6.
107.6, Rate :-This shall conform to clause 106.7.
S.S. IO8 MATERIALS I15

Specification No. 108

Coarse Aggregate for Concrete
108.1. Termihology :

I 08. I . I . Coarse Aggregøte :-Aggregate almost all of which is retained on

a 4.75 mm. size sieve.
108.1.2. Nominal size of Coarse Aggregate :-The size then which only
a small specified percentage of aggregate is larger.
108.1.3. Single sized Coqrse Aggregate :-Aggregate most of which is
close to the nominal size.
108.1.4. Graded size Coarse Aggregate :-Aggregate with sizes well
distributed between the nominal size and lower limit for coarse aggregate.
108.2. General :

108.2.1. Source :-The aggregate shall be obtained from the quarries

specified. Samples of aggregate shall be furnished to the Executive Engineer'for
prior approval.
108.2.2. Broken stone shall, unless otherwise specified, consist of hard,
sharp, angulqr pieces, broken to specified sizes. Flaky and weathered stones shall
not be used.

108.2.3. The coarse aggregate shall be free from all dust and dirt and
washed to ensure that all faces are perfectly clean,
108.2,4. Aggregate shall not contain any harmful material such as iron
pyrites, coal, mica, shale or similar laminated material, clay, alkali, soft fragments,
sea shells, organic impurities, etc., in such quantity as to affect the strength or
durability ofthe concrete and in addition to the above, for reinforced concrete any
material which might attack the reinforcement,
Table 108-A
Nominal size and Corresponding grading for single size
and graded aggregates

IS : Sieve Percentage passing by weight for single

Designation size aggregate of nominal size
63mm 40mm 20ntm l6mm l2.5.mm
(t) Ø@(4)O6)
80 mm. 100
63 mm. 85- I 00 100
40 mm. 0-30 85-100 100
20 mm. 0-5 0-20 85- I 00 100
l6 mm. 85-100 100
12.5 mm. 15-100
116 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

(r) Q) (3) (4) - (s) (6)

l0 mm. 0-5 0-5 0-20 0-30 0-45

4.75 mm. 0-5 0-5 0-10
2.36 mm.

IS : Sieve Percentage passing by weight for graded

Designation size øggregate of nominal size
63mm 40mm 20mm l6mm l2.5.mm
(r) (7) (8) (e) Q0) Qr)

80 mm. 100
63 mm.
40 mm. 95-100 100
20 mm. 30-70 95-100 100 100
16 mm. 90-100
12.5. mm. 100 90-100
l0 mm. 85-100 l0-35 25-55 30-70 40-85
4.75 mm. 0-20 0-5 0-10 0-10 0-10
2.36 mm. 0-5

Table 108-B
Sizes of Coarse Aggregates for use in mass concrete

Clqss snd Size IS Sieve Percentage passing

Designalion by weight
' (r) (2) (3)

Very large 150 to 80 mm. 160 mm. 90-100

80 mm. 0-10
Large 80 to 40 mm. 80 mm. 90-100
40'mm. 0-r0
Medium 40 to 20 mm. 40 mm. 90-r00
20 mm. 0-10
Small 20 to 4.75 mm. 20 mm. 90-100
4.75 mm. 0-5

108.2.5. Aggregates which are chemically reactive with the alkalies of

cement are harmful as cracking of concrete may take place and shall be rejected.
--

S.S. IO9 MATERIALS 117

108.2.6. The broken stone used for a work, which is likely to be subjected
to or open to the action of fire must not be lime stone or of a nature liable to
disintegrate or become calcined under high temperature. Flint is liable to disintegrate
under the action of fire and shall not therefore be used.
108.2.7. Quartz has such a smooth surface that adhesion of the mortar
thereto is poor and is therefore not normally suitable as an aggregate unless
specifically passed after laboratory test.
108.3. Sizes and Grading :

108.3.1. Unless otherwise specifred, nominal sizes and corresponding grading

for single size and graded aggregate for plain and reinforced concrete shall be as
given in Table 108-4. For mass concrete work the sizes and grading shall be as
given in Table 108-8.
108.3.2. For reinforced concrete the nominal maximum size of the aggregate
shall be 20mm. Unless otherwise specified. For heavily reinforced concrete members
the nominal maximum size of the aggregate shall usually be restricted to 5mm. less
than the minimum clear distance between the main bar or 5mm. less than the
minimum cover to the reinforcement, whichever is smaller. Where the reinforcement
is widely spaced the nominal maximum size may be as great as or greater than
the minimum cover.
108.4. Mechanical properties :-Mechanical properties of aggregates
regarding crushing value, impact value, abrasion value and soundness shall unless
otherwise specified conform-to the requirements of IS : 383-1970.
108.5. Testing :-Tests where required shall be carried out in accordance
with IS : 2386-1963.
108.6. Stacking :-The relevant clauses of l0l shall apply.
108.7. Measurement :-All linear rfieasurements shall be in metres correct
to 0.01 of a metre. Volume shall be worked out in cu.m. correct to 0.01 of a cu.m.
108.8. Rate :-The unit rate shall be per cu.m.
Specification No. 109
Marble
109.1. Classification :-The marble shall generally be classified either as
white or coloured. A combination of different colour shall be as per Appendix A
of IS : 1130-1969 or may be specif,red.
109,2. General Requirements :-To the extent possible the marble shall
be free any foreign matter and cracks.
. 109.3. Sizes :-
109.3,1. :-The marble slabs shall be of specified dimensions.
.S/øås

109.3.2. Tiles :-The tiles shall be in the form of specified dimension.

109,4. Workmanship :-The marble slabs and tiles shall be Supplied with
one of following finishes :
118 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

(a) Sand and/or abrasive finish.

(b) Hone finish.
f09.5. Physical Properties :

109.5.1. The physical properties of marble for slabs and tiles shall conform
to the requirements given in col. 3 of the following table when tested in accordance
with the standard procedure given in the corresponding ISI Codes.
Table 109-A
Physical Properties of Marble

S/.No. Characleristic Requirement Method of test

(t) (2) (3) (4)

L Moisture absorption afrcr 24 Max.0,4,Yo IS : 1124-1974.

hours immersion in cold water by weight
II. Hardness Min. 3 Mohs. Scales.
III. Specific Gravity Min. 2.5 IS : 1122-1974.

109.6. Handling of Stacking :-Marble slabs and tiles shall be handled

with great care and stacked neatly, without damaging their shapes and finish.
109.7. Measurement :-All linear measurements shall be in metres correct
to 0.01 of a metre. Areas shall be worked out in sq. m. correct to 0.01 of a. sq.m.
109.8. Rate :-Marble slabs and tiles shall be pairl per sq.m: specifying
the thickness.
Specification No. l'10
Sand
110.1. Terminology :

I 10. I . I .
Sand :-Granular material (passing 1Omm. sieve and almost entirely
passing, 4.75 mm. sieve and predominantly retained on 75 micron sieve) resulting
from natural disintegration and abrasion of rock or processing of completely friable
and stone.
I 10.1 .2. Nutural Sand :-,Fine aggregate resulting from natural disintegration
of rock which has been deposited by streams or glacial agencies.
I I 0. I .3. Crushed Stone Sand :-Fine aggregate produced by crushing hard
stone.

I 10. 1 .4. Coarse Sand :-The fineness modulus of coarse sand shall not be
less than 2.5.
1 10. I .5. Fine Sand :-The fineness modulus of fine sand shall not be less
than 1.0.

110.1.6. Fineness Modulus :-Anemperial factor obþined by adding total

s.s. I l0 MATERIALS l19

percentages of a sample of the aggregates retained on each of the following series

of sieves divided by 100.
The sieves used are 150 microns, 300 microns, 600 microns, I'18 mm., 2.36
mm., 4.75 mm., l0 mm., 20 mm., 40 mm., and larger increasing in the ratio of
2tol.
I10.1.7. Bulking of Sand:-lncrease in bulk volume of a quantity of sand
in moist condition over the volume of the same quantity of sand when completely
inundated.

I l0.l.8. Bulking Fqctor :-Ratio of volume of moist sand and the volume
of sand when completely inundated.
110.2. Source :-Sand shall be obtained from the source defined in the
descriptive specihcation sheet.
110.3. Quality of Sand (General) :
110.3.1. Sand to be used shall be composed of hard Silicious material. It
shall be clean, sharp and angular type.
110.3.2. Sand required for various purposes shall conform to the gradingÔ
given in Table 110-4, 110-B and 110-C, and the grading of whiõh falls outside
the specified limits due to excess or defltciency of coarse or fine particles may be
processed to comply with the standard by screening through a suitable sieve and/
or blending with the required quantities of suitable sizes of sand particles. Any
deviation may be left to the discretion of the Executive Engineer based on practical
experience with the use of local material.

The various sizes of particles of sand shall be uniformly distributed throughout

the mass.

The required grading may often be obtained by screening and/or by blending

together either natural sands or crushed stone screenings which are unsuitable.
I10.3.3. Deleterious Materials:-The sand shall be durable and free from
adherent coatings and organic matter and shall not contain any appreciable amount
of clay balls or pellets.
110,3.4. The sand shall not contain any harmful impurities, such as iron
pyrites, alkalies, salts, coal, mica, shale or similar laminated or other materials in
such form or in such quantities as to adversely affect hardening, strength and
durability of concrete or mortar for plaster or cause corrosion of Metals.
110.3.5. Sand which is chemically reactive with alkalies of cement is
harmful as cracking for of concrete may take place shall be prohibited.
110.3.6. Unless found satisfactory as a result of further tests as may be
specified by the Executive Engineer or unless evidence of such performance is
offered which is satisfactqry to him the maximum quantities of clay, fine silt in,
fine dust and organic impurities in sand shall not exceed the following limits
determined in accordance with IS : 2386 (Part-ll)-1963.
 120 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

(a) CIay, Fine silt and Fine dust,

l. In natural sand or
crushed gravel sand Not more than 4%o by weight
2. In crushed stone sand Not more than l0% by weight
(b) organic impurities Below that indicated by comparison
with standard solution or with
clause No. 3.
In particular cases crushed stone sand with even higher proportions of fine
dust than specified above may be satisfactory and the jimit- so permitted will
however be specified by the Executive Engineer.
I 10.3.7. The sand shall be screened before use. If the sand brought to site
is dirty, it must be washed clean in water.
r sand containing saline impurities

Engi
shall
sand
:äåi1ili'.ä,i|"1',r;.'ä,i'.i'i;
n case the sea sand has to be used
the same shall be taken from the upper reaches of the beach where the salt has
been washed out by rains.
110.3.9. Bulkage Allowqnce:-when measuring sand due allowance shall
be made for bulkage from moisture as explained in clause 110.5. below.
110.4. Determination of silt content (Fierd test) :-The percentage of silt
content may be determined as given below :-
sand to be tested sha drying in 200 ml.
The size of sample sh s the cylinder upto
water shall be added mark. The mixture
vigorously and the co le for 3 hours. The
height of silt visible as settled layer above the sand shall be expressed as percentage
of the height of the sand below.
110.5. Determination of bulkage allowance of sand (Field method) :
110.5.1. object:-This test covers the procedure of dete¡mining in the
field, the amount of surface moisture or bulkage in fine aggregates by displãcement.
in water.

110.5.3. Procedure :

110.5.3.1. The procedure adopted depends on the fact that the volume of
inundated sand is the same when dry.
S.S. IlO MATEzuALS 121

110.5.3.2. ln a 250 ml. meâsuring cylinder pour the damp sand

(Consolidating by shaking until it reaches the 200 ml. mark. Then fill the cylinder
with water and stir theosand well. (The water shall be sufficient to submerge the
sand completely). It wilf"be seen that the sand surface is now below its original
level. Suppose the surface is at the mark Y ml. The percentage of bulking of the
sand due to moisture shall be calculated from the formula.
Percentage bulking": 110 (200-y)

v
I 10.5.3.3. The percentage of bulkage of sand shall be rounded off to the
nearest whole number.
110.6. Stacking :
110.6.1. This shall conform to clauses 103.3,1. to 103.3,3.
110.6.2. The relevant clauses of S.S. : 103 shah also apply,
110.7. Sand for Masonry :
110.7.1. Quality:-This shall conform to clause 110.3.
110.7.2. Grading :-The particle size distribution of sand to be used in
mortars for masonry work shall be within the limits specified in Table 110-4.
Table 110-A
Requirements of grading for sands for masonry work

IS : Sieve Designation. Percentøge by weight

passing 15 ; Sive

4.75 mm. 100

2.36 mm. 90-100
l.l8 mm. 70-100
600 micron 40-100
300 -Do- 5-',l0
150 -Do- 0- l5

110.8. Sand for Plastering :-

110.8.1. Quality:-This shall conform to clause 110.3.
110.8.2. Grading :-
110.8.2.1. For the purpose of indicating the suitability for use, the sand is
classified as Class 'A' and Class 'B' in accordance with the limits of grading. Class
'A' sands shall be used generally for plaster work but when they are not available
Class 'B' sands may be used.
110.8.2.2. The gradiúg of sand for intemal wall and ceiling plaster shall be
within the limits specified in Table ll0-8.
 FI
I

122 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

Table 110-B
Requirements of grading for sands for internal wall and ceiling plastering

IS : Sieve Percentage by weight passing IS : Sieve

Designation
Class A Class B

2.36 mm. 98-100 for uncer coats '98-100 for under coats

100 for finishing coats 100 for finishing coats

l.l8 mm. 80-95 for under coats 80-100 for under coats
95-100 for finishing coats 95-100 for finishing coats
600 microns 30-85 30-95

300 microns 5-50 5-56

150 microns 0- l0 0- 15

110.8.2.3. The grading ofsand for external plaster coats and renderings shall
be within the limits specified in Table 110-C.
Table 110-C
Requirements of grading fbr sands fbr external plastering and renderings

IS : Sieve Percentage by weight passing IS : Sieve

Designation
Class A Clqss B

4.75 mm 100 100

2.36 mm 90-100 90- 100

l.l8 mm 70- 100 70- I 00

600 microns 40-85 40-9s

300 Do. 5-50 I 0-65

150 Do. 0-10 0- l5

110.9. Sand for Cement Concrete (Plain and Reinforced)

r 10.9.L Quality :-This shall be as per clause 110.3.
110.9.2. Grading :-The grading of sand is classified into four grading
zones in which sand becomes progressively finer from giading Zone I to grading
Zone IV as in Table 110-D.
s.s. lll MATERIALS 123

Table 110-D
Natural of crushed stone sands percentage passing for

IS : Sieve Grøding Grading Grading Grading

Designation Zone I Zone II Zone III Zone IV
(1) Q) (3) (4) (s)

l0 mm. 100 100 100 100

4.75 mm. 99-100 90-r00 90-r00 95-100
2.36 mm. 60-95 75-100 85-100 95-100
1.18 mm. 30-70 55-90 75-100 90-100
600 microns t5-34 35-59 60-79 80-r 00
300 -do- 5-20 8-30 t2-40 I 5-50
150 -do- 0-10 0-10 0-10 0-15

110.9.2.1. For crushed stone sands, the permissible limit on 150 microns
IS : Sive is increased to 20 percent.

110.9.2.2. Sand complying with requirements of any grading Zone in

Table-ll0-D above is suitable for concrete, but the quality of concrete produced
will depend upon a numbsr of factor including proportions.
110.9.2.3. Where concrete of high strength and good durability is required,
sand conforming to any one ofthe four grading zones may be used, but the concrete
mix shall be properly designed. As sand grading becomes progressively fine that
is, from grading Zone I to IV, the ratio of sand to coarse aggregates shall be
progressively reduced. The most suitable sand to coarse aggregates ratio to be used
for any particular mix will, however, depends upon the actual grading of particles
shape and surface texture of both sand and coarse aggregates and will be specified
in the schedule.
110.9.2.4. Sand conforming to grading Zone lY shall not be used in
reinforced concrete unless tests have been made to ascertain the suitability of
proposed mix proportions.
110.10. Measurement :-This shall conform to clause 108.7.
110.11. Rate :-This shall conform to clause 108.1.
Specification No. 111
Lime
111.1. Terminology:
1 1 1.1.1. Quick Lime :-The calcined material, (the major part of which is

calcium oxide in a natural association with a relatively smaller amount of magnesium

oxide) capable of slacking with water.
111.1.2. Lump Lime :-Qúick lime as it comes from the kiln.
 124 TFIE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

I 1 l.l .3. Hydtvted Linte :-A dry power obtained

by treating quick linre
with water enough to satisfy its chemical uifinity for water
under thc bondition of
its hyclration. It essentially consists of calcium hydroxide
and some magnesium
hydroxide.

_ I ll.1 '4. Hydrauric Lime :-Lime containing smalr qua'tities of sirica and
alrrn.ri'a and/or iron oxide which are in chemical combination
with ùvrrrw
some vlof the
tItç

::f'*,:::1::::,:l':: q1l1c. u,pur,tl or morrar wricrr has ilre p."fåny of setring

l:j T:*:T :'lll.1.*u,...
and serni-hydraulic
nydiaulíc limes are
limes as mentioned in clause"Lurrir,"J;;,i;;:;,ií
3.1 of ls: i12_1973.
;ñiil:
I11.1.5. Fat Linte:-The lime which has high calcium oxide
content and
is dependcnt for sefting and hardening solely on the
absorption of carbon-di_oxide
from thc atmosphere.
lll.2. Classilication :

l1l.2.l . Litnes shall be classifiecl as below :

Clctss A :-Eminently hydraulic limes used for structural purposcs.

Cla.ss B :-Semi-hydraulic lines used for
moftar for masonry work.
Class c :-Fat limcs used nrainry for finishing coat
in prastering, white
wa s rri' g an d w i trr, ; dì;;ilJ':iïlt"
J:;, iïTi'ff"
or any :?i:,ï":*ì:ï;
other pozzolanic material
to produce artificial"i,^bì;'
hydraulic nortar.
class D :-Magnesium lime used for finishing coat
in prastering, white
washing, etc.
E :-Kunkar lime used for masonry mortars.
Class

[Please see Next pages for Tabre rlr-A and rabre rrr-Bl
111.2,2. class "A" shalr be supplied as hydrated lirne
onry. class .,8,, and
class "c" limes shail be suppliecl both ás quick rime ana nyaraiàãrime.
limç.ihall be supplied as quick lime and iydrated lime. class.,D,,
Class ,.8,, lime shall be
supplicd as hydrated limc only.
111.3. chemicar Requirements :-Building limes are
crassified in l l r.2
shall comply with chemicalréquirements specified
in Table ilr-A when tested in
accordance with the methods prescribed ¡i lS:ltZ_tSlt.
l.ll'4' Physicat Requirements :-Builaing limes shall comply with the
physical requirements specifièd in Table lll-B when tested in accordance with the
nrethods prescribed in IS : 712_1973.
111.5. Sampting:_
l115.l. euick lime:_In thc cas
chemical requirements specified in claus
samples are taken at the point of loading a
are taken at any other point then the lim
to the agrecment between the Contracto
111.5.1.2. Hydrated Limes :-'rn the case of Hyderabad limes the samples
shall be taken at the point of delivery.
 TABLE III-A ?
?
Chemical Requirements

Requirements for building limes

sl. Type of Test Class A Class B Class C Class D Class E

No.
Hydrated Quick Hydrated Quick Hydrated Quick Hydrated
(r) (2) (3) (4) (s) (6) (7) (8) (e) (i0)
(Ð Calcium and magnesium,
oxides per cent Min. 60 70 70 85 85 85 85 25

(iÐ Magnesium oxides per cent Max.

Min.
55 5 jj 5
-
5
5

(iiÐ Silica, alumina and feric -l

rr
oxide, per cent' Min. 25 l5 t5 F
(iv) Un-hydrated oxides, t-
per cent Ma¡c. 8 U)

(v) Insoluble residue in hydrochloric

acid less the silica percent, Max. ) J 2
(vÐ Insoluble matter in Sodium
5 5 5
carbonate solution, Per cent Max. 5 5 5 5

(vii) Loss on ignition, per cent 5 for large 5 for large 5 for large
lump, 7 for lump, 7 for lump, 7 for
lime other tha¡ lime other than lime other than
large lump. large lump. large lump.
(viii) Carbondioxide, percent Mæç. 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

(i*) Cementation value Min. 0.6 0.3 0.3

Max. 0.6 0.6
l\)
(Jr
 TABLE III-B N)
o\
Physical Requirements

Requírements for buíldìng lìmes

Sl. Type of Class A Class B Class C Class D Class E Methods

of -l
No. Test
lr
Hydrated Quick Hydrated Quick Hydrated Quick Hydrated Hydrated test Ref.
(l) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (e) (10) (l l)
U)
(Ð Fineness Shall leave no Shall leave no Shall leave no Shallleave Shall leave lS:.6932 -l
residue on residue on residue on no residue no residue (Part IV) z
2.36mm. IS : 2.36mm IS : E50 micron IS : 85Omicron 236 mm. 1923 U
Sieve, not more Sieve, not more Sieve, not more IS : Sieve, IS : Sieve, F
than 5 percent than 5 percent than 5 percent not more not more U
(A
on 850-micron on 85O-micron on 300 micron than 57o on than 5% on
'o
IS : Sieve and IS : Sieve and IS : Sieve and 300 micron 850 micron ln
o
the fraction the fraction the fraction IS : Sieve IS : Sieve rl
passing through passing through passing through and ths frac- and the frac- o
850-micron IS : 85O-micron IS : 3O0-micron IS : tion passing tion passing
-l
Sieve shall leave Sieve shall leave Sieve shall leave through 300 through 850
not more than not more than not more than micron IS : micron IS : zV)
l0 per cent (of l0 per cent (of l0 per cent (of shall
Sieve Sieve shall
this fra tion) this fraction) this fraction) leave not leave not
on 3OO-micron on 300 micron on 212 micron more than more than
IS : Sieve IS : Sieve IS : Sieve t0% (of this 10% (of this
fraction) on fraction) on
212 micron 300 micron
IS : Sieve IS : Sieve
(iD l0 on 850- 5 on 85O-micron 5 on 850 micron -- lS : 6932 ?
Residue on
IS : Sieve, the IS : Sieve, the (Part III) ?
slaking (on the mlcron
IS : fraction passing fracting passing 1973.
basis of quick Sieve
lime taken), through this sieve through this sieve
Max. percent when further when further
by weight passing through passing through
300 micron IS : 300 micron IS :
Sieve shall leave Sieve shall leave
residue 5 residue 5
(iii) Setting time In the putty of In the puttylS : 4031

standa¡d consis- of standa¡d 1968

tency as per consistency
IS : 6932 (Part- as per IS :
6932 (Part
z
vIIÐ-1973
initial set shall VIII) initial È
E1
set shall take
take place in
place in not
z
not less than t-
2 hrs. and less than 2 hrs. (A

final set with- and final set

in 48 hrs. within 48 hrs.
(iv) Compres- l7.5kg./ffi* 12.5. kg./cm2 10.5 kg./cm2 15:6932
sive after 14 days afters 14 days after 14 (Part

Stength and 28kg-/ and 17.5 kg./ days and VII)

Minimum. cm2 after crfr at 28 17.5 kg.lcrf 1973.
28 daYs days shall, after 28 days
shall, how- however, shall however
ever, show show an show an
an lncrease lncrease lncrease over
over that over that thzt at 14
at 14 days day,s.
at 14 daYs tJ
\ì
(v) Transverse Modulu so Modulus of Modulus of 15:6932 N)
Strength rupture not rupture not ruph¡re not (Part oo
less than leass than less than VII)
10.5 kg.lcm2 7 kg.lørP 7 kg.lemz
at 28 days at 28 days at 28 days
(vi) Work- Shall require Shall require Shall require Shall require IS : 6932
ability not less not less not less not less ' (Part-
than 12
-l
thzn 12 than l0 than l0 uII) F

bumps to bumps to bumps to bumps to t973.

lrl
attain an attain an attain an attain an
average average average average þ
spread of spread of spread of spread of V)
-l
l90mm. l90mm. l90mm. l90mm.
from an from an from an from an
z
U
initial spread initial spread initials spread initial spread
of l00mm. of llOmm. of ll0mm. of F
llOmm. U
on the flow on the flow on the flow on the flow v)
FÚ
table table table table FI
c)
(vii) Volume Yield l.7ml. per l4ml. per IS : 6932 tsIJ

gnrm or as gram or as - (Part IV) o

agreed to agreed to 1973 È
between the between the o
purchaser and purchaser and z
CA
the supplier the supplier
(viii) Soundness The Le The Le The Le IS : 6932
Chatlier Chatlier Chatlier (Part IX)
moulds shall moulds shall moulds shall 1973
not exhibit not exhibit not exhibit
more than more than more than
E l0 mm. l0 mm. lOmm. ?
U
(n expansaton expanston ?
expanston
v)
, lix) Popping ana *
Shall not
\o Shall not IS : 6932
pitting exhibit any exhibit any (Part IX)
disintegration disintegration 1973
popplng or poPpmg or
pitting on pitting on
the surface the surface

Note :-The sign (+) means no requirements of the tests.

?
È
E
F
Ì-
u)

¡9
\c)
r30 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

l ll .5.2. Procedw'e of Santpling:-Thc sampling shall be done in accordance

with the procedure laid down in IS : 712-1973. The samples shall be kept properly
sealed until tcsted.
ll1.5.2.1. General:-Sampling shall be carried out as quickly as possible
so that the material does not deteriorate. The total time occupied in mixing (and
if necessary quartering down) the composite samples and the preparation (where
necessary) of the final samples from this shall not exceed two hours. The fìnal
sarnples shall be three in number ancl shall be placed immediately in clean, dry,
air-tight containers. When testing is not to be carried out once the samples shall
be enclosed marked and sealed to the satisfaction of the Executive Engineer, paying
special attention to the air-tightness of the containers. Tools and containers shall
bc of material free from rust and shall be alkali resistant.
111,5.2.2. Sanrples of quick linte :-Three fìnal samples each of not less
than 20 shall be taken as provided under clause 111.5.2.2 (a) for lump quick lime
an<l under clause 111.5.2.2 (b) for powdered quick lime.
(a) Luntp Quick Lime:-An initial samplc shall first be taken from which
thc final samplcs to be testcd shall be obtained by quartering. This initial sample
shall not be less than 3 kg. pcr tonne of material sampled and shall be taken as
follows :-
(i) In Bulk :-When the lump linre is loose approximately equal
portions shall bc drawn from as many differcnt positions as possible, corresponding
to not less than two selected placcs for every 3cu.m. so as to be fair by representative
of the materials.
' (ii) In packages:-'With lump lime in bags, barrels or other packages
the initial sample shall be made up by approximately equal portions taken from
not less than onc package for every tonne. Where the number of packages is less
than 20, the sample shall be drawn from at least three or half the number of
packages whichever is chose at random.
Sufficient material shall be taken from each package sample to produce a
total initial sample of at least 3kg. per tonne of material the sample is supposed
to reprcsent. Samples shall not be taken from broken packages.
In either of the cases (i) or (ii) above the initial .sarnples shall be broken
dowu to pass through 12.5 mm. IS : Sieve. This shall be collected and thoroughly
nrixed on a clean dry surface preferably on a steel plate of atleast 5 mm. thickness
and then reduced to about 20 kg. by coning and quartering.

. 20 kgs. may be necessary when all the tests are to be carried out. If not
the sample may be broken further to below 5mm. and reduced to the required
quantity for the tests.
(b) Powdered quick lime:-Suff,rcient materials for the sample or samples
shall be taken direct in approximately equal portions from different positions
corresponding to every 3 cu.nt. of the stock when the lime is loose or from one
package from every ten packages when the lime is not loose or where the number
of packages is less than 20 fron.r at least three or half the number of packages
 t12 MATERIALS l3t
whichever is less choosen at random. The quantity of material drawn shall be not
less than 1.5 kg. per tonne of material to be represented by the sample.
111.5.2.3. Sampling Hydrated Lime:---The final samples each, of not less
than 5 kg. be taken direct in the same manner as described under 111.5.2.2 (b)
for powdered quick lime.
111.5.2.4. Materiuls for tests and chemical analysis :-At the time and
place at which the tests and chemical analysis are to be carried out the sample taken
as described under clause lll.2.2 shall be crushed to pass through the 2,36 mm.
IS : Sieve thoroughly mixed and slightly more quantity of lime than is sufficient
for conducting the tests taken in such a manner to be as representative as possible.
In the case of lump quick lime quartering shall be carried out.
From the material hnally choosen a small quantity from the sample shall
be ground and rejected in order to ensure absence of contamination in the grinding
equipment. Then about 100 gms. of the sample shall be ground with as little
exposure to air and water vapour as possible to pass through 300 micron IS : sieve
and placed in a small air-tight container.
111.5.3. Facilities for sampling and identifying :-The contractor shall
afford every facility and provide all labour and material for taking and packing
samples for testing and for subsequently identifying samples.
11f .6. Stacking and Storage :-
111,6.1. Stacking shall conform to clauses 103.3.1 to 103.3.3.
111.6.2. Lime shall suitably be stored in such a manner as to permit of
easy access for proper inspection to protect it from dampness and to minimise
warehouse deterioration,
111.6.3. The lime at work site shall be suitably protected from weather
action.

111.6.4. Lime shall not be stacked against the walls of the shed.
111.6.5. Quick lime shall as far as possible be stacked soon after it is
received. Storage of unslaked, fat or semi-hydraulic lime is not desirable as lime
deteriorates by absorption of moisture from atmosphere.
II L6.6. Lime which has perished or which has been damaged by dampness
rain or intermixture of dirt or which has become partially air-slaked shall on no
account be used on the works and shall be removed at once from the site.
lll.7. Measurement :-This shall conform to clause ll0.l0.
111.8. Rate :-This shall conform to clause 108,8.

Specification No. 112

Portland Cement
ll2.l. Portland cement shall conform to IS t 269-1967 which covers
the following types :-(a) Ordinary portland cement for general use; (b) Rapid
hardening portland cement for use where high early strength is required; (c) Low
 ìI
132 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

heat portland cement for use where low heat of hydration is required as in mass
concrete for dams.
112.2, Unless otherwise specified "cement" shall mean ordinary portland
ccment.
172.3. Cement shall be produced as fresh as possible after manufacture
direct fiom manufacturers or from authorised dealers. The suppliers shall furnish
a tcst certificate where required.
112.4. The cement shall be procured either in bulk or in bags bearing the
manufacturers name or his registered trade mark.
112.5. The net weight of each bag shall be 50 kg. The permissible tolerance
on the weight of cement supplied in bags shall be + 2.5% per bag, with an over
all tolerance of + 0.5o/o per wagon load of 20 tonnes or more.
112.6. Storage ;

112.6.1 . Cement bags shall be stored in dry, weather proof godowns.

Adequate prccautions shall be taken to ensure stacking of cenrent bags in such a
way as to keep thern about 150 mm. to 200 mm. clear above floor and 250 mm.
to 300 mm. clear of walls.
112.6.2, The height of the stack shall not be ordinarily be more than l0
bags and in no case more than l5 bags (except for very short periods) to prevent
the possibility of lumping up under pressure. Cement bags shall be stacked in a
manner to facilitate their removal and use in the order in which they are received.
112.6.3. Cement shall be stored at the work site in such a manner as to
prevent deterioration due to moisture.
112.6.4. Cement which has become caked or otherwise damaged by getting
wet or for any other reason shall on no account be used on the works.
112.6.5. Vy'hen the cement has been stored for prolonged periods or when
deterioration is suspected it shall be used only after it is tested for conformity ryith
standard specifi cation.
112,7, Testing :-All tests when required shall be conducted in accordance
with IS : 4031-1968 and IS : 4032-1968.
112.8. Measurcment & Rate :-This shall conform to clause 105.4.
Specification No. 113
Lime Mortar
113.1. Matcrials :-Slaked lime, sand and water to be used shall conform
to SS : lll-110 and 129 respectively.
113.2. Mix Proportions :

113.2.1. The mortar shall be mixed in the proportions noted in Table I l3-
A below or such other propoftions as may be defined in the relevant schedule item
for the various items of thc work.
s.s. 113 MATERIALS

Table 113-A
Mix proportions for lime mortar by volume

Item of work Lime Class of lime suitable Sqnd

(1) (2) (3) (4)

All limes except fat lime a

Mortar for concrete 1

Mortar for masonry (Brick or stone) I All limes except fat lime 2
Mortar for plastering I st coat I All limes except fat lime 2
Mortar for plastering 2nd coat I All limes except fat lime 1%

Mortar for plastering 3rd coat (sebara) Lime All limes can be used No.
Only Sand
Moftar for pointing All limes except fat lime l%
Mortar for terracing work All limes except fat lime t%
Brick on edge All limes except fat lime 1/2
Flat tiles All limes except fat lime 1%

Plastering Top and Bottom As above for plastering

113.3. Preparation of lime mortar :

113.3.1. Grinding :

113.3.1.1, If lime iö supplied in the form of quick lime it shall first be

slacked to give dry hydrated lime.
113.3.1.2. Dry hydrated lime shall be ground to the required consistancy
of a stiff paste with necessary water and then the specified proportion of sand added
to it, This mix shall then ground again to the required consistency of a stiff paste
with necessary water. Excess water shall be avoided.
I13.3.1.3. The preparation of mortar as above for use in masonry works
shall be retained for a day's requirement only.
113.3.1.4. When an animal drawn mortar mill is used for grinding, the
mortar is to be ground for not less than 100 revolutions. In the case of a machine
driven mill the grinding lime shall not be less than 20 minutes or until sand and
lime gets thoroughly mixed.
112.3.1.5. The mortar ihatt be raked up continuously during the process
particularly in the angles of the mill.
112.3.1.6. Every precaution shall be taken to ensure that the pressure on
the mortar is not so high that sand particles in the mortar get powdered to an
appreciable extent.
113.3.2, Partly set and dried mortar shall not be retempered for use and
shall be removed from the site.
113.4, Stacking of storage :-All lime mortar after grinding shall be kept
damp and shall never be allowed to go dry. This may be ensured by covering the
 11

134 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

ground mortar with wet sacks or by any other suitable means. It shall always be
protected from sun and rain.
113.5. Time for use :
I13.5.1. All mortar shall be used as soon as possible after grinding Mortar
shall not be used after more than 24 hours of grinding in case of-hydrauìíc lime,
72 hours in the case of semi-hydraulic lime and 7 days in the case of fat limcs.
After expiry of the aforesaid periods all mortar shall be removed from the site of
work.

Specification No. 114

Surki Mortar
ll4,l. Materials :-Lime, Surki, sand and water to be used shail conform
to S.Ss. 104, ll0, lll and 129 respectively.
114.2. Proportions :
114.2.1. surki mortar shall be mixed in the proportions noted below or
such othcr proportions as may be defined in the relévant schedule item for the
Various items of work.
Table 114-A
Proportions for Surki mortar by volume

Item of work Lime Surki Sand

@ A. C Types of lime)
(r) (2) (3) (4)

Concrete % t%
Masonry (Brick or stone) % t%
Pointing v, I

114.2.2' Quantities of materials and labour required for various iterns of

work shall be as given in the standard data and relevànt specification.
114.3. Preparation of Surki Mortar :_
I 14.3.1. surki, lime and sand shalr be measured out in suitabre
sized boxes
one over the other in proper proportions.
114.3.2. The method of mixing and grinding, etc., as described in the
standard specification for "Lime Mortar,' vide clause 113.3 shall be followed
with
the exception that the mortar being hydraulic shall be used within 24 hours
after
being mixed.
114.3.3. Any mortar which has not been made use of wìthin the about limit
of time or which has set and hardened shall be considered unfit for use and
recovered forthwith from the site of work.
114.4. stacking and storage :-This shall confirm to clause 113.4.
S.S. I 15 MATERIALS 135

Specification No. 115

Cement Mortar
115.1. Materials '-Çsmee1, sand and water to be used shall conform to
S.Ss. : 112,110 and 129 respectively.
. 115.2. Proportions :

115.2.1. Cement mortar shall be mixed in the proportions noted below or

such other proportions may be defined in the relevarrt schedule item for the various
items of work.
Table 115-A
Proportions of Cemend and Sand by volume

Item of work Cemenl Sand

(1) (2) a)

l. Mortar for masonry 5

2. Mortar for masonry 6
J. Mortar for Plastering 4
4. Mortar for Pointing J

115.2.2. If of the cement may be replaced by approved

specified part
pozzalona such as surki conforming to SS : 104 and fly ash conforming SS : 105.
115.3. Preparation of cement mortar :
115.3.1. The portland cement shall be measured by weight, 1440 kg. being
taken as I cubic metre and sand measured in suitable sized measuring boxes. A
bag of cement weighing 50 kg. may be taken as 0.035 cu.m.
L15.3.2. Mixing in Mechqnical Mixer :

115.3.2.1. Mixing shall be done preferably in a mechanical mixer. In such

case the cement and sand in the specified proportions shall be mixed dry thoroughly
in the mixer operated manually or by power.
115.3.2.2. Water shall then be added gradually and wet mixing continued
atleastfor 3 minutes, Care shall be taken not to add more water than that required
to bring the mortar to the required working consistency.
115.3.2.3. Mixer shall be cleaned with water each time before suspending
the work.
115.3.3. Hand Mixing :
115.3.3.1. The measured quantity of sand shall be spread over a platform
and the cement uniformly spread over the sand. The cement and sand shall then
be mixed over dry three times to obtain uniform colour.
115.3.3.2. The quantity of dry mix which can be used within 30 minutes
shall be taken and the required quantity of water to give a workable consistency
shall be added while the mortar is thoroughly mixed for atleast 5 minutes.
 l'1

136 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

115.4, Time of use : I

115.4.1. cement moftar shall be used as soon as possible after mixing and
before it has begun to set and in any case within 30 minutés after the water is added
to the dry mixture,
115.4.2. Mortar unused for more than 30 minutes shall be rejected and
removed from the site of work.
Specification No.i16
Cement Lime Mortar
116'1. Materials :-cement, lime, sand and water to be used shall conform
to S.Ss : ll0, 111, ll2 and 129 respectively.
116.2. Proportions :-The cement lime and sand shall be taken in the
proportionsof (l: l:6)or_(l :l:7) or(l:2:9) (Cement: Lime:Sand)by
volume or as nìay be specified in the relevant schedule item.
116.3. Preparation of cement Lime Mortar :-The sand and lime shall
be measured by volume in suitable measuring boxes. cement shall be measured
by weight l440kg. being taken as equivalent to one cubic metre or a 50kg. bag
taken as equivalent to 0.035 cu.m.
116,4, Lime (Sand) mortar of the required proportions shail be prepared
as per S.S. 113. The specified quantityof cement shall then be added to tholine
mortar and thoroughly mixed either by hand or by a mechanical mixer. If necessary
additional quantity of water shall be added during the final mixing to bring the
mortar to a workable consistency.
116.5. Time of use :-cement rime mortar shall be used as soon as
possible after mixing and before it has begun to set and in any case within one
hour after the addition of cement.
I16.5.1. Mortar which has set or remained unused for more than one hour
after addition of cement shall be rejected and removed from site,

Specification No. 117

Sebara Putty (Lime Putty)
ll7.l, Materials ;

ll7.l.l. Lime:-Pure fat lime conforming to s.S. : r12 shall be used.

117.1.2. Water :-Water shall conform to S.S. : 129.
117.2. Preparation :-Lime shall be slaked and mixed with sufficient
lvater to form a thick paste. It shall be reduced to a fine paste by grinding. It shall
then be passed through a fine sieve (3mm. IS : sievej to remJve all unslaked
particles aid foreign matter and allowed to mellow undei water for atleast l0
days
in a slaking tank. The surplus water on the top shall be allowed to run off, Lime
putty so formed shall be kept wet till it is completely used. It can be stored without
deteriorating for 15 days, provided it is protècted from drying out.
 S.S. 120 MATERIALS t37

Specification No. 118

Pan Tiles
118.1. General Requirements :-Tiles shall be made from well prepared
clay and well burnt to give a uniform texture and colour and they shall be free
from twists, cracks and particles of stone.
118,2. Size and Shape :-Tiles shall be about 225mm. long, 140mm. wide
at the large end, l25mm. at small end and 10mm, thick and they may be segmental
or semicular in shape.

118.3. water Absorption :-After 24 hours immersion in water, absorption

by weight shall not exceed 20% of the dry weight of the tile,
118.4. Measurement & Rate :-Tiles shall be counted in full numbers and
paid per hundred,
Specification No. 119
Burnt Clay Flat Terracing Tiles
119.1. General Requirements :-Flat tiles shall be made from fine, well
weathered or well prepared clay and shall be uniformly well burnt, They shall have
even texture and shall be free from twists, bends, cracks and particles of stone.
119.2, sizes :-The sizes of tenacing tiles and torerances shall normally
be as under.
(a) Size 150mm. x l50mm. x 12.50mm.
(b) Tolerances : Lenght and width : plus or minus 5mm. Thickness plus
or minus 2mm.
119.3. water Absorption :-The water absorption shafi be 240/o when
immersed completely in clean water at 24" for 24 hours.
119.4. Flexural strength :-The modulus of rupture in bending when
tested in accordance s : 2690-(Part-l)-197s and IS :2690-(part-Il)-1975, shall not
be less than l0kg,/cm.
119.5. Measurement & Rate :-This shall conform to clause 11g.4.
Specification No. 120
CIay RoofTng Tiles, Mangalore pattern
120.1, Terminology :
120.1'1. Mangalore pattern roofing /i/es :-These are machine pressed,
burnt clay roofing tiles suitable for laying on, sloping roofs by means of nibs which
catch on reepers or battens and overlap similar tile at the lower end on the sides.
120.1.2. Ridge titles :-The machine pressed burnt clay tiles of 'v' shape
are suitable or use on roof ridges in conjunction with Mangalore pattern tiles.
120.1.3. ventilating /i/es :-These shall be similar to the roofing tiles as
prescribed in clause l20.l.l except for a suitable shielded opening for ventilation.
 I I
I

138 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

120.1.4. Ceiling tiles :-A machine pressed, burnt clay tiles for use as
I

ceiling under the Mangalore pattern tiled roof. I

I
I

I
B
l1

Corrugations

Tie down
Cross-Rib.

Section YY Plan back of tile

Batten lugs Overlap 25mm. min.

\-f-eayes lugs

[Fis. 120.1]

TYPICAL DETAILS OF MANGALORE TILE

120.2. General Requirements :-Roofrng tiles Mangalore pattem and
specials in clause 120.1 shall be of two classes namely class "AA" and Class "A'l
on conformity with lS : Specifications,with characteristics specified in Table 120-
A and 120-8.
Table 120-A
Classification of Roofing tiles

Requiremenl
s/.
No. Characleristics Class "AA" Class "A"
(1) (2) (3) (4)

(i) Water absorption, percent Max. 24

(iD Breaking load, Kg. Min.
(a) Average 102 82
(b) Individual 9l 68
s.s. 120 MATERIALS 139

Table 120-8
Classiflcation of Ridge and Ceiling tiles

Requirement
,s/.
No Characteristics Class "AA" Class "A"

(i) Water absorption, percent Max. 19

(for ridge and ceiling tiles)
(ii) Breaking strength
(for ridge tiles only) Kg. Min.
(a) Average 1.5 1.10
(b) Individual 1.15 0.95

120.2,1. The roofing tiles shall conform to IS : 654-1972 and ridge and
ceiling shall conform to IS : 1464-1973.

rl
tltl
rl
ÏI fFig. 120.21
6,.
t_
T
Itlrl
rl
rl E

All dimensions in mm.

i.--2osi RIDGE TILE

120,g, Shape, Dimensions and Tolerances :

120.3.1. The typical shapes of Mangalore pattern roofing tiles, ridge and
ceiling tiles are shown in figures 120-l to 120-3.
 140 THE A,P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

120.3.2. The sizes of roofing and ridge tiles in accordance with relevant
Indian Standard are given in Table below :
Table 120-C
Sizes of Mangalore pattern roofing tiles

Sl.No. Overall length in mm, Overall width in mm.

0) Q) (3)

(i) 410 235

(iù 420 250
(iiù 425 260

Table 120-D
Sizes of ridge tites

SI,NO Length in mm. Overall width in mm.

(1) (2) (3)

(t) 375 265

(ii) 400 265
(iii) 435 265

120.3.3. Tolerqnces :-The following tolerances may be permitted in the

dimensions of Mangalore pattern roofing tilès.

CEILING TILE

All dimensions in mrh.

B
ï
B

Fig. 120.34 Fig. 120.38

Double lug type Singte tug type
s.s. l2l MATERIALS 141

Dìmensions Tolesnces

Effective length plus or minus 6 mm.

Effective width plus or minus 3 mm.

120.3.3.1. The tolerances on the length, width, and height of ridge tiles
shall be plus or minus 5mm. respectively.
120.4. Tests :-The tiles and specials shall comply with the tests laid in
the relevant Indian Standard and if required a test certificate to this effect from
an approved laboratory shall be furnished by the supplier.
120.5. Measurement & Rate :-Tiles and specials shall be counted if full
number and paid per hundred.
Specification No. 121
Glazed Tiles
l2l.l.
Qualities :
121.1.1, The tiles shall be covered by a glaze on the top and the under
side. The edges shall be free from glaze in order that the tiles may adhere properly
to the base.
121J.2. The glaze shall be uniform in quality and free from welts, ships,
craze, specks, crawlings or other imperfections visible from a distance of one metre.

121.1.3. The glazed tiles shall be white or coloured.

121.2. Size and Shape of Tiles :

121.2.1. The tiles shall generally be square and of two nominal sizes i.e.,
149 x l49mm. or 99 x 99mm. with a thickness of 5, 6 or 7 mm.
121.2.2. The specials such as covers internal and external angles, beads,
cornices and corner pieces shall be of specified sizes.
Table 121-A
Dimensions of fittings for glazed tiles

Length Height l4/idth Radius of

,s/. L HW rounding
No Fitting mm. mm. mm. qt mm.
corners
(r) (2) ' (3) (4) (s) (6)

(Ð Cove base Same as for Same as for 25.00

conesponding corresponding
tiles tiles
(iÐ Round edge Do. Do. 10.00
(iii) Corner cups 2s,3t,37
 142 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

(iu) Angles galzed Same as for 25,31,37

corresponding
ti les

(v) Ridges Do. 50

(ui) Legs 25,37,3J 25,31,37
(vii) Cornice 150 23 50
(viii) Capping beads 150 12

121,3. The tiles shall bc true to shape and conform to the performance
requircnrcnts of IS : 7ll-1910 as revised from time to time and the supplier shall
subnrit a certificate if required with respect to the quality of tiles and detailecl
thcrein.
121.4. Measurements & Rate :-This shall conform to clause .l 20.5.
Specification No. 122
Bitumen felts for rvater proofing and damp proofing
122.1. classificatio¡r :-Bitumen felts shall be classifìed as follows
dcpcnding upon the type of base used in their manufacture and the uses for which
the felts are suited in accordance with IS : 1322-1970.
(a) Fibre base.
Type I: Saturated felt for underlay.
Type 2: Self-finished felt (for water proofing) - Grade l.
Self-finished felt (for water proofing) - Grade 2.
Self-finished felt (for damp proofing) - Grade J.
(b) Hessian base.
Type 3: Self-finished felt (for water proofing) - Grade 1.

Self-finished felt (for damp proofing) - Grade )

122.2. Dimensions :

122.2.1. unless specified otherwise bitumen felts shall be supplied

in widths of 0.9m. and 1.00m. The length of felts shall be such that each roù shall
be adequate to cover an area specified below taking into accounf the necessary
overlaps.

Type of felt Area covered

Type 1 40 sq.nì.
Type 2, Grades I & 2 20 sq.m.
Type 3, Grade I t0 sq.m.
Type 2, Grade 3 l0 sq.m.
Type 3, Grade 2 l0 sq.m.
S.S. I23 MATERIALS I43

122,3. Tests :
122.3.1. Bitumen felts shall comply with the tests specified in IS :1322-
1970 and if required a test certificate to this effect from an approved laboratory
shall be fumished by the supplier.
722.4. Packing :

122.4.1. Unless specified otherwise, bitumen felts shall be packed in rolls

according to the approved (trade) practice. No roll shall contain more than two
pieces. The number of rolls containing more than two pieces in any one delivery
shall not exceed 3 per cent of the rolls in that delivery.
Specification No. 123
Cuddapah/Shahabad Slabs
123.1. Quality :
123.1.1. The slabs shall have an even surface without any viens, cracks
or flaws and shall be of uniform colour.
123.1.2. Earthy and flaky slabs shall be rejected.
123.1.3. Slabs shall be either up-polished or polished on face.
123.2. Dimensions :

123.2.1. The slabs shall be rectangular or square and generally of the sizes
given in the table or of any other sizes specified in the relevant schedule item.
Table 123-A
Standard Sizes of Slabs

Length in mm Breadth in mm Thickness in mnt Tolerances in mm.

190, 50, 295,395 l9s 15, 25, 30 (a) Plus or minus 5mm.
on dimensions more
than l95mm.
295, 395, 495 29s 15, 25, 30, 40, 50 (b) Plus ¿r minus 2mm.
s¡ dimensions less
1¡¿n 95mm.
395, 495, 695 395 15, 25, 30, 40, 50
495, 595,795 495 15, 25, 30, 40, 50
595, 795, 895 595 30, 40, 50
795,895, ll95 795 30, 40, 50, 60, 70
895, 1 195, 1495 89s 50, 60, 70
I195, 1495 I 195 50, 60, 70, 80, 95
t495 1495 50, 60, 70, 80, 95
 T

144 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

123.3. Sample:-Before supply the contractor shall submit the

samples to the Executive Engineer for approval.
123.4. Measurement :-All linear measurelnents shall be in metres correct
to 0.01 of a metre. Areas shall be worked out in sq.m correct to 0.01 of sq.m. They
shall be differentiated by their lenghts, widths and thickness.
123,5. Rate :-The unit rate shall be per sq.m.
Specification No. 124
Galvanized Steel Sheets (Plain or Corrugated)
724.1. Gcneral :-Plain and corrugated galvanized steel sheets shall confonn
to thc requirenlents of IS : 277-1969,
124.2. classifìcation :-Galvanized steel sheets (plain or corrugated)
produced by hot dip process are classified as follows :-
Class 1 : Extra heavy coating of Zìnc, nominal 750 g/m2
2 : Hcavy coating zinc nominal 600 g/m,
Class
Class 4 : Medium coating of zinc nominal 450 glm2
Class 4 : Light coating of zinc nominal 375 glm2
124.3. Dimensions :
124.3.1 . Sizes:-Galvanized steel sheets (Plain or Comrgated) shall generally
be of the sizes given in the following table :

Table 124-A
Sizes of Galvanized Steel Sheets (plain or Corrugated)

llridth (mm.)

Length in metres Plain Corrugated

750 mm 660 mm
or or
900 mm 800 mm

124.3.2. Thi&ness :-The thickness of sheets shall generally be 0.63,

0.80, 1.00, 1.?5 or 1.60 mm.
124.4. Marking :

124'4); Every sheet shall be regibly marked with manufacturer's name or

trade mark.,The.bp sheet be each bundle rhull, in addition, be marked with type
of coating, lenglrt qri¿¡¡, thickness antl the number of corrugations in the case of
corrugated sheets.
s.s. 125 MATERIALS 145

124.5. Stacking and Storage :

124.5.1. Sheets shall be handled and stored in such a manner as not to

damage them in any way.
124.5.2. These sheets shall be stacked on wooden battens laid on firm and
,level ground.

124.5.3. It shall be protected from atmospheric actions such as rain, sun,

moisture, etc., to avoid deteriórations.
124.6. Measurement :-This shall conform to clause 123.4'They shall be
differentiated by their types of coating and the number of corrugations.
124,7. Rate :-This shall conform to clause 123'5.
Specification No. 125
Un-reinforced Corrugated Asbestos Cement Sheets
125.1. General :

.1.
Un-reinforced comrgated asbestos cement sheets shall conform to
125.1
the requirements of IS : 459-1970.
125,2. Classification :

125.2.1. The sheets are classified as comrgated or semi-cotrugated according

to the size and form of comrgations.
125.3. Dimensions and Tolerances :

125.3.1. Dimensions:-The corrugated sheets shall be and conform to the

linear dimensions specified in Tables 125-A and 125-8.

Table 125-A
Dimensions of Corrugated Asbestos Cement Sheets

Pitch of Depth of Overall Effective Nominal Length of

Corrugation Curragation width I'yidth thickness sheet
of sheet

P D B C T A
mm. mm. mm. mm. mm. mm.

(t) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

t46 I 050 l0l0 t.5, t.75,

2,2.5
t46 48 I 050 t 0l0 2.51,3

IAPDSS - 101
 E

t46 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

Iable 125-B
Dimensions of semi-corrugated Asbestos Cement Shcets

Pitch of Depth of Overall Effective Nominal Length of

Corrugation Curragation width width thickness sheet
. of sheet
P D B C T A
mm. mm. mm. mm. lnm. mm.

(l) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

338 45 I 100 l0l4 6 1.5, 1.75, 2.25

338 45 l 100 l0l4 7 2,5, 2.75, 3

125.3.2. Tolerance:
125.3.2.1. Tolerance on length and width:-corrugated and semi-corrugated
not vary from the dimensions for length and width specified in the
sheets shall
Tables 125-A and 125-8 by more than plus or minus 6mm.
125.3.2.2. Tolerance on thickness :-No tolerance is permitted in thickness.
For the purposes of measuring thickness, a sliding gauge having a blade not more
than 25mm. long and approximately 3mm. thick may be used-.

125,4, Freedom from defects :-The sheets when delivered shall be free
fro r bility and shall have been
ma k surface of the sheets shall
bee

125,6, Measurement :-This shall conform to clause 123.4. They shall

also be differentiated by the number of corrugations,
125.7. Rate :-This shall conform to clause 123.5.

Specification No. 12G

Steel for Reinforcement

126,1, Quality :-The various types of steel shall conform to relevant
Indian Standard Specifications as follows :
- s.s. 127 MA"TERIALS t47

Table 126-A
Types of Sheets

Sl.No. Types of Steel Relevant 15 No,

l. Cold twisted steel bars for concrete reinforcement IS 1786-1966

2 Hot roled mild steel and medium tensile steel
deformed bars for concrete reinforcement IS l 139-r966
3. Hand drawn steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcement IS 1566-1967
4. High tensile steel bars used in prestressed concrete IS 2090-1962
5. Indented wire for prestressed concrete IS 6003- l 970

6. Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars for

concrete reinforcement IS 432-Part-l-l966
7. Hard drawn steel wire IS 432-Part-ll-l966
8. Plain hard drawn steel wire for prestressed concrete IS 1785-Part-I-l 966
IS I 78S-PartlI-1967
9. Uncoated stress relieved strand for prestressed concrete IS 6006-l 970
l0 Mild steel binding wire IS 280-1972

126,2, All the reinforcement shall be clean and free from dust, oil paint,
grease, mill scale or nrst at the time of placing.
126.3. Storage :-
126.3.1. Reinforcement steel and binding wire shall be stored above ground
surface upon platform, skids or other supports protected as far as practicable from
surface deterioration by direct contact with undesirable elements or by exposure
to conditions producing rust and corrosion. Bars shall be so supported as to avoid
distoration and saging of long lengths. All reinforcement of same designation shall
be stacked separately and distinctly marked,
126.4. Measurement :-Reinforcement steel and binding wire shall be
measured by length or by weight. Linear measurements shall bè in metres correct
to 0.01 of a metre. Standard weights/metre lenghts of the reinforcement steel
diameter wire shall be adopted as per IS weighVshall be measured in tonnes and
kgs. correct to 0.1 of a kg.
126.5. Rates :-The unit rate shall be per tonne for steel and per kg. of
binding wire.
Specification No. 127
Steel for Structural Work
127.1. Materials:
127.1.1. Structurql Steel :-.tJnless otherwise specified structural steel shall
conform to IS : 226-1975 "structural Steel Standard Quality" and IS :2062-1969
for "Fusion V/elding Quality".
 I
r48 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

127.1.2. Rivet Steel:-All rivet steel shall conform to IS :1148-1973 and

IS : 1149-1973.
127.1 .3. Steel for bolts and nuts :-All bolts and nuts shall conform to
IS : 1367-1967.
121 .1 .4. Ll/ashers :-Plain washers shall be made of steel conforming
lS : 226-1915.
127.1 .5. Dimensions, forms, weight and tolerances of all rolled steel and
other members shall conform to relevant IS or shall be as specified. The finished
material shall be free from cracks, surface flaws, laminations and rough jagged ancl
imperfect edges and all other harmful defects and shall have a srnooth uniform
finish. The section shall be supplied/tolspecified lenghts, smoothly cut to the
required dinrensions.
127.1 .6. Tolerance:-Unless otherwise specified the permissible tolerances
shall be in accordance with IS : 1852-1973.
127,2. Straightening :-All deformed structural material shall be properry
straightened by nlethods which are not injurious, prior to being laid off, punched
or otherwise worked in the shop. Steel with kinks and bends shall be rejected.
127,3, Storage :-Structural stcel shall be storcd above surface of the
ground upon platforms, skids or other suitable suppofts to avoid distortion of
scctions in long lcnghts and shall b-e protected as far as practicable from surface
deterioration by direct contact with harmful elements or exposure to conditions
producing rust and corrosion. It shall be so stored and handled that the rnaterial
is not subjected to excessive stresses and damage.
127,4. Tests :-The structural steel shall comply with the tests laid down
in the relevant IS : Specification and if required a test certificate to this effect from
an approved laboratory shall be furnished by the supplier.
127.5. Measurement :-The linear measurements shall be in metres correct
to 0.01. of a metre. Standard weight per metre length of specified section shall be
adopted as per IS weights shall be calculated in tonnes and kgs. correct to 0.10
of a kg.
127.6' Rate :-The unit rate shall be per tonne for steel sections and per
kg. for rivets, bolts, washers, etc.
Specification No. 128
Asbestos Cement Flat Sheets
128.1. General :

128.1 .1. Asbestos Çement flat sh^ets shall conform to IS : 2096-1966.

128.2. Classification :
128.2.1. Asbestos cement flat sheets shall bc classified according to the
unit bending stresses as below :

(a) Compressed sheets :-sheets which give a minimum unit bending

stress of 225 kg.lcm.2 having a density exceeding 1.6 kg./dm3.
l,
ri
,.
S.S. 129 MATERIALS I49

(b) (Jncompressed sheets :-sheets which give a minimum unit

bending stress of 160 kg.icm.3 having a density exceeding 1.2 kg.ldm.3.
128.3, Dimensions and Tolerances :

128.3.1. Dimensions :
128.3.1. The nominal thickness of asbestos cement flat sheet shall be
5,6,8,10 and 15 mm.
128.3.1.2. The nominal lenghts and widths of the asbestos cement flat
sheets shall be specified below :

Lenght width
mm. mm,

2400 2400

r 800 I 800

1200 1200

128.3.2. Tolerqnces :

128.3.2.1. Tolerance on thickness :-The actual thickness measured shall

not vary from the nominal thickness specified in clause 128'3.1'l by more than
plus or minus 5 per cent.
128.1.2.2. Tolerance on lenglh and width :-Asbestos cement flat sheets
shall not vary from the nominal dimensions for length and width specified in clause
128.3.1.2 by more than plus or minus 5 mm.
128.4, Freedom from defects :-The sheets when delivered shall be free
from visible defects that impair appearance or serviceability. The surfaces of the
sheets shall be of uniform tùture ìn¿ rttutl have atleast one smooth surface. They
shall be, flat, rectangular and shall have neatly trimmed, straight and regular edges
and shall be square at the corners.

work as possible.
128.6, Measurements :-This shall conform to clause 123.4 except that
they shall differentiated by their thickness only.
128j, Rate :-This shall conform to clause 123.5.
Specification No. 129
Water
l2g.l. water used for mixing mortar or concrete and for curing shall be
clean and free from injurious amounts of deleterious materials such as oils, acids,
 150 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
alkalics, salts, slit and organic matter, etc., and material which may cause
discolouration. It shall be free from suspended impurities.
129.2. where contains any sugar or an excess of acid, alkali or salt the
Executive Engineer may refuse to permit its use. As a guíde, the foilowing
concentrations represent maximum pe nissible values.
(a)
To neutralise 200 ml. sample it shall not require more than 2 ml.of
0.1 normal Na OH.
(b) To neutralise 200 ml. sample it shall not require more than l0 ml. of
0.1 normal HCl.
(c) Percentage of solids should not cxceed the following :

Organic 0.02 per cent.

Inorganic 0.30 per cent.
Sulphates 0.05 per cent.
Alkali chlorides 0.10 per cent.
129.3. If
required by the Executive Engineer the water shal be tested
by
comparison with distilled water. comparison shãll be made
by means of standard
cement tests for soundness, time of sett
IS : 269-1967. Any indication of unsou
minutes or more decrease of more than
water samples when compared with the
distilled water shall be sufficient cause
129.4. containers for transport, storage and handiing of water shall be
clean.

129.5, Potable water is generally considered satisfactory.

129,6, vy'here permitted sea water not co'taining more than per
chloride salts may be used for curing o tly.
3 cent of

Specification No. 130

Teak Wood
130.1. Quarity :-The teak used for various works shall be durable
of^good quality. It shall be weil seasoned, free from decay, rot nuÀrut
and
fungi and
insect attacks.
130.1.1. lil'ood other than pores and bailies:-The teak wood shail
be
uniform in texture straight in fibre, free from flaws, shaker, *urf,
cups, springs,
twists, bends or large loose or dead cluster knots or defects
of any other kind. It
shall be free from spongy, brittle, flaky, brashy condition sap
wood ánd borer holes.
130.1 .2. Knots:-The diametre of knots shall not be more than 25mm. and
aggregate area of all the knots shall not exceed I per cent of'the area of the piece.
130.1 .3. Poles or posts :-Natural felled teak without
any possessing. They
shall be classified according to the mild girth or mid diametre
órìccording to the
s.s. 131 MATERIALS t5t

girth or diametre at top and bottom excluding bark in each. case. These shall be
ñree from large and dead knots, cracks and wooden borer infection.

130.1.4. Logs or rounds shall be square or rectangular'

130.1.5. scantlings :-Sawn timber other than planks and reepers.
130.1.6. Planks :-scantlings with thickness less than 50m¡n. and width
more than 50mm.
130.1.7. Battens or reepers :-scantlings with thickness and width less
than 50 mm.
130.2. Sawing :-All scantlings rs shall be swan
in straight lines, plane-s, uniform thickne from end to end
and sha-ll be swan in the direction of the n with sufhcient
margin as to secure specified dimensions, lines and planes after being wrought'
130.3. stacking .-As soon as the foundations of a building are laid- all
necessary timber scantlings shall be brought to site and stacked properly' They shall
be kept under cover and allowed to remain till required'

130.4. Measurement :
130.4.1. All linear measurements shall be in metres correct to 0.01 of a

metre. Volumes shall be worked out in cubic metres correct to 0.01 of a cubic metre.
130.4.2. Poles or posts shall be measured in running metres and differentiated
by their girth or diametre and lengths.
130,4.3. Batiens or reepers shall be measured in running metres and
differentiated by their widths, thickness and lenghts.
130.4.4. Planks, logs or rounds and scantlings shall be measured in metres
and volume worked out as per clause, 130.4.1 shall be differentiated by their
lengths. Planks shall also be differentiated by their widths and thickness.
130.5. Rate :-The unit rate shall be per running metre or per cubic metre
as the case may be.
Specification No. 131
Bamboos
131.1. Quality :-Bamboos shall be free from attacks of weevils, not older
than about two to three years and well seasoned'
131.2. Classification :-The bamboos are classified as follows :
(a) First Class
(b) Second Class
(c) Third Class
(d) Reepers.
131.3. Sizes:-The sizes of the above classes of Bamboos shall conform
to the sizes given in the Table l3l-4.
 ì

152 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

Table 131-A
Sizes of Bamboos

Class Diametre Lengtlr

0) (2)
ß)
First Class Over 150 mm 3.5 to 4.5 metres
Second Class Over 125 mm 3.5 to 4.5 metres
Tlird Class Over 100 mm 3.5. to 4.5 metres
Reepers 10 to 25 mm 3 to 4 metres

131.4. Measurement :-The diametre shall be measured at mid rength of

each bamboo.

Specification No. 132

Ballies
132.1, Materials :
132.1.1. Ballies shall be round, reasonably straight, without bark (except
in the case of casurina) and without defects such as large and dead knots,
holes,
rots, splits, cracks, wooden borer infection, etc.
132.2. Quality :-unress otherwise specified ballies shall be from the
following specieg of wood :

Teak, casurina, Eucalyptus, chennagi, sirmanu (Tirman) Billudi

Nallamaddi,
Sal.

132.3, Tolerances :-The tolerances shown in Table 132_A may be

permitted.

Table 132-A

^t/. Length Mean diametre or Tolerance in diarnetre at

No diametre ut the middle the thinner end

Ballies not Not less than the The diametre at the thinner end
exceeding 3m. specified diametre shall not be Iess than the specifred
length diametre by more than lOmm.
Ballies exceeding Not less than the The diametre at the thinner end
3m. length specified diametre shall not be less than the speci-
f,red diametre by more than 20mm.

132.4, Measurement :-The ballies shalr be measured in running metres,

correct to 0.01 of a metre and shall be differentiated by their diameters
anJlenghts.
132.5. Rate :-The unit rate for payment shal be per running metre.
s.s, r 33 MATERIALS ls3

Specification No. 133

Steel Sheet Piling Sections
133.1. Scope
133. l. l. Steel sheet piling shall be used in coffer dam constructions,
protective works and for river training works.

|te 8.5

|. -'-
tsPs 10212 PtLtNG SECTTON

133.2. Material :

133.2.1. Piling sections shall be made from steel of any one grade confirming
to IS : 226-1975 "Specification for Structural Steel (Standard Quality)" IS : 961-
1975 "Specif,rcation for High Tensile Structural Steel, or lS :2062-1969" specification
for Structural Steel (Fusion welding quality)".
133.2.2. Where steel is required in copper bearing quality, the copper
contents shall be between 0.20 and 0.35 per cent.
e æâ!s
t4t.Q,
ll?.fþ

Thcse rad Il will

T Find themsclves at
.u.6

t
The time of Rolling
-2.8 e
oFc€ør
goF ål|33r ñrË s^rr e
47.q. i?j,t
loa'' PPROX

láfd ttl.'¡-l r,irß-J î

:
:..L1
lte APPßOX

L' {-
þ' 420.sC to of Interlock

--+1
FIO. t88.2
All dimensions in mm
Isps 1625 U piling section
154 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

133.3. Designation :

ç o! PrLt
þ-t5a
.F-lo¡

',J
ta2:;

lXeÉC ÊÅcü lr!!

l¡ GMt6¿vG3 Ât
¿ nbl ot io¡ll{6
¿5 q
Q or ¡¡tcr Prrg warL

¿¡ro 5 C t0 c oÉ t¡?€¡ ¡¿cr(

4re

FlG, t83-8
ISPS 2222 U PILING SECTION

133.3.1. Steel sheet piling sections shall be designated with the letters ISPS
followed by the section modulus per metre of wall in cm.3 and letters symbols Z,U
and F which denote Z-type, U-type and Flat-type sections respectively.
133.4. Dimensions :-
133.4.1. The nominal dimensions of the steel sheet piling sections shall be
as given in Figs. 133-1, 133-2, 133-3 and 133-4.

All Dimensions in mm.

ISPS lOOF PILING SECTION

Approximate calculated sectional properties based on the nominal dimensions
are given in Table 133-4.
 s.s. r 34 MATERIALS 155

Table 133-A
Geometrical properties of Indian Standard Sheet piling Sections

st. Desig- Weight V/eight Section Moment Secl. Peri- c-c dis-
No nation per m. per sq.m. modules of area metre tance
of wall of per m inertia perm perm of
kgs. wall of wall per m. of of joints
kgs. cm3 cma wall wall cm.
cm2 cm.

ISPS 1,0212 49.25 123.12 t,021 9,449.5 157 233 400,0

ISPS 1,625U 65.37 162.40 1,625 24,563 207 308 402.5
ISPS 2,222U 82.70 195.70 2,222 3g,2lg 249 331 420.5
ISPS IOOF 55.20 138.00 100 428.0 176 104 400.0

133.4.2. Tolerances:
133.4.2.1 . Dintensional rolerances:-Dimensional tolerances of the profile
of the piling sections shall be as agreed to between the purchar"r und thg
manufacturer.
133.4,2.2. IMeight Tolerances:-The weight tolerances shall be +4 per cent
and -2.5 per cent.
133.4.2.3. Length Tolerances :-The sections shail be supplied in lenghts
between 9m. and 13.4m. subject to a tolerances +75 mm, and
-50mm. Any specific
length may be ordered subject to mutual agreement between the purchaser and the
manufacturer.
133.5. MarkÍng :

133.5.1. Piling sections shall be marked with the following details :

(a) Manufacturer's identification mark,

(b) Designation, and
(c) colour code to identify grade of steer as per IS : 2049-1963.
133.5.2. The material may also be marked with l.s.l. certification mark.
133.6. Measurement :-Steel sheet piling sections shall be weighed in
tonnes correct to 0.01 of tonne.
133.7. Rate :-The unit rate for payment shall be per tonne.
Specification No. 134
Bitumen Emulsions for Roads (Anionic Type)
134.1. emulsions are generally used in road construction
and maintenan ilisation, grouting, tack coating, resurfacing, seal
coatings, premi other special circumstances whãre cold applìlation
of bitumen is
156 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

134.2. Terminology :

134.2.1. Bitumen Emulsion (Anionic) :-An emulsion in which the anion

of the emulsifier is at the interface with the bitumen particle. An emulsion in which
the particles are negatively charged and the aqueous phase is alkaline.
134.3. Types and uses :

134.3.1. Emulsified bitumen shall be of the following three types and shall
conform to IS : 3117-1965.
(a) Rapid setting type (R,S.), used for penetration and surface treatment.
(b) Medium sètting type (M.S.), used for mixing with coarse aggregate.
(c) Slow setting type (S.S.), used for mixing with fine açgtegaÍe.
These types shall not be used in temperatures below 5"C as their utility is
likely to be impaired.
134.4. Requirements :

134.4.1. Bitumen emulsion shall be homogenious and shall show no

undispensed bitumen after thorough mixing within 90 days after manufacture.
134.5. Handling :-As damage is likely to occur during the unloading of
bitumen drums from railway wagons and from lorries in case of transit by road
from the rail road great care shall be exercised in the handling of bitumen drums
during these operations. As far as possible unloading of bitumen drums shall be
done with the help of wooden skids on which they can be rolled from the wagons
or lorries on to the ground safely. In case skids are not used the drums may be
unloaded on a mattress of straw packed in gunny bags.
134.6. Storage :-Each consignment shall be kept separate until the
material has been accepted, Drums containing different grades shall be kept in
separate lots and never intermingled and shall be stored in such a manner as to
permit easy access for proper inspection and identification of each consignment and
in a suitable place that will not damage the containers whereby leakage of bitumen
or instrusion of water and other foreign matter may be caused,
The presence of pockets of water in bitumen gives rise to frothing during
heating.

Bitumen drums shall not be stored in low lying areas where in rain water
is likely to collect around the drums and leak into the drums creating pockets of
water inside the bitumen.
As a further precaution against intrusion of water the bitumen drums shall
be stacked with the drums lying on either side (and not end on) so that any rain
water that falls on them will be quickly drained off.
134,7. Sampling :

134.7.1. For the purpose of testing the size of the sample and the sampling
procedure from drums and bulk supply shall be as described in IS : 1201-1958
subject to the following :
S.S. I35 MATERIALS 157

(a) From drums :-The contents of drum which the sample is to be taken
shall be thoroughly mixed by rolling the container to and fro for a period of two
or three minutes successively in opposite directions, allowing at least five revolutions
of the container in each direction and then up ending the container through two
revolutions, first in one direction and then in the opposite direction.
(b) From Bulk :-Where practicable bulk deliveries of bitumen emulsion
shall be agitated by forced circulation or air agitation, be one sampling.
134.7.2. The sample of bitumen emulsion shall be drawn within 24 hours
after delivery and tested within 7 days from the date of drawing unless otherwise
specified.
134.8. Testing :-Tests where necessary shall be conducted as detailed in
IS : 3117-1965.
134.9. Marking :

134.9.1. Éach container shall be legibly and indelibly marked with the
following :-
(a) Manufacturer's name and/or distinguishing trade mark, if any;
(b) Date of manufacture;
(c) Type and grade ;

(d) Batch number; and

(e) Date of expiry.
134.10. Measurement :-Where supply of bituminous material is required
it shall be weighed in terms correct to 0.01 of a tonne.
to be paid for separately,
l34.ll, Rate :-The unit rate for payment shall be per tonne.
Specification No. 135
Cutback Bitumen
135.1. Scope :-Cutback bitumen is generally used in road works.
135.2. Terminology :
135.2.1. Cutback bitumen :-Bitumen, the viscosity of which has been
reduced by a volatile dilutent.
135:3. Types and Grades :
135.3.1. This shall conform to IS : 217-1961 and shall be of three types
namely :

(a) Rapid Curinç ßc) :-Cutback bitumen is classified on the basis of

initial viscosity into six grades i.e., Rc-O, Rc-l, Rc-), Rc-3, Rc-4 and Rc-5.
(b) Medium Curing (Mc) :-Cutback bitumen is classified on the basis of
initial viscosity into six grades i.e., Mc-0, Mc-I, Mc-2, Mc-3, Mc-4 and Mc-5.
(c) Slow Curing (Scl :-Cutback bitumen is classified on the basis of initial
viscosity into six grades i.e., Sc-0, Sc-I, Sc-2, Sc-3, Sc-4 and Sc-5.
158 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICAT]ONS

135.4. Requirements :

135.4.1 . Penetration at 25"C,100g,5 sec. in l/100 cms. shall be as under

for the different grades of materials :

(u) For all the six rapid curing (Rc) grades i.e., Rc-0, Rc-l, Rc-2, Rc-3,
Rc.4 and Rc-5, the penetration shall be from 80 to 120.
(b) For all the six medium curing (Mc) grades, i.e., Mc-0, Mc-l, Mc-2,
Mc-3, Mc-4, Mc-5, the penetratio¡r shall be from 120 to 300.
135.4.2. Cutback bitumen shall not be heated beyond the flash point.
r:
135.4.2.1 . For rapid curing (Rc) cutback bitumen of grades i.e., Rc-2, Rc-
5 the flash points is 26"C.
135.4.2.2. For medium curing (Mc) cutback bitumen the flash point is d

given for different grades as under:38"C for Mc-O to Mc-l,65"C for Mc-2 to
Mc-5.

135.4'.2.3. For slow curing (Sc) cutback bitumen the flash point is given
for different grades as under :
65"C for Sc-0 to Sc-1,79"C for Sc-2,93"C for Sc-3, 107"C for Sc-4 and
l2l"C for Sc-5.

135.5. Handling :

135.5.1. This shall conform to clause 134.5

135.6. Storage :

135.6.1. This shall conform to clause 134.6.

135.7. Sampling :

135.7.1 , Lot:-ln any consignment all the containers for cutback bitumon
of the samc category and grade and from the same batch of manufacture shall be
grouped together to constitute a lot.

135.7.2. The number of containers to be selected at random from the lot

shall depend upon the size of the lot and shall be in accordance with Table
135-4.

Table 135-A
Number of the containers to be selected

S/.No Lol Size No. of contøiners

(1) Q) (3)

l. Upto 50 2
2. 51 to 100 J

3. 101 to 200 4
,-

s.s. 136 MATERIALS 159

(r) (2) (3)

4. 20t to 300 5

5. 301 to 500 7
6. s01 and above l0

135.7.3. From each of the containers selected as in the table above, an

(representative of the material in the container) shall be drawn in
the methods prescribed in IS : l20l-1958 taking all the precautions
in. All these samples from individual containers shall be stored
separately.
135.8. Testing :-Tests where necessary shall be conducted as detailed in
IS : 217-1961.
135.9. Marking :
135.9.1. This shall conform to clause 134.9.
135.10. Measurement :-This shall conform to clause 134.10.
135.11. Rate :-This shall conform to clause l34.ll.
Specification No. 136
Paving Bitumen
136.1. Scope :-Paving bitumen is used for road ways, air fields, etc.
136.2. Grades :-Paving bitumen shall be classified into five grades
according to their penetrations as specified in IS : 'l-3-196l.
136.3. Requirement :-
136.3.1. lså :-No mineral matter other than that naturally contained in
the material shall be present.
136.3.2. The material shall be homogenous and shall not foam when heated
to 175"C.

136.3.3. Paving bitumen shall not be heared beyond the flash point.
136.3.3.1. Forpaving bitumen of all the five grades (i.e., s. 35 to s.200)
the flash point is 175"C.
136.3.4. Penetration at25oc,l00 g., 5 sec. in l./100 cms. shall be as under
for the different grades of materials (as per IS : 73-1961 Table-II).
Grade of material Penatrstion
(l) s 35 30 to 40
(2) s 4s 40 to 50
(3) s 65 60 to 7O
(4) S e0 80 to 100
'175
(5) s 200 to 225
160 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

136.4. Handling :-This shall conform to clause 134'5.

136.5. Storage :-This shall conform to clause 134.6'
136.6. Sampling :-This shall conform to clause 135.7.
136,7. Testing :-Tests where necessary shall be conducted as detailed in
IS : 73-1961.
136.8. Marking :-This shall conform to clause 134.9.

136.9. Measurement :-This shall conform to clause 134.10.

136.10. Rate :-. This shall conform to clause 134.11'
Specification No. 137
Coal Tar Pitch
137.1. Scope:-This specification covers the range of four grades of coal
tar pitch from soft to hard consistencies with softening points verying from 45"C
to 92"C intended for the production of water proofing protective and binding
compounds employed in, masonry, steel, timber and concrete structures and also
for the preparation of roofing felts.
137.2. Terminology :

137.2.1. Coaltar pitch :-The black or dark brown solid or semi-solid

fusible and agglomerative residue remaining after partial evaporation or fractional
distillation of Coal tars.
137.3. Grades :-Coal tar pitch shall be classified into the following four
grades:

(a) Soft pitch.

(b) Soft medium pitch
(c) Hard medium pitch.
(d) Hard pitch.
They shall conform to the requirements given in Table I to IS : 216-1961.
137,4, Handling :-This shall conform to clause 134.5'
137.5. :-This shall conform to clause 134.6'
Storage
137.6, Sampling :-Tliis shall conform to clause 136.7'
137.7. Testing :-Tests where necessary shall be conducted as detailed
in IS : 216-1961.
137.8. Marking :-This shall conform to clause 134.9'
137,9. Measurement :-This shall conform to clause 134.10.
137.10. Rate :-This shall conform to clause l34.ll'
 s.s. 138 MATERIALS 161

Specification No. 138

Moorum
138.1. Quality :-The moorum shall be composed of well graded coarse
siliceous grains sharp and gritty to touch and free from dirt and othËr deleterious
matter. It shall not contain lumps larger than 20 mm. and the fines (passing through
75 microns IS sieve) shall not exceed l0%.
The liquid limit (L.L) and plasticly Index (p.I.) of moorum for various uses
shall be as follows :

L.L. P.I.
(a) roads -33
Filler material in W.B.M. Not more than 4 to 9
(b) Filler material in surface treated
W.B.M. roads _20 Not more than 6
(c) Sub base for roads Not more than
-20 6
(d) Backing for revetments Not more than 6
-20
138.2. Stacking :-This shall conform to S.S. : l0l,
138.3. Measurement :-All linear measurements shall be in metres correct
to 0.01 of a metre. volumes shall be worked out in cubic metres, correct to 0.01
of a cubic metre.
138.4. Rate :-The unit rate for payment shall be per cubic metres. This
shall include the cost, conveyance and stacking, etc.

IAPDSS - I II
T'

162 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 2
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR CLEARING SITE,
DISMANTLING OF BUILDINGS AND OTHER
STRUCTURES AND BLASTING
^t/.
Specification Name of Specification Page
No No. Nos.
201 Clearing Site 162
202 Dismantling of Building and other Structures 166

Specification No. 201

Clearing Site
201.1. The area described or shown on the relevant site shall be cleared
of all obstructions, loose stones and rubbish of all kinds. If big size stones or
boulders are met with they shall be broken, bumt or blasted, removed and stacked
as specified.
201.2. All brush wood shall be cleared and the roots entirely removed.
201.3. No trees are to be cut down and removed without the instructions
of the Executive Engineer, The roots of those which are cut down, shall be removed
upto a depth of 600mm. below ground level or l50mm. below formation level
whichever is lower.
201.4. Trees to be preserved shall be defined in the schedule.
201.5. The products of the clearing
manner as may be ordered by the Executive
in a perfectly clean condition. All products
of the Government and shall be disposed of
201,6. Ant hills are to be completely dug out and queen ants destroyed.
201,7. All holes or hollows whether originally existing or produced by
digging up of roots shall be carefully filled up with eanh well rammeðand leveileâ
off as may be directed.
201.8. All Temples, Mosques, Churches, Historical monuments, Tombs
etc., shall be safeguarded.
201.9. Anti-termite Treatment :
201 '9.1 . General:-Anti-termite treatment before construction and during
early stages of.construction, where required, shall be done generally in accordancé
wirh IS : 6313-Parr-It-1971.
201.9.2. chemical used :-The various chemicals that may be used, the
relevant IS: Specification for the same and their usual concentrations as water-
emulsions for soil treatment are given in Table 201-A.
 S.S. 2OI DISMANTLING OF BLDS., BLASTING, ETC. 163
.TREATMENT
OF TRENCH BOTTOM AND SIDES

DOSAGE 54M2
1-
300mm.
L
[Fis. 201.1]
TABLE 201.A
^s/.
Parliclars of Chemícals Concenlration by
No weight per cent
1. Dialdrin emulsifiable concentrates (IS t0s401962) 0.50
2. Aldrin emulsifi able concentrates (IS r 307-les8) 0.50
3. Reptachlor emulsifi able concentrates (IS 643e-1e72) 0.50
4. Chlordance emulsifiable concentrates (IS 2682-re66) 1.00
201.9.3. Site Preparøtion :

201.9.3.1. All stumps, logs and roots shail be removed fro¡n the building
site. Sub-floor arears shall be kept free from all debris.
201.9.3.2. on clays_and other heavy soils where penetration is likely to be
slow and on sloping sites where run off of the treating sólution is likely to occur,
the surface of the soil shall be scarified,-to a depth of at least 75 mm.
201 .9.3.3. on loose, sandy or porous soils where loss of treating soluJion
,!r9yqh excessive percolation is likely to occur, preliminary moistening or inó' soit
shall be restored to.
201 .9.3'4. All concrete from work, levelling pegs, timber off-cuts and other
builder's debris shall be removed from the ur.a to-bã treated.
201.9.4. T'reqtment :

201.9.4.1 al emulsions listed in Table 201_A shall be

applied uniform d rate at the various stages of the treatment.
A watering can shall be used to secure
-uniform
distribution
of the chemical
201 .9 '4.2. The chemical barrier shall be complete and continuous under the
whole of the structure to be protected,
201.9'4.3. Soil treatment shall be started when the foundation excavations
are ready for laying foundations. Laying of the foundation shall start when the
chemical emulsion has been absorbeã uy ttre soil and the surface
is quite dry.
 ì

164 TIIE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

201 .g.4.4. Treatment shall not be carried out when it is rainìng or when
pumpcd
the soil is watcr-logged. ln thc event of water-logging thc watcr shall be
out and the chemiõal emulsion applied when the soil is rendercd absorbent.

201 .g.4.5. once formed, treated soil barriers shall not bc disturbed, if
disturbccl by chance immediate steps shall be taken to rcstore continuity.
201 .9.4.6. If termite monnds are found within the plinth area
thcse shall
bc broken open and any one of the etnulsions listed in Table 201-A' in half the
concentration shown therein shall be poured into these ntounds at the ratc of about
4 litres/m3 of thc mound volume'
201 .g .4.1 .
Details of the trçatment of foundation and basenlent excavations
an<l backfiIls togcther with the clisease of the emulsions to be applicd are given
in Figs. 201-1,101-2 and 201-3. Treatrnent of the backfill shall procecd layer by
layer as laid. Care shall be taken to ensurc adequate treatment of the soil in
imrnecliate colttact witlr the vertical masonry surfaces. Wherc necessary shallow
holcs or treuches shall be made in the fill along the vertical faces attd thc chcmical
emulsion applied through thcm to thoroughly soak thc soil'

TREATMENT FOR LOAD BEARING WALLED STRUCTURE

Floor finish
Fourth Treatment of
Floor base concrete
Soil along externai
Perimeter Dosage 5Um2 100mm. Sandbed

Second Treatment of
Back fill in immediate
Contact with foundation
Structure Dosage 15Um2 Third Treatmentlof
Top surface of plinth
Filling Dosage 5Um2

T
300mm.
First Treatment of
J Trench and sides
Dosage 5Um2
Section

lFis.201.2l

201 .g.4.8. The soil around pipes, conduits and under expansion joints shall
be treated carefully.
201.g.4.g. Afterthe building is complete, holes shall be made with a steel
rod to a depth of 300mm. and at intervals of about 150mm. in the soil along the
s.s. 201 DISMANTLING OF BLDS., BLASTING' ETC' 165

emulsion
external perimeter of the building and these holes filled with the chemical
at the rate of 15 litres/m2 of the perimeter walt'

TREATMENT FOR R.C. FRAMED STRUCTURE WITH COLUMNS

AND PLINTH BEAMS
Second treatment of toP surface base concrete
of Plinth filling Dosage 5L/m2 Floor finish
100mm. sand bed

Third treatment of
soil along External
perimeter Dosage
15Llm2

First treatment of
back fill in imme-
diate Contact with
foundation structure,
Dosage 15Um2

R.C.C. columns

C.C. roofing

[Fis. 201.3]

201.9.5. Safety Precautions :

201,9.5.1. All the chemical concentrates specified are poisonous and

hazardous to health, when absorbed through the skin, inhaled as vapour or swallowed.

eyes they shall be flushed with plenty of water and immediate medical assistance
given. In case of poisoning suitable remedial measures shall be taken in accordance
with IS : 4015-Part-I-1967 and IS : 4015-Part-ll-1967.
201.9.5.2. All containers of the chemical concentrates shall be clearly
labelled, secùrely closed and carefully stored, out of reach of children and domestic
animals.
 t66 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

201.9'5.3. The chemical concentrates are oil solutions and present a fìre
hazard. Open flames shall not be allowed during mixture.
201.9.5.4. care shall be taken in the application of these chemicals to see
that they are not allowed to contaminate welli ãr springs which serve as
sources
of drinking water.
201.10. Measurement :-All linear measurements shall be in metres, correct
to 0.01 of a metre. All areas shall be worked out in square metres, correct to 0.01
of a square metre. All volumes shall be worked out in òubic metres, correct to 0.01
of a cubic metre.
20l.ll. Rate :

201 .ll '1. The un_it rate shail be per l0 square metres. cutting
and uprooting
of trees having girth of 500mm. and above as measured one metre- uboue g.ounã
level shall however be paid for separately.

201.11.3. Anti-termite treatment shall be paid for separately.

Specification No. 202
Dismantling of Buildings and Other Structures
202,1. The buildings or other structures defined in the schedule and handed
over shall be dismantled down to ground level or to bottom of foundations
as may
be specified in the schedule.
202.2, Precautions :

g and underpinning shall be provided

erty, which is to be left intact, before
be carried out in such a way that no
property.
202'2.2' Wherever required temporary enclosures or partitions shall also
be
provided.
202.2'3. Necessary precautions shall be taken to keep the dust nuisance
down as and where necessary.

ic manner. All

ii'î.iå -'*i:
202.2.5. Where fixing is done by nails, screws, bolts, rivets, etc., dismantling
shall be d-one by taking out the fixturès wittr proper tools and not
by treating oî
ripping off.
S.S. 203 DISMANTLING OF BLDS., BLASTING, ETC. 167

202,2.6. All materials obtained from dismantling shall be the property of

the Government. Any serviceable materials obtained during dismantling shall be
separated out and stacked or stored properly as directed by the Executive Engineer.
All unserviceable materials, rubbish, etc., shall be disposed off as directed by the
Executive Engineer.
202.3. In of damage, the responsibility for making good of such a
case
damage shall solely rest with the contractor, alternatively, the value of materials
broken or damaged shall be recovered from the contractor.
202.4, All necessary precautions shall be taken to safeguard all human life
etc., and in case of accidents the contractor shall be solely responsible for all
compensation claims arising under the relevant State or Central Acts.
202.5. All work shall be measured before the dismantling is started.
202.6.Unless otherwise specified, the measurements and units for payment
shall be the same as those adopted for the construction.
Specification No. 203
Blasting
203.1. Scope :-This specification lays down the requirements for blasting
and related drilling operations in locations other than mines.
203.2. Terminology
203.2.1. Blasting cap :-A shell closed at one end and containing a charge
of detonating compound which is ignited from a spark.
203.2.2. Detonator :-The term shall include igniters, blasting caps, electric
blasting caps or other similar devices used to explode commercial explosives'
203.2.3. Electric blasting Caps :-A shell containing a charge,of detonating
compound which is ignited by an electric current from two projecting insulated leg
wires.
203.2.4. Explosive ;-Any mixture or chemical compound which is capable
of producing an explosion by its own energy like black powder, dynamite,
nitroglycerine compounds and fulminate.
203.2.5. Magøzine :- Any building or other structure used for the storage
of explosives.
203.2.6. Missed hole :- A drilled hole containing an explosive charge that
failed to eiplode.
203.2.7. Permqnent blasting wires :-Those wires between the firing
switches, for use in blasting, where the power source is an electric circuit.
203.2.8. Primer:-A explosive catridge with a detonator or ingiting agent
inserted therein.
203.2.9. Safety fuse :-A medium manufactured especially for firing
explosive charges, that conveys a flame at a uniform rate.
 168 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

203.2.10. stemming:-Material used for confining a charge of explosives

in a hole or to cover explosives in mudcapping.
203.3. General :

203.3.2. All the rclevant central, State and Local Laws and Rules and

203.3 thoroughly acquainted with the details

handling
of ons shall be employed by the Blasting
Contractor. be supervised by a càmpetent anã
experienced

203.3.4. Blasting in unrestricted areas shall be carried out during fixed

hours every day or on fixed days in the week. This information shall be amply
il
publicized and the following precautions observed.
(a) .on the project-sites, where regular blasting operations are carried out, 1

daily blasting hours shall be clearly painted on the sþn'boards on all the roads
{
approaching in that area.
(b) Road closing barriers shall be provided to close the traffic on these
roads, at least 400 meters away from where the firing is to take place.

- (c) Red flags shall be prominently away all around

the area to be blasted and proper precautions aken by clearing
all the persons froin the flagged area at Ie firing.

co
wa
tii
tingui "i'ìi;
n shall
be s.

for the safe custody and proper

to
acc
acc
i:,T"iï:i,:T'åxî"î':îï
contractor shall be liable for
penal action.
203.3.6. No explosives shall be abandoned. They shall be disposed off or
in accordance with the approved methods. The contractor shall
destroyed strictly
s.s. 203 DISMANTLING OF BLDS., BLASTING, ETC. 169

be solely responsible for damages to property and any accidents which may occur
to workmen or any other persons due to any or all the operations connected with
storing and handling or use of explosives and blasting.
203.4. Materials, tools and equipment :-The black powder explosives,
detonators, fuses, tamping materials, electrical firing equipment is used, tools for
drilling holes and tamping shall be subject to the approval of the Executive
Engineer. The Executive Engineer may specify the type of explosives to be allowed
in special cases. The fuse to be used in wet locations shall be sufficiently water
resistant as to be unaffected when immersed in water for 30 minutes. The rates
of burning of the fuse be uniform and definitely known to permit such a safe length
being cut as will permit sufficient time to the firer to reach a place of safety before
explosion takes place. It shall not be more than 600mm. per minute. The length
of a fuse shall not be less than l200mm. Detonators shall be capable of giving
effective blasting of the explosives. The blasting powder, explosives, detonators,
fuses, etc., shall be fresh and not damaged due to dampness, moisture or any other
cause, They shall be inspected before use and the damaged articles discarded totally
and removed immediately.
203.5. Procurement :-All blasting materials shall be procured only from
standard firmsor licensed dealers.
203.6. Transportation :
203.6.1. In cases where explosive¡ are required to be transported and stored
at site, relevant clauses ofExplosives Rules, 1940 or as amended subsequently shall
be complied with.
203.6.2. Where the magazines are located near the construction site and
bf asting operations continue daily, actual requirements of explosives shall be drawn
from the magazlne and transported to the site. Any lefÌ-overs shall be returned to
the magazine each time after the blast. In case of work at scattered places and for
a small duration portable magazines shall be used and kept within a fence in a safe
place and properly guarded. Detonators and other explosives for blasting shall be
transported to site ofwork in original containers or in separate securely locked non-
metallic containers and shall not be carried loose or mixed with other materials.
203.6.3. For carrying a small quantity (approximately 5 kg. of explosives)
specially designed insulated containers may be used. Thesd containers shall be
constructed of finished wood not less than 50mm. thick or plastic not less than
6mm. thick or pressed fibre not less than lOmm. thick. There shall be not metal
parts (not even nails, bolts, screws, etc.) and the container shall be water pioof and
provided with a lid. The container shall be provided with a suitable non-conductive
carrying device, such as rubber, leather or canvas handle or strap.
203.6.4. Vehicles to be used for transporting explosives shall be in good
working condition and shall have a tight wooàen oi non-sparking metal (copper,
brass and the like) floor, with sides and ends high enough to prevent the explosive
from falling ofthe vehicle. In open-bodied vehicles, the explosives shall be covered
with a water pr-oof and fire-resistant tarpaulin. Electrical wiring in vehicles shall
be fully insulated so as to prevent the chances of short circuiting and at least two
 170 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

fire extinguishers of Carbon tetrachloride type shall be carried. The vehicle shall
be properly, marked so as to give adequate warning to the public in regard to the
nature of cargo. No metals except approved metal truck bodies shall be allowed
to come in contact with cases of explosives.
203.6.5. Loading and unloading of explosives shall be done carefully.

. 203.6.6. Explosive and detonators or blasting caps shall not be permitted

to be transported in tfie same vehicle. Metal flammablé or ðorrosive substances shall
not be transported with explosives, As far as possible transportation of any other
material with explosives shall be prohibited.
203.6.7. No unauthorised persons shall be allowed in the i,ehicle carrying
explosives.
203.6.8. Smoking shall be prohibited in the vehicle carrying explosive.
203.7. Storage :
203.7.1. Storage of explosives is regulated by the Indian Explosives Act
and provisions there under shall be strictly observed. ihe magazine fór storage of
explosives shallbe built to the designs and specifications of the Eiplosives Department
and located at the approved site,
203.7.2. Explosives shall be stored only in a magazine which is clean, dry,
well-ventilated, reasonably cool, correct located, substantially constructed, bullei
and fire resistant and securely locked.
203.7 .3 ' Precautions against lightning shall be provided in accordance
with
the Indian Electricity Act and the Indian Explosives Act.
203'7.4. The following shall be hung in the lobby of the magazirle:
(a) A copy of rules both in English and in the language with which the
workers concerned are familiar.
(b) A statement of up-to-date stock in the Magazine.
(c) A certificate showing the last date of testing of the lightning conductor.
(d) A notice that smoking is strictly prohibited.
203.7.5. Blasting caps, electric blasting caps or primers shall not be stored
in the same box, container or room with othér eiplosives.

.203.7.6. Explosives,.fuse or fuse lighter shall not be stored in a damp or

wet place or near oil, gasoline, cleaning solutions or solvents or near radiaiors,
steam pipes or other sources of heat.
203.7.7 . No sparking metal or sparking metal tools shall be stored in
an
explosives magazine. Persons entering the magazine shall put on magazine shoes,
which shall be provided at the magazine for the purpose.
203.7.8. smoking shall not be permitted with in the fencing around the
explosive magazjne, nor matches, open lights or other fire or flame shail be allowed
near the magazine. Warning noticei to this effect shall be displayed at conspicuous
places.
 S.S. 203 DISMANTLING OF BLDS., BLASTING, ETC. I7I
203'7'9. Oily cotton rag Ìr/aste, and articles liable to spontaneous ignition
shall not be allowed inside the magazine.

203.7.11. No leaves, grass, brush or debris of any kind shall be allowed

to accumulate with 8m. of an explosives magazine.
203.7.12. The magazine shall on no account be opened during a thunderstorm
or when one is expected and no porson shall remain in the vicinity ãf tn" magazine
during such periods
203.8. Handling :
203.8.1. Any package
-
or handled roughly. The explos
s shall not be dragged, dropped
e opcned only at à safe distance
and properly shielded from th sivès in builã storage.
203.8.2. sparking metal tools shall not be used to open wooden or fibre
board cases of explosives.
203.8.3. The covers of the explosive cases or packages shall be replaced
every time soon after taking out part of the content; as long ãr uny explosives
are
left in them.

_ 203.8'4. Explosives shail not be placed where they may be exposed to

flame, excessive heat, sparks or impact.
203.8.5. Smoking shall not be permitted nor matches, open rights, fire,
flame or any other device capable of producing sparks or flame shall be carried
while handling or using explosives.
203.8'6. Explosives shall not be carried in the pockets by any person.
203.8.7. No person shall handle, use or be near explosives during the
approach orprogress of a thunderstorm, All persons shall retireìo a place of sãfety.
203.8.8. children and unauthorised or unnecessary persons shall not be
present where explosives are being handled or used.
203.8.9. Nothing shall be inserted in the open end of blasting cap except
fuses.

. .203.8.10. No persons shall strike, tamper with or attempt to remove or

investigate the contents of a blasting cap or an electric blasting .äp o, attempt
to
pull out the crimped safety fuse out of a blasting cap.
203,8.11. Primers shall not be madeup in a magazine or near excessive
quantity of explosiveness or in excess of immediate needs.
203.8.12. No attempt shall be made to reclaim or use fuses, blasting caps
or electric blasting caps or any other explosives which may have been water soaked
even if they have been dried out. The manufacturer strit ue consulted.
 _I
it

112 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

203.8,1 3. No attempt shall be made to soften hard-set explosives by heating

ovcr a fire or by rolling the explosives on the ground.
203.8.14. Deteriorated or damaged explosives or blasting equipment shall
not be used, but shall be disposed and destroyed as per approved methods.
203.9. Drilling :-
203.9.1 .
Before planning the drilling operations for blasting purposes, nature
of startum and the over burden shall necessarily be examined to avoid possibilities
of land slides after blasting.
203.g.2. The face of rock shall be carefully examined before drilling to
determine the possible presence of unfired explosives. No attempt shall be made
to drill at a site if uncletonated explosives are suspected.
203.9.3. The position of all holes to be drilled shall be marked out with
circies in white paint. The bore holes shall be jumped or drilled in the rock face,
A bore hole near another hole loaded with explosives shall be sprung.
203.9.4. The charge holes shall be drilled to required depths in suitable
places. The bore holes shall be carefully checked for length, presence ofwater, dust,
etc., with a wooden tamping pole or a measuring tape before loading.
203.9.5. A bore hole shall not be loaded with explosives after springing
(enlarging the hole with explosives) or upon completion of drilling without making
surc that it is cool and that it does not contain any hot metal, burning or smouldering
material. Tctnperatures in cxcess of 65"C are dangerotts.
203.9.6. Surplus explosives shall not be stacked near working areas during
loading.
203.9.7. No loose materials such as tools, drilling implements, etc., shall
be left on the rock surfaces to be blasted.
203.10. Loading :

203.10.1. Loading with btock powder :-Blasting shall normally be done

with black powder. When blasting is done with powder, the fuse cut to the required
in
length shall be Powder shall
be gentlytamped Powder shall
then be covered d lightlY but
firmly.
203.10.2. Loading with high explosives :

203.10.2.1. High explosives shall only be used in special cases with the
written permission of the Executive Engineer. When blasting is done with dynamite
and other high explosives, dynamite cartrid$es are prepared by inserting the required
cut end of a fuse into detonator and finishing it with nippers at the open end. The
detonators shall be gently pushed into the primer leaving one-third of the copper
tube or an
elect made
with ading
wire ectric
s.s. 203 DISMANTLING OF BLDS., BLASTING, ETC. 173

blasting cap from the exPl

up and securely bound wi
explosive. Bore holes shall
The holes shall be cleared
be used for inserting cartridges or any explosives into a bore hole or passing any
obstruction in a bore hole. The space for above 200mm. the charge is then gently
filled with e and of anY
convenient with artridge
shall be on taken leading
wire or the not g charge'

203.10.2.2. Explosive cartridge shall not be c¡t nor explosive removed

from the cartridge for use,

203.10.2.3. No attempt shall be made to slit, drop, deform or abuse the

primer.
203.10.2.4. Blasting caps or electric blasting caps shall not be connected
to detonating fuses except by methods recommended by the manufacturers of caps.
203,10.2.5. Kinking or injuring of fuse or electric blasting cap wires shall
be avoided, when tamping.
203.10.2.6. Metallic devices of any kind shall not be used in tampering.
Wooden tamping tools with no exposed metal parts except non-sparking metal
connectors for jointed poles shall be used, Violent tamping shall be avoided' Primer
shall not be tamped.
203.10.2.7. Care shall be taken to confine the explosiveness in the bore
hole with sand, earth, clay or other suitable stemming material.
203.11. Firing :-
203.11.1 . General:-Firing may be done either with safety fuses or by
electrical ignition. The blasting site shall not be approached within 5 minutes of
firing to permit toxic gases to disperse. After the blast the contractor's Supervisor
shall inspect the work and satisfy himself that all the charged holes have been
exploded before workmen are permitted to approach the site. All holes loaded in
a shift shall be fired in the same shift.
203J1.2. Firing with søfety fuse :-The number of holes to be loaded and
fired at one time shall in no case be more than the limit fixed by the Executive
Engineer. The safety fuses of the charged holes shall be ignited in the presence
of a competent and experienced Supervisor of the contractor who shall see that all
the fuses are properly ignited. The firer after igniting the fuses shall run to a place
of safety which is generally dictated by the burning time of the fuses. Utmost care
shall be taken to count the number of loud reports to ensure that all the shorts have
fired.
203.11.3. Electrical firing :

203.11.3.1. Only the Supervisor incharge shall possess the key of the firing
appararus and þe shall keep it always himself.
 174 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

203.11.3.2. Special apparatus shall be used as a source of current for the

blasting operations. Power lines shall not be tapped for the purpose.
203.11.3.3. The cletonators shall be checked before use.
203.11.3.4. For blasts in series, only detonators of the same manufacture
and of the same group of electrical resistance shall be used.
ch of the electrical lines as could constitute danger for the
I be removed from the site. The firing cable sllall have a
r so as to avoid shofi circuit due to contact with water,
203'11.3.6. The use of earth as a retum rine shall not be permitted.
203.11.3.7. The firing cable shall be connected to the source of current
only when no-body is in the area of blasting.
203'l 1.3.8. Before firing, the circuit shall be checked by a suitable apparatus.
203,11 '3.9 ' After firing whether with or without an actual blast the
contact
between the firing cable and the source ofcurrent shall be cut offbefore
any people
are allowed to leave the shelters.

lectrical detonators shall be

shall be blasted as quickly as
ing necessary warning signals.
till the storm has passed.
203.12. Misfired Holes :

(a) If the misfire is due to a faulty cable or faulty electrical connection,

the defect shall be remedied and the shot fired.
(b) The stemming by use of water or air jet from a
hole until the hole has bee 600mm. of the charge of half the
depth of the stemming, wh I be syphoned or pumped out and I

then a fresh (new) charge

l
(c) A new hole shall be drilled 600mm, away from the old bore and
parallel to it and about 300mm. less in depth and the new hole charged and duly
fired. The missed hole shall also explode along with the new one.
203.12.2. A careful search shall be made of unexploded material in the
debris of the second charge.
203.12.3. Before leaving the work the blasting Supervisor of thc contractor
of one shift shall inform in writing the blasting Supervisor of the contractor of the

I
S.S. 203 DISMANTLING OF BLDS., BLASTING, ETC. 175

next shift ofany cases ofmisfire and shall point out the holes denoted by red cross
and also state the action, if any, to be taken in the matter.
203.13. Measurement :-This shall conform to clause 201.10.
Pre-measurements shall be taken and got check measured before blasting
ôperations are started. When pre-measurements are not directly possible, the quantities
may be arrived at by measuring compactly formed stacks of blasted rock or boulders
duly deducting 40% or higher percentage towards boids as may be directed by the
Executive Engineer.
203.14. Rate :-The unit rate shall be per cu.m.
 I

t76 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 3
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR EARTH \ryORK
!

CONTENTS
.t/. Specif cation Name of Specification Page
No No. Nos.
t. 30r Excavation & forming uncompacted banks 176
2. 302 Embankments compacted by other than power
driven equipment 180
303 Embankments compactecl by power driven equipment l8r
304 Clay blankets 186
305 Filters 187
306 Rock-fill in toe of embankment 188
301 Turfing 188
308 Excavation of foundations 189
309 Filling in foundations l9l
310 Filling in basement 191
311 Well Sinking for foundations 192
312 Well Sinking for water supply 194
313 R.C.C. Precast and Cast-in-situ pile foundations 195

Speciflcation No. 301

Excavation and Forming Uncompacted Banks
l.l. Scop. '-1¡ris specification applies to ains,
etc., wh the excavated sotr *.¿ not be formed
or and
also whr breaking clods, ramming un.'r *""i,..iLnlng
ired.
3.2. Excavation :

3t'2.1 . Draìn or canar sections shall be excavated as specified or as

directed the Executive Engineer. Both the inner edges ofthe bank
shall be neatly
aid symfrically to the centre line of t re channel. They shall
as far as possible
ta.straig in straight rea.ches and smoothly curved on
bends. Alr gangways,
pathwaysrd landings shall be such that they
fall within the canal section so that
final dre$g of slope shall consist of cutting only and not
filling.
301.2. suitable arrangements shall be provided to divert surface
drainage
:learof th ercavation during the work. Sump pits may
be excavateà at suitable
llace andhrwater thus collãcted may be pump.a out ôr let into a nearby
valley.
301.11. In case ground water table is met during excavation
Il?eaures sh/ be taken adequate
for dewatering. The method adoptãd to dewater depends
s.s. 301 EARTH V/ORKS t77

upon the type of sub-soil strata met with and the quantity of ground to be removed
tó keep the sub-soil water table below the level of the excavation'

All Dimensions in Metres

[Fig. 301.1. 1 to 10]

LIFT = % IA+BI+C LIFT = % IA+BI+C

LIFT = % [A+e¡+ç LIFT = % [A+e¡+ç

T
B

---lÍ,---- ¡
c

L|FT = % lA+Bl+C LIFT = lz lA+Bl+ç,

LlFl = /" [A+Bl+C2+Ca LIFT = lz [A+B]+Cr+C2+Ca

LIFT = y2 [A+B]+Cí+C2 LIFT = lz [A+B]+Cí+C2+Ca

IAPDSS - l2l
178 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

301.2.4. If there is a continuous spring of water a sub-drain with sumps

at intervals may be provided. Excavation shall be done from down-stream side to
up-stream side so as to facilitate easy drainage to the nearest natural drainage
course.
301 .2.5. In case of canals to be lined sub-soil water shall not be allowed
to accumulate in the canal bed and the dewatering arrangements shall be so organised
as to deal with the rain water also.
301.2.6. Excavation may be carried out by manual labour or by suitable
machinery.
\ùy'hile excavating in rocky strata abive the lining in case of lined
301.2.7.
sections and above the F.S.L. in case of unlined sections, the rock may be allowed
to stand at the slope shown in the relevant drawings and no finishing is required
other than removal of rock masses which are loose and are liable to fall.
301.2.8. Boulders which may interfere with the work shall be removed.
301 .2.9. Rock Excavation :

301 .2.9.1. Rock excavation shall be carried out by any of the following
methods as may be specified by the Executive Engineer.
(a) Excavation by hand with suitable rock wedges, hammers, steel bars,
picks, etc. ;

(b) Excavation by pneumatic or other power tools ;

(c) Excavation by blasting; and

(d) Excavation by any other approved method.
301.2.9.2. During rock excavation over hangs or unsafe slopers shall not
be pcrmitted.
301.2.9.3. Blasting when required shall be done in accordance with SS 203
"Blasting".
301 ,2.9.3.1. In order to minimise over break and loosening of material at
the finished surface final cutting for the last 450mm. to 600mm. in hard rock shall
be carried out by controller blasting or trimming or with the help of pneumatic or
other power tools.
301 .2,9.3.2. Unless otherwise specified the over break shall not exceed
75mm. and the estimates shall be prepared taking into account this over breakage.
301.3. Forming unconsolidated Banks :
301.3.1. Spoil from the excavation shall be deposited on banks to such
sections as are shown on the relevant plans, specified or ordered by the Executive
Engineer. Ramming, breaking clods and smooth surface sectioning shall not be
necessary but a spoil bank with a neatly aligned toe, even slopes and even top
surface shall be formed as the depositing proceeds,
301.3.2. Deduction from the earthwork rate as decided by the Executive
Engineer shall be made for careless deposition.
s.s. 301 EARTH WORKS r79

301.4. Measurement :-All linear,measurement shall be in metres correct

to 0.01 of a metre and volumes worked out in cubic metre correct to 0.01 of a
cubic metre.
301.4.1. All original works shall be measured by levels, except for
foundations for buildings and trenches for pipe lines, etc., for which the quantities
shall be worked out by pit measurements.
301.4.2. Repair works such as slit clearance in canals and distributaries,
raising of the standards of tanks, canals and distributaries and widening of road
formations and any other works as may be directed by the Executive Engineer shall
be measured by levels.
301.4.3. Earthwork for repair works such as filling up of gullies and pot
holes and making up of berms of roads and any other works as directed by the
Executive Engineer shall be calculated by pit measurements'
301 .4.4. Earthwork for emergent repair works such as forming of ring
bunds for restoring the breached portions of tanks, canals and distributaries, etc.,
and for closing breaches on roads shall be calculated by pit measurements.
301.4.5. Where pit measurements are taken they shall be checked \'/ith the
help of thandoos which shall be left for the purpose and maintained until the check-
m"àtur.*"ttts of the work are completed. Wherever pit measurements are taken
deductions shall be duly made for boulders, vegetation, thandoos which are not
made use of and for losses of earth in transit'
301.4.6. The mode of taking measurements and making payments, that is,
whether by levels or by pit measurements shall be incorporated in the tender
schedules and the agreement bonds,
301 .4.7. Where payments are made with reference to levels, the L'F. Books,
the section sheets (in which the levels are plotted) and the calculation sheets shall
be treated as adjuncts to the measurement books.
301.4.8. For embankment works which are to be paid, based on levels the
rate shall be worked out taking into account the field density, the proctor's density
and shrinkage, etc.
301.4.9. Wherever soils harder than those contemplated in the original
sanctioned estimate are met with during actual execution in excavation works on
account of which excess over the original sanctioned estimate is involved, the levels
shall be test-checked by the Executive Engineer.
301.5. Rate :

301.5.1. The unit rate shall be per l0 cubic metres and shall include the
initial rate for excavating, dressing, bed and sides to exact sections of working
plans, conveyance and depositing to the requirements of this specification, inclusive
of l0 metres of initial lead and 2 metres of initial lift, providing and forming model
sections, lock spittings, strings and stakes as may be considered necessary by the
Executive Engineer to guide the contractor in excavating in depositing. Extra leads
 180 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

and lifts shall be paid for separately when the material is convcyed by head loads.
\ilhcn conveyance charges are paid for transporting the material, no separatc charge
for extra leads and lifts shall be paid.
301.5.1.1. Leads and Lifts:
(i) "Leacl' is the horizontal distance between the ccntral line of the pit
cross scction and the central line of the bank which is formed with the excavated
earthy. "Earth lead" by head-load will be the "lead" as above defined less an initial
lead of ten metrcs. For every extra lead of ten metres or part thereof payment will
be madc at thc contact schedule rate.
(ii) "Lift" is the vertical distancc obtained by adding up, A, B and C where :

(A) half the depth of pit actually excavated ;

(B) half the nraximum height of thc bank formed with the
excavated earth over existing ground or bank; and
(C) the difference betwecn the top level of pit actually excavated
' and the lcvel abovc which the bank is formed.
Figurcs 301-l I to l0 illustrate the method to calculate the value of c in
different circumstances (on page 177).

"Extra lift" by head load will bc the sum of A, B and C as above defined
lift of two metros. For every "extra lift" of one metre or part thereof
less an initial
payment will bc made at the contract schedule rate.
301 .5.2. In case of rock the rate shall be per cubic metre. The rate shalr
include the permissible over breakage of 75 mm. \ilhen measurement is not directly
possible from the sections, it may be arrived at by measuring compactly formed
stacks of the excavated rock. Deduction of 40 percent or higher percentage as may
be directed by thc Executive Engineer shall be made to allow for the voids.
301.5.3. Excavation in earthwork beyond the sections shown on the plans
shall not be measured for ¡.raymcnt. In the case of rock-excavation also the
overbreakage of 75mm. refened to clause 301.5.2 shall not be measured for payment
and therefore the contractor while quoting his rate for rock excavation has to take
into account the permissible over breakage of 75mm.
301.5.4. Dewatering :-unless specially provided for as a separate item in
the contracts, the excavation rate shall include baling or pumping out all water
which may accumulate in the excavation during the progress of the work either
from seepage, springs or rain and divertion of surface flows if any by bunding or
other means.

Specification No. 302

Embankments Compacted by other than Power Driven Equipment
302,1. Scope :-This specification applies to low embankments of canals
and drains, flood banks, tank bunds and road embankments including reforming
of breached embankments, etc., which have to be compacted by methods other than
power driven equipment.
S.S. 303 EARTH WORKS l8r

302.2. selection and Demarcation of borrow area :-This shall conform

to clause 303.2.
302,3. Borrowing of soils :-This shall conform to clause 303'3'

embankment to the required section.

302.5. Tests :-This shall conform to clause 303.8.
302.6. Measurement :-This shall conform to clause 303'9'
302,7. Rate :-This shall conform to clause 303.10'
Specification No. 303
Embankments Compacted by Power Driven Equipment
303.1. Scope :-This specification applies to earthdams, embankments to
canals and drains, flood banks, tank bunds and road embankments including reforming
or breached embankments etc., when compacted with power driven equipment.
303.2. Selection and Demarcation of Borrow Areas :
303.2.1. Investigation :

303.2.1.1. Trial pits:-To ascertain the suitability of soils for embankment

purpose taken by excavating trial pits not only in the borrow
area at as to cover the whole area; but also from soils got
from fo r excavations. Generally the dimensions of the trial
pits shall be one metre by one metre upto about 1% metres depth and for deeper
pitt p.op"r slopes shall be given (so that the soil may not slip in) either by
ãxcavating in stips or by excavating in slopes. The bottom section of the pit shall
not be more than one metre by one metre.
In soils where the pit walls do not safely stand by themselves, shoring,
strutting or cribbing etc., shall be resorted to. The excavated earth from the trial
pits shall be thrown at a minimum distance of 2 metres from the top edge.
303.2.1.2. Sampling :-Representative soil samples in required quantities
shall be collected from the trial pits and shall be clearly identified by the trial pit
number and the levels at which the samples are taken. Undisturbed samples where
required shall be collected in accordance with the procedure laid down in IS : 2132-
1972 "Code of Practice for thin walled tube sampling of soils".
303.2.1.3. Testing & Selection of suitable soils :-The soil samples collected
as above shall be tested in accordance with the relevant Indian Standards for the
following properties to assess their suitability for embankments :
(a) Grain size analysis.
 182 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
(b) Aterburg's limits.
(") Shrinkage Iimit.
(d) Optimum Moisture content.
(e) Proctor's density.
(Ð Shear strength at optimum moisture content and l00yo
saturation.
(g) permeability at proctor's Density.
Additional tests shall be conducted where so required.
303.2.2. Demorcation of serected borrow areas:-Thewhore
area used for
borrowing soils shall be clearly demarcated by means
of p"g, or'bioundary stones.

303.3. Borrowing of Soils :

ufficient quantities of soils are not available in the
they shall be borrowed from elsewhere. In this case
the
areas shall be done on the same principles as
for the

303.3.2. Borrow pits :

3 pits shall not normally be more than 25m. in length,

lOm. in pth. A clear spacing of one metre between each
shall be pit
be clearly peg marked and number tags of the pits
shall be
303.3'2.2' In the case of earth dams unress otherwise specifiedthe borrow
pits shall not be located within a distance of l0
times rhe heigh;;f th, embankment
on the up-stream side and two times the height of
the embã'nkr"ni'on the down-
stream side.
303.3.2.3. The depth of the pits shafl be so regulated that their
botrom does
not cut the hydrauric gradient rine having a slope oi¿ , l f.",,, ih; top edge of
the embankment.
303'3.2.4' In no case the pits shall be located within 5m. from
the toe of
the embankment, If there are old piis in the borrow
area the new pits shail be located
onc metre away from them.
303.4. Excavation :-Excavation of borrow soils shall be done
either (a)
by manual labour or (b) by mechanicar methods using earth
*ou;ng machinery.
 EARTH WORKS 183
s.s. 303

303.4,1. Excsvation of Borrow pits by Manuql Labour z

303.4.1.1. Vy'hile excavation borrow pits, ramps and steps shall be left of
the easy carrying of the soils to the top.

and check measured.

303.4.1 bottom of the bonow pits shall be excavated
level and the shall be inter connected with a drain so as to
drain off the er into the natural stream or valley course'
303.4.2. Excqvation wilh earth moving equipment :-The earth moving
machinery to be used shall be selected depending upon the nature of the work
involved.
303.5. Moisture control st borrow areas :---The moisture content of the

to the optimum moisture content.

303.6. Forming of Embankment :

shall be lock
sp all be marked
at s' This Profile
sh for trimming
of loose soils from the edges after compaction of the embankment.
303.6.2. Preparation of Sub'Grade :

303.6.2.1. Clearing site shall confrons S'S. : 201.

303.6.2.2. StriPPing :

303.6.2.2.1. Top soil where it contains vegetable matter, grass or shrub

roots or loose unsuitable soils, etc., shall be stripped to a minimum depth of 150mm.
or to a greater depth where so specifìed.
303.6.2.3. ScariJìcation:- The surface on which the embankment is laid
shall be loosened or scarified by means of a plough or ripper or any other method
to the satisfaction of the Executive Engineer'
303.6.2.4. Sloping grou benching shall be done
with a little slope towards the as to give a good grip
to the embankment soil with the specified benches shall
be 450mm. x 450mm.
 t84 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

303.6.2.5. Exposed rock:- where rock is met with it shall be benched

or othcrwise treated as specified by the Executive Engineer.
303.6.2.6. Unless otherwise specified boulders shall be broken if necessary
and removed.
303.6.3. Junctions..
303'6'3.1. The junctions between the old and the new embankments
shall
be benched to a slope of 4 : I to ensure proper bond.
303.6.4. Spreading of Soils :
303.6'4.1. No stones, iobbres having maximum dimension of more
than
l00mm. size shall be placed in the earth fill. All clods which can
not get crushed
shall be broken into smaller pieces.
303.6.4.2. Thickness of horizontar rayers:-An earth used for embankment
or cut off trenches where so provided shail bó spreacr in horizontal
rayers of l00nlm.
to 250 mm' beforc compaction depending upon the type of eq'iiment
used.
303.6.4.3. Zonar sectionç :-In Zonar sections the selected and
approved
soils shall be spread to the required widths. All the Zones
shall be tackled
simultaneously and the difference in level between zone
to zone shall not be more
than 150 mm.
303.6.4.4' on resuming work each day or after an interval of a
few days
or when work is not done in continuity, the prãvious rayer
shail be weil rakecr and
water sprinkled over it before the fresh rayèr is laid ãnd
compacted.
303.6.5. Moisture content:-The moisture content in soir for embankment
and for filling of cut off trenches shall be determined by
tests in accordance with
IS : 2720. If the moisture content is below the optimum moisturs
content for the
gìven compaction, then necessary water shal be added
uv ,prinHrng and the oil
shall be compacted. If the moisture content of the soir i,
molsture content then it shall be allowed to dry down to-o."
tt un ur" optimum
the optimum moisture
content and then compacted. The moisture content shall
be uniform throughout the
layer of material and proughing, disking, harrowing or other
methods of mixing
may be acquired of obtain uniform distribution.
303.6.6. Compaction :-Compaction shall
wheeled rollers, pneumatic type roìlers, sheep
programmers, power rammers and such other equ
number of passes of different types of rollers to
testing the density of the compacted soils at site
specifìed passes of the rollers. The number of passes shall
be those at which the
required c
tests for each type of

Each
in the
pass
soils. Roll

pre
ï:ï:liillii'ïil'J;
l
be made on each compacted layer and
unless otherwise specified dry density attained shall not less
tiran 9g% of the .
maximum dry density (standard proctor) for the type of materials
used. The earth
moving machinery shall not be allowed to pass over a compacted porlion
of the
S.S. 303 EARTH WORKS I85

embankment beyond a certain limit by varying the hauling routes and ramps, thus
ensuring that over compaction does not take place in any particular reach.
303.6.7. Special precautions :-Daring construction a small transverse slopes
from centre towards the edges shall be given and fulther in the reach where the
earth dam is being raised, the work will be tackled in continuous horizontal layers,
to avoid pools of water and concentration flow of water during rains, which will
cause dangerous scours and rain gullies.
Special precautions shall also be taken while rolling the spread soil near
structures, conduits, sluice barrels, filters and rock toes etc., as detailed below :
303.6,7 .1. Neqr Structures :-The roller shall not operate within one metre
of exterior walls of the structures. The portion of the embankment where the roller
is not permitted shall be compacted to the required density by such other means
as specified by the Executive Engineer.
303.6.7.2. Around the conduits and sluice barrels :-The earth shall be
rolled evenly on both sides ofthe conduits, sluice barrels etc., so that there is equal
pressure on the sluice or conduits from both the sides. Rolling shall be permitted
over conduits and sluice barrels only after providing the specified cushion of earth
over them. This cushion of earth shall be compacted to the required density by such
other means as specified by the Executive Engineer.
303.6.7.3. At junctions with embankment :-Compaction at the junctions
shall be done carefully by taking the roller well over the benched slope of the
embankment. In case the whole length of the embankment is not formed
simultaneously and a portion of the reach is formed, the slope of the bending surface
between the previously compacted portions of the embankment and materials to
be placeid in each zone shall not be steeper than 4 : l.
303.6.7.4. In zonal sections :-In Zonal sections the required compaction
for each zone shall be achieved by regulating the number of passes of the order
in the different zones in accordance with clause 303.6.6 and the level of any zone
shall not exceed the level of the adjacent zone by more than 150 mm.
303.6.7.5. In cut off trenches:-Rolling shall be done along the cut off
trench and the roller shall be taken close to the sides of the trench. In cases where
the compaction by rollers is not possible, compaction to the required density shall
be achieved by such other means as specifìed by the Executive Engineer.
303.6.7.6. Reþrming or breached embqnkments :-The breach shall be
cleared of all water, sand, stones, soft mud, slush, vegetable mould, trees, etc., if
any found in the bed and sides ofbreach. Thejunction between old and new banks
shall be joggled and stepped for proper kãying and sloped towards the old
embankment to prevent slipping into the breached site.
303.7. Trimming of Loose Soils after Compaction from sides and ends
:- while marking out the embankment an extra provision of 600mm. shall be made
on either sides so that the roller may be taken as close as possible to the extreme
edges. Later the extra 600mm. width shall be neatly trimmed and the trimmed
material shall be permitted for reuse in the embankment at higher elevations.
 186 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

303.8. Tests :-Quality control tests shall be regularly carried out to

determine the suitability of the soils used for the embankment and to control the
moisture content and ensure that the density as specified in the relevant clauses
has been attained. The number and frequency of such tests shall be as may be
instructed by the Executive Engineer. All tests shall be done in accordance with
the relevant Indian Standards.
303.9. Measurement :
303.9.1. All original works as well as repaii works shall be rneasured as
per the relevant clauses 301.4.1 to 301.4.9.

303.9.3. Removal of roots extending upto l50mm. below stripping levèl

shall not be paid for separately.
303.f0. Rate :

303.10.1. The rate for the embankment shall be for each lOcu.m. of the
compacted section including borrowing soils, transporting, spreading, watering,
compaction, trimming the sides and ends of the embankmenti.
303.10.2. water, if available within the initial read of y, K.M. shall not
be paid for separately.
303.10.3. The rate shall include conveyance of water and earth within
initial leads and lifts. Conveyance over the initiál leads and lifts shall be paid for
separately.
303.10.4. The following items of work shall be included in the rate for
embankment and shall not be paid for :
(a) marking out ;
(b) forming thandoos and their removal after check measurement ;
(.) forming and removal of steps, ramps, benching, battering beyond the
finished profile ;

(d) formation of temporary drains for diversion of surface flows, baling

of seepage water and such other temporary arrangements, unless otherwise provideã
for separately.
Specification No. 304
CIay Blankets
_ 304.1. scope :-clay blankets are made from impervious soils and are
used on the beds of reservoirs or in channels or canals to reduce seepage.
. 301.2. Requirements :-The material used for these purposes, shall be
impermeable, free irom excessive shrinkage and swelling, shall'resìst erosion and
S.S. 305 EARTH V/ORKS I87

have adequate stability. As far as possible, G.C. or S.C. materials shall be used.
When satisfactorily soils are not available, the surface shall be protected with a
blanket of stable gravelly soils if so instructed by the Executive Engineer.
304.3. Laying :-The clay blanket shall be laid and compacted to a length
and depth as specified and as instructed by the Executive Engineer.
304.4. Measurement :-Dimensions shall be measured to the nearest 0.01
metre and volume worked out to the nearest 0.01 cu.m.
304.5. Rate :-The rate for clay blanket shall be for a unit of l0 cu.m.
and shall include all operations of quarrying, transporting, laying, watering,
compaction, etc., complete. The rate shall include conveyance of water and earth
within initials leads and lifts. Conveyance over the initial leads and lifts shall be
paid for separately.
Specification No. 305
Filters
305.1. Scope :-This specification covers filters used for intemal drainage
namely, filter blankets, horizontal and inclined filter drains, longitudinal and transverse
and filters around rock toe and under revetment and riprap, etc.
305.2. Filter Materials :

305.2.1. The filter materials shall consist uf clean, sound and well graded
sand and crushed rock. The materials shall be free from debris, organic matter and
other deleterious matter. It shall be ensured that the surface over which the filter
is laid has been well consolidated to not less than 95Yo of the proctor's density.
305.2.2. For earth dams upto thirty metres height filter materials in contact
with earth or foundation soil shall be of any available clean, well graded sand
having maximum size of 6 mm. This shall be over laid with well graded, hard,
durable coarse aggregate of maximum size 20mm. Over this a layer of hard durable
well graded coarse aggregate of maximum size 25mm. in contact with rock fill/
riprap shall be used.
305.2.3. The thickness of each filter layer shall be not less than 300 mm.
305.2.4. Where the height of earth dam is more than thirty metres, the
gradation of the filter layers shall be more elaborately fixed based on extensive
laboratory studies and shall be specified in the special specifications for the project
works.
305.3. Placing of filter :-The foundation shall be cleared and stripped
in accordance with Specification 338, before laying the bottom layer of filter
material. Filter material shall be laid in layer in l50mm. and compacted to 70%o
relative density by the required number of passes of crawler type tractors or any
other approved method. Watêr as found necessary shall be sprinkled before
compaction. Care shall be taken to ensure that materials of different layers do not
get mixed, both at the time of placing and during compaction. Extreme care shall
be taken when placing materials to obtain a fill free from lenses, layers and streaks
of segregated materials. In the case of horizontal filters, after being compacted,
188 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

earthfill material shall be laid over it in layers of l50mm. and compacted as diiected
by the Executive Engineer. Sheep foot roller shall not be used till earthfill has been
laid and compacted to a thickness of 600mm. over the filter blanket. However, the
construction of earthfill in the initial 600mm. thickness shall be subject the same
quality control regarding moisture content and dry density as for the rest of the
embankment. In the case of inclined filters, the filter shall be raised along with
adjoining embankment layers and shall be properly compacted by suitable means.
In order to avoid contamination of the filters with adjoining earthfill material, the
top of the filter shall be kept slightly higher than the adjacent embankment level
and any contaminated portion shall be scraped and removed before adding the new
layer.
305.4. Measurement ;-All linear measurements shall be in metres, correct
to 0.01 of a metre. Volumes shall be worked out to the nearest 0.01 cu.m.
305.5. Rate :-Unit rate for this item shall be per one cu.m.
Specification No. 306
Rockfill in Toe of Embankment
306.1. Materials :-Rockfill shall consist of sound, durable and well graded
broken rock obtained from approved excavation for the work and/or from approved
quarries and shall be approved prior to being transpofted to the area of deposition.
The materials shall range in size from 75mm. to 450mm. However, no load shall
contain more than 15 per cent by volume or rock fragments smaller than 75mm.
in size. All brush roots, or other perishable material shall be removed from rockfill
during the spreading.
306.2. Placing :-The rockfill shall be placed and packed to obtain a
stable, well graded and free drainingfill. The smaller rock fragments shall be placed
adjacent to the filter of embankment and the large rock fragments near the outer
edge of the fill, The rock fìll shall be placed and roughly levelled in layers not
greater than one metre in thickness. The interstices shall be well filled with spawls
and chips and tightly wedged to ensure firm packing. Rock toe shall be laid true
to specified line and grade.Contamination of the rock with finer materials from any
other zones shall be avoided.
306.3. Measurement :-All linear measurement shall be in metres, correct
to 0.01m. Volume shall be worked out to nearest 0.01 cu.m.
306'4' Rate :-rhc;îÏ:iîi'i,::ïÏ'be per one cum
.
Turfing
307,1. Materials :-Sods of grass which form a thick short turf shall be
used.

307.2. Preparation of Bed :

307.2.1. All areas to be turfed shall be trimmed or filled to the profile
required so that the finished work after laying the sods shall be the required line
and grade.
-
S.S. 308 EARTH WORKS I89

307.2.2. The areas to be sodded shall be free from stones, roots, or other
undesirable foreign material.
307.2.3. The soil on the area to be sodded shall be loosened and raked to
a depth of not less than 25mm. All clods and lumps shall be broken to provide
a uniform texture.
307.2.4. The prepared bed shall be moistened adequately to permit the sods
to adhere properly.
307.3. Sodding :-The sods shall be cut in rectangular shape 80 to l00mm,
thick and laid so that their edges are is close contract and then welded by gently
ramming till they form a level and compact mat.
307.4. Watering :-Sods shall be thoroughly watered immediately after
placing, They shall be kept thoroughly wet for a period of at least seven days after
laying and shall be maintained in a satisfactory wet condition for a period of thirty
days thereafter.
307.5. Rate :

307.5.1. The rate for turfing shall be for a unit of 10 sq,m. of sod in place
and shall include preparation of the bed, supply and laying of the sods, watering
and maintenance for the specified period.
307.5.2. Earthwork for trimming or filling to the required profile shall be
paid for separately.
Specification No. 308
Excavation of Foundations
308.1. Excavation :

308.1.1. Excavation for foundations shall be to the exact dimensions as

specified or as directed by the Executive Engineer.
308,1.2. In firm soil, the sides ofthe excavation shall be kept vertical upto
a depth of 2 metres and for a greater depth, the excavation shall be widened by
allowing steps of 500mm. on either side at every 2 metres depth. Where the soil
is soft, loose or slushy,'the width and depth of the steps shall be suitably altered
or the sides sloped or shored up as directed by the Executive Engineer. It shall
be the responsibility of the contractor to take complete instructions in writing from
the Executive Engineer regarding the stepping, sloping or shoring to be done for
excavations deeper than 2 metres.
308.1.3. The bed ofthe excavation shall be dressed level and rendered firm
by watering and tamping. Any soft pockets occurring in the excavated bed shall
be dug out and filled with concrete of the same mix as the foundation concrete
or as may be directed by the Executive Engineer. If by the contractor's mistake,
the excavation is made to a depth greater than that specified or as required by the
Executive Engineer, the excess depth shall be made good with concrete of the same
proportion at the cost of the contractor.
308.1.4. The foundation excavation shall be inspected and passed by the
Executive Engineer, before the concrete is laid.
 l
190 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

308.1.5. Excavation in Rock :

308.1.5.1. Excavation in rock shall be carried out by crow bars, pick taxes,
chisels or pneumatic drills, etc. Unless permitted, blasting shall not be restored to.
Where blasting is permitted the final section of excavation shall be obtained by
chiselling.
308.2. Disposal of excavated material :

308.2.1. Excavated materials shall not be placed within one metre of the
edge of the excavation or half the depth of the excavation whichever is more or
a greater distance as prescribed by the Executive Engineer. All materials excaùated
shall be the property of Government. Materials suitable and useful for back-filling
or other use shall be stacked separately as directed by the Executive Engineer.
308.3. Protection :

308.3.1. Near towns.and all busy localities foundation excavation shall be

properly fenced and marked within red lights at night to avoid accidents. Adequate
protective measures shall be taken to see that the foundation excavation does not
effect or damage the adjoining structures. The contractor shall be entirely responsible
for any accidents, injury to life and damage to property caused by his negligence.
308.4. Measurement :

308.4.1. The dimensions of the excavation shall be measured to the nearest

0.01m. and volumes worked out to the nearest 0.01 cu.m. I

308.4.2. The measurements for the foundation excavation shall be made

according to the sections shown on the drawing or to such other sections including I
stepping and sloping back as authorised by the Executive Engineer. I

308.4.3. In the case of excavation in rock, when measurement is not

directly possible from sections, it may be arrived at by measuring compacitly
formed stacks of the excavated rock as per clause 301.5.2.
308.5. Rate :

308.5.1, The rate for earthwork shall be for a unit of 10 cu.m. The rate
for excavation in rock shall be for a unit of I c,¡.m.
308.5.2. The rate for excavation shall include the following and no extra
payment shall be made.
(a) Site clearance, such as clearing of shrubs, brushwood, under growth
and small trees not exceeding 300mm. in girth, measured at one metre above ground.
(b) Making out.
(c) Initial lead of l0 metres and initial lift of 2 metres.
(d) Forming temporary steps at sides of deep trenches.
(e) Removing slips and blows during excavation.
(Ð Fencing, protection and other safety measures as specified in clause
308.3.

I
S.S. 3IO EARTH WORKS 19I

(g) All dewatering required during excavation, unless provided for separately
in the agreement.
(h) All shoring, sheeting, planking and strutting etc., unless provided for
separately in the agreement.

Specification No. 309

Fitling in Foundations
309.1. Earth used for back filling shall be free from salts, organic or other
deleterious matter. Unless otherwise directed by the Executive Engineer, G.C. or
S.C. material shall be used. All clods of earth shall be either well powdered or
removed.

309,2, As soon as the construction of the foundation has been completed

and measured, the space all around the foundation shall be cleared of all debris
and filled with earth in layers not exceeding l50mm., each layer being watered and
well compacted before the succeeding layer is laid, care being taken not to disturb
the constructed foundation. The backfill shall be brought to the original ground
surface.

309.2.1. On completion of the structure, the ground shall be carefully

dressed with a gentle outward slope for a distance of 3 metres, all round the
structure, unless otherwise specified or directed by the Executive Engineer.
309.3. Rate :

309.3.1. The unit rate shall be per 10cu.m., and shall include spreading in
layers not exceediúg l50mm, in depth, watering, compaction, levelling and surface
dressing all round.
Specification No. 310
Filling in Basement
310.1. The earth or sand for filling in basement
shall be of approved
quality and free from salts, organic or other deleterious matter.
310.1.1. Expansive soils shall not be used. Also sea sand shall not be used
unless specifically permitted by the Executive Engineer. Where so permitted the
top 300mm. of the filling shall consist of approved earth or sand.
310,2, The surface to receive the filling shall be first cleared, free from
all roots, vegetation or spoil and wetted.
310.2.1. Filling shall be done in layers not exceeding 150mm., each layer
being watered and compacted before the succeeding layer is laid, cafe being taken
not to disturb the structure. The finished level of the filling shall be to the bottom
of the base concrete of the flooring.
310.3. Rate :

310.3.1. The unit rate shall be per l0 cu.m. and shall include the cost of
all the operations described above.
192 THE A.P. STANDAR.D SPECIFICATIONS

Specification No. 311

Well Sinking for Fondations
311.1. General :

3l l.l.l. Well foundation generally consist of steining of masonry (brick

or stone with or without reinforcement) or concrete (plain or reinforced) provided
with a curb at the bottom which is sunk to the required depth by dredging. The
well is then plugged at the bottom with concrete, filled with sand and provided
with a concrete cap at the top.
311.2. Excavation :

311.2.1. If the river bed is dry, open excavation shall be carried to a depth
just above the water level or to such depth as may be specified before the curb
is laid. Open excavation shall conform to SS : 308.
311 .2.2. Where it is necessary to sink foundation wells in standing water,
unless otherwise specified by the Executive Engineer, an island of sand or earth
shall be formed before laying the curb. The island shall extend at least 3 metres
beyond the outer periphery of the wells to be sunk. The material forming the island
shall be free from all stones and other hard materials which are liable to impede
the sinking of the well and shall be brought.up atleast 500mm. above the water
level. The sides of the island shall be adequately protected from erosion.
311.3. Curb :

31 l 3.1. The curb shall be made of reinforced concrete with a cutting edge
provided where necessary with a steel shoe.
311.3.2. The curb shall be laid truly in position and level.
311.3.3. Cement concrete for the curb shall be of the grade not less than
M 150. The concreting of the curb shall be done in one continuous operation.
311.4. Steining :

311.4.1. Cement concrete for steining shall be of grade not less than M
100. V/here bricks are used for steining they shall have a strength not less a than
75 Kg.lcm2. The moftar for brick or stone masonry shall be of cement mortar (l:3).
311.4.2. The steining shall be built in one straight line from bottom to top.
In no case shall it be built in plumb at intermediate stage when the well is titled.
311.4.3. The steining shall be built in true shape both on the inner and
outer edges.
311.4.4. The height of the steining built at any stage shall be such that the
well does not loose stability.
311.5. Sinking :

3l 1.5.l. Sinking shall be commenced only after the steining is cured atleast
for 48 hours.
311.5.2. The sinking of the well shall proceed uniformly so that the well
does not go out of position or out of plumb beyond the specified tolerance.
S.S. 3II EARTH WORKS 193

311.5.3. Dredging may be done manually or mechanically.

311.5.4. Kentledge or sinking load shall be placed in an orderly and safe
manner so that it shall not interfere with dredging or damage the steining of the
well.
3l1.5.5. Wells shall not be dewatered during sinking without the specific
permission of the Executive Engineer.
311.5.6. Water jetting may be used where necessary to facilitate sinking.
311.5.7. Blasting may be resorted to only with the specific permission of
the Executive Engineer. \ühere so permitted light charges placed below the level
of the cutting edge and fired under water shall be used so as not to damage the
steining.
3l 1.5.8. As sinking proceeds a record ofthe different kinds ofsoil penetrated
by the well shall be kept by preserving suitable soil samples. Necessary insilø tests
may be conducted where so required.
311.5.8.1. Suitable gauges shall be painted on the outside of the well
steining to provide a continuous indication of the depths cast or sunk.
311.5.9. All precautions shall be taken against possible damage to the
foundations of structures in the vicinity of the wells prior to commencement of
dredging of the material from inside of the well.
3 I I .5.9. I . Careful watch shall be kept during sinking and any tilts developed
shall be immediately attended to. Whenever the well shows a tendency for tilting,
adequate preventive measures shall be taken by shifting the kentledge, controlling
the dredging, jetting or by any other approved means.
311.5.9.2. Blasting shall not be permitted before 24 hours have elapsed
since the last course of masonry or concrete has been laid.
311.6. Bottom Plugging :

3l 1.6.I . The bottom of the well shall be cleaned of all loose and unwanted
material before plugging is started.
311.6.2. The method adopted for concreting shall be such that sound concrete
is obtained. fn any method adopted the concrete shall be placed at the bottom and
shall in no case be dropped from a height. The methods used may be tremie, prepakt
concrete or concreting by skip boxes. The concrete in all cases shall be evenly
distributed on the base.
311.6.3. The concreting shall be done in one continuous operation to the
required thickness if there are two or more dredged holes, plugging shall preferably
be done simultaneously and to equal height in all the dredge holes.
311.6.4. No flow of water shall be permitted through the concrete till it
is set.

311.6.5. Concrete used for the bottom plugging shall not be ofa grade
lower than M 100. The well shall not be dewatered or the concrete otherwise
disturbed for atleast 14 days after it is laid.

IAPDSS - l3]
194 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

311.7. Sand filling :--Sand for hlling shall be clean and free fi'om earth,
clay, clods, rods, boulders, etc.
311.8. Top Plug :

311.8.1. After filling the well with sand upto the required height, the top
plug of the specified thickness shall be laid over it using cement concrete not leaner
than(l:4:8).
311.9. Measurement :-This shall confotm to clause 305.4.
311.10. Rate:
31 1.10.1. Earth-work for open excavation shall be paid for as per SS : 308.
All structural steel work shall be paid for in accordance with SS: 1103. All R.C.C.
work shall be paid for in accordance with SS : 403 and all plain concrete work
shall be paid as per SS : 402. All masonry work shall be paid for in accordance
with SS : 501 and SS : 601. Sand filling shall be paid for at the unit rate of 10
cu.m. and shall include all the operations as described in clause 311.7.
311.10.2. Sinking :

311.10.2.1. Sinking shall be measured correct to 0.01 of a metre from the

initial position of the cutting edge of the curb of its final position. The unit rate
for sinking well shall be per metre and shall be inclusive of, formation of island
where necessary, dredging, dewatering where permitted, supplying and placing
kentledge on the top of well and removing the same, jetting, blasting where
necessary, supplying and use of all necessary stagings and scaffoldings, tools,
plants, requirement and other incidental works to sink the well to the specihed
levels. It shall also include the use of divers for removal of obstacles from under
the cutting edge of the well. The level of cutting edge of the curb at the time of
casting shall be recorded and signed by the conhactor in token of his acceptance.
311.10.2.2. Any extra sinking done beyond the specified level for the
purposes of correcting the tilt or shift shall not be paid for.
I
Specification No. 312 t
Well Sinking for \üater Supply
312.1. General :-Wells sunk for water supply generally consist of steining
of masonry (brick or stone or sand cement blocks with or without reinforcement),
concrete (plain or reinforced) provided with a curb at bottÒm which is sunk to the
required depth by dredging. The well is then provided with a plug at the bottom
either of graded coarse sand and gravel pebbles to admit bottom infiltration.
312.2. Excavation :-This shall conform to clause 311.2.
312.3. Curb :-This shall conform to clause 311.3.
312.4. Steining :- This'shall conform to clause 311.4. Where specified
sand cement blocks (a : 1) mix, can be used for steining in place of brick or stone.
Weep-holes 6mm. x 50mm. shall be provided in sand cement blocks to a specif,red
level in the steining, where side infiltration is required. Weep-holes shall be provided
with a slope towards the outside of the well steining.
 S.S. 313 EARTH WORKS 195

312.5. Sinking :-This shall be as per CL 3ll,5.

312.6. Bottom plug :-The well shall be plugged with graded coarse sand
or gravel of approved size to admit bottom infiltration. Sand gravel (pebbles) shall
be carefully lowered into the well in gunny bags and evenly distributed on the base.
312.6.1. Vy'here bottom infiltration is not required as in the case of collecting
wells and pump wells, concrete plug shall be provided as per clause 311.6.
312.7. Measurement :-This shall conform to clause 305.4,

' 312.8. Rate :-This shall conform to clause 311.9.

Specification No. 313
R.C.C. Precast and Cast-in-situ Pile Foundations
313.1, Scope :-This specification is for the construction of reinforced
concrete load bearing piles which transmit the weight of the structure to the soil
by resistance developed at the toe of the piles by friction along their surfaces or
by both. The piles may be of any of the following types :

(a) Precast piles, driven by hammer and/or Jetting.

(b) Driven cqst-in-situ piles :-The piles may be formed by filling a light
mandril driven steel shell with contract. Alternatively a steel casing may be driven
which is later replaced by concrete by withdrawing it after concrete is formed.
(c) Bored cqst-in-silu piles :-The piles may be formed with or without
a casing by excavating or boring a hole in the ground and subsequently filling it
with concrete.
(d) Under reamed piles :-Two types of under reamed piles that is single
and double under reamed piles are in common use.
313.2. Materials :

313.2.1. Reinforced cement concrete :-Reinforced cement concrete shall

conform to SS : 403,
313.2.1.1. The grade of concrete shall be as follows :

Situation Grade of concrete

(a) For head driving (where driving stress Not less than M 200
exceeds 100 kg./cm2)
(b) For easy driving (where the driving Not less than M 150
stress is less than 100 kg./cm2)
(c) For cast insitu piles Not less than M 150

(d) For under water cÒnstruction The mix for concrete shall have
l0olo more cement than what is
used for normal situations.
196 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

313.2.1 .2. The shape and cross section of thc pile shall be as specihed.
313.3. Prccast piles :

313.3.1. Care shall be taken at all stages of transporlation and handling to

ensure that the piles are not damaged or cracked. During handling piles shall be
supported at the appropriate lifting points provided for the purposc. If thc piles arc
put down temporarily after being lifted, they shall be placed on trestles or blocks
located at the lifting points.
313.3.2. Piles shall be stored orl firm ground free from liability to unequal
settlement under the weight of the stack of piles. Thc piles shall be placed on
supports which are truly level and spaced so as to avoid undue bending in the piles.
The support shall be located vertically one above the other. Spaces shall be left
round the pilcs to enable them to be lifted without difficulty. The order of stacking
shall be such that the older piles can bc withdrawn for driving without disturbing
the new piles. Separate stacks shall be provided for different lengths of piles.
Whercver curing is needed cluring storage, arrangements shall be madc to enable
the piles to be watered.
313,4, Before the operation of handling and driving the pilcs, the minimum
periods requirecl for various operations counted from the time of casting shall be
as follows :

Type of centent Mininunt period from the time of casting

usecl in
casling side
Strike End of Lift from Drive
the piles shutlers wet curing casting bed

(u) Ordinary port-

land Cement 24 hrs. 7 days l0 days 28 days
(b) Rapid hardenning
portland Cement 12 hrs. 7 days 7 days l0 days

313.5. Control of pile Driving :

3 13.5. L Protection of pile Head :- The head of precast concrete pile shall
be protected with packing of resistant material, care being taken to ensure that it
is evenly spread on the piles and is held securely in place.'If a drop hammer or
single acting hammer is used, a helmet shall be placed on the head of the pile and
provided with a block of hard wood or other material not thicker than the width
of the pile
313.5.2. Selection of pile Hammer :-The pile shall be driven by any type
of hammers, provided they penetrate to tl.^ prescribed depth or attain the specified
resistance without being damaged. The weight of the hammer shall be atleast half
that of the pile and shall also be suff,rcient to cnsure a final penetration of not less
than 2.5mm. per blow, Unless rock has been reache{ within a single acting or drop
hammcr the stroke shall normally not excecd l.35mm. for R.C.C. piles, A heavier
hammer shall be preferred to limit the drop or stroke. Continued driving long after
the pile has almost ceased to pcnetrate shall be avoided.
s,s. 313 EARTH WORKS t97

313.5.3. .Ietting :-\ùy'herever necessary, jetting of piles by air or water

to facilitate driving may be carried out with the permission of the Executive
Engineer.
313.5.4. The driving of a number of piles in loose sand shall proceed
outwards from he centre as otherwise, it may be difficult to drive the inner piles
to the same depth as the others. However, in the case of soft clay soils, the driving
shall proceed from outside to inside so that the soil is restrained from flowing out
during the driving oPerations.
313.5.5. If there is a major variation between the depths at which adjacent
foundation piles in a group meet refusal, a boring shall be made nearby to ascertain
the cause of this difference. If the boring shows that the soil contains pockets of
highly compressive material below the level of the shorter pile it shall be necessary
tolniorce penetration of all the piles to a level below the bottom of the zone which
shows such Pockets.
313.5.6. Defective Piles :

313.5.6.1. Piles that are defective shall be pulled out and replaced. However,
where defective piles are permitted to be left in place, additional piles shall be
driven as directed by the Executive Engineer.
313.5.6.2. Levels shall be taken on each pile after driving and again after
all the piles are driven. Piles which are found to have risen up shall be redriven
to the original depth or resistance, unless redriving tests on the adjacent piles show
this to be unnecessary.
313.5.7. Driving tolerance :-Unless otherwise specified, the maximum
shift in portion shall not exceed 75mm, at the level of the bottom of the pile cap
and the pile shall not deviate by more than 2Yo (above l") from the specified
inclination.
s13.6. Cast-in-situ piles :

313.6.1. Where bored cast insitupiles are used in soils liable to flow, the
bottom of the casing shall be kept for enough in advance of the boring tool to
prevent the entry of soil into the casing, thus preventing the formation of cavities
and settlements in the adjoining ground. The water level in the tube shall be
maintained at the natural ground water level until the tube is sealed. The joints of
the casing shall be made as tight as possible to minimise inflow of water or leakages
of air, where. compressed air is employed to facilitate concreting. Before concreting,
where the use of compressed air is unnecessary, the bottom of the boring shall be
plugged and dried, as far as possible. If concrete is placed in precast concrete tubes
or consists of precast sections, these shall be free from cracks or other damages
before being installed.
313.6.2. Reinþrcemenl :-Any reinforcement used shall be made into cages
and well wired to withstand handling without damage. The bars shall be so spaced
as not to impede the placing of the concrete and the lateral ties or spiral binding
shall not be closer than l50mm. centre to centre. Care shall be taken to preserve
correct cover and alignment of reinforcement, throughout the whole operation of
198 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

placing the concrete, The displacement or distortion of reinforcement during the

operation shall be avoided.
313.6.3. Concreting :
313.6.3.1. Concrete shall be so placed as to fill the entire volume of the
h.rbe or bore withqut the formation of voids caused by faulty vibration or entrapped
air.
313.6.3.2. Concrete shall not be placed through water, but in unavoidable
circumstances it shall be done with necessary precautions uncler the approval of
the Executive Engineer,
313.6.3.3. In silty clays and other soils there will be a tendency to cause
'waisting' in the concrete deposited and suitable precautions shall be taken against
this by proper compaction of the concrete during placement.
313.6.3.4. In the case of concreting inside tubes
withdrawn, the concrete shall be placed in sufficient quan
the withdrawal of the tubes a sufficient head of concrete
than inflow of soil and water.
313.7. Under reamed piles :
313.7.1. Under reamed piles shall be used as follows :

(a) Single under reamed piles for foundations of lighter structures upto two
storeys.
(b) Double únder reamed piles for foundations of heavier structure, in
shallow as well as in deep layers of expansive soils.
313.7.2. The length of piles will depend on the depth of stable zone of
soil and the piles shall be taken at least 500mm. into it, uniform diameter piles
in expansive soils shall however be taken down sufficiently deep into the firrn soil
strata so as to develop the required anchorage against uplift.
313.7.3. Diameter of piles shall be not less than 200mm.
313.7.4. Diameter of the under-reamed portions of piles shalr normally be
two to two and a half times the diameter of the shaft and shall not be more than
three times the diameter of the shaft.
313'7.5. Piles shall be provided at all the junctions of walls and at
intermediate points where necessary.
313.7.6. The spacing of under-reamed piles shall normally be kept a
minimum of twice the under-reamed diameter for normal leading.
313.7.7. In double under-reamed piles the vertical spacing between the two
under reamings may also be kept equal to one and a half times the under-reamed
diameter. (See Fig. 313-1)
313.7.3. Capping Beams i '
313.7.8.1. The capping beams shall be kept a minimum of 80mm. clear
of the ground.
 EARTH V/ORKS t99
s.s. 313

Width of wall
Air Gap

50mm. thick
concrete slab
or brick on
edge RWGS
First under Ream
Section )(X
Shearing surface'

Boring required for

First Under-ream

fFig.313.1l
Second First
Under-ream

300
350 to 400
For bucketl
to 40" for Du = 3D
40o to 50' for Du = 2.5D
Hrliå
-l DÞl I
-Dri
ffi sinsteunder-reamedpile

50" to 60o for Du = 2D Double Under-reamed Pile

All Dimensions in Millimetres

TYPICAL DETAILS OF UNDER.REAMED PILE

313.1.8.2. The minimum depth of the capping beams shall be kept as

l50mm. and it shall not normally exceed 200 mm.

313.7.9. Constructions :

313.7.9.1 . Bore holes shall be made by earth augers. In case of manual

boring an auger boring guide shall be used to keep the bores vertical or to the
desired inclination and in position.
313.7.9.2. After the bore is made to the required depth, enlargfirg of the
base shall be carried out by means of an under reaming tool.
313J .g.3. For double under-reamed piles, boring shall hrst be made to a
depth as required for the first under-reaming. After completing the first under-
t"átni.tg, the bore shall be further extended by augering to the full depth and then
the second under-reaming done.
200 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

313.8. Measurement :-A linear measurement shall be in metres, correct

to 0.01 of a metre, according to the different diametres of the piles.
313.9. Rate :-The unit rate shall be per running metre.
For precast piles the payment for driving shall be made separately.
For cast-in-situ piles, the rate shall include both the cost ofpile and driving.
For different diametres, different rate per running metre shall be paid for.
s.s. 401 CONCRETES 201

SECTION 4
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONCRETES
CONTENTS

.s/. Speci!ìcation Name of Specification Page

No. No. Nos.

l. 401 Lime concrete and surki concrete 201

) 402 Cement concrete for plain and reinforced works 203

J. 403 Reinforced cement concrete work 215

4. 404 Repair grouting to aprons and revetments with surki

concrete and pointing with surki mortar 220

405 Prestressed concrete work 221

Specification No. 401

Lime Concrete and Surki Concrete
401.1. The concrete shall consist ofgraded aggregate ofclean broken stone
or verified or hard well burnt broken brick mixed with matrix or either lime mortar
or surki mortar as may be specified. The broken brick, broken stone, lime mortar
and surki mortar shall comply with the Standard Specifications 103, 108, I 13 and
I l4 respectively. Unless otherwise specified the maximum size of the aggregate
shall be 40mm.
401.2, Proportions :-The quantity of mortar shall be ;!0 per cent of the
groç volume of the aggregate. For the maximum size of the course aggregate other
than 40mm. the quantity of mortar shall be as specified by the Executive Engineer.
401.3. Mixing :-Concrete shall be mixed on a level platform of slabs,
bricks or wood of such dimensions as the Executive Engineer may direct' The
platform shall have tight and close joints so that there shall be no leakage of water
or mortar through it and the mixing tool shall not strike the joints while in operation.
The aggregate shall be first washed clean and thoroughly wetted. The measured
quantity shall be placed to an even thickness on the platform covering not more
than half the length of the platform. Measured quantity of mortar in the proper
proportion noted above shall then be evenly spread over the aggregate and the
whole thoroughly mixed using just sufficient water (applied with a spinkler) to
enable the mortar to adhere to each piece ofthe aggregate by turning it over several
times and gradually transferring it to the vacant half of the platform until all
particles of aggregate are covered with mortar. Suitable measuring boxes shall be
used for both the aggregate and the mortar. When it is necessary to give great
fluidity to the concrete this shall be effected by adding water to the mortar and
on no account by adding water to the mixed concrete. No more concrete shall be
mixed than can be laid in position on the same day of mixing and excess if any
shall be removed at once from the site.
 202 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

401.4. Laying :

401 .4.1. After the bed for the concrete is properly prepared and wetted,
the concrete shall be laid carefull! in position in layers not exceeding 150 mm.
It shall never be thrown from a height, but gently laid along with a basket in such
3 way that the agg mortar. Each layer shall be
well rammed until If this does noi take place
completely the top thin mortar. No water shall
be added during ramming but t
and well scored with the point
added. No ramming shall be
less than two men arranged
space of not more than half a metre per man, shall do the ramming, moving forward
and backward and in unison.
401'4'2. ln case of foundations sufficient labour and materials shall be
employed to
foundations,
joint. Such b
be applied to
concrete.
401.4.3. \ùy'hen concrete is laid against from work the joints of the from
work shall be sufficiently right to prevent the leakage of mortar.
401.4.4. Laying concrete under water:-For laying under water or in wet
conditions, lime concrete, using class "4" lime or surki concrete shall only be used.
When concrete is to be laid in wet locations the Executive Engineer shall decide
whether the excavation is to be kept fuol water while the concrete laying is iln
progress or whether the concrete is to be laid udder water. If the concrete is to
be laid under water it shall be simply tipped into place by means of a basket or
box containing it, the concrete being gently overturned when it reaches the bottom
and no tamping or ramming shall be done until the concrete surface rises above
water level, and even then the surface shall be tamped gently so as not to squeeze
out the mortar. when pumping is done care must be taken that it is not done in
a manner to permit any disturbance or leakage or suction of mortar from the
concrete.

, .. 401.5. curing :-The concrete shall be kept wet after each days work and
shall be cured for a period of not less than l0 days or such other period of time
as the Executive Engineer may decide, either by ponding, frequeni sprinkling or
by any other means.
401.6. No masonry shall be built upon concrete within three days after its
laying.
401.7. Measurement :-All linear measurements shall be in metres, correct
to 0.01 of a metre. volumes shall be worked out in cubic metres, correct to 0.01
of a cubic metre.
401.8. Raie :-The unit rate for payment shall be per cubic metre. Thè
rate shall include all necessary from work and the cost of all materials, mixing,
s.s. 402 CONCRETES 203

conveying, placing, compacting, curing, tools and all appliances required for laying
the concrete in position. It shall also include the cost of bailing out water and
pumping for keeping the excavation free of water unless otherwise specified. Extra
leads and lifts shall be paid for separately. Where tests are specified by the Department
the cost of testing shall be borne by the department, except where the materials
have failed in which case the cost of tests shall be bome by the contractor or
supplier in addition to the rejection of such materials from usage on the works.

Specification No. 402

Cement coicrete for Plain and Reinforced work
402.1. Terminology :

402j ,1. Controlled Concrete :-Concrete for which the mix has been
proportioned on the basis of trial mix based on preliminary tests.
402.1.2. Ordinary Concrete:-Concrete for which a nominal mix has been
used without preliminary tests.
402.1 .3. Preliminary test i- A test conducted in a laboratory on a trial
mix with the object of designing a concrete mix before actual concreting operatidns
or for determining the necessary adjustments during execution.
402.1 .4. I(orlcs test:- A test conducted either on the field or in a laboratory
on specimens made on the site out of concrete being used on the works.
402.1 .5. Proportioning:- The determination of the mutual proportions of
cement, aggregates, water and admixtures if any required to attain the desired
workability, strength and any other special characteristics.
402.1.6. Grøde of Concrete i- The letter M (Standing fbr 'mix') followed
by a number indicating the specified 28-day works cube compressive strength of
the mix expressed in Kg./cu.m2.
402.2. Materials :

402.2.1 . Coarse aggregate :-The aggregate of specifred maximum size

shall be graded and shall comply with SS : 108.

402.2.2. Sand :--This shall conform to SS : 110.

402.2.3. Cement:-Cement to be used, shall conform to the SS ; ll2.

402.2.4. Water :-Water used for both mixing and curing shall be fresh,
clean and free from injurious amounts of deleterious materials. Potable waters are
generally considered satisfactory for mixing and curing concrete.
402.2.5. Admixtures :-When specified only approved admixtures shall be
used strictly in accordance with the Executive Engineer's instructions. Calcium
chloride shall not be used for reinforced concrete.
402.3. Grades of Concrete :-The concrete shall be of seven grades
designated as M 100, M 150, M 200, M 250, M 300, M 350 and M 400.
 THE A.P, STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

402.4. Strength Requirements of concrete :

402.4.1 . Where ordinary portland cement conforming to SS : ll2 is used

the 28-day compressive strength requirements for various grades of concrete shall
be as given in Table 402-A.
Table 402-A
Strength requirements of concrete (All values in Kg./cm2)

Compressive strength of l50mm.

cubes at 28 days after mixing
Grades of Concrete
Preliminary test Iüorks test
(minimum) (minimum)

M 100 l3s 100

M 150 200 iso
M 200 260 200
M 250 320 250
M 300 380 300
M 350 440 350
M 400 500 400

Where rapid hardening portland cement is used the specified strength shall
be attained at 7 days instead of at 28 days. where other cements are used the
Executive Engineer shall specify the corresponding requirements, preferably on the
basis of preliminary tests.
402.4.2. The strength requirements specified in Table 402-A shall apply
to both controlled and ordinary concrete. Preliminary tests need not however to bq
made in the case of ordinary concrete.
402.4.3. In order to get a relatively quicker idea of the quality of concrete
optional works tests on beams for modulus of rapture at 72+2 hours or at 7 days,
or compressive strength tests at 7 days may be carried out in addition to 28-day
compressive strength tests. In all cases a 28-day compressive strength specified in
Table 402-A shall alone be the criterion for acceptance or rejection ofthe concrete.
If however, from tests carried in a particular job over a reasonably long period
it has been established to the satisfaction of the Executive Engineer that a
suitable ratio is got between the 28-day compressive strength and the modulus
of rupture at 72 plus or minus 2 hours or 7 days or compressive strength
at 7 days than in such cases compression strength at 7 days may be
accepted. The Executive Engineer may suitably relax the frequency of 28-
day compressive strength tests specified in Table 402-D provided the expected
strength values at the specified early age are consistently met. For this
purpose the values given in Table 402-B may be taken for general guidance in the
case of concrete made with the ordinary portland cement.
 CONCRETES 205
s.s. 402
Table 4O2-B
optionat works test requirements of concrete, (All values in kg./cm.)
(All tcsts conducted in accordance with IS : 516-1959)

Grade of Compressive strength Modulus of ruptures bY

concretg on l50mm. cubes Beams test, Minimum
at 7 days Minimum
at 72 plus or minus 2 hrs. at 7 daYs

M 100 70 l2 t'7

M 150 100 l5 2l
M 200 135 17 24

M 250 170 t9 27

M 300 200 2l 30

M 350 235 23 32

M 400 270 25 34

402.4.4. of a concrete mix as indicated by tests lies in

Vy'here the strength
between the strength for any tv'o grades specified in Table 402-^, such concrete
shall be classified for all purposes as a concrete belonging to the lower of the two
grades between which its strength lies.
402.5. Proportioning and works control :
4025.1. Controlled concrete:-As far as possible controlled concrete shall
be used on all concrete works requiring a concrete of grade higher than M 200.
Controlled concrete for use in plain and reinforced concrete shall be of grade M
100, M 150, M 200, M 250, M 300, M 350 and M 400'

402.5.1.1. The concrete mix shall be designed to have an average strength

tests in Table 402-4. The
adequate workabilitY for
of
can be properly comPacted
of aggregate by weight Per
50kg. of cement shall not exceed 450kg. except where otherwise specifiqally permitted
by the Executive Engineer.

used in the preliminary test.

 206 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

402.5.1 .3. In proportioning concrete the quantity of both cement and

aggregate shall be determined by weight. where the wcight of cement is determined
by accepting the manufacturer's weight per bag a reasonable number of bags shall
be weighed separately to check the net weight. when loose cement is weighted at
the site it shall be weighed separately from the aggregates. vy'ater shall be either
measured by volume in calibrated tanks or weighed. AII measuring equipment shall
be maintained in a clean serviceable condition and their accuracy periodically
checked.
402.5.1.4. It is most important to maintain the water cement ratio constant
at its correct value. To this end determination of moisture content of both fine and
coarse aggregates shall be made as frequently as possible, the frequency for a given
job being determined by the Executive Engineer according to the weather conditions.
The amount d to compensate for any observed
variations in content in the aggregates shall be
determined a 963. To allow for the variation in
weight of aggregates due to variation in their moisture contents suitable adjustments
in the weights of aggregates shall also be made.
402.5.1.5. No substitution in materials used on the work or alterations in
the established proportions except as permitted in clause 402.5.1.4. shall be made
without additional tests to show that the quality and strength of concrete are
satisfactory.
402.5.1'6' Workability of concrete shall be checked at frequent intervals.
The slump test as described under clause 402.9.1 may be adopted for this purpose.
Table 402-C gives suitable slumps for various conditions.

SIumps
Type of work
when vibrqtors when vibralors
are used are nol used
A. Plain Concrete.
l. Mass concrete in foundations, lOmm. to 25mm 50mm. to 75mm.
footings, retaining walls and
pavements, etc.
7 Sections less than 75mm. 25mm. to 40mm. 75mm. to l00mm.
thickness.
B. Reinforced Concrete.
l. Mass concrete in foundations, lOmm. to 25mm. 75mm. to l00mm.
footings and retaining walls, etc.
2. Beams, slabs and columns etc., 25mm. to 40mm. l00mm. to l25mm.
with normal amounts of
reinforcement.
3. Thin.sections cir section with 40rnn. to 50mm. l25mm. to-150mm.
congested reinforcement.
s.s. 402 CONCRETES 207

402.5.2. Ordinary concrete:-when the use of controlled concrete is not

considered practicable ordinary concrete may be used. The use ofordinary concrete
shall however be restricted to grades M100, Ml50 and M200. The proportions for
ordinary concrete shall be in accordance with Table 402-D.
Table 402-D
(Concrete mix Proportions)
Ordinary Concrete

Maximum total quantity of Proportion of Jìne Maximum

dry aggregates by volume sggregate to qùantity
per 50kg. of cement to cosrse aggregate of water
be taken as the sum of per 50kg.
the indjvidual volumes cement
Grade of of fine and coarse Litres
concrete aggregate Litres
(1) (2) (3) (4)

M 100 300 Generally (l : 2) for fine 34

aggregîle to coarse aggregate
M 150 220 by volume but subject to 32
an upperlimit of (1 : I %)
M 200 160 and a lower limit of (l : 3) 30

402.5.2.1. The proportions of the aggregates shall be adjusted from upper

limits to lower limits progressively as the grading of the fine aggregate becomes
finer and the maximum size of coarse aggregate becomes larger. Example
: For an average grading of fine aggregate the proportions shall be (1 : l%),
(l : 2) and (l : 3) for the maximum aggregate size of l0mm., 20mm. and
40mm. respectively.
402.5.2.2. M100, Ml50 and M200 of ordinary concrete correspond
(l : 2 :4), and (l : lYz: 3) nominal mixes currently
approximately to (1 : 3 : 6),
used in the country.
402.5.2.3. In proportioning concrete the quantity of cement shall be
determined by weight. The quantities of fine and coarse aggregates may be determined
by Volume but these shall also preferably be determined by weight. In the later
case the weight shall be determined from the volume specified in Table 402'D anð
the weight per litre of the proportioned by aggregates. If the aggregate is moist
and volume batch is adopted allowance shall be made for bulking which shall be
determined as follows: In a 250m1. measuring cylinder pour the damp sand and
consolidate it dry shaking until it reaches the 200m1. mark. Then fill the cylinder
with water and stir the sand well. The water shall be sufficient to submerge the
sand completely. It may be seen that the sand surface is now below its original
levels. Suppose the surface is at the mark 'Y' ml. The percentage of bulking of
the sand due to moisture shall be calculated- from the formula.
Percentage bulking=(200/y-l) x 100
208 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

402.5.2.3.1. The water cement ratios shall not be more than those specified
in Table 402-D. Excess water reduces the strength of concrete and shall be avoided.
The quantity required shall be carefully observed from time to time and reliable
data worked out for guidance as the work proceeds. The cement content of the mix
specified in Table 402-D for any nominal mix may be increased if the quantity
of water in a mix has to be increased to overcome the difficulties of placement
and compaction, so that the water cement ratio specified in Table 402-D is not
exceeded.
402.5.2.3.2. In the case of vibrated concrete, the limit specified may be
suitably reduced to avoid segregation.
402.5.2.3.3. The quantity of water used in the concrete mix for reinforced
concrete work shall be just sufficient to produce a dense concrete of adequate
workability which will surround and properly grip all the reinforcement. Workability
of concrete shall be controlled by maintaining a water cement ratio that is found
to give a concrete which by just sufhciently wet to be placed and compacted without
difficulty with the means available.
402.5.2.4. Workability shall be controlled by direct measurement of water
content with due allowance for any surface moisture in the corirse and fine aggregates.
Clause 402.9.1and Table 402-E give details of the slump test and recommended
slumps for various conditions.
402.5.2.5. Allowances shall be made for surface water present in the
aggregate when computing the water content. Surface water shall be determined
by one of the field methods described in IS : 2386 (Part III)-1963. In the absence
of exact data in the amount of surface water may be estimated from the values
given in Table 402-E.
Table 402-F
Surface water carried by average aggregate

Aggregate Approximate quantity of surface waler

(ilres per cubic meter)

Very wet sand 120

Moderately wet sand 80
Moist sand 40
*Moist gravel or crushed rock 20 to 40

*Coarser the aggregate, less the water it will carry.

402.5.2.6. If ordinary concrete made in accordance with the proportions

given for a particular grade does not yield the specified strength due to proper
quantities of materials not being available such concrete shall be classified as
belonging to the appropriate lower grade. Ordinary concrete proportioned for a
given grade in accordance with'Table 402-D, shall not however be placed in a
higher grade on the ground that the test strengtirs are higher than the minimum
specified. No such interpolations shall be permitted.
 S.S. 402 CONCRETES 209
-
402.6, Mixing :

402.6.1. Machine mixing :-Concrete shall normally be mixed in a

mechanical mixer. Mixing shall be continued until there is a uniform distribution
of materials and the mass is uniform in colour and consistency, but in no case shall
the mixing be done for less than 2 minutes after all the materials are in the drum.
When the mixing drum is charged by power loader all the mixing water shall be
introduced into the drum before the soiled materials. The skip shall be loaded with
about one half of the coarse aggregate, then with the fine aggregate, then with the
cement and finally with the remaining coarse aggregate on top (if all-in-aggregate
is used, the skip shall be loaded first with about one-half of the aggregate, then
with the cement and finally with the remaining aggregate on top). Where the mixing
drum is manually charged it shall be charged with the dry materials in a similar
manner and the water shall be added immediately before the rotation of the drum
is started.
402.6.2. Hand Mixing:-When hand mixing is permitted by the Executive
Engineer it shall be carried out on a water tight, non-absorbent platform with a
showel, trowel or a similar suitable implement, Care shall be taken to ensure that
the mixing is continued until the mass is uniform in colour and consistency. The
platform shall be large enough to enable atleast two batches to be mixed
simultaneously. The following procedure shall be adopted while mixing.
(a) The cement and fine aggregate in the specified proportions shall be
mixed dry until the mixture is thoroughly blended and is uniform in colour, with
no pockets of sand or cement.
(b) As much quantity of coarse aggregate as can be mixed and laid
within 15 minutes after water is added to the mixture shall then be laid on
the dry platform and the required quantity of cement-sand mixture shall be
spread over it. The whole mass shall then be mixed turning over atleast three
times while adding the required quantity of water with a sprinkling can'
402.7. Placing and Compacting :
402.7.1. Transporting :-The concrete shall be handled from the
place of mixing to the place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable by
methods which will prevent the segregation or loss of any of the ingredients.
If segregation does occur during transportation the concrete shall be remixed before
being placed.
402.7.1.1. Temperature control :-During hot or cold weather concrete
shall be transported in deep containers which on account of their lower ratio of
surface area to mass reduce the rate of loss of water by evaporation during hot
weather and loss of heat during cold weather. The temperature at the time of
placement shall not be more than 104 "F or 40 "C and the depth of the concrete
layer laid shall not exceed 600mm. when the temperature is 40 "C.
402.7.2. Pløcing:-The concrete shall normally be placed and compacted
within half an hour of mixing and shall not be subsequently disturbed. Method of
placing shall be such as to preclude segregation. All concrete which has set before
placement shall be rejected and immediately removed from site.

IAPDSS - l4l
210 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

402.7.3. Plqcement under wster:-When it is necessary to deposit concrete

under water, the method, equipment, materials and proportion of the mix to be used
shall be approved by the Executive Engineer before the work is started. Such
concrete shall not be treated as "controlled concrete". The concrete mix shall
contain atleast l0% more cement than that required for the same mix placed in
dry conditions, the quantity of extra cement varying with the conditions of placing.
The volume or weight of the coarse aggregate shall not be less than one and half
times, not more than twice that of the fine aggregate. The materials shall be so
proportioned as to produce a concrete having a slump of not less than l00mm. and
not more than l50mm. Coffer-dams or forms shall be sufficiently tight to ensure
still water if practicable and in any case to reduce the velocity of water to less than
3m. per minute through the space into which concret'e is to be deposited. Coffer-
dams or forms in still water shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar
through the walls. Pumping shall not be done while concrete is being placed'and
until 24 hours thereafter. Concrete shall be deposited continuously until it is brought
to the required height. While depositing, the top surface shall be kept as nearly
level as possible and the formation of seams avoided. The methods to be used for
depositing concrete under water shall be one of the following:
402.7.3.1. Tremie :-When concrete is to be deposited under water by
means of a tremie the top section of the tremie shall be of a hopper large enough
to hold the entire batch of the mix or the entire contents of the transporting bucket
if any. The tremie pipe shall not be less than 200mm. in diameter and shall be
large enough to allow a free flow of concrete are strong enough to withstand the
external pressure of the water in which it is suspended even if a partial vacuum
develops inside the pipe. Preferably flanged steel pipe ofadequate strength required
for the job shall be used. A separate lifting device shall be provided for each tremie
pipe with its hopper at the upper end. Unless the lower end of the pipe is equipped
with an approved automatic check value, the upper end of the pipe shall be plugged
with a wadding of gunny sacking or other approved material before delivering the
concrete to the tremie pipe through the hopper so that when the concrete is forced
down from the hopper to the pipe it will force the plug (and along with it any water
in the pipe) down the pipe and out of the bottom and thus establishing a continuous
stream of concrete. It will be necessary to raise the tremie slowly in order to cause
uniform flow of the concrete, but the tremie shall not be emptied io that water enters
above the concrete in the pipe. At all times after the placing of the concrete is started
and until all the concrete is placed the lower end of the tremie pipe shall be below
the top surface ofthe plastic concrete. This will cause'the concrete to build up from
below instead of flowing out over the surface and thus avoid formation of laitance
layers. If the charge in the tremie is lost while depositing, the tremie shall be raised
above the concrete surface and unless sealed by a check value it shall be re-plugged
at the top end (as at the beginning), before re-filling for depositing concrete.
402.7.3.2. Drop bottom bucket :-The top of the bucket shall be open. The
bottom doors open freely downward and outward when tripped. The bucket shall
be filled completely and lowered slowly to avoid backwash. It shall not be discharged
until it rests on the surface upon which the concrete is to be deposited and when
discharged shall be withdrawn slowly until well above the concrete.
s.s. 402 CONCRETES 2tl
402.7.3.3. .Bøgs :-(of at least 0.028 cu,m. capacity) of jute or other coarse
cloth shall be filled about two thirds full with concrete, the spare end being turned
under so that the bag is square ended and securely tied' They shall be placed
carefully in header and stretcher courses so that the whole mass is interlocked. Bags
used for this purpose shall be free from deleterious materials.
.4. Construction joints :-Concreting shall be carried out continuously
402.7
up to construction joints, the position and arrangement of which shall be
predetermined by the Executive Engineer. When the work has to be resumed on
a surface which has hardened such surface shall be roughened by chiseling, swept
clean, thoroughly wetted and covered with a l2mm. layer of freshly mixed mortar
composed of cement and sand (in the same ratio as the cement and sand in the
concrete) immediately before the placing of the concrete. When the concrete has
not fully hardened all laitance shall be removed by scrubbing the wet surface with
wire or bristle brushes, care being taken to avoid dislodgement of particles of
aggregate. The surface shall be thoroughly wetted and all free water removed. The
surface shall then be coated with neat cement grout. The first layer of concrete to
be placed on the surface shall not exceed l50mm. in thickness and shall be well
rammed against the old work, particular attention being paid to corners and close
spots.

402.7.5. Compaction :-Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted during

the operation of placing and thoroughly worked around the reinforcement, around
embedded flrxtures and into corners of form work. Wherever possible vibrators of
the surface, form or immersion type shall be used. Over vibration or vibration of
very wet mixes shall be avoided.
402.7.6. Finishing :-Exposed concrete is best finished while it is still
green by floating. Concrete surfaces cast against forms shall normally not
require any further finishing. If however, any defects are observed after
removal of forms, any toughness or projections shall be removed by chipping
and grinding with corborundum brick or a power grinding machine. Any
hollows or honey combing shall be made good by the application of mortar having
the same proportion as used in concrete and having as stiff a consistency as possible.
No extra payment shall be involved for finishing concrete surfaces as mentioned
above. If however for reasons other than defective work as mentioned above a cost
of plaster has to be applied for which supplemental specifications are furnished,
then the thickness and method of payment shall be defined in the schedule. Care
shall be taken to roughen the hardened concrete surface by chiseling to get a good
bond between the concrete surface and the plaster.
402.8. Curing:- Concrete shall be cured either by ponding or by covering
with a layer of sacking-canvas, hessian or similar absorbent material which shall
be kept constahtly sprinkled with water. Altematively the concrete being thoroughly
wetted may be cured by a layer of approved water proofing material. Unless
otherwise specified curing shall be continued for a period of three weeks.
402.9. Tests :
402.9.1. Slump test:-This test is used for measuring the workability of
fresh concrete on the field as well as in the laboratory.
212 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

402.9.1.1. Apparatus:
(a) Mould :-The mould for the test specimen shall be in the form
of frustrum of a cone having the following internal dimensions.

Dimensìons mm,

Bottom diameter 200

Top diameter 100
Height 300

The mould shall be constructed of non-corroding metal (brass or aluminium'

shall not be used) of atleast l.6mm. thickness and the top and bottom shall open
and at right angles to the axis of the cone. The mould shall have a smooth internal
surface. It shall be provided with suitable foot pieces and also handles to facilitate
lifting it up in a vertical direction as required by the test. A mould provided with
a suitable guide attachment may be used. A typical mould without the guide is
shown in Fig. 402-1.
TYPICAL MOULD FOR SLUMP TEST

..{roo ornþ'

T-T-
I roo

Ir- tt-rg
ATLEAST 16mm. thick

Alldimensions in mm.
[Fis.402.1]

(b) Tamping rod :--The tamping rod shall be of steel or other suitable
material 16mm. in diameter, 600mm. long and rormded at one end.
s.s. 402 CONCRETES 213

402.9.1.2. Sampling:-If this test is being carried out in the field the
sample of freshly mixed concrete shall be used. In the case of concrete containing
aggregate of maximum size more than 40mm. the concrete shall be wet
sieved through 4mm. screens to exclude particles bigger than 40mm.
402.9.1 .3. Procedure :-The internal surface of the mould shall be
thoroughly cleaned and freed from superfluous moisture and any set concrete before
commencing the test. The mould shall be placed on a smooth horizontal, rigid and
non-absorbent surface, such as a carefully levelled metal plate the mould being
firmly held in place while it is being filled. The mould shall be filled in 4 layers
each approximately one quarter of the height of the mould. Each layer shall be
tamped with 25 strokes of the rounded end of the tamping rod. The strokes shall
be distributed in a uniform manner over the cross-section of the mould and for the
second and subsequent layers shall penetrate into the under laying layer. The bottom
layer shall be tamped throughout its depth. After the top layer has been rodded
the concrete shall be struck off level with a trowel or the tamping rod, so that the
mould is exactly filled. Any mortar which has leaked out between the mould and
the base plate shall be cleaned away. The mould shall be removed from the concrete
immediately by raising it slowly and carefully in a vertical direction. This allows
the concrete to slump/subside and the slump shall be measured immediately by
determining the difference between the height of the mould and that of the highest
point of the slumped concrete. The above operations shall canied out at a place
free from vibration or shock and within a period of 2 minutes after mmpling. Any
specimen which collapses or shears off laterally gives incorrect results. If this occurs
the test shall be repeated with another sample. If in the repeat test also the specimen
shears, the slump shall be measured and the fact that the specimen has sheared shall
be recorded.
402.9.1.4. Very good indication of the cohesiveness and workability of the
mix can be obtained, if after the slump measurement has been completed the side
of the concrete is tapped gently with the tamping rod. A well proportioned concrete
which has an appreciable slump will gradually slump further, but if the mix is harsh
it is likely to fall apart.
4029.2. Compressive strength test :-All the tests shall be done on hardened
concrete in accordance with IS : 516-1959.
402.9.2.1. Cube test :

(a) Size of cubes :-In the works test with the approval of the Executive
Engineer l00mm. cubes may be used in place of l50mm. cubes provided the
maximum nominal size of the aggregate does not exceed 20mm. Even the use of
l50mm. cubes shall normally be restricted to concrete having a maximum nominal
size of aggregate not exceeding 40mm. Where concrete with aggregates larger than
40mm. size is required to be tested the size of cubes shall be specified by the
Executive Engineer keeping in view that generally the length ofthe side ofthe cube
shall be about four times the lnaximum nominal size of the aggregate in the concrete
constituting the cube specimen. Alternatively l50mm. cube specimens may be used
for such concrete by wet screening and removing aggregate pieces larger than
40mm. size.
214 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

(b) Strength in relation to the size of the cube :-When 100mm. cubes are
used the values obtained from tests on l00mm. cubes shall be reduced to the extent
established by comparative preliminary tests with l00mm. and l50mm. cubes (or
in the absence of such comparative tests by l0 per cent of the value determined
from the tests) in order to give the equivalent strength for l50mrn. cubes. Vy'here
cubes larger than l50mm. are adopted generally no modification is necessary unless
otherwise specified by the Executive Engineer.
4029.2.2. Cylinder Test:-Compressive strength test may with the approval
of the Executive Engineer be conducted on l5Omm.'diametre and 300mm. high
cylinders in accordance with IS : 5-6-1959 instead of on cubes: Where cylinder
strength figures are adopted the compressive strength figures given above shall be
modified according to the formula :

Minimum cylinder compressive strength required : 0.8 compressive strength

specified for l50mm. cubes.

É.
o 1.00
F
o
u
z 0.96
o
tr
o
uJ
É. 0.92
É.
o
o
0.88
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
Height
RATIO
Diameter
[Fis. No. 402.21
CORRECTION FACTOR HEIGHT/DIAMETER RATIO OF A CORE
402.9.2.3. Core Test ;
Core specimen :-Core specimen for the determination of compressive shength
shall be extracted from hardened concrete by using a diamond core bit or other
suitable means. The diametre of the specimen shall preferably be atleast three times
and in no case less than two times the nominal maximum size of the coarse
aggregate. The length of the specimen shall be about twice its diametre and in no
case less than the diametre. In case the heighVdiametre ratio is less than 20 the
correction factor shown inFig.402.2 shall be applied to get the cylinder compressive
strength. The corresponding cube strength shali be then got by adopting the iormula
in clause.402.9.2.2.
402.9.3. Modulus of rupture test:--The test shall be done in accordance
with IS : 516-1959.
--
S.S. 403 CONCRETES 2I5

402.10. Sample acceptance criteria :-

The number of test spec sampling and the criteria
for acceptance ofconcret ade shall be in accordance
with table V of IS : 4 ordinary concrete'
402,11. Measurement :-This shall conform to clause 401'7'
402.12. Rate :-This shall conform to clause 401.8. The rate shall include
cost of reinforcements also'
Specification No. 403
Reinforced' cement' concrete work
403.1. General :-unless otherwise specified, R.c.c. work shall be done
in accordance with IS : 456-1964 as revised from time to time.
403.1.1. Terminologt:-This shall conform to SS : 402.
403.2. Materials :
403.2.1. Coarse qggregøte:-The aggregate shall conform to SS : 108.

403.2.2. Sqnd :- Sand shall conform to SS : 110'

403.2.3. Cement :-Cement shall conform to SS : 112.

403.2.4. Water :-rilater to be used shall conform to SS : 129'

403.2.5. Reinforcing steel :-steel used for reinforcement shall conform
to SS : 126.
403.3. Preparation and Laying of reinforcement :-
403.3.1. The reinforcement of the specified size and type shall be cut and
bent in
accordance with the bar bending schedule.
403.3.2. The reinforcement shall be located exactly in accordance with the
drawings and securely tied together with soft iron binding wire of suitable thickness
or tackwelded.
403.3.3. Proper care shall be taken by supporting the reinforcement on
suitable precast cement mortar blocks of the required thickness at suitable intervals.
403.4. Splices :

403.4.1. As far as possible, reinforcement shall be of full length, but where

this is not possible the reinforcement may be spliced by one of the following
methods as instructed by the Executive Engineer. (All splices shall be properly
staggered) :

(a) Lapping with or without hooks,

(b) Thread connections with bolts and nuts,
(c) Welding.
403.4.2. Where welding is done, representative samples from the welded
joint shall be tested if so required by the Executive Engineer before the reinforcement
is laid.
 216 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

403.5. Form Work :

403.5.1. Form mensions as

shown on the plansand rigid during
the placing and compac snãtt permii
no leakage of cement
403'5.2. Suitable struts or stiffeners or tiers shall be used for the formïork
wherever necessary.
403.5.3. All supports shall be properly braced and cross-braced in two
directions.

. 403.5.4. AII splices and braces shall be secured by bolting unless specially
instructed otherwise.
403.5.5. All struts shall be fïrmly supported against settlement and slipping
by suitable means as directed.

403.5.9. Suitable inserts for blockouts or electrical and other service fixtures
where necessary shall be provided in the required locations as specified.
403.6. Placing of the Concrete :
shall be thoroughly completed by rodding or by the use
s of suitable immersion, form, pan or screed vibrators).
ncrete shall have suitable consistency and over vibration

403'6'2. Before laying the concrete the form work with the reinforcement
in place shall be inspected and approved by the Executive Engineer.
403.6.3. care shall be taken to work the concrete thoroughly alround the
reinforcement particularly in congested locations.
S.S. 403 CONCRETES 217

403.7. Construction Joints :

403.7 .1 . Vertical joints in floor and roof slabs shall be provided in the case
of long buildings of more than 30m. in length, specially when the widths or depths
of such building are less than 15m. and when narro\,v corridors connect blocks of
relatively greater widths. The most suitable positions for such vertical joints are
where the corridors take-off from inner blocks. On soils such as black cotton, such
joints are more essential, shall be invariably provided at the places shown in the
drawings or as directed by the Executive Engineer.
403.7.2. Location of construction Joints :
403.7.2.1. Construction joints when necessary shall be located as follows :

In the main beams over the centre of supports.

403.7.2.2. No vertical joints shall be permitted in case of main beams. In
other cases they shall be provided if necessary in the following locations :
(a) in subsidiary beams at mid span ;
(b) in the case of slabs, the joints wherever possible shall be parallel to
the main reinforcement in the case of one way reinforced slabs and over the centre
of supporting beams or walls in other cases.
403.7.2.3. In general the joints shall not be provided in locations of
considerable shear or under concentrated loads.
403.7.2.4. Suitable water stops as specified shall be provided in the case
of water retaining structures.
403.8. Expansion Joints :
403.8.1. Wherever required, expansion joints shall be provided in accordance
with the drawings.
403.8.2. Expansiori joints shall be provided in the case of very long structures
at locations of large variation in the height or width of the structure or where
differences in foundation conditions are involved.
403.8.3. They shall be constructed in accordance with the drawings or as
directed by the Executive Engineer.
403.9. Bearings of R.C.C. Slabs and Beams :
403.9.1. Where supports are not monolithic with the beam or slab the
bearing surface shall be plastered with cement mortar (l : 3) with the craft paper
laid over the plaster before laying the concrete.
403.9.2. The vertical face of the masonry rebate at bearings shall be plastered
smooth with C.M. (l : 3). A gap of 12 mm, wide shall be left between the vertical
face of the masonry and the beam face. This space shall be filled with a filler in
the form of pads before the concrete is laid. This is illustrated by Figures. (Fig.aO3-
I and Fig. 403-2).
403.10. Removal of Form-work :
403.10.1. All form-work shall be removed without causing any shocks or
vibrations to the structure.
2r8 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

403.10.2. After the expiry of the period specified in clause 403.10.3 the
wedges at the supports shall be loosened and the concrete watched for any distress
after which the supports shall be completely removed.
SLAB BEARING OVER WALL
R.C.C. S

Thick craft paper over Plastering with CM(1:5)

smoothly finished surface 12mû. Thick and
surface finished smooth
Plastering
[Fig. 403.1]

R.C.C. T_BEAM AND SLAB BEARING OVER WALL

Thick craft paper over
smoothly finished surface

Plastering with
CM (1:3) 12mm.
thick and surface
finished smooth C.C. Bed block
finished
smooth

craft paper over

smoothly finished surface

[Fis. 403.2]

403.10.3. In the case of big works where earlier removal of shuttering is

necessary for economy in shuttering, the time limits may be deviated from on the
approval of the Executive Engineer who will then give his orders based on the
merits of each individual case. In deciding the time limit the following table which
gives the minimum the placing of concrete and striking
of the shutters mây In case this table is proposed to be
followed it will be the tender notice).
 s.s. 403 CONCRETES 219
-
Table No. 403-A

Removal of shuttering Normal portland cement concrete

placed in normal weather
conditions, (days)

(a) Walls, columns and vertical sides

of beams and slabs 24 to 48 hours
(b) Removal of props to slabs :

(Ð Spanning upto 4.5. metres 7 days

(iÐ Spanning over 4.5. metres 14 days
(c) Removal of props to beams and arches :

(i) Spanning upto 6 metres 14 days

(ii) Spanning over 6 metres 2l days

403.10.4. In the case of cold wether it may be necessary to increase the

above periods as directed by the Executive Engineer.
403.11. The structure shall not be put to normal use earlier than 28 days
after completion.
403,12. Load testing of structures :

403.12.1. Loading tests on a completed structure shall be made if required

by the specification or by the Executive Engineer in the event ofa reasonable doubt
as to the adequacy of the strength of the structure. Such tests shall be made after
the expiry of 56 days of effective hardening of the concrete.
403.12.2. In such tests superimposed tests load on any structure shall unless
otherwise specified be equal to one and quarter times the specified superimposed
load for which such structure has been designed and this load shall be maintained
for a period of 24 hours before removal. During the test struts strong enough to
take the whole load shall be placed in position leaving a gap under the members.
403.12.3. If within 24 hours of the removal of the load the structure does
not show a recovery of at least 75 per cent of the maximum deflection shown during
the 24 hours under load, the test loading shall be repeated after a lapse of at least
72 hours. The structure shall be considered to have passed the test if the recovery
after the second test is at least 75 per cent of the maximum deflection shown during
the second test.
403.12.4. If the reinforced concrete structure satisfies the tests made, the
payment for the labour involved in the test loading shall be made to the contractor
under clause 63 of "Preliminary Specifications". If the reinforced concrete does not
satisfy the tests no payment shall be made for the test and the whole work shall
be liable for rejection and shall be redone at the contractor's expense. Thereby the
contractor shall not be absolved from his liabilities under the "Rate of progress"
clause in the "Articles of Agreement" to stick up to the original programme of
completion of the work in time.
 -\

220 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

403.12.5. If during the test or upon removal of the load the member shows I

signs of weakness or faulty construction it shall be reconstructed or strengthened

as may be ordered by the Executive Engineer at the contractor's cost.
403.13. Measurement :-This shall conform to clause 401'7. Measurement
and check measurement of reinforcement shall be done before laying the concrete.
403.14. Rate :-The unit rate shall usually be per cu.m. or in the case of
floors and roofs it may be per sq.m. of a specified thickness. The unit rate shall
include complete execution of the work built in place inclusive of cost of materials,
tools and plant, forms, finishing; curing and all other works involved in complying
with this specification and the addendum specifications if any and the contract
drawings. Extra leads and lifts shall be paid for separately. Where tests are specified
by the Department the cost of testing shall be borne by the department, exccpt
where the materials have failed in which case the cost of such tests shall be borne
by the contractor or supplier in addition to the rejection of the materials and redoing
of the work at his expense.

Specification No. 404

Repair grouting to aprons and revetments with surki concrete
and pointing with surki mortar
404.1. The surface of the apron or revetme.nt shall be thoroughly cleaned
and joints raked out to 250mm. depth or to any other depth as specified by the
Executive Engineer. The whole surface shall be swept clean.
404.2. The joints shall then be filled in with surki concrete made with surki
mortar (1: t/z : %) as per SS : 1 14 and graded broken brick or broken brick aggregate
of maximum size 20 mm. If the interstices are large, a larger size aggregate as
specified by the Executive Engineer may be used. The concrete shall be rammed
with flat bars, trowels or flat ends of small thin crowbars to ensure effective
consolidation.
404.3. The surface shall then be neatly flush pointed with surki mortar
(1 : Vz: l) as per SS : 114, covering the joints of the newly laid concrete to the
depth of pointing while the concrete filling is still green.
404.4. The concrete and pointing shall be continuously kept wet at all
stages of the work and for three weeks after completion.
404.5, Measurement :-All linear measurements shall be in metres, correct
to 0.01 of a metre. All areas shall be worked out in square metres, correct to 0.01
of a square metre.
404.6. Rate:-The unit rate shall be per l0 square metres. The rate shall
include surface cleaning, filling joints with surki concrete, ramming, pointing,
watering and tools and appliances required for completing the grouting operation.
This shall also include the cost of baling but of water where required, unless
otherwise specified. Extra leads and lifts shall be paid separately.
S.S. 405 CONCRETES 221

Specification No. 405

Prestressed concrete work
405.1. Scope :-This specification covers prestressed concrete work for
bridges, buildings, pipes, tanks, pavements, transmission poles, etc.
405.2. Materials :

405.2.1. Concrele :-Concrete shall generally conform to SS : 402 as

specified for reinforced concrete. Only controlled concrete of grade not less than
M 350 shall be used. In addition to control tests at 7 days and 28 days age,
additional tests shail be conducted at intermediate ages where so specified, to
determine the strength of concrete at transfer or for stage prestressing. Unless
otherwise specified, ordinary or rapid hardening portland cement conforming to
SS : I 12 shall be used. The quantity of cement used shall not be less than
360 kg./cu.m. of concrete.
' 405.2.2. S/eel :-Steel for untensioned and prestressed reinforcement shall
conform to SS : 126.

405.2.3. Shesths :-Sheaths shall be manufactured from bright or galvanized

metal sheets or any other specified material. They shall be preferably machine made
and of a large enough bore to allow easy threading of the cable or bars in long
lengths,
They shall be strong enough so as not to be dented or deformed during
handling or concreting.
405.2.4. Anchorages :-Preferably proprietary forms of anchorages shall
be used and they shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications.
If the Executive Engineer so instructs a few of the anchorages proposed to be used
shall be got tested.
405.2.5. Grout:-Ordinary portland cement conforming to SS :l12 shall
normally be used for grouting. However at temperatures less than 7 "C rapid
hardening portland cement conforming to SS : I 12 may be used where so specified.
Sand where used for large ducts shall be of a size smaller than 2 mm.
Water shall generally conform to SS : 129. Special care shall however be
taken to ensure that it does not contain ingredients likely to include corrosion of
steel.

Plasticizers or other additives shall be used only when specifically permitted.

Additives containing chlorides, nitrates or other ingredient which induce corrosion
of steel shall not be permitted.
The compressive strength of the grout after 7 days moist curing measured
on l00mm. cubes shall be at least 175 kg./sq.cm.
405.3. Workmanship :
405.3.1. General :-Workmanship shall in general conform to SS : 403.

405.3.2. Handling prestressing steel :

222 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

405.3.2.1 . Cleaning:-All prestressed steel shall be free from loose mill

scale, rust, oil, grease or any harmful matter at the time of its placing in the member'
A slight film of rust is however not harmful.
Cleaning of the steel may be carried out by immersion in suitable solvent
solutions, wire brushing or passing through a pressure box containing carborundum
powder.

405.3.2.2. Straightening :-As far as possible prestressing wire shall be

obtained from the manufacturers in coils having diameter of not less than 350 times
the djameter of the wire, so that the wire springs back straight on being uncoiled'
If due to smaller diameter of the coil or any other reason it does not happen, the
wire shall be carefully straightened before use.
Prestressing steel bars shall be obtained from the manufacturers in straight
lengths. Any small adjustments necessary at the site shall be made by careful cold
bending.

Bars shall not be bent when their temperature is less than 10"C.
405.3.2.3. Positioning:-Prestressing steel shall be accurately located and
maintained in position, both vertically and horizontally as specified.
The method of supporting and fixing shall be such that the profile of cables
is not disturbed by heavy and prolonged vibrations by pressure of wet concrete,
by workmen or by construction traffic.
The steel sheaths or duct formers shall be suitably tied to the secondary
reinforcement or to withdrawable bolts, precast concrete blocks or other effective
means in such a manner that they do not give rise to excessive friction when the
steel is being tensioned.
405.3,2.4. Cutting:-All cuttings to length and trimming of ends shall be
done by suitable mechanical or flame cutters. When a flame cutter is used care shall
be taken to ensure that the flame does not come in contact with other stressed steel.

In post-tensioning, ends ofprestressing steel projecting beyond the anchorages

be cut after the grout has set.
405,3.2.5. Splicing :-Prestressing reinforcement may be spliced with
suitable coupling units which shall have ultimate tensile strength not less than that
of individual wire or bar being jointed.
Welding of prestressing steel shall in no case be permitted.
405.3.2.6. Protection :-Internal prestressing steel shall be protected by
grouting as detailed in clause 405.5.
Extemal prestressing steel shall be protected by encasing it in a dense
concrete cover secured to the main concrete'
405.3.3. Placing of sheaths :-sheaths shall be sufficiently water tight to
prevent concrete laitance penetrating them in quantities likely to increase friction.
Special care shall be taken to ensure water tightness at joints.
 S.S. 405 CONCRETES 223

The alignment of all sheaths and extractable cores shall be strictly as

- specified and maintained securely to prevent displacement during placing and
compaction of concrete.
405.3.4. Pløcing of ønchorages :-Anchor cones, blocks and plates shall
be positioned and maintained during concreting so that the centre line of the duct
passes axially through the anchorage assembly.
All bearing surfaces of the anchorages shall be cleaned prior to concreting
and tensioning.
Adequate provision shall be made for protection of the anchorage against
corrosion.
405.4. Tensioning :
405.4.1. Equipmenl :-The equipment used for prestressing shall be of
suitable hydraulic or mechanical type and shall satisfy the following general
requirements.
(i) It shall be capable of applying the controlled force without inducing
undesirable secondary stresses in the anchorages, reinforcement or concrete;
(ii) Vy'here two or more wires are stressed simultaneously, provision shall
be available for equal stressing of the wires;
(iii) Suitable means shall be provided for direct measurement of the force
in prestressing steel during all stages of tensioning as well as elongation of the
prestressing steel.
(iv) All load measuring devices shall be kept properly calibrated. Permissible
errors shall not exceed 5 plus or minus 0/o.

405.4.2. Procedure :-
405.4.2.1. General:-The tensioning shall be carried out under competent
supervision in such a manner that the stress in the steel increases at a gradual and
steady rate.
No prestress shall be transferred to the concrete until it attains the specified
strength at each stage.
No tensioning shall be carried out when the temperature is less than 2 "C.
Prestressing forces to be applied and corresponding extensions shall be
worked out in advance taking into account all losses. No alterations shall be allowed
unless specifically approved. A detailed record of the forces applied and the
observed elongation shall be maintained.
405.4.2.2. Pre-tensioning:-It shall be ensured that the tension is maintained
fully by some positive means during the period befween tensioning and transfer.
In the long line method of prestressing, sufficient locator plates shall be
distributed throughout the length of the bed to ensure that the wires are maintained
in thqir proper positions during concreting. lVhere a number ofunits are fabricated
in a line the moulds shall be free to slide in the direction of their length and thus
permit transfer of the prestressing forces to the concrete along the whole line.
224 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

Sufficient space shall be left between ends of adjacent units to permit access for
cutting of wires after transfer of stress.
The wire shall be cut in such a manner that the lateral eccentricity of the
prestressin minimum.
Moulds when required to sustain the reaction from the prestressing force
shall be sufficiently rigid.
405.4.2.3. Post-tensioning :-Where wires in a cable are not stressed
simultaneously, spacers shalf be securely held in position so as not to be displaced
during successive tensioning operations.
Vy'ires and cables shall be so aianged that they do not pass round sharp
corners or bends avoiding setting up of high local stresses. .
After the steel has been anchored the force exerted by the tensioning
equipment shall be decreased gradually and steadily, so as to avid shock to the
prestressing steel or anchorage.
In the case of precast concrete units- which are to be prestressed together
it shall be ensured that the faces in contract are true and the duct holes are properly
aligned.
405.4.3. Safety precautions :-Allreasonable precautions shall be taken
when working with or near steel which has been tensioned or is in process of being
tensioned. Personnel shall neither stand in line with the steel anchorages or the
jacking equipment, nor shall they walk on the steel. Effective protective measures
such as stout timber shields armoured with steel sheet shall be placed in line with
prestressing steel and behind the jacks, so as to protect personnel crossing in the
course of their duties,
405.5. Grouting :-
405.5.1. Equipment :-The equipment shall be capable of producing a
grout of colloidal consistency and delivering it at pressures upto 7kg./sq.cm., under
continuous operation without any appreciable pressure fluctuations. It shall also
include provision for recirculating the grout while actual grouting is not in p¡ogress.
405.5.2. Mixing :-Water shall be added to the mixer first and then the
cement added. After these have been thoroughly mixed sand in the specified
proportion and the additive if specified shall be added. Mixing shall continue for
at least 2 minutes or until a uniform consistency is obtained.
Unless otherwise specified the water cement ratio shall not exceed 0.45.
405.5.3. Injection :-lnjection shall be continuouS. Grout shall be allowed
to flow from vent openings until its consistency at exit is comparable to that of
the grout injected. The vent openings shall thereafter be fïrmly closed one after
another'in the direction of flow starting with the vent nearest the pump.
Sufficient pressure shall be used to force the grout completely through the
duct care beidg taken not to rupture the ducts.
Grouting shall be carried out as soon as practicable after the steel has been
stressed.
 s.s. 405 CONCRETES 225

The injection tubes shall be topped up with cement grout if any wastage or
subsidence of grout occurs when the pump is disconnected.

_ when
grouting is done at temperature below 7oc provision shall be made
for thoroughly protecting the concrete member against frost. Grouting is not
recommended in very cold weather.

Anchorage devices, ducts or metal sheath and mild steel shall be deemed
to be included in the item of high tensile steel and shall not be measured sepaiately.

DÃsçurvc Þngrneer. lne unlt rate shall also lnclude compensation for furnishi
and placing additional reinforcins steel reorired hw rhc -oji^,rlar crrc+^* ,,-^À /:
:11. t,";!:q.,*1iãi.i 1"rf",..,"s-,";i¡ö;eäi;î.ïffiiìï'ï#;
ducts, metal sheath, anchoring devices, distribution ptut.r br assembliäs
iäå'¿:::
and incidôntai
parts) and for furnishing samples for testing, foi grouting recesses
and pressure
grouting ducts.
In case high tensile steel is to be
tensile steel shall be per tonne and shall c
and plant required for fixing, placing,
tensile steel in the prestressed cemeñt
here in above. The cost of anchoring de
be included in this rate.
For pre-cast prestressed concrete members the rate
shall also include the cost of all materials, tools and plant
place these members in their final positions in the work
a,
by the Executive_Engineer. Extra lèads and lifts shall be paid for separately.
where
tests are specified by the department the cost of testing shätt
be bornå by department
except where the materials have failed in which caðe the cost
of suðh tests
bole by the contractor or supplier in addition to the rejection of the materialsshall
and
redoing of the work at his expense.

IAPDSS - l5l
226 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 5
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR BRICK MASONRY
GONTENTS

s/. Specification Name of Specification Page

Nc No. Nos.

501 Brick Masonry - General 227

502 Brick in Lime Morþr 236

s03 Brick in Surki Mortar 237

504 Brick in Cement Mortar 237

s05 Brick in Cement Lirrre Mortar 237

506 Brick 'Work in City 237

507 Brick Arch'Work 237

s08 Brick Honey Comb Work 240

s09 Reinforced Half Brick Partition Walls 241

510 Boiler Brick Works 242

5l I Honey Comb V/ork with White Washed Pan Tiles 244

512 Brick Nogging 244

 ?,2',7
BRICK MASONRY
s.s. 501

$ËcTl0N 5

STANDARD SPECIT'ICÀTIONS
FOR BRICK MASONRY
SPecification No' 501
llrick MasonrY - Gcneral
501.1. TelrninologY ;---
torm nlay also
50l ll Quoin:-An axtolnal cotner in brick work' thc
¡"rntc th" ìnlsonìy trnit trscd to lorrn lhc qtloin'
quoin (Scc
501.1.2. Squint:
.A brick of spccial shape usecl at an obliquc
Fig.: 571-lA).
cut or brokon across its lcngth
1.3. Bdl :-.-Any portion of a brick'
501
tion' ü'á *¡ot" sizc' as for exan,ple half
,,r,'¡ v inoï. .;;;"g ï; iÀ rt*tì*
bats,i tlìr'cc fotrrth bats, ctc'
wholc
either ma¡rufacttlrod or cut from a
,Or, t.O. Closc¡:--l'art of a brick
'
brick and usccl to maintaill boncl'
Bcvellc(ì closer lllustrated in Fig 50l-lB'
King closcr'-lllustrâtcd in Fig 501lC'
Quccn closcr'--Illustr¿tecl in Fig 50l-lD' '

DIFFERENT TYPES OF PART'BRICKS

IFig 5ol.1l i:,
t ot z \

190mm.
F- ---f
SIZES OF FULL BRICKS

t ' ->.'
,.--\,'/<,^,'">t
-< a'4-1 i-
%=)'IA. Squint

''ffi-r .l- ìd.lz,

-,4
, -l-.-"Í** H
þ
228 TI'IE A.,P. STAND,AI{D SPECIFICATIONS

L= Legnth ol Moclular Brick

W '. wi(llh of Modular Brick
ll: Ilcight of Modular B|ick
501.2. Matcrials ;

501.2.1. ßrick:; : -.'Unlcss othcrwise spccificd comnlon bultrt clay bricks

shall conlorm to SS : 102.

501.2.2. Morttu' :---l'his shall bc spccificd type and shall conform to SSs :

ll3 to Il6 PILLARS - ENGLISH BOND

--¡50 ¡.100 r- 200 -".¡

t--Ï--_=1õ0
ODD COURSE lr.- 400
1x2
__l BRrcK r --r-l 400
"
EVEN COURSE

-'l 100 þ- 150 200 -+- 150 *r

1 T
200 100
t 500
ODD COURSE EVEN COURSE
_r 50+ 100 r+ h_ 200 -,{

All D¡mensions in Mill¡melres

:(-
I
400

I l*- 400
ODD COURSE

r
300 100 î
150

ODD COURSE
I I
a-

s.s.501 BRICK MASONIìY

501.3. .loints in Bricl( rvork: Thc thickncss ofjoints in thc casc of

masonry with lilst class bricks shall not bc rnorc than l0mm,, ancl in the casc of
nasonry wilh sccond cltrss blicks shall not be nrorc than l2mnl.
501.4. Scalfoklirrg :
501.,1.1. Scaffolding shall bc dcsignccl to withstand all thc deacl, livc, a¡rcl
impact loads which arc likcly to come on thcrn.'l'lrcy shall also bc so designccl
to onsurc thc safcly of flìc worknren using thcm aud shall confolm in all lcspects
to thc rcqrLirarncnts ol' tlrc rclcvant builcling rcgLrlations on salbty, hcalth, an<l
wollììre, an(l also thc local buildilg byc-laws.
501.4.2. Fol exposcd bliok work or titlo work doublc scaflolding having
two sets of vcltical sLtpports shall bo provi<lcd. Thc supports shall bc soLrncl and
stlongly tic(l togethcr with holizorìtal picces ovcr which thc scaffolcling planks shall
bc fixcd. lol brick masonry to be covcrccl witlì plastor, singlc scaflolcling shall bc
allowccl. In this case, thc inncr cld o1'the horizontal scaffolcling polc shall rcst in
a holc providcd in thc hcaclcr coulsc only. Only onc hcaclor for cach polc shall
bo lcti out. Such holcs howcvcr shall not bc allowed in pillars undcr onc mctrc
in wiclth, or inrmcdiatcly ncar thc skcw backs, of archcs. Thc holcs lcfì in masonry
work fol supporfing thc scaffoldings shall bc fillcd ancl mâclc goocl, balora
plasteling.
501,4,3, Thc contrâctor shall bc lcspolsiblc for providing anil rraintainiug
suflìcicntly stlong scafloltling so âs to withstând all loads likcly to cornc upor it.
501.5. Soaking of lìr'icks :

501,5,1, Bricks lcquilcd for masonry in ccrnent or conìpositc limc mortars,

shall bc thoroughly soakecl in clcan watcr fo¡ atleast an hour in b¡ick linecl tanks
of sufñcicnt size immetliatcly befote use. The cessation of bubbles, when thc blicks
¿rre irnmerscd in watcr, is an indication of tholough soaking of b cks, The soakccl
l¡ricks shall be kcpt on wooden planks or brick platfolms to avoid contact with
carlh.
DETAILS OF BRICK BONDS (English Bond)
[Fis. 501 .3]

T
200
J
T'-
100
1
'100
J,
,+- 200 +- 200

ODD COURSË EVEN COURSE

 1'III.' A,P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

DETAILS OF BRICK BONDS (Ensl¡sh Bond)

h- 2oo I 1oo þ

1'
100

+
200

ù
þ zoo J¡- 2oo -T* 2oo 4 Éoodsoþ *J oo,¡
ODD COURSE EVEN COURSE

F-too--:ç-2oo=- 2()o
ODD COURSE

T
200

t
200

t IFis. 501.31
All Dimensions ¡n
s.s. 501 RRICK MASONIìY

DETAILS OF BRICK
BONDS (Contd.)

1% BRICK WALL
ODD COURSE

r
r 200
200

+ 4
100
*
200 -lþ 200 -¡|.{'

All Dimesions in mm.

[F¡9, 501.4]

501,6. Laying :

501.6.1. General I

501.6.1.1. B¡ick work shall bc laid in English bond as shown in Iìigures

501 .2to 501 .5 unlcss spccifiecl otherwise. Flalf or cut bricks shall not be uscd cxccpt
wlìera nccessary to conrplctc the bond, Closers in such cascs shall bc cut to the
rcquircd size and rrsecl near the ends of walls,
501.6.1.2. For cxposed brick work sclcctcd bricks shall be usecl lor thc
facc-
 TIITJ A,P, STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

DETAILS OF BRICK BONDS (Contd.)

200 4 hà- 200

All Dimesions in mm, [Fig.501.5ì
Elevation of Wall
501.6.1.3. Method of løyittg;-The b¡icks shall bc laicl as follows I
A laycr of moltar shall be spread on frrll width for suitablc lcngth of thc
lowcl courscs. Each blick shall first bc laicl so as to projoct ovcr the one bclow,
both at tho end and at thc sido, thclì prcssecl into thc mortar aurl shovccl ìnto final
position, and set homc by gcntle tapping with the handlc of a trowcl or.a wooclen
rnâllct. Its i'sitlc faccs shall bc butte.ecl with mortaÌ bcforc the next brick is lairl
iurd prcssed agÍìirìsf it. on cornpletion of a course, the vcltical joint sha| bc
fulry
fillcd lrorn thc to¡ with morrrr.
501,6,1.4. The walls shall be takcn up truly plumb. All oourscs shall,be
laid truly horizontal and all vertical joints shalì be tiuiy vertical. Vcrticâl joints in
altemate coursos shall conrc directly onc over thc othc¡-, Thc thickness of brick
courses shall be kept uniform and for.this purposc woodcn sh.aiglìt edgo
with
graduatiols giving thickncss of each brick course includccljoint shalì be uscd. .fhc
height of window.sills, bottom of linte ancl such othc¡ important points in thc
hcight
of the walls shall be markcd on it. B¡icks shall be laid with fì.ógs upwaLcls, A ict
of tools comprising of woo<lcn straight edges, Mason's spirit ieveì, square half
mctle rulc, line ancl pins, strirg and plumb shall bc kept on the site of \.vork,
501.6.1.5. Both thc faccs of walls of thickness greatcr than 20ùnm, shall
bc kept in proper plan. All the connoctecl brick work i-haÌl bc canied up nearly
at one lcvcl and no portion of the wo¡k shall bc lcft moro than one mctrc below
the rest of the work. Wherc this is not possiblc the work shall bc rakccl back
according to bond (and not left toothed) ît an anglo not steeper thoan 45".
501.6.1.ó. All iron fixtules, pipcs, outlets of water, hold_fasts ofcloors anrl
windows, ctc., which arc required to be built in walls shall bc built in walls shall
bc embcdded in cemcnt mortâ¡ in cement conc¡ete as specificd, in their positions
as thc work procecrls. Cemcnt concrcte shall be paicl for separately, Fixing
of steel
and Alu'rinium doors, windows and vcntilato¡s shall be dàne in accorrlance with
SS : lô 10.
501.6.1.7. The fluc ofthe chimncy shall bc prrgcttecl thrt is plastcrcd with
mrr.l gobar mortar(J mud : I gobar'¡ ls thc work procccds.
S.S.5O1 BI{ICK MASONRY 233

501.6.1.8. /oir¡s ;-Ulicks shall t¡e so laid thît all joints arc quitc full of
-lltc thickncss ofjoints shall be as clcsc¡ìbetl in clausc 501.3.'l'hc facc joirtts
mortar,
sh¿rll bc rakccl to a ninjmum cLcpth of l5mrn. by a jackirrg tool daily tluring thc
progrcss of worl< whctt thc nrortrr is still grccn so as to providc propcr kcy for
il," pl"rt"r or pointing to bc dotrc. Whcte plastering or pointing is not required'lhc to
bc cionc, thc joints shall l¡c strLrck flush ancl l'inishecl at tlìc timc of laying
|'a,:c ofblick wo¡k shall bc clcattccl thc vcry day aftcr brick work is lai<l and all
mortar dtoppings removccl.
501.6.2. Walls :

501.6.2.1. ,4.11 quoins shall bc accuratcly constructod and thc heights ofthc
coutscs checkccl with storey rods âs thc wolk proocctls lrt gcrtcral quoin-bricks slrall
bc hcatlcrs and strctchcls in altematc courses, thc boncl lreing cstablishecl by placing
a quoin closcr ncxt to thc quoin headcr.
501.6.2.2. Acutc and obtuse quoins shall be bonclecl, whcrc practicablc, in
thc salne way as squarc quoils, Obhrse quoins shall bo formccl with sqrtints showitlg
a thrcc-qua|ter brick on one fhce and a quartcr brick on tho othor' Scc liigs 50l 6
and 507.7.
.úÀ ø\

#,iffi*&%ffi
tu tu
tu #^
/€d\\,i\
ffifrffi
& tu lFig, 501.61
SQUINT JUNCTIONS IN ENGLISH BONÐS
501.6.3. Pilasters:--.Thesc shall bc so sct ot¡l as fo avoid broken bon<l,

501.6.4. Openin¡¡s :

501.6.4.1. l)oor and winclow opcniugs shall h¿ve arch work or lintcls
(stone or R.C,C.) ovcr thcm of type as specifiecl or as ditectcd by the Excctrtivc
Enginecr whcrc so specificcl a splay of (1 : 4) to (l
: 6) shall bc provided in the
jambs on inner sides, in cascs where a door or window opens iuward.
501.6.4.2. The depth of ¡evcals and rcbates shall, wherc, practicablc,
conform to standard brick sizes i¡r ordel to avoicl cutting of bricks and thcreby
weakening the work.
 lllli r\.P. SI ANDAIìl) SPlriCllf lClA'lìONS

,'f\
Y..1
,ii l
(t¡:-\
i\-. \
/,,ì,,)i:\
., ,l;\ È;ì
i!r.iiìtt'. it r,i ltlii,t!çå
,.,.)\ \:..4
r.,.':ì,. ,{.i\\
tiLii,,ì-üì i tiii.ririrfrÌl$
,t
,- ^'i.//
\. .-"'t':t I
i.,t-ti
urtii t,i\,i/ +, i 1ä ùì1l/

ní#o*l lF¡g. 501.71

il'úir]#
ACU'I'II AND OBTUSI] SQUINT QUOINS IN ENCI,ISH BONDS
501.6.4.3. Thc alrarrgcmcnt of boncl at quoins at janrbs of opcnings shall
bc sylnrnchical.
501.6.5. Partitions :--Fol half'-brick portions to bc kcyccl into urain walls,
itìdcnts shall bc left in tlìc latcr.
501.6.6. Brick cop¡ng & cut bt'ick corners :. Care shall bc takcn that thc
bricks forming tl'ìe top coursos of all plinth parapcts stcps, the tops ol'walls bclow
IìCC slab ancl ends of walls shall bc propcrly Iacliatocl and keyccl into position as
showrr in [ig. 501-8.
50) .6.'/ . 'li ealnent at the eflds ctf the beaus oncl joi.sts :-The cnds of all
rvootlcn bcarns, wooclcn loof trusscs, etc., shall lcsl in rccesscs having 40mm. spaÇc,
fol the frcc circulation of ait all tountl thcm lnd provìdcd wìth pcrforatccl zinc
shecting, Wharc it is nccessary to build cnds of stccl joists or othcr stecl work into
masonry. thc masonry fol atlcast l30mm. all-round thc imbcddcd stcel shall be in
ccment Jnodar. Co¡bels undcr hcavy bcants, cor¡rices or brick under joists ancl bcd
plates for bcans, gililers ancl tlusses shall be built-in, as the work ploccccls in
accorclancc, with thc drawings and adclendum spccifications, if any supplied.
501.7. Protection against dâmâgcs
501.7.1. Care shall be taken cluring constrrLction that edges of.jambs, sills,
hcacls, ctc., arc not clamagecl.

501.7.2. The brick wolk shall be protected from thc cffccts ofsun, r'aìn,
liost, ctc., (during the constnrctioÌr and until such tiûìc it is grccn ancl likely to be
clamagccl) by covering with gunny bâgs, stfaw, ctc.
501.1Ì. Curing:-.All masonry built wjth sr.uki, hydraulic limc o¡ cement
mortar shall bc kept wet for a periocl of two wccks aftcr laying, unless a longer
pcriocl is stipulatccl by thc Exccutivc lnginccr'.
,-

s.s. 501 lllìlCK M¡\SONRY

T
300
DoWEL 250mm
DEEP FILLED
WITH CEI\¡EN1
N/ORTAR 1 ; 3
+ T (1C : 3C sAND)
10i
70 I

+ 200
70
I
60
T
-r60F70r 70F100r
t
ls 200 -'l Alternative

,{
f
70
+
100
T
60
T
t
70
¿
-t T
70 300
+
70 F- 200 -{
60
'(
f

1ug¡791 76 H00d
I
þ' zoo d All Dimesions in mm.
lFis.501.Bl
SKETCHES SHOWING TOP COURSES CUT BRICK CORNER
IMARU CONA]
501.9. Final ltinish :

501 .9. I . Unloss othotwisc spccificil all brick wolk shall be plasterccl as pct
tha rclcvÂnt standard specifiÇation for plastcring as mentioned ill the Tendcr
Schcdt¡lcs.

501.9.2. Whclc pointing is spccified it shall be clone as per tlìo rclovè]ìt

stauclarcl spccification for pointing as mcntioned in thc Tcndcr Schcdules After thc
pointing is properly curved thc wall fâcc shall bc washcd clcan ancl staitrs and
adharing mort¿ìr lumps renrovecl.
 236 T[.f ti A,P, STAND/\RD SPICIFICATIONS

501.10. Mc¡surcnrcnt :
501.10.1. 'lhe qlrantity of brick work to bc paid unclet.this itcm shall be
in numbcr of aubic llìctrcs mcasurcd of, thc complctccL brìck wo¡k ancl limìting the
dimcnsions to thosc slìown on the plans. Llatterod, tapercd ancl curvcd portionsihall
bc mcasulccl nct, l)ilncllsions shall bc mcasurccl corroctto 0.01 of â mch.c ând thc
quantitics of individual itcr¡s wo|kccl otù corrcct to 0.1 of a cubic tnctrc rcspcctivcly.
501.10.2, The wo¡k shall bc measur.ccl in thc following catcgories in
convcnicnr stagcs stating thc hcight or dcpth:
(i) [iom loundation to plintlì ]cvcl,
(iì) Irrom plinth levcl to floor. two levcl,
(iii) lìom {loor two lcvcl to floor thrce lovcl ancl so on,
(iv) Brick work in the palapots shall bc neasurcd ancl paid for. scparatcly.
501,10.3. Corbcls, string courscs, projccrirìg pilaster.s, apr.ons ancl siìls,
corniccs, drip courscs, ovcrsailing courscs ¿rnd othcr pr.ojcctions, etc., of splayccì,
bLrll-nosecl ol alìy othcr typo or purposc nìadc, ol out bricks shall bc nlcasurccl
scpafatcly in rrLuning lnctlcs stating thc clinteusions of cach,
501.10.4. No tlcdtrctions shall bc rnadc, rìot any oxtra paynrcut uraclc for
thc following:
(t) þlnds o1'dissimilal uratelials (i.c., joists, beams, posts, girclcrs, r.aftcls,
purlins, trusscs, corbels, steps, otc.) caclì 0.05m, in section or less.
(ii) Opcnings each ì.rpto 0.01mr, (in calculating the area of thc openings
any scpâratc lintels ol sills shall bc inclucled along with thc sizc of the opcnings
but the cnd poltions of thc lintcls shall bc cxcludccl ând thc oxtra wiclttrs of tñe
rebatcd rcycals il any shall also be excluclcd).
(iii) Wâll platcs and bed plates, bearings of slabs, chajjas, ancl thc likc,
whcl'e thc thickncss clocs not exccccl l00nrnr. ancl the bearing cìocs not extcncl ovcr.
thc full thickness of thc walls.

. 501.10.5. Masonry (cxcluding fire brick work) in chimney brcasts, chimncy

stacks, smoke ol air flucs upto 0.20 sq,m. scctional area, shall be measu¡cd as solirl
and no cxtra paynrcnt shall be madc for.pârgclling and corning such flucs, Whcr.c
flues excecd 0.20 sq.tn. iu scctioual ar.ea, clcductions shall be maclc for.thc samc
and pargotting ancl coniug flucs paicl for separatcly.
501.10.6. Appeltr¡rcs lor fire placcs shall not be deductc(l an(l oxtra labour
shall not be mcasuled, for spiayìng of jambs and throating.
501.11. R¡ìtc :-Thc lìatc shall bc for a unit of ona cubic metlc of finishcd
work inclusivc of conveyance, scaffolcling, constmction, quoins ancl jantbs, smooth
rubbing oljoints, cuÌrrg, ctc., cornplctc in all rcspccls.
'
Specification No.502
Brick in Limc Mortar
502.1. All rclevant clauscs of SS : 501 shall apply.
s.s. s07 I]IìICK MASONITY 237

502.2. MatcI'ials :

502.2,1, llricks:.. Whcthct fiLst class or sccotrcl class l¡ricks arc to bc tlscd
shall bc specific<l ancl shall conply with SS : 102
502.2.2. L¡me ntortar '..-'-'1'hç nìoltar shlll confotn to SS : I13 and thc
proportiou of linìc mortar shalt bc as spccified in thc rclcvânt schcdulc itcnr'
SPecification No. 503
Brick in Surki Mortar
503.1. This shall bc samc ¡s for SS : 502, cxccpt thât Surki mortar
complying to SS: 114 shall bc uscd in this casc.
Specification No. 504
Brich in Ccnent h4ortar
504.1. This shall be sane as loÌ SS : 502, except that tl'ìc ccmcnt moltâr'
of spccilrccl ptoportion to bc usccl sh¿ll conlotm to SS : l15
Specification No. 505
ßrick in Ccmcttt Limo Mortar
505.1. This shall be samc as for SS : 502, oxcept that thc ccmcnt limç
nìortâr ol spccificcl plopottion to bc ttsccl shall confollrl to SS : I l6
Specification No' 506
Brick work in ClaY
506.1. All rclcvart clîuscs of SS : 501 shall apply.

506.2. Materi:ìls:
506.2.1. Bricks: Sccond class bricks conformitrg to SS | 102 shâll be
usccl,

506.2.2. Mud moúu' .-Mrt(l mortar shall be as pu clause 616 2

506.3. Work shall be carried out as pet SS ; 502 with thc cxccplion that
clay rcplaccs thc lime moltat, Thickncss ofjoints shall not cxcecd l2mm. The
blicks requirc no rvctting beforc use and no curing is neccssaty
Specification No. 507
Brick'Arch Work
50?.1. All rclcvatrt clauscs of S.S. 501 shall apply.
50?.2. Maierials :
507 .2.1. Bricks :-tsricks shall be of first cl¿rss oL sccond class of thc
specificd typc and shall bc cut and rubbed to thc rcquircd shape to give uniformly
widc ¡adial joints unless specially moulded bricks arc specificd. The bticks shall
gcr.rerally cornply with SS : 102.

507 .2.2, Morlar i -Mo¡tar shall be of spccifiecl proporlion ancl shall confotm
to SS : 113 ro ì16.
 .II
238 I[ì A,P, S'IANDARI) SPBCIÞ'ICATIONS

507,3. Form wolk :. ..Fornr wolk alì(l ccntcring f'or alclìcs shâll bo cracta(l
aniì got approvccl by thc Exccutivc Engincer bel'orc thc alch tvo|k is staltcd. lt shall
bs strong cnough to bcâr thc clcad loacl of thç arch and the livc loads that are likcly
to co¡na upo¡ì it during construÇtion without any apprcciablc clcflcctions.
'Iho shuttcring shâll bc tightcncd tvitlì hard rvoocl wcclges ol sand boxes, so
that tlìc s¿ìrlrc coLLld bc cascrl without any jcrks boing tta¡tslnittod to the arch wo|k.
lhc casing irlTangcrncnt shall pcnnit all portions of thÇ shuttcr¡ng being lowclcd
sinrultaneously,
Thc shuttc¡ iDg shall be stnrck wjthi¡r 48 houfs of thc cornplction of thc arch,
ancl ouly alìcr tlrc spandrcl hirs bccn fillcd in alcL thc arch is loadcd.
507,4. Lay¡ng :

507.4.1. Circulqr Arclrcs.

507,4,1,1, Tlrese are eithcr'(a) plain archcs brrilt in hallbrick conccntric
rings with brcak ioints, or (b) gaLrgcd archcs built out of bricks cut or specially
nroulcled to bc lcqLrilcd shapc as shown ìn Fig. 507-1. The alch work shall be
calliccl or ûom both thc cnds unilormly and kcycd in tho ccntlc. Thc l¡rickis shall
bc flushcil with nroltar ancl wcll ptcsscd into thcit positions, so ¿ts to squcozo or¡t
a part of tl'ìc rnortal an<l lcavc thc joints thin an(l compact. All joints shall bc full
of lnortirr ancl thc thickrrcss ofjoints shall not bc lcss than 5mnr. and shall not be
morc than l5mm.
BRICK WORK IN ARCHËS
Circular arch guaged cut or moulded óricks (WËen the Face is pointed)
FACE JOINTS NOT I\,4ORE
voussotRSJ
THAN smm. IHICK

lFis.507-1Al
-.-

I]RIC]K MASONRY 239

s.s.507

BRIGK WORK lN ARCHES Circular (Plain) Arch

(When the Face is plastered) lJs¡ng ord¡nary Bticks w¡th varying thickness
or mortar Jo¡nts ,mm. to 50mm.
507.4.1.2. As soon as the arch is complctocl thc haunoltes shall be loadctl
by fìlling up thc spanclrcls with carth or any spccifiecl mater ial ttpto thc crown lcvcì
ol the alch. Care shall bc takcn to loail thc haunchcs olÌ the two sides of thc
spandlcls unifbrnrly.
50':,.4.1.3. When thc arch facc is to be pointcd (ancl not plastered) thc fircc
bricks shall bc cut to propor shâpc or moulded so as to havc joints not cxccoding
5rnm.. in thickncss. Bricks shall bc laicl radial through joints to thc full depth ol'
thc arch ancl thc voussoirs shall b¡cak joints to tho firll dcpth of thc Arch. Thc
voussoirc shall also brcak joints with cach othcr.
507.4.2. I4qt Arches :

5O'7.4.2.1. Those shall bc gaugcd archos of bricks cut or nouldcd to proper

shape as shown in Fig, 507.2. Thc cxtraclos shall bc kept horizontal ancl the intraclos
shall be given a sJight camber of I in 100 of thc span The centlc of the arch fiom
which joìnts shall. racliatc, shall be cleternrined by thc point of the intcrscction of
thc trvo lincs drawn fiom thc encls of the ¿ìr'ch at thc springing level and at 60"
lo llìc horizontal.
507.4.2.2. In flat archas, bricks shall be laid radial throrlgh joints to tlìQ
fìrll dcpth ol thc arch and voussoirs shall also break joints with each othe¡. Thc
atch wo¡k shall bc carricd up from both the cncls rrniformly and keycd in thc ccntrc.
This thickncss of thc points shall not exceed 5mm Thc top of thc arch shall be
hor izontal,

507.4.3. Skew-baclrs :--Bticks forming skew-backs shall bc d¡essc<l or cut

or as to givç plopcr raclial bcaling to thc end vor¡ssoirs. Impropcrly dressed bticks
shall not bc usccl.
240 ].IIE A,P, ST,A.NDAIID SPECIFICAI'IONS
FACE JOINTS NOT MORE THAN 5mm. Tl-llCK

FACE JOINTS FLAT GUAGED ARCH

[Fis.507.2]

507.4.4. Spandrels ;-The bricks of thc spandrel walls at thcir functions

with the ex¡ados of the a|ch shall bo cut to fit into thc curyature of the arch.
507.5. Méasurcmcnt :-'fhe lcngth of the arch shall bc mcasurcd as the
mean of the cxhados and thc intrados of thc arch coücct to 0.01 mctre and
quantities worked out in cubic mctrcs, correct to 0.01 of a cubic mctle.
507.6. Râte :--The unit ratc shall bc for one cubic netre of finishcd arch
work including matolials, scaffolding and labour, etc., completc.
Specification No. 508
. Brick Honey Comb Work
508.1. All rclcvani clauses of SS : 501 shall apply.
508.2. Mat€rials :
s.s.509 BIìfCK MASONRY 241

508.2.1. Bricks:-Bricks of specified class shall be uscd and shall confo¡m

to SS : 102,
508.2.2. Mortar :-Mortar shall be of specified proportion and shall conform
ro SSs.: 113 to ll6.
508.3. Laying i For half b¡ick thick walls, strctcher bond shall be used
throughout the length keeping cqual opcnings of rectangular shapes or of shapcs
as specificcl. F'or one brick thick walls spccified bonds shall be adopte<l Bricks shall
havà a minimum bearings of40mm. on either side. Tho thickness of
joints shall
bc 10mm. arÌd the joints shall bc struck smooth o¡ pointed with (1 : 3) centcnt
mo¡tar.
508.4. Meâsurement :-Linear climensions shall be measured corroct upto
lomm, and thc areas worked out corrcct up two placc of docimals in square metros'
:
Tho unit ratc shall be for one square mchà of tho honey-
508.5, Råte
comb work without making any deductions for the openings,
Specification No. 509
Rei¡rforced Half Brick Partition Walls
509.1. All relevânt clauses of SS : 501 shall apply
509.2. Matcrials :
509.2.1. Brick :-Bricks used shall be of first class varìety shall comply
with SS : 102.

509.2.2. Motar :-Thc cement moúar used for reinforced brick work shall
generally bc rich and dense and not of weaker mix than (l : 4) Lime moftar shall
not be uscd. The cement mortar uscd shall confo¡m to SS : 113.
509.2,3, Reinlorcement :

509.2.3.1. Rcinforcement for half-brick partition walls may bc in thc form

of mikl stecl flats or hoop iron or expanded mesh or mild stecl bars or labric ancl
shall bc of specified qualities.
509.2,3.2. ln the case of round bars used as reinforcement, the
diametcr
shall not cxceed 8 mm. Flat bars or similar rcinforccment used shall not havc a
thickness excceding 8 mm.
509.3. Laying :

509.3.1. Brick work : :The brick work shall be done cxactly in the same
mannar as for SS : 104 cxcept that strctcher bond shall only be uscd. The heights
of such walls shall not be more than 4 metrcs.
509.3.2. Re¡nforcenent I

509,3.2.1. The rcinfotcement shall bc well cmbeddcd in cemcnt mortar at

every third course or as specified. Half the joirìt thickncss of mortar shall first bc
laid and tho othet half laid after the reinforcement is placed in position.
509.3,2.2.'I'hc inlaicl steel roinforccment shall be completcly embedded in
mortar. Ovcrlaps in thc rcinforcement, if any shall not be less than j00mm
IAPDSS - l6l
242 THE A,P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

509.3,2,3. The joints shall bc not no¡e than 1Omm. gcncrally and whcte thc
rcinforcing flats or bars arc thcre thc joints shall be not loss than lsmm.
509.3.2.4. The mortar interposcd betwoen tho reinforccment bars ancl thc
brick shall bc not less than 5mm, thick,
509.3,2.5. In thc casc whcrc thc ¡einforccmcnts cross insicle â joint, thc
diarnete¡ of the reinforcemcnt shall not excccd 5 mm. unless spccially shaped bricks
are used to permit larger reinforccmcnt.
509.4. Meâsuremcnt :-\ryhere half brick thick wall is jointcd to the mâin
walls of 200 mnl. or grcatar thickness tho measuromcnt for half brick thick wall
shall bc takcn for its clcar lcngth from ths face of the ¡¡ain wall. Thc length ancl
hcight of walls shall bc measurcd cor¡act to the millimetres and areas worked out
in square mcfres, corrcct to 0.01 of a square mctro.
509.5. Râtc ;-Thc unit ratc shall be for one square metre of the finishcd
work.
Specification No. 510
Boiler Brick Works
510.1. All rclevant clauscs of SS : 501 shall apply.
510.2. Materials :

510.2.1. Fite brictø : Jhcy shull bc nroulclcd from fire clay (confolming
to I.S. Spccifications) burnt at a high temperature in special kilns. They shall be
dense, tough, cvenly burnt throughout and of the required size and shape. They
shall be white or yellowish in colour and shall not show signs of fusion when heated
to a temperature of about 1600 "C. Crushing strength of fire bricks shall not be
lcss than 130 kg.sq.cm. Wcight of the fire b¡icks shall be about ).4 gm./c.c., land
absorption of water shall not bc more than l0% by weight when tested,
501.3. All brick wo¡k ofboilers, flues, ash pits and economisers, etc., when
cxposed to flame or hot gases shall invariably be lined with specified fire,bricks.
Bricks chimncys shall be lined with fire bricks from the base to a height lvhich
shall bc fixed in accordance with the local regulations, (Municipal byeJaws, etc,).
510.4. The joints of the fire brick lining shall be made with specified fire
clay of finc quality and the ordinary bricks though set in with as fino mortar as
possible, shall necessarily be laid with some what coärserjoints. The ordirary bricks
will therefore require to be specially moulded and selected to suit the make of fire
bricks used so that the depth of onc fire brick including one fire clay joint, shall
corrcspond with the depth ofone ordinary brick including oìe mortarjoint as shown
in Fig. 501-1,
510.4.1. The fire bricks shall be merely dippecl in well puddlcd firc clay
mixed with wâter to the consistency of paste so that thcrc is no appreciable
thickness ofjoints between the firc bricks. (Endcavours shall be madc to obtain
firc bricks of a suitable thickncss to bond in with thc local bricks to avoid the
neccssity of special moulding of local bricks. Fire bricks are made available in
different thickncsscs for this purposc).
s.s. 510 BRICK MASONRY 243

Fine
claY

SECTIONAL ELEVATION
lF¡9,510.1ì
510.5. The fire brick linings shall be nadc of onc course of hcaders
followcd by two courses of strctchcrs and the ordinary bricks work laid to
coneslond with this sctting
510.6. Where brick wo¡k touches thc boilcr firc clay only shall bc ttsecl
ancl on no account mortar containing lime o¡ cement shall come in contact with
any paú of the boiler ProPçr'
501.6.1. Thc top two courses ofbrick work shall be set ii.ì ccmont except
whare in oontact with the boilcr.
510.7. At the top of the boiler sidc walls an off-set or chase shall be left
into which the non-conclucting composition covering the boiler can be jointed, as
shown in the Fig, 501.2.

SECTIONAL ELEVATION

lFig. 510.21
244 THE A,P, STANDARD SPECIFTCATIONS

510,8. The brick work shall be allorvcd to dry thoroughly before a fire is
lighted and any cracks appear¡ng on a subsequent fìrìng due to expiÌnsion or
contractìon or fâulty drying of the mortar shâll at once be rcctified by scraping out
thc joints and rcpointing with firc clay whilst thc b¡ick work is hot, (ordinary mortar
shall not be used in such cases).
510.8.1. Thc fire brick lìning shall be canied round the fire box doo¡s and
âcross thc top and bottom of thc tube hcaders in water tube boilers. Thc spacc
bctwoon thc tube hcaders shall be carefully packed with asbestos packing ând firc
clay.
Specification No. 511
Iloney Comb work with White Washetl Pan Tiles
511.1. Materials :

5ll.l.l. Pqn tiles '.-^-Pan tilcs shall conform to SS

5ll,l.2. Mortur :{he mortar shall be of spccified proportion ancl shâll

corrfonn to SSs. : 113 to 116.

511.2. Laying :

511.2.1. The tilcs shall be soakc<ì in water for 24 hours and allowcd to
tlry. Aftel thcy arc quite cìry they shall bc dippcd in whitc wash complying with
SS ; 908, (of the consistency of crcam) and again allowod to clry.
511.2.2. the tilcs shall then be laid irì rectangular rows with the concavc
surface down-wards, with sufficient mortar at the joints to prcvent the tiles from
displacement. The tiles in each row shall be builfin, so that eâch tilc cover thc
joint betwcen thc tilcs in the row immediately below. Broken tiles shall never be
uscd on the work. In no case shall tilcs of differcnt dimensions be used on the same
work.
511.3. Measurement :-This shall conform to clausc, 508,4,
511.4. Rate :-This shall conform to clause 508.5.
Specification No. 512
Brick Nogging
512.1. General :-This work shall be 150mm. in thickness. This consists
of a combination of teak posts and planking, (tho timbcr complying with SS : 130,
"Tcak-wood"), the inter spaccs being filled in with "Brick in Lime Mortar" of SS
: 502 with first class bricks and finally plastcrecl with lime mortar on both tlìo faces.
512.2. Framc ìvork of timber :-The uprights of posts shall be l50mm.
by.l20mm. and shall be placed at ccntral distances of 1,5m, Befween thesc posts
aàd notched into them shall be holìzontal ribs ofteak plankirrg l50mm. by 50mm.
lixed 900mr¡. apaft vertically. Between rhese cross braces of diagonals l50mm.
by 40mm. shall be inserted halved together at points of inter-section and spiked
to the posts. All faces of timber in contact with the masonry shall be well coated
ìvith bitumen paint (two coats) and the faces of timbcr exposed to vicw on
completion of the walling shall be given three aoats of best whito lcad paint or
any other pajnt âs may be specificd.
- s.s.512 BRICK MASONRY

512.3. Intcrspaces i--All the interspaces shall be fillcd in with brick in

limo monar
512.4. Plastering :-After the completion of thc brick work, the surfacc
of the work shall be kept thoroughly wcttcd. Nails shall be driven into tho lcdge
of the timbo¡ frame work to give a hold to thc limo plaster, (with which both thc
faces of thc work shall then be finished off to a thickness to be slightly
sunk from
ths faces of thc posts) The plastering shall be kept wet for one week'

512.5. The plastcring shall bc givcn two coats of whitc washing as for SS
:908;
512.6. If a cloor or wintlow is to bc fitted in a brick nogging wall, a cirawing
shall bc giveû showing the details of thc shutter and particulars of fittings, ctc'
512.7. Measuremcnt :-The work shall be measurcd in metres, corroct to
0.01 of a mctre ancl thc aroas worked out in square netros, corroct to 001 of a
squâre motro.
512.8. Ratc :-Thc unit rale shall bo for l0 sq metres of cornplctely
ñnishcd work inclusìvc of painting and white washing in accordancc with this
specification. Thc rato shall incluclc thc cost of tho doo¡ or window and all the
aicontpanying fittings, etc., unless otherwise specified
 TI'IE A.P. STANDARD SPECIF'ICATIONS

sEcTtoN 6
STANDARD SPECIF'ICATIONS FOR STONE MASONRY
CONTENTS

.s/. SpeciJication Nane of Specifcation Page

No.

l. 60r Stone Masonry-General 246

2. 602 Cut stone in Lims Mortar 25s
3. 603 Cut stone in Surki Mort¡r 257
4. 61)4 Cut stono in Ccment Mortar 257
5. q05 Cut stonc-Rock Rustic or quarry faced in mortar )\1
6. 606 Cr¡t stone string course, band a¡d othcr cor¡rices
ctc,, in Mortâr. 257
7. 607 Cut stone arch work 259
8. ó08 Rubble arching 260 ,
I

9. 609 Coursed Rubblc in Lime Mortar' (l st son) 261

r0. 610 Courscd Rubblo in Surki Mortar (lst sort) 263
11. 6ll Coursecl Rubblc in Cement Mortar (l st sort) 263
12. 6t2 Coursecl Rubblc in Mortar (2nd sort) 263
13. ót3 Uncoursed I{ubble or randum rubble in lime mortar 264
14, 6t4 Randum Rubble in sulki mortar 265
15. 615 Randum Rubblc in Ccment Mortar 266
16. 616 Randum Rubble in clay 266
l'7. 6t7 Dry stone masonry (for retaining walls) 266
18. 618 Damp proof (or ant pfoof) course with Shahabad
stone/Cuddapah stone 50 mm thick in Cement
Monar I : 3 266
19. 619 Rough stonc dry packing for aprons and revctmont 267
20. 620 Laterite or rough stone pitching for conservancy works 268
2t. 621 Mooram backing to lough stonc dry packing and
gravelling to top and side slopes of bunds l50mm. thick 269

Specification No. 601

Stone Masonry-General
601.1. Scope or Applicibility :-The following i:lausçs arc to be complied
with for all classes of stone masonry. The clauses of this specification shall bc
S.S, 60ì STONE MASONRY
and the
Inti"nbl" in all pcrtincnt tlctails to thc following tnasonry spccifications withihc
1""";;;; i"; .;;'nurii"ul.r it",n of work is for complction in accordancc specified
;il;;;;i*;;t oi this spccification and tha othet special speciflrcations
by thc Executive Engineer.
Stone :-The source, typc, quality strength ând water absorption
of
601'2'
stone confoIm to SS : 107.
which it is to be
60l.2.l S0lection :-In sclecting a stone thc situationforin variotrs situations
uro¿ nor-to U" considercd. Thc common typcs
of stones in tlsc
are shown in Table 601-4.
Table 601-A
Common tYPes of Stones

Situal¡o Types of Stones

.9/.No.
(3)
(r) (2)

L Masonry work submcrged in water Denso stolìcs like granitc ancl

gneisscs.

2. Masonry work exposcd to smokc and Granite, quartzitc

chcmical fumes
3. For fire rcsistalìt masonry Sand stone

4. For carved or ornamental rvorks, Granite, Marble, sand stone, etc

archcs, etc.
5. For masonry bclow plinth course or in Denso stones likc granìte
contact with soil gneisses

601.2.2. Dressing .
601.2,2,1 . Thc following are the common type of dressing :

(a) Pitchcd faccd drcssing

(b) Hammer drcssing
(c) Rock facing
(d) Rough tooling
(e) Punched dressing
(l) Close ¡ickcd drcssing
(g) Fine tooling
601.2.2.2, Pitched faced dressing :-Thle edges of a pitchcd- faced dressed
,ron" rholl bc level ancl shall be in theìame plane being absolutely square wìth
the bed of the stone. Superfluous stone on the face shall be allowed to remain
there
and left ¡aisedin the fãrm of natural rounded cobble stone The minimum with
faced drcssing round the four eclges of the face of the stone shall
be
of pitched
25mm. Sec Fig. 601.l.
 Wil
TLIE A.P. STANDARD SPECIIIICATIONS

PITCHED FACED DRESSED SURFACE

lFig. 601.11
601.2.2.3. Hanmer clressing ;-A
hammcr drosscd stonc shall havç no
sharp and iuegular corncrs and shall have a comparatively ovon surface so âs to
fit wcll in the masonry, The hammer d¡esscd stone is also kitown as hanrmer ficccl.
The busing on the face shall not be more than 4Oru¡rr. unless othorwisc spccificd
on an exposed face, Sec Fig. 601-2.

lt--1
ll:*ïri:ffi11_]
I
I ¡,l,It,tùt!:ù:\ Li

HAMMER DRESSED STONE SURFACE

IFis, 001.2]
601.2.2.4. Rock facíng, ltock Rustic, euarry føced :_A stone which has
,been d¡esscd in this manner shall have a minimum ðf ZS**, wicle chisel drafts
at tJre four edges, all the edges being at thc samc plane. The bushing on the
exposcd
face shall'not be more than 40 mm. unless otherwise specifiecl.ice nlg. 6Ot.:.
601.2.2.5. Rough tooling;-Rough toolctÌ su¡face shall have sedes of
bands, 40mm. to 50mm. wide, morc or less parallel to thc tool marks
all over the
surface. These marks may be eithc¡ horizontal, vertical, or at an angle of 45"
as
required, The edges and corners shall be rcndercd square ancl true, The dressed
stone may have depressions on tlte su¡facc. The depth of gap betwccn the
su¡face
and a straight edge held against the surface shall noì U. rnãrô than 3 mm. Sec Fir¡.
601.4.

601.2.2.6, Punched clressing:-The rough tooled surface is furthcr drcssed

to show scries of parallel ridges. Chiscl marksìhall be left all over thc surface.
The depth of gap between the surface and a shaight edge helcl against the surface
shall not be more than 3mm. See Fig. ó01.5.
601.2.2.7. Close Picked dressirtg :-The punched stonc is further dressed
so âs to obtain a finer surface, the riclges or chisel marks left over being vcry
tiny.
The depth of gap between the surface and a straight edgc kept ove¡ the surface
shall not be more than l.Smm, See Fig. 601,6,
601.2.2.8. Finc tooling :-The close picked surface is further dresscd so
that all the projections are removed and a faiily smooth surface is obtained, The
surface shall have 31o.4 lines per l00mm. width depcnding on the degrce of
hardness of stonc and the dcgree of fìtness requircd. Sce Fig. 601,7.
s.s,601 STONE MASONRY

il
il
ROUGH TOOLED STONE SURFACE
lFig. No. 601 .41
T

ffiil
HËffi d-_]
H##tl-\
PUNCHED STONE SURFACE
lFis. No. 601 .51

CLOSED PICHED STONE SURFACE

[Fig. No. 601 .6]
u
25(:) TITË A,P, STANDARD SPECIFICA'I'IONS

T
n
FINE TOOLED STONE
[Fig. No. 60'1 .7]
n
SU RFACE

Table 601-B
Uscs lbr somc typcs of Dressings

,tl, Type of dressing SpecÌ,fìc r.rse

Rock facing Used in buildings as quoin stones in the corncrs of

brick masonry or rubble masonry and in the plinth
to givc an appearance of strength and solidity.
2. llough tooling Used whcre fairly regular plane faces are requirecl
for masonry work.
Punched dressing Used where even surfaces are requirccl.
Fine tooling Very commonly aclopted for Ashlar work.

601.2.2.9. .9azples :-Before starting masonry work, the samples of dressed

stones shall bc firrnishcd to the Executive Engineer by tha contractor fot approval.
These approvcd samplcs shall be kept at the site of work for vcrificatìon.
601.2.3. Size oJ Slo e :_Except in Dams stones used in rubble masonry
shall bc small enough to be lifted and placcd by hand and as such the thickness
of courses shâll bo limited to 250mm. Thc lcngth of thc stone shall not excecd thrcc
timos tho hcight and the breadth on basc shall not bc greater tltan three fourths
of thc thickness of wall nor less than l50mm. The height of stonc for rubblc
nasonry shall be not less than l50mm. The lcast thickness of laterite stone shall
-
s.s, 601 STONÐ ìrí¡\SONRY

bc 175mm. ar'ìd othcr dimensjons shall bc as laicl down in thc rclcvant spccificatìon,
thc stones beings laid hcaclcr and strctchcr altcrnativcly, brcaking joints by at least
75mm.
Unless otherwisc spccificcl all lintels and insiclo stoncs which are nof to bc
.plastcrod over shall bc to thc full width of thc walls in which they are placed
including the thickness of plaster,
601.3. Moltâr :---The mofiar to bc uscd for cach class of masonry shall
Çonform to thc particular stan<lard spccification fol that class of norta¡ and the
stanclard spccification for thc natcrials used the¡ein. For examplc "Crrt stonc in
ceÍncÍìt lrortar" thc portland cemcnt, sand and ccment mortar shall conform to thc
threc tospoÇtivc standard specifications for those items.
601.4. Scaflblding and tools and plâDt :*This shall bc as pcr clauscs 35
and 3(> of Prcliminary Spccifications.
601.5. Laying of Stoncs :
601,5.1. Stones shall be laid on thcir broadest faccs which gives bcttcr
opportunity to fill thc spircos betwccn stonos,
601.5.2. Stratificd stones shall bc laid on thcir natulal bcd, this is, with thcir
strata pcrpcndicul¿ìr to tho prassurc,
601.5.3. The coulses shall be built pcrper.clicular to thc prassurc which the
nrasonry shall bear,
601.5.4. Wherc therc is tobe variation in thc depth ofcourses, largor.stones
shall be placed in the lower courses, the thickness of courses decreasing gradually
towards thc top of wall.
601,5.5. Moriug the stone ctfter ít has been placecl upon the ntortqr becl
:-tf it is necessary to move â ston€ after it has bcen placed on thc mortar bed
it shall bc lìfted clcar and bc iesct. Attenpt must never be madc to slide it over
the stones aheady laid. Care must be takcn not to disturb joints already laid, when
handling or moving the stone.
601.6. Bond :

601.6, L To give sufficicnt latcral boncl a stonc in âny course shall ovcrlap
thc stonc in the course below, i.c., joints parallel to the pressure in two acljoining
coursos shall not lie too closely in the same vertical line.
601.6.2. To givc sufficient transvorse bond, the prescribcd numbcr of
hcadcrs shall extcnd from front to back of thin wâlls or from outsicle wall to the
interior of thick walls vidc masonry specifications for various classcs ol works.
601.6.3. To bond the work, at all junctions of walls the stones in each
altelnatc course shall be so carried into cach ofthe respective walls as to unite tho
wolk thoroughly,
601.6.4. To bond the work whele breaks are unavoidablo in carrying up
the work continuously in.horizontal courses, sufficiently long stcps shall bc left to
join thc olcl ancl ncw work.
 TFITJ A.P, STANDA.RD SPECIFICAI'IONS

601.6.5. 'l'he plactice of building two thin facos tied with occasional
through stonss and filling up the middlc with small stonos or dry packing shall bc
strictly guârdod against.
601.7. Watcring :

601.7.1, Stones shall be sufficicntly well wetted beforc laying to prcvcnl

absorption of rvatcr from tho mortar ancl cach mason shall be supplied by thc
contractor with a vesscl for'lvetting stoncs,
60t.7.2. masonry built with surki, hyclaulic limc or ccncnt mortar
^ll continuously for two wcoks ftom the date of builcling in-placc,
shall bc kept waterecl
lunlcss a lolger petiod is stipulatcd in respect of special cases, Water¡flg is to bc
done carefully so as not to disturb or wâsh out the lìtortat,
601.7,3. Whcrc tl'ìc mortar has pcrished ot has beconre dly, white ol
powdcry through ncglcct or watcring, thc work shall be pulled dorvn ancl rcbt¡ilt
at thc corìtrâctol's er.pcüsc, lf thc contractor fails to watet tho work to tho
satisfaction of the officer in charge of thc work, thc lattcr shÂll artangc for thc
rcquisite to watcr the wotk ptopelly antl chargc thc cost to thc colttractor.
601.7.4. All nrasonry shall bc washcd clcan on complction ancl all stains,
limc or othorwise rclnovcd f¡om thc faec.
601.8. Wct foundatious : ln wct foundations tho cxcavation shall bc kept
lica of watcr, by the cortractor, whilc thc masonry is in progress and until tho
Exccutjve Engineer consiclcrs thc nortar has sufficiently set.
601.9, Jambs for door and windorv openings :-Jambs for door and
window opcnings shall bc formed with quoins of the full height of tho course in
the càsc of coursocl masonry, Thc quoin shall be in breadth at least one and half
times the clepth of thc coursc ard in a lcngth at least twicc thc dcpth, For each
sidc of door openings thrcc and for window openings two of thcsc quoins shall
bc stoncs of thc full thickncss of thc walls. Unless rcbating of thc whole frame
into thç mâsonry is specially specified, chiscl dressing to tho width of door and
window franes shall bc donc to sccure a closc fit bctweon the framc and thc
masonÌy.
A rebate shall be nrade in the framc wherc plastering is to joins with the
frame as shown in the standard designs fol doors and windows and thc plastcr shall
bc kcycd well into the rebÂte to form a neat joins. Jambs shall be splaycd as
closcribed in the Staldard Specificâtion fot "Brick Masonry General". Unit ratcs
for all classes of masonry shall include quoins, jambs and chiscl dressìng.
601.10. Bearings lbr Beants, Girders, Trusscs, ctc. :

601.10.1. Bed plales :---Bed platcs are to bc laid in all cases under the en<ls
of beams, girders, roof ttusscs, etc. The becl plates arc to bc of sizes as spccifiecl
or ordcrcd by thc Dxecutive Engineer, In all important aasos, cut stoncs or plain
or reinforccd concrcto blocks shall bc used aud the size and quantity clctailed ancl
inclu<lcd undcr the relcvant item of work. In all other cases wherc cut stonc or plain
or reinfo¡ced concrete bcd plate are not required the contractor shall supply largc
stonas of sizc and dressing as ordcrcd by the Executive Engineet and he will not
t-

s.s.601 STONË MASONRY 25f

be paid any extra rate abovc tl'ìe contract rate for thc wall masonry for such largc
stones.
601.10.2. Recesses ;-The ends of all beams, girders, roof trusscs, ctc.,
shall bc situated in a reccss having 40mm. spacc all rouncl them to pcrmit frcc cilcu-
lation of air and proviclcd with pcrforatc<l galvanisccl stecl shceting. No dccluction
fioln thc contcnts of thc wall shall bc made for such rcccsscs in ordor to compcnsfltc
lor thc additional labour cmploycd for forming thcm and the masonry unit ratc shall
inoluclc provicling and fixing the pcrforatcd galvanised stool shcoting.
601.10.3. Buill-in-er¡dr :--Joists and rafters shall usually bc built in thc
masonry irnrl tirrrcd for thât position. When it is approvcd by thc Executive Engineer
to bLrild cnds of stccl joists or other stecl work into masonry, masonry f'or at lcast
150mm. al¡ound the cmbecldcd stcel shall bc in cemcnt mortar.
601.11. Treatment of corners:-Thc vcltical cxteriot colners ofbuildings
alcl pillars of builclings in courscd rubblc in mortar, first ancl second softs and
lan<lom nrbblc in mortar (exccpt for clay mortar masonry) shall be chisel drafted
lbr'40nrm. width on eithcr side or such othor width as nlay be specified, At the
entranccs of doors, windows, archways anil othcr openings, the corners against
which cloors o¡ winclows will open shall be chamfered for 25mm. width ancl chisel
drallcr bcyond thc chamfel for 40mln. as ¿ìbovg, (excepf whcl parliarncntary hingos
aro uscd, in which casc chìsel drafting only is neccssary).
All intcrior corners of rooms and projecting anglcs shall be rounded to
25mm. raclius. Thc projcoting angles shall in such cases be chamfered as neccssary
and thc rounding for both intcrio¡ cornors ând projecting angles shall then be done
in thc plaster, Similarly, roundc<l, chamfered and chisel drafter corners shall bc built
at tho placas shown oñ the drawings,
All chiscl drafting and chamfering rcfcrred to undcr this clausc shall be
includcd by the contractor in his tendcr unit rate for masonry. l{ounding of corners
shall be includecl in his tender unit rato for plastering. No extra allowance shall
bc madc for labour and materials involved in the compliance of this clause, unlcss
it ìs so expressly stated in his agrocment.

CHISEL DRAFTING FOR CORNERS OF BUILDINGS AND PILLARS

 TI.IE A,P, S]'ANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

601.12. Dotvels and Cramps :--Wlìen so specificd or instructed by the

liixccutivc lìlgincor, copings shall be dowellccl or crampcd and courscs ofpillars,
skcw-backs ancl similar work jogglcd to thc stoncs below using dowels and cramps
of thc harclcst and toughcst stone procurable or of coppcr and sct in centent mortar
as ordcrcd. Iron cramps shall not be uscd. Extrd payment for strch dowels or cramps
shall bc fixccl by prior agrecment bcfore cxccutio¡r of the work,
601.13. ÉIolcs and Recesses :-Care shall bc taken to sec that holcs for
passagc of watcr whcrcvcr necessary (as from terraccs an<l bathrooms) and reccsses
lìrr clown fall pipes, etc., ale providcd clLrring constriction and ncatly finished off
by pointing or plastering as ordered. Holcs are also to be cut in thc sill stoncs to
rcceive thc uprights of door framcs in cascs where the¡e is no thrcshold platc to
thc f¡amc.
601.14. Returns, Buttresses and Counterforts :-Rcturns, buttlesses ancl
counterfolts ctc,, shall bc built ancl bonded into thc \,vork âs it proceccls and not
insertccl or joggled on after tlÌe masonry is advanced, No extra paymont shall be
m¡tlc for labour involvecl in buildirrg in any fixtulcs, holdfasts, ctc., which are givcn
to tlìc contractor for fixing in plnce,
601.15. Electlical sanitary and other ['ixtÌres :-All clcctrical sanitary
and othcr fixturcs ctc., shall be built ancl bonded into tlìc work as it proceeds anã
not inselted or jogglcd on aftcr the masonry is advanccd. No cxtra paymcnt slìall
be madc for labour involved in building in any fixtures, holdfasts, ctc., which are
givcn to the contractor for fixing in place. Iloles of thc rcquired size and shape
shall bc left in thc masonry dut,ing cÒnstruction alone for fixing pipes, service lines
or fol passage of watcr. Aftcr service lines, pipes, çtc., arc fixecl the extra hollows
left in auy shall be fillcd with (l : 3) cemont mortar or (l : 3 : 6) comcnt concrete
as dircctcd by the Executivc Engineer. Thc facc shall bc neatly finishecl with
mâtching stones. If any fixtures are to be provided, they shall be neatly embedded
in the requircd positions whilc laying the masonry. Iron fixtures shall bc cmbedded
in (l : 5) cament moftar.
. Well seasoned wooden plugs and bricks of sizcs and quality approve<l by
.thc Executive Enginecr arc to bc built-in as the wo¡k proceeds for fixing door anâ
window shutter applianccs, coat hangers, picture rails ánr1 for any othõr purpose
dccidctl as necessâÍy by thc Executive Enginecr.
601.16. Pointing :-Pointing shall be done in accordance with the releviÌnt
Standarcl Spccifications for pointing as nentionecl in the Tender Schcdulcs.
601.17. Mcasurement :-All linçar mcasurernents shall bc in ¡netres,
correct to 0.01 of a metre, All areas shall be worked out in square metres, corroct
to 0.01 ofa squaro netre. All volumes shall be wo¡ked out in cubic motrcs, correct
to 0.01 of a cubic mctrc. All work shall bc measured net as constructed. No
deductions shall be maclc fo¡ opcnings upto 0.01 sq.metre in area.
601.18. Rate :
601,18.1, The rate for payment shall be for onc cubic metre of finishcd
work inclusive of quoins, conveyance, drcssing, chised drafting, smooth rubbing
ofjoints, stacking, scaffolding construction, poilìting lvith same mortar and curing
etc., complcte in all respects,'I'he rate shall include charges for leads and lifts,
bcsides convcyance charges,
,-

s.s.602 STONE MASONRY

601.18,2. Whcrc tcsts atc specificd by the dcPartmcnt tlìc cost of such
tcsting shall bc bornc by tha doparhncnt, cxccpt wherc thc lnatcrials have failed
to satisfy tho prcscribccl corclitious of quality, etc., in which casc tlìo cost of suclì
testing shall bc bornc by thc contractor supPlìcr.
601.18.3, Whelcvcl rccluired the sarnplcs of natcrials shall be produced to
,iho Exccutive Enginccr
for approval and for kccpiug at the workspot.
Specification No. 602
Cut Ston€ in Lirnc Mortar
602.1. All relcvant clauses of SS : 601 shall apply.
602.2. Cnt stone :-Every stonc shall bc tine tooled on all beds, joints
and faces. Every stonos shall be fine tooled cxactly square on all faces unlcss culvcs
or spccial angles are spccifiecl for any facc or edgc. in which casc thc dressing shall
be exactly to tcmplatç or drawings supplietl, Ashlar is another na¡no for this class
of stonc and tnasonly.
602.3. Cut storte rock rustic or Quarry faced :-This shall corfirm to
tho rcquircmcnts ofcut-stone described above, exccpt that the faccs cxposctl to vicw
shall have a fìne dressed chisel draft 25mm. wide all round the cdgcs of cach sbnc
ancl the stone botwoen the drafts shall bc lcft rough as tho stonc comes from thc
c¡ralry but no tock-face or "bushing" is to projoct morc tlìatì 75mm. fiom the planc
ol clrafts, Sca Fig.602-1, When this class of face ñnish is rcquirccì, it shall bc so
dcsc¡iherl in thc worriinq of the relevfint schedule itcm.

ELEVATION

ROCK OR RUSTIC
ASHLAR WITH
CHISEL DRAFT
[Fig. No. 602.1]
 THE A.P. STANDARD SPEC'IFICATIONS

602.4. For any otlìer typc offacc dressing or clressing ofjoints h cttt stone
work, or whcro cut stoÍìe is used as facing to otllor mlsonry, thc class of work
shall be describcd in thc schcdule itcm working ancl an addcndum to this stantlartl
specification givcn by the Exccutive lJngineer dcfining thc nature of work to bc
done and mcthod of measrÌrcment and payment.
602.5. When thc supply of cut stonc lpart from masonry is madc by a
contractor, the stono and clrcssing shall bc to thc standards laid tlown hcrc-to-fora
in thc specification.
602.6. Joints :-Thc masoury joints and shall bcd in no casc be mo¡e than
3mm. ìn thickncss arrcl all visiblc cdgcs shall bc quitc flce from unslightly chippings.
Each stonc shall be struck with a mar¡l whcn laid to bring ìt to a solid bcaring both
as to bcd and joint. All joints shall bc set full in mortar and joints neatly struck
on facc in thc manner specificd or as may bc directcd by thc Exccutive Engìttcet.
602.7. Courses :-Tho stonc shall bc laid in rcgular horizontal courses
with vcrtical sidc joints and all the courscs shall be of the same hcight unless
othcrwisc spccificd or ordercd by the Executive Engincer in which casc no coutsc
shall bc thickcr than any coursc bclow it. No stone shall be less in brcaclth tlran
in height, nor less in langth than twicc tho hoight. Unlcss otherwise specilìccl by
thc Exccutive Engincer or othcrwise required to fit the p¿ticular work, the dcpth
of cou¡ses shall uot be lcss than 200mm. in hoight.
602,8. Bond :--The face stones shall bc laid header and strctcher alternately
(unlcss otherwise ordered by tho Exccutivo Enginecr) the hcaders bcing arrangecl
to coma âs ncarly as possible in the middle of thc stretchers above and below ancl
thc stoncs shall brcak joint on the faco fol atleast the height of thè course and thc
bond shall be carefully maintaincd throughout the wall.
602.9. Through stoncs :--In walls 750mm. thick and unde¡, the headers
shall run light through thc wall.
602.10. No pinning of any dcscription shall be allowcd. Each stone must
first be fitted into its placc dry in order that any inaccuracy of figure may be
discovcred ând corrcctcd by thc stone cutter before it is finally laid in mortar ancl
settled in its bod.
602.11. All fi¡re dressed cut stone work shall be protected by means of
wood boxing or othor suitablc mcans immediately after fixing at the contÍactor's
exPense,

602.12. All cut stone work shall be moultlcd or chamfcrcd as may be

ordercd. Templates for moulding shall be cut out of galvanised stael sheot or other
materials and approved by the Executive Engincor,
602.13. Coping stones shâll be set in Standard Specification cemcnt mortar
(l : 3) unlcss othcrwisc specified or defincd in the scheclule items.
602.14. Measuremcnt :-Thc mcasurements of cut stone work whethe¡
moulded or chamfered shall be takcn squtrc ovcr all thc projection ofthe individual
out stoncs and not ¿rlong the premitral face. The portions of thc featurcs tailing into
the wall shall not be meâsured.
S.S.606 STONE MASONRY 257

602.15. Iìatc :

602.15,1, All cut stonc copings shall be paid Îài on mnning metre basis
or on cubic motrc basis as may bc spccified.
602.15.2. No payment shall bc maclc for thc portions of tlìo fcatu¡os tailing
into thc wall.
602.15,3, All cut stonc or ornamcnts or othcr cnrichmcnts shall be paid
for by piccc as âlso sçulpturcd spoì.rts â¡ìd brackcts. The lafe shall inclLrdc placing
ancl propcr' fixing irnposition. Where an cnrichmcnl is workecl in mouklings, key
stoncs, atc., thc laboul cost for the same shall bc fixccl by prior agrectlent beforc
cxccution of thc wolk.
602.15.4. The trcacls (only) of cut stone stcps shall be measurccl ancl paid
lor as cr¡t storle work, The hoarting shall bc measurcd alcl paid for âs rîndom rubblc
lÌìasonIy.
Specification No. 603
Cut Stonc i¡r Surki Mortar
'fhe specificatiou shall bc tlre same as Spccification No. 602 exccpt that
Stanclard Spccification "Surki Mortar" shall be usetl instead of lime mortar.
Specification No. 604
Cut Stone in Ccment Mortar
Tho Spccification shall be the sâmc as specificâtion No. 602 exÇept that
Standarcl Spccilication ccnlcnt mortar of specificd proportion shall be used instcad
of limc mortar.
Specification No. 605
Cut Stone lìock-Rustic or Quarry Faced in Mortar
This work shall bc executed similar to Spccification No. 602, 603 or 604
accoruling as tlìo moúar dcscribed in thc Tcnder Schcdulc for the item i.e., lime
mortar, surki mortar or cclncnt n'ìofiar resÞectivcly, The face shall finish shall be
as pcr clausc 602.2.
Specification No. 606
Cut Stone String Course Band and other Cornicos, etc., in Mortar
606..1, A1l thc rclcvant clauscs of SSs : 601 to 605 shall apply.
606.2. AII cut stonc string courses, cornices, drip mouldirrgs and chajjas
shall be mouldcd or chamfcred as may bc orclered or shown in the drawings. They
shall tâil irìto the work not less thân the projection with a mininrum of 250mm.
or such other depth and bealing as the Executivc Engineer may direct ancl shall
be paid at a rato pcr ruflning metre âlong the oourses i.e., the projecting portion
only shall be paid for as spccial work, Thcy shall also be throated on the undor
side if so ordcred.
606.3. Cut stonc quoins shall be laid header and st¡ctcher in altemate
of the full height of one masonry course.
coLtrscs. They shall ordinarily be

IAPDSS - l7]
 TIIT, A,P, S1'ANDAIìD SPIJCf I.]CA'TIONS

þ roo
-"1*-- 250 rso "l
---1*_

.{2512ol*

400
þ-_---
FIXING OF BAND CORNICE ON A MASONRY WALL
[Fig. No.606.1]

606.4. Band corniccs shall bc of unif'orm clepth ancl pcrfcctly horizontal,

with no stonc lcss than 450mm. in lcngth on Íäce. Thc cornicc shall projcct flom
the facc of the walls as sholvn in the chawings or as instructccl by thc Exccutive
Engineet, Sec Fig. 606-J.
606.5. Mcas[rcment :

606.5.1. String courscs, cornices, drip mouldiugs ancl chajjas ctc., shall bc
moasurecl in running mctrcs along thc corrrso (i.c,, thc projccting portion only shall
be rncasurerl).
606.5.2. Wherp cìlt stonc quoins are provicled ilì other types of masonly,
they shall bc measurcd for separately on cubic metrc basis.
606.6. Ratc :-The unit rate shall be per running metrc or per cubjc nrctcr I

as may bc specifictl.
s.s. ó07 S1'ONE MÄSONRY 259

Specification No. 607

Cut Stone Archiltg
607.1. All rclcvant clauscs of S.Ss, ó01 an<l 602 shall apply,
607.2. Geucral :

607.2.1. Thc arch stoncs shall be cÌoscly of thc sanc sizc ancl carefilly
and acculately wrought giving the proper radiating joints, th¿ìt is, thc arclì stonos
shall bc chessccì lìrll and truc to thoir propcr shapcs aud shall bc carcfully scf in
good finc nrortar. 'lhick¡rcss of the ring ancl thc class of thc mortar shall be clcfinccl
in tho lclcvant schcdule itcn.
607.2.2. Thc arch stoncs shall not bc lcss than 250¡nm, as thcir lcast
climension ancl l-eaclcr joints shall brcak joint at lcast for 250mm. in archcs upto
600 in thickness, thc stoucs shall all bc of thc full thickncss of thc ring. For dceper
arch riugs, the Executivc Engincct shall stipulalc thc boncl, fäcc-stoncs and kcy
stoncs.

607.2.3. Dxact uniformity shall bc |cquiled in thc thickncss of thc arch ring
ancl in obliqLrc or skew archcs, great caro is to be taken to dross thc bcds to thc
rcqr.rircd winding.
60'1.2.4. All arch wolk stones shalL bc of specially largc sizes. The breadth
of caçh stonc at top Ând bottom shall bc clctc¡rnincd al tha tìmc of cxccution
accorcìing to tho spân ancl the numbcr of stones.
607.3. Dressing :-Thc hcaclcrs and thc sidc radial joints shall be fine
toolcd to oxact fit on all bcds, Thc kcying course shall bc âçcurâtcly fitted ând
drivcn into its placc with heavy woodcn bcatcrs. Thc sìcle or radial joints shall bc
pcrpcndicular to tho tangent of thc curvo of tlìe arch at cach poiut an<l at right angles
to thc facc. Tho saffit shall be drcssccl to the true cu|ve of thc alch ancì the back
or uppcr surface of thc arch stones shall have its upper surfacc dressed to â plane
flat surface according as thc drawings nray inilicatc. Thc thickncss of each joint
shall not exceccl 5 mm.
607.4. F¿ìce Stones :-Thesc stones shall bc finc tooled or rock faced as
spccifìcd or as shown in thc drawings. Il shalL also be scparatcly spccificd if
chamlcling is to bc donc to thc cxposcd laclial joints of facc stones an<l the
horizontal joints of the soffit.
607.5. Ccntcring :
607.5,1, The contractor shall furnish for the approval of the Excoutive
Engireer, plans for the centerings of all arches upto 5 metres spån. For larger span
archcs, thc Exccutivc tsnginccr shall prcparc ccntering plars and firrnisbed the sanre
to thc contractor, cxccpt in casc of lunrpsunr contlacts, whcro thc contractor shall
prcpale ancl submit the plans of the centerings proposed to be used for prior
approval by the Exccutive Engineer. For spans larger than 2 mctrcs, timber
ccnterings arc to be used and are to be providecl with hard woocl wcdgcs for
slackening the centerings. Sand boxes shall be used for slackening for spans over
6 tuetlcs, In all ccntcrings thc îrrângcment shall bc such that the slackening can
260 TFIE A,P, STANDAIìD SPI'CIIìCA'I'IONS

bo âlfcctcd without âny vibration being tlansmittcd to thc arch and in thc casc of
a sclics of alchcs thc alrangcmcnt shall bo such that tho ccntalings oan all bc
slackerecl simultaueously. If the ccntelings arc not of clcar span, but rest oD
intclnrcdiato brick pillals, thc brick pillars shall be well ancl strongly buìlt, thc top
of each pillar bcing cappccl with woocl ancl conuectccl up \Mitl'ì other pilìaLs by a
contint¡ous piecc o1'timbcr from abutmcnt to âbutmant.
6(\7.5.2. h't all centcrings thc upper bcaring sulfacc shall bc vcry corrcctly
formecl to the cr¡rve of tho intrados of the arch.
607,5,3, Thc contractor shall obtain instftrction fiorn the Éxccutivc IÌnginecr
rcgarding thc nuinbcr of horrrs after corlplction of thc alch wlìcn thc ccntcrings
shall bc sutÏicicntly slackencd to comprcss the joints (rctightcning at oncc) and âlso
the tiue lor compÌctc removal. Whcn r,rsing limc rnoñar, ccnterings shall orclinalily
bc slackcnctl within 24 hours after con'ìplctiorì ol'tlìo arclì. Calc shall be taken
however, that thc ccrìtcrings arc not slackcncd whilc thc mortal in thc last fìnishcd
.joints is still so soft thÂt it gcts squeczccl out, lrut at thc samc timc tho cotìtcrilìgs
shall be slackenccl whilc thc ¡no¡tar is st¡ll moist so as to allow the arclì to comprcss
itsclf irnd bling all thc joilts to fair bearing, ln thc casc of â scgncntal arch, carc
shall bc takcn to scc that tlrc scwbacks âre securc giving a weok's timc to sct. In
thc casc of seni circulat, clliptical pointccl or othcr a¡chcs springing frour a
horizonfal joint, casc shall bc taken to seo that thc acljaccnt wall has bccn built up
to two thirds of thc hcight of the arch, befole slackcning ccnhrings. With quick
sctting ccmcÌrt lnodar, cor'ìtorings shall be lcl't till thc morta¡ has finally set.
607.5.4. During thc progross of thc work carc must be taken to distributc
the load ou the ccntcrings in ordcr to obtain a huc curve at the completion of the
work. Before turning ârchcs cxcccding l2 nretres span, tlre rnid<llc h¿ìlf of thc
centorings shall bc loadcd w¡th all thc matcrial which is to bc usccl on thât portion
of tho aÌch ring.
607.6. Removal of Bad work :-l l' rny rrch settles unduly or becomes
unslightly through carelcssncss, bâd workmaûship, inaclequate contoring or bâd
matclial it shall be removcd ancl ¡cbuìlt at thc contriìctors' exponsc,
607.1, Mcasrtrement ;-Measurcmcnt of arch wolk shall be the lncans of
the lcngth of cxtraclos ancl intrados, the full breadth of thc arch and the full thickness
of the ring.
607.8. Rafc :-The rato for arch work shall inclrrde the provision ofpropcr
ccnterings as clescril¡ed aboye togothor with tho sotting up of sând boxcs, casing
and lemoving the ceÌìterings irrcspcctive of thc size of the arch.
Specification No. 608
Rubblo Arching
608.f. All relcvant clauscs of SSs : 601 ancl 607 shall apply.
608.2. Rubblc arching shall consist of flat beddcd stoncs laicl solidly ancl
flush in mortar with thcir raclial joints perpeudicular to thc tangant to thc curvc
of the a¡ch at each point and the arch stones shall propefly break joint at hoading
points. Thc mortar to be used shall be of standard specification of the class
- S,S. 609 STONE MASONRY

clcscribecl in the schcc[¡lc item worcling ancl thc thickncss of arch ting shall bc
ilcl'incd fhcrcin. Each stonc shall bc hammet clressccl approximatcly to tlìc propcr
shapc, with the nocossary sunrmering, so that thc alclì stot'ìcs may bcar fairly one
lrpon anothcr lbr the full thickness of the arch ring and shoulcl parts of the backs
of the stones be opel, they shall bc soliclly wcclged up with spalls and chips of
stoncs sot in noúar. Thc cxposccl faccs ofthc face or quoin stones shall be br¡shcd
-fhc
or plain drcssed as specifìecl with face pcrpeudicular to the leugth inwards.
soffit shall be drcssed to a plaue surfhcc, tnrc at all points to tlìc cr¡ryc of thc arch.
608.3. The joints of lìrcc a¡rcl soffit shall not cxcocd lznn, in thickncss.
608.4. The arclr c¡roins shall bc sclectccl stonas of thc sâmo thickncss âs
tho sl'ìccting ol thc coursc in all cascs cxtcncling light through from int¡ados to
extndos oì as may bc spccifìcd,
6011.5. hìtclior arch stoncs iD thc shocting sh¿ll not bc lcss thân 75nìm. in
lcast dincrlsion ând thc stoncs shall break joint with cach otlìer at lc¿rst 1,30r¡lll.
In alch rings 400nrn1. tlìick antl undcr', âll stoncs shall bc olthe lull thickness of
thc lirìg.
60tì,6. In arch riugs rnolo than 400mm, thick the stoncs shall be laid in
Âlternâtc coLllses of hcailcts ¿nd slotchcÍs, unless otherwiso spco¡fic(l, not rnorc than
two stoncs going to nrake tqr thickness of the arch dng,
Specification No. 609
Course<l Rubble in Lime Mortar (First Sort)
609.1. All rclcvant clauscs of SS : 601 shall apply.
609.2. Thc work shall consist of a facing of sclccted stoncs hanrmcr
dlcsscd at faces and joints with only a small proportion of snallc¡ stoncs iu fhc
hc¡rti¡rû. Scc Fir 6()9.1.
JOINT NOT TO EXCEED
12mm, ¡n THICKNESS

E
E
o
o
ul
f-
Lr-

to
J
_:lf:[:]t_f
tfnrL:I
UJ
U)

ELEVATION
lF¡9. No.609.'11
COURSED RUBBLE FIRST SORT
262 TI'II] A.P. STANDARD SPECIIIICATIONS

609.3. The facc stonçs shall bc sc¡uarccl on all joints wjth bcds horizontal
and ur'ìloss othcrwisc orclcred by thc Exocutivc Enginccr, they shall bc sct in rcgular'
cor.¡tscs of uniform thickncss f¡om bottonr to top throì.rghout. Unlcss othcrwisc
ordcrecl by thc Excc\Ìtivc Enginccr, cach coursc shall bc thc hcight of cflch stone
in the oourso, i.c., diffelent depth stonas arc not to l¡c uscd and lcvcllcd off iìt cortâin
hcights to lornr thc course fol this class of masonry. No läot stone shall bc of lcss
width in plarì than l50mrn. for walls 400mm. thick, 200mm, fol walls 450nrn. thick
ancl 250mm. lbr walls 600mrn. lhick and more arìd half lhe quarìtity shall not lcss
than ì/ro cubic mctrc, r/.0 cubic rnctrc anclr/,, cubic mctrc ìn volumc lbr walls of
thc abovc tlriokncss rcspcctively, Thc facc stonc shall l¡e l¡id hcadcrs ¿ud strctchcrs
altcrnativcly, so as to brcak joint by atlcast 75nm, and headers shall projcct at lcast
100mm, bcyond tha strctchcrs, Long vcrtical faccs shall be carclìrlly avoitlcd. 'fhc
stoncs shall bc solidly bccldcd, sct full in r¡ortar wìth joints not cxcccding 12mnr.
in thickncss and with lo pinning rvhatcüer on thc lacc ancl shall cxten<l wcll back
into tho hcarting, I-leight shall nôt cxceecl braadth at thce nol length inwarcls. 'Ihe
backs shall bc leli rough as quarriecl, thc bcd aud voltical joints being hamncr'
tlrcsscd squaro with thc facc fol a wiclth of not less than 75mur. atcì 40¡¡ln. inwards
fiom thc facc rcspcctively. Bushing shall not ptojoÇt more than 40lnm. iu lirccs,
C.l{. Masonly Ist soft shall rìot bc plâstcrçd, but it shall be pointed. Whcro
plastering is ploposctl, the trLrshing shall not project moro thau l2 mm.
609.4. Ucight ol Coulscs :'.-The coulscs arc to bc not lcss than l50mnr
in hcight unlcss othcnvisc spccificcl. No cou¡se shall be deepcr than alìd coursc
bclow it and no coursc shall diffcr fron that adjacent by rnore tlìÌn 25Ínm. in dcpth,
609.5. 'lhrough Stoncs and llcâdcrs :--lr all walls Lrpto à width of
600nm, bond stoncs running through tho wall sball be providecl at intcrvals of 2
mctres clear in cvery coursc, For walls thickcr than 600mnr. a linc of hcadcrs cach
hcatlel ovellapping thc othot by l50nrm, or moro shall bc plovidccl fronr fiont to
back at 2 mctros ¡ntcrvals ìn cvcry coulsc. Carc shall be taken not to placc thc
bond stor'ìcs of succcssivc cortrscs ovol cach othcr. Thc positions of bond stor'ìos
shall bc malkccl on both thc laccs for idcntification and vsrification. (Tar malking
whcrc plastcr is to bc applicd will suffice).
609.6. No uuclcr-pinning of any k¡nd is to bc allowecl ancl bollow bcdding
ancl flushing such gaps with no¡tal arc to be carefLrlly avoidctl,
609.7. Ucalting t- All stonas, chips, spalls, etc,, shall be washcd clcan
with water bclore usc so as to ensule a clean surface for thc mortar to adhcrc to.
They shall bc sprinkled wìth water bcforc achrally placing irr work to prcvcnt
absorption ol waler fiom lhe mortar. This is spccially ncccssary in thc casc of sand
stones and othel highly absorbont stoncs. Thc intcrior shall bc fillcd in with good
flat beddecl stonas sct as closc as possiblc, wcll flushcd in mortar. Chips and spclls
of stono shâll be weclged in whcrcvcr ncccssary so âs to avoid thick becls orjoints
oI lnoftar care being taken that no cty work or hollow spacc shall trc lcft anywherc
in thc masonry. Thc facc work and backing shall bc brought rrp cvenly bLrt the
backing shall not bc levollcd up at each course by the use of chips.
609.8. Ths quoins and the angles of tho opcnings shall bc of sclectecl stonc
very carefully squarecl and beddcd and ârrângcd to bond alternatcly long and short
in both clirections. These shall be as pel clausc 601.9. Extcrior and interior angles
S.S, 6 12 S]'ONIì IV1ASONRY 2bl

ancl conìcrs sball bc chamlcrecl, chisci tl¡aftcd ancì rotLtrclccl as dosÇribc(l undcr
clausc 601.1 1 ,

609.9. Thc work on tho intcrior face shall bc prcciscly tho s¿Ìmc as oIì thc
cxtcrior f¿rcc, t¡nlcss tho wotk is to be plastcrccl in rvhich casc the siclcjoints rtcctl
not bc vcnical.
609.10. Finishirtg ol joints :- jl'hc joints
shall l¡c strrrck reatly at thc closo
ofthc day's work. Whclc pointing ofplastctillg to stoDo nlasonty is not colltcmplatctl
rlì.' j('inls slt¡tll bc rutrbcrl sntoolh.
Specification No. 610
Cor¡rscd lÌubble in Srtrl<i Mot'tar (F irst Sort)
Thc spcciñcation shall bc cxactly thc samc as the StiìD(lâId Spccitìcation (r09
for "Courscrì Rubblc iu [-llì1ç Mortar, lìirst Sort" cxccpt tlìât thc Ìnoltar is to b0
of thc Stanclard Spccification for "Surki Mortlr" instcdd of "l-ittrc Mortar"
Specification No. 611
Coursctl lìubblc irl Ccnrcnt Mortar (Ifirst Sort)
'fhc specifìcation shall bc cxactly thc snrìre as thc Standard Spccification 609
lor "Coursctl lì.ubblc irl L,ilnc Mortâr, F'irst Sort" axcopt that thc mortîr is to bc
of thc Standalcì Specifioation for "Cc¡¡cnt MortâI of Proportions as Spccificd"
ìnstead of "Lirnc Mortar".
$pecification No. 612
Coursed Rubblc in Mortar (Secontl Sort)
612.1. This work shall bc sxcctLtcd similar to thc spccifìcatìons lor C.R
M¿ìsonly Irirst Sort, (Nos.609, (r10 or ó11 according to tho mort¿rr clcsclibctl ìn
ihc tcndcr schcclulc lol thc itcnl t.e,, Limc Mortar, Su¡ ki Mortar or Cçmcnt Mot tar
rcspcotivcly) wìth thc cxcaption tlìat thc hcarting and backilg shall conlornì to tho
stanclarcl spccification lor Rantlonr rubblc ntasonly ancì borld with thc facc stones
carriecl up contìnuousiy with tl'ìc facc work, clausc 609.9 of thc F¡rst So¡t S.S not
applying. Sce Fig. 612,1 .

CROSS SECTION OF WALL

FRONT FACE
INNER FACE

[Fig. No.612.1]
Goursed rubble second sort
612.2, Darn Masonly :

| 6l:.2.1, In thc c¡sc of ntasonry dams thc loundation shall bc of a unifornr

' rn.l levcl surftrcc without luy clips olslopes. Wherc thc surfacc is irlegltlar or slopcd
 TLIE A.P. STANDARD SPI]CIIICATIONS

thc rock shall be benchcd rnd all crevìccs, d¡illed holcs, clips etc., shall bc fiJlctl
by grouting or with concrctc as spccìfied by tha Exccutivc Engìnecr. Thc founclation
shall bc thoroughly clcancd of all loosc particlcs, clirt, oil ol glcasc, ctc., by
chiseling and using stiff b¡ooms, jots of watcr, ail or wcl sa¡rd u-nclcr prcssurc.-
612.2.2. lbe work shall be carricd out in suitablc blocks. tìoth thc faces
and hcarting shall be carricd but sintultanoously, as ftrr as possible and the
difference in lcvcls betwecn thc highest and tlìa lowcsr poiuts ai any timc in any
block and the lcvel clifference betwccn thc succcssivc blqiks shall uot tre mo¡c than
I.5 motros. Each laycr shall bc lcll rough cnough to fornì a goo<1 boncl rvith tlrc
ncw aoursc. Masorrry surfaccs, which bcfo¡o thc succcccling Jaycr ol- masonry is
built on thcm havc bcc¡r cxposcd for a long tinc, shall bc thor.oughly clcanccl of.
all loose particlcs, dirt, oil or greaso, ctc., by chiscling anrl by using stiff broorns,
jcts of wafcr, air or wct sancl unclcr pressure.
612.2.3. Quality contr.ol tcsts for stlcngth anrl permcability of rnortar and
filccl tcsts for pcrmcability of masonry shall bc colcluctccl rcgularly at fi.cqucnt
intc¡vals.
612.2.4.
,be plovrclecl Transversc joints, construction joi¡ìts and nlctâl soals, elc., shall
as spccified.
612.3. Mcasurcnrcnt :-For rhick walls over 750 rn¡r, thickncss likc tl¡ms,
anicuts, lock rvalls, abutments and picrs ctc., thc ftrcc wolk for 450 mrn. thickncss
as built shall be mcasured sepâratcly, liont thc rcst. Othcr tlìin wrlls shrll bc
mcasr¡rccl in full,
612.4. lìatc :-For thiok walls the faco work of 450 mrn. shall bc paicl
for as C.R,S lst sort and thc rcst as for R.R, masonry. Other thin walÌs shall bc
paid for as for C.R.S. 2nd sort
Specification No. 613
Uncoursed Rubble or llandom Rubblc iu Lime Mortâr

.. 613.1. Dressing :--The face stonc shall bc hammer dr.cssecl on'thc facc,
sides ancl the bcds to cnablc it to co¡ne into
close proxirnity with thc neighbour.ing
stonc. Thc bushing in thc face shall not proj€ct mor.e thal 40 mm, ol an
face ancl l2 nlnl. on à lace to bc plastcreci. Stoncs with roLrntl su¡lacc shall
"xpos"ã
not
be uscd iu construction.
6l.r'2'5¡to of Stoncs : -
613.2.1. Face Sto¿¿s:.*Face stones shall bc ofnot less width in plan than
l50mrn. for walls 400rnm. thick, 200mm. for walls 450nm. thick 250¡¡nr, fbr
walls
600 mm. thicL.or nrorc. lhlf thc qìlilntity shall not bù lcss thln r/,^cu.nt. rrro cu.m.
irnd '{, cu.nr, in volulnc lor rvalls ofthc itbovc thickncsscs rcspcåiivcly. Nä stonc
lcss than 150 mn. in height shall bo usccl on thc face,

.bctween613.2.2. Llearting:-Smitll stones shall bc calefully sclccted to roughly fit

the larger. oncs,
613,2,3, Bctnd S¡o¡¿s:,-Rond stoncs shall bc at least r/ro sc¡,nr.
il alca at
facc.
-
s.s.6l4 STONIi MASONRY

(r 13.3. Laying :

613.3.1. Fcrce S'tonc.s :

613.3.1.1. Ihc lacc stonc shall bc laid hcadcrs antl strctchers alternativcly
so as to brcak joints by al lcast 75 mm. Carc is to bc takcn to brcak joitìts vct ticaìly.
'l'hc storcs shall be solidly bcdclcd with joints not cxccccling 20 tnrn, iu tlticklcss,
lirr'lhcr rlrcssing bcing donc if nccessaly to cnsurc (his, No ¡rinning whalsocvcl shall
bc usccl on thc faoc ancl facc stoncs shall cxtcncl wcll t¡ack into hcarting. Ifeight
of thc stonos shail not cxcccd brcadth at facc nor lcngth inwatcls.
6l'J.3,\ .2. phcrc burut storÌo is uscd tho nl¿Ìsorìry shall comply with this
th t thc work is to bc levcllcd off in horizontal courscs at cvcry
spccificatìon cxccpt
onc mctrc in height ol sLlch othor lcver as thc Exocutivc Èìtginccr rnay ditcct.
613.3.2, Ileattirtg: All stoncs, ohips, spâlls ctc., shall be washcd clcan
wilh wator bcforc usc so âs to cr'ìsurc a clcarì suìfiìcc lor thc n'ìortar to a(lhcrc k)
and shall bc splinkJcd with wâtcÌ bafora actually placing in thc rvork to plcvcnt
âbso¡ption of watel from the rnortar. Ilvcry stolìo shall bc sot flush in mortar ancl
no clry work or hollow spaccs shall bc lcft. Chips and spalìs shall bc wedged in
thc work whclc ncccssîr'y to prcvcnt thick bccls of rno¡tar.
613.3.3. llond Stoncs : Iìoncl stones shall bc built in thc rvall at intcrvals
of 2,0 mctcrs in Jcngtlr ancl 600 nm. in hcight ancl shaìl lun through the rvall if
thc wall is not ¡rorc than 600 mn. thick. If thc r.vall is morc tlran 600rnn. thick
a Iino of hcadcls shall bc laid fronr facc to brck, cat h hc¡dcr ovcllipping thc othcl
by ât lcâst 150 nnr, The bond storìc shall be clcarly markecl on both thc fiìccs.
(Tar rnarking will do if thc faccs havc to bc plastcrcd).
613.4. Quoirs :--The quoins at corncrs of buildings, anglcs at entrînccs
of cloors, winclows, archways or othcr opcnings ând pillars unlcss proy¡dcd for
untlcr othcr masonry items, shall bc cxccuted to thc Standârd Spccifications 1'or
cutscd rubblc work, first sott, inclusive of chiscl rlralling, chamfcring comcrs, ctc.J
vitìo clausc 601.11. Rough chiscl clrcssing to lho width of the framcs of dools,
windows, ctc., shall bc donc to make thc fiamcs l¡ut cJoscly against the Jambs r¡nlcss
rcbatirrg of thc fi¿mc into masonly is cxpressly specificd, No extrî paynìcnt shall
bc nratlc for any of thc aboye ìtems o1'work.
613.5. Mortal' :--Thc linre mort¿r to be used shall confornr to Specification
in SS : I 13.
613.6. Measurenrent :-This shall confolrn to Clausc 601 , 17.

613.7. R¡ltc :--lhis shall conlolr¡ to Clausc 601.18.

Specification No. 614

Ran<lonr Rubblc in Surki Mortar
614.1. 'thc spccification for this itcm shall be cxactly thc samo as thc
Standard Spccification 613 for "Random Rubblc in Lirne Mortar" exccpt that thc
morta¡ shall bc the Standard Specificatiou "Surki Mol tar" insteacl of "Lime Mol.tar",
 1.II[] A,P. ST,/.\N DAIìD S PECITIICA.IIONS

Specification No. 615

lìantlonr Ilubble írr Ccmcrrt Mortâr (1 :3)
'I'he spccification for this itelÌr sh¡ll bc thc s¿ìmc as thc Standa¡d Specilioalion
6f3 for "Ranclom lìLrl¡blc in Limc Mortar" cxcopt that tho mo¡tar shall bc thc
Standartl S¡rccitìcation "Cemcnt Mortar (l ; 3)" instead of Lirìrc Mortâr.
Specification No. 616
ììandom Rubblc in Clav
616.1. Âpplicability :
616.i,1. Thc work shall be cxccutctl to tlìc siìmc specil'ication as thc
Stanclarcl Spcoification 613 lor "Random Rubblc iù Linc Morta¡" with thc cxception
llrat fhc clay of thc tìcscription undcl clausc 616.2 shall bc Ltscd iustcad of "Limc
Mortar".
6l(r. 1.2, Whclevcl masonry walls alc bLrilt il Random lìubblc in Clay it
is ncccssaly to corìsh uÇt top 300rnrr, of walls and 300mn, of wall ¿rouncl winrlows
ancl tlools r,vitlr Rantlom Rubblc in Lirnc Mortar or ccmcnt mortar alrd it shall t¡c
pâid for âs srLch.

616.2. Mortrr :- Thc moltar shall bc prcpalecl from carelìrlly sclcctcd soil
of naturc to wlìich sand shall bc aclclcd whcrcvcl ncccssary in sucl'r
tcn¿rcior.¡s
quarìtity that a d crl lump of thc mixture shall not show signs of c|ackirrg. It shall
trc wcll trocldcn ancl worketl inlo thc consistency of a thick pastc by thc addition
of sufficicnt watcr. Tirc ¡l'Ìixturc thus made sh¿ll bc kcpt for a wcck allowing watet
to stan(l orì thc top of it in a shallow pool and shall bc wcll tanrpcd with water
by trcacling, bcfote it is to be used on thc wofk. Calc shall bc takor to removc
all clods, stones, glass, ctc,, befbLe thc nìottâr is uscd on the wo¡k,
Specification No. 617
Dry Stone Masonry (for Rctainirrg Walls)
The wo¡k shall be exccutcd with l¡ond âtld lninimum size stones accordiug
to thc Standard Specification 613 for "Randon Rubble in Lime Mo¡1ar.", tho moftar,
bcing omittccl and chamfering and chiscl drafting of colncrs not bcìng rcquir.ccl.
The largcst rubble stonc procurablc flom the quarries spooif,ed shaìl be uscd, Thc
battcr to such masonry lbr rvalls ancl parapets shall noi be loss than I in 12.
Specification No. 618
Damp Proof (or Ant Proof) Course with Shahal¡ad Stones/Cudtlapah
Shnes 50mm. thick in Cement Mortar 1:3
6111.1. Thc Shahabad stones/Cu(ldapah stoncs shall bc 50urm. thick and
cach stonc shall bc of thc full width of thc wall. Thc stoncs shall be laid over a
l2m¡n. thick ccmont mortar bed of (l : 3) proportion an(l slìall conform to thc
Standarcl Specification for thc samc typc of Shahabad/Cudclapah stone flooring. Thc
stonc shall be laid at a levol just bclow thc under face of the flooring. If so shorvn
on thc drawings ol spccified tha stonos shall project 25mm. beyond thc plìnth in
outer walls without vcranclahs and bc ncatlv roundcd off.
- S.S, ó19 STONE MASONRY 267

618.2. 'Thc clamp ptoof cortrsc shtil bc plovidccl lor all walls cxccpt
vc|anclah rctaittittg wàlls, or fbr Paftictrlâr walls only as may bc showll ou thc
drawings ot as sPccificcl
['ol buildings ol minor inrportancc, a clamp proof cltLsc of 20mn.r. of (l :
3) ccment nìortar will strfficc, laicl at lcvol just bclow thc rtnclct fìce ofthe lloor.
618.3. Nleasureurcttt :--Thc Iolcvaot poúiorl oIclausc 60l l? shall ap¡rly.
'fhc nreasurcmcnl. slrall be for thc lcngth ancl wicìth corresponcling to the longth a¡ì(i
wiclth of the Shahabad/Cuddapah stonos and lir¡itcd to thc tlinrcnsions shown in
thc cl'arvings or as otclctccl by thc lixcctrtivc tingincct
618.4. lìatc lnit latc slrall bc pet cach sqttate nlctrc ofsullacc of
:-".-'fhc
Shahabad/Cuddapah stoncs. Iltc rate sh¿ìll bc ittclLtsivc of roulding ofl and flat
nosittg
Specification No. 619
Iìough Stonc Dry Packing lbr Àpl'ons & Iìcvctmeltts
619.1. Thc bctl or slopc to rcccivr; thc packing shall lt¡st bo plc¡raled as
. spccificcl and passc<i by thc fìxcctrtive Engincor, In casos rvherc thc wolk of
prcparatiorl oI bctl ancl slopc such as cutting ottt high bLLncl, filling ìn hollows, etc.,
or thc digging of thc wall loLrnclatious is t'ilther sxtcllsivo, soparatc itcms shall
usually bc pro,,,iclccl fbr such sLtbsicliary kìncls of wolk in tho schcdulc to thc
îgÌecmcnt. tìrt if thc work involvccl in sLrch s'.rbsicliary itcm is vary littlc, no
scparatc provision nccd bc trade anc{ in thc absctlcc of sttch provision, the
colìtlactor shall unclorstand tlìat this tcnder rutc is inclusivc ol all strch work without
cxha chargc. Ilthc packing ìs to bc laitl on urcor'ìrpactc(l maclc Lrp soil, which is
objcctiouablc, it shâll as far as possìble not bc laid till the soil Jras contplotely
scttlcd. If a backing of mooruur, qtrarty lubbish or othor mâtcrial is to bc givcl
it shall bc spccificd in a scpalatc schedulc itcm. (A l50rnm. thick ittoorttnr ot qLtarty
rubbish backing wcll wctied ancl consoliclaterl is prcscribcd lor loosc soils),
619.2. Tho stoÌìcs uscd lbr Revchnents aud Àprons shall confornr to SS
: 106, Thc snallcl sizc stoncs requircd for filling in intcrsticcs ancl wctlging shall
only bc suppliccl to thc actual r-oquiremcnts for thc work and shall not bc used in
two or nloro layers as a substitutc for thc spcciñccl sizes of stones,
619.3. Thc stones shall bc laicl closely in position on thc prcpaled bccl and
firmly sct with thcir broadest encls downwards so thât thoy mây mcct all round thcir
bascs and with thc top of thc stonc lcvcl with fhc linished surfacc of thc packing.
The stoncs sh¿ll bo laid brcaking joint as far as possible iu thc dilection ol' thc
flow oi watcr. Thc stones shall bc placccl normal to the sulface to bc protccted.
619.4. 'l'he intaÌsticcs botwecn adjacont stoncs shall be filled in with stoncs
of thc pro¡rcr size, well dlivcn in rvith crow bars to cnsltÌa tight packing ancl
conpletc filling of all intcrsticcs, Such filling shall bc calriecl on simultancottsly
with thc placing in position of thc large stonos and shall in no case be pclmittcd
to lag bchintl, The final wcdging shall be do¡re only al'ter obtaining thc orders of
thc ExccLIt¡va Engineer. Thc final wedging shall bc donc with tlìc largcst sizcd chips
practicablc, each chip bcing wcll drivcn honre with a hamntcr so that no chip is
possiblc of bcing pickcd up or rcrnovcd by hantì.

I
 1'i ¡E A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

. 619.51 P|ofilcs of strings ancl pcgs slrall bc ÞLri uÞ ro cl.rsr.rrc that thc
pitching is dolc tluc, straight and to thc propcr slopc ìhroughout ¿ìnd rcvçtmcnts
shall i¡r all cascs bc built up from thc loot ol thc ùound tJbe rcvcttc(|. Câr.c
is
rìocrssâry that a strong toe wall or other protcctio is always given to thc
rcvctmcnt,
rvhich plotectivc mcasr¡¡.c shall be shown on the plans.

. .. .619.6, On contplction, thc surlacc prcscntc(l try thc apron or rcvetmcnt

shall bc cvcn th.oughout, f'cc fiom i.r'cgrlarities ancr to túe'equirccr lcngth,
brcaclth
and slopc as s¡ccificcl ot as shown on the plans,
619.7, Mcasurcrnent :^-All lincar mrasrn.cnlents shall bc in nìctros con.cct
to 0.01 ofa mctrc. All arcas shall bc rvo¡kecl out in scluarc nìctrcs, cor.rcct to 0.01
of a squarc nrch.c, AII volunlcs shall bc workcd out ín årrbic mch.cs; corrçct
to 0.01
of a cubic rnctrc. The thick¡rcss of rcvctmeut shall bc ntcasLrrcd ¡ror.Áal to tlìc
slopc,
Any projcctions ¿bovc fhe sulfacc ncccl not bc mcast¡rcd scparatcly. Unlcss
othcrwisc spccificd the rough stoncs shall bc stackccl ancl prcmezrsrilcnrcnts
takcn
bcforc laying ancl 40% dccluctio¡ì or voi(ls shall be matlc.
6l9.ti. llntc :--..'lhq unit latc shall bo pcr. one cubic rnctrc of flnishccl work
antl all thc rclcvant sr¡b-clar¡scs of 60l.ltì shall apply,
Specification No. 620
Latcritc or Rorrgh Stone pitching for Rivcr Conselvitncy Worl<s
..^ _ 620.1. l,aterìtc or r.otrgh stone ol rcquirccl sizc shall conf.onn to clausc
ólq 2.

620.2. Profilc sections with strings ancl pcgs shall be formed by thc
contractor at suitable intcrvals at his cost. Thc pltctilng slatt
bc done truc, straight
propcr slopc. Thc to¡ laycr of'srones sha úc 45Omm, thick
ll,lli,:ll" laii ctosity
rn posriron irnrl Iirnrly sct with rhc bro¡tlcst hccs downrvartls.
620.3. Thc intcrsticcs bctwcen thc stoncs shall be fillccl with largc sizcs
chips and cach chip shall bc wcll d¡.iven homc with a hamncr
soìhat it cannot
bc rcnrovccl by hlnrl.

-6?0.4. On complction thc sr¡rface shall bc cvcn throughout fiee lrom

irrcgularitics and to thc lcquirecl tlinrclsions arrrl slope o, ,f..if,"ã or as shown
on plans.
620.5. Measuremcnt :-This shall conform to Clause 619.7.
620.6. Rate :-The rate shall conform to Clausc ó19,g.
Specification No. 621
Moor¿rm Backing to Ilough Stone DrJ packiug
621.1. Thc sutfacg to reccivc thc nrooranr backing shall bc neatly trimme<l
to thc ¡cquircd slope ancì frcccl fr.om âll roots and vcgctañon and profuscly
wcttccl
beforc mooram is laid on.
621.2. Standard mooranì As per SS : l3g shall then be mixed with wator
on fhc.previous day. Ncxt day morning it shalr bc wcl ¡¡ixcd and
workccì with
marnotics till it can bc formed into stiff plastic balls. Mooram
so mixcd shall bc
S.S. 62I STONF] MASONIìY

carrio(l jn bâskcts to whcrc ìt is to bc l¡ricl and clcpositccL ìn a single layer to givc

l50rnm. of finishetl thickness antl shall bc well ranrmccl in position with flat wooclcn
or ifott rammcrs.
621.3. Thc tinishcd surlaco ofmooram shall bc left untouchod trntil it (lrics
rup ancL clocs not show sigtrs of yiclcling.
621.4. 11 rny thickness other than 150mm, is spccilìccl, the rvork shall bc
cxccutcd to this specilìcattou, ramnring in laycrs not cxcecclìng l50rnm. in thickncss.
621.5. Nlcasulcmeut i--All linolr mcasttrcmcnts shall l¡c in mctrcs, conact
to 0.01 of a mctre. All arcas shall bc workecl out in sqrtatc lllctlcs, colrcct to 0 01
of a squarc rnct¡c. Thc nrooram shall be stackccl nncl pretneasu t cmctlts tâkcn bclolc
laying.
621.6. Ratc : -Thc unit ratc shall bc lor 10 scluare nìotros (unloss othclwisc
spccilìcci in thc schedulo) of finishccl work and all the Iclevant sub-clauscs of clause
601.ltl shall apply.
270 TII[i A.P, S'|ANDAIìD SPI¿CIFICA'IIONS

sEcTt0N 7
ST'AN{DATI.D SPECIFICATIONS FOtI FLOORII\G
CONTENTS

Sl. Specificution N{one ol Specifrcqtion Puge

L 701 flooring - CcnclaI 270

2. 702 Irlooling with SJrahabad/Cuclcla¡rah SIabs 275
3. ',/03 [rlooling witlr Polishcd Shahabad/Cudclapah Slabs 2'16
4. 704 lìrlooling with Conìcnt Moúar (I : 3), 12nn, thick 276
5. 705 Irloorìng with Coloulcd Ccrrent MortaL ( I ; 3),
l2rnn. thick 27',?

706 Terraocrl Flooling r,vith llrick on l.ìdgc, 75nrm, thick

[]rokcn Brick Aggregatc Concrctc and l2mm,
thick Cement Plastcring (1 I 3) to Top 2'17
7 '7
07 Flooring rvith Glazccl'l'ilcs 27',l
8 703 Irlooring r.vith In-sihr-torrazzon Finish 2'18
I '109 filooliug with Cenrcnt Iilcs (A) Plain or Colourcd
(B) Terlazzo, (C) Chcquclcc{ or Embosscd 281
l0 7t0 Iu-situ-Cranolithic ( oncrctc Flooring ?-82

Specification No. 701

Floorilrg - General
701.i. 'l'crminology :

701. r, L Sub-base '. The prcparcd surfhce of grouncl on which thc base
concrölc is laid.
701.t.2. Bqse cotrcretc :---Thc layer of concrcto on which the floor topping
is laicl,

701, L3. Stlrflr,er l Thc slructurll floor which scrves as a basc lor thc
flooring.
701.l.4. Laitonce;--'Thc layer cousistilg esscntially offinc ccmcnt particlos
which ot'len for¡ns iuto scunr on thc sulfacc of frcshly laid concrctc, gcucraliy
formed by excessivc srLrfacc tlor.velling of concrcte immecliately aftcr it has been
laid.
'70L1.5. tledding Aíortcu or underlqyer i-The layer of mortar on whìch
the tiles or slâbs arc sct.
'701.1.6, Cenent J/¿¿,-,y :-.,Neat ccmcnt mixcd with water to a honey like
consistcrrcy. It may also inclucle pigmcnts.
s.s. 701 III-OORINC 211

.l .7 . 'l'erruzzo :---Tclrazzo stoPping is thc floor fìnisìr wltcrc the wcat itlg
701
surlacc is nornally contposccl ot trrarblc chips in a matrix of ccnlcrlt witlr ol withoLtt
pignlcnts ald mccltanically or uranltally grotLnclcd ancl polishccl.
'.'01J I'itt /r¡.¡1¿s i jlhcsc arc tiny air cclls in tilcs rvhiclt open rrp clltrtng
.8.
glincling ancl polishing înd ârc toô sr'ì)âll to bc 1ìllctl in.
'101.1.9. Pores :- l-loles âppcaring in thc srtrfacc ol (hc hardcncd tilcs
iritiai grinclirrg

701,1.10. Granolitltic concrele :-..Concrctc tììado with spccially sclcclcd

aggrcgatc of ltigh harcltrcss, srìrl'acc tcxtLlrc ancl parliclc shiìpcs stlit¿blc lol Ltsc as
a wcaling finish to floo¡s
70l.l.ll. Swftrctt hurtlner :-'A whiclr nray bc applictl to thc
subst¿rlìcc
sÙllaco of thc ha|dctrccl Çotìcrctc to incrcase thc rvcaL Icsistancc of tlìo colìclctc
701.l.12. ,4bra¡iv¿-r'; -Mct¡llic of non-rnctallic matclials olhigh abtasiotr
lcsistancc which tnay bc incorporatctl in the floor topping mix to irìcroasc tho
¡br¡rsiun lcsistrtttcc nf lhc tìool to¡¡ittg.
701.2. Nlatclials:
701.2.L All thc materjals to bo ttscd for flooling shall confbtm to tbe
fclcv:rnt sturrl:rr(l \lìcci ticrìlioll\.
'7Ol.2.2. All pigmcnts to bc L¡sccì shall conlonn tt¡ appcndix 'A' of lS :

2t t4-1962.
701.2.3. As fìrl as possiblc colourod ccrucnt of stanclatd quality only shall
bc usccl and thc usa of pigrncnts avoiclçd,
701.2.4. Clcân ¡nd dly storaga shall bc providccl lt thç sitc lbr all tho
nlatcrials. Ghzccl ol polishccl tilcs shall bc stored in î room or tln(lcr stlclÌ covar
as will prcvent exposurc to danrpness, sun, raìn ancl stlaining. Thc stolagc shall
be tlonc in snch a rvay that excassiva handling ancl accidcntal datnages arc avoiclecl.

70.1.3. Collclete Basc :

701,3.1. ln thc casc of bascmclìt or gÌound fìoors thc concrctc basc shall
bc laitl on a bed plcparctl in accolclance with SS : 310, lcvcl or slopcd as spccilìccl
or as inshuctecl by thc Exccutivc Eugincct. On tho bed thus prcparcd limc or surki
concrctc complyirtg with SS : 401 or Cemcnt Conctctc contplying with SS : 402,
as s¡rccificcl in thc schcdulc, shall bc laid in onc thickncss ancl tampccì witlr iron
rammcrs until tho oorìcrctc is thoroughly compactctl. Thc sttrfacc slrall bc ìcf1 rough
to lorm sr¡il,rblc kcy with lhc lìoor to¡ping.
701,3.2. 'Ihe top levei oi conctctc base shall bc to thc top of baselnent
without any plinth off-sets.
?01.3,3. Thc finishcd deptJr of the concrcte basc shall bc 100tn¡r. or as
specificcl in thc schedule and shall bc uniform for the wholc floor. Thc surface shall
bc cven ancl lcvel or to thc specified slopcs.
 272 TIIIJ A.P. STANDAIìD SPECIFICA'IIONS

701.4. Ptotcctioì agaitìst Dampness :

701.4. l. Whercvcr it is suspectod that clampncss or. w¿ttcl nliìy fincl its way
to thc top of the basc çoncrcto or floo¡ on the course of usage the following
prccautions may be takcn,
(a) Layiug the base coltcrote in two laycls or not lcss than 5ornm. thickncss
cach, with a laycr of wâtor proof ¡nembranc of applovccl quality sandwitched
bctwccn tlìcn]
(b) Laying thc basc concrctc in two laycrs of not loss than 50nrn. thickncss
cach ancl painting thc top surliìcc of thc lowcr layct with two coats ol l¡ihtmcn of
applovod quality.
701 .4.2. Wherc it is cxpccted that thc (litn.ìprìcss nay fincl its way fì.om thc
surrttLrncling walls, thc darnp proofìng trcatrìlcnt shall bc continuccl along thc sicle
walls to a hcigllt of a¡ least 150 nnl abovo thc bascrncnt lcvcl. .l-hc said walls,
shall be kcpt unplastaÌc(l to tlìis cxtont ancl sha be finishccl or plastcÍcd al'tcr the
rlanrp-pIoofing h câttìlerìt is contplctcd.
701.5. Joints & Panclling :
. 701.5.1. (k)nstruct¡ot1 joints ;--Wlìcrc corìsh.uctiorì joints arc providccl in
thc basc concretc or sub-floor to tally with thc construction joints in tllc rvalls o¡.
founcìations, thcse joints shall bc filled with an approvccl scaling compound. ln
such
cascs construction joints shall also be plovirlccl in thc floors and iìoor toppings,
a<ljustecl so as to tally with thc constructiol joints in thc basc conc|ete or sì.rb-floor.
Thc joints shall also tre fillcd witlì an approved sealing compouncl.

, . ,701.5.2. Expansion joints;-Where expansion joints arc providocl to rccluce

the risk of cracking duc to cxpansion or contrâction ofthc floor anrl floor toppiugs,
thqse shali t¿lly with thc constructiou joints providccl if any. Thcsc joints
shall also
bc filled with an approvecl scaling compound.
701.5.3. Panelling i-
701,5.3.1. Panellihgoffloors and floortoppingorof base concrctc or.sub,
- whc¡'c found nccessaly, shall bc done tc-siritablc
l.loor sizes to facilitate easv
co¡stfuction and thcsc panels shalr ta y with the construction joints ancr cxpansioi
joints wherc providccl in thc basc cotrcrcte or sub-floo¡ or walls.

. 701.5.3.2. The pancls shall prefcrably bc scparatcd by mcans of clivicling

ships. Thc material for clividing strips sha be sLrch that it has sinrilar ¡csistancã
to wcar as thc flooring. The dividing strips shall bc of aluminium, glass or any
othcr matoliâl as spccified. Thc dcpth of tho str.ips shall bc not less than 25 mm.
Portions of the bottom edgcs of thc divi(lirìg strips may also be cut to â hcight
not
cxceeding 12mm. and twistcd, so as to provicle anchóragc into thc floor topping,
The spaciug of such crrt portions shall not be closcr than l00mnr. ,tnctroragc
arrangcments may also bc provided by fixing 40rnrn. long cross nails thr.ough tie
tlividing strips.
Whcre dividing sh.ips are not provicled thc bays or pancls shall
.be laicl
. ..701,5.3.3.
altcrnately allowìng for an intcrval of at ieast 24 hours úerwccn laying of
the adjacent bays.
 s.s. fJ 14 IìOOFING AND CIJILINC 105

814.2,3. 'ì'lrc shccts shall bc sccuretl togathcr with 6n]t1]. dianrctrc gaLvanizcd
bolts ancl nut, with a galvaDizcd stecl waslìcr ovcr a bitttniuous wîshcr ttrrclcr tlrc
bolt hcacl, Thc galvanizcd stecl lvashcr shall bc of25mnr' dia anct 1.(>mnt thickncss
and thc bituninous fclt washcr shall bc of 25mm, dia and 1 6mtn. thickncss
814.2.4, Bolts shall bc placcd at 300mm intcrvals along the cdgc of tho
lcngth of tlìc shcet ot at such distancc (approxirnately 30ùun ) as will cc¡ually
cliviclc thc slìccts alorìg their lcngths Thc bolts shall be placcd zigzag so that
thc
cncls of cach of tho two ovcrlapping shccts shall bc drawn rightly onc against thc
othcr. 'fhc horizontal joints of tlìc shects shâll also be boltod togothcr, tha bolts
bcing placccl usually on cach altcrnativc corrttgation riclgc
814.2,5. Thc holcs fot thc bolts shall be drillcd in thc ridgcs f'ronì o(rtsidc
to insiclc. Thc bolt holcs shall be slightly larger tlìan tlìe diamotcr of thç bolt so
âs fo allow for contrâction and expansion of thc shcçts
814.2.6. Whclc thc shccts have to bc cut to suit thc tlimcnsions ofthc rool,
cithcl along with slopc or along tlte lcngth, thcy shall be ncatly c(rt along a straight
linc.
{Ì14.2.?. Iror outsidc waLl attd pattilions, thc shcets nay bc lìxcd witlt a
lap ofonc alcl a hatfcorrttgations This may bc obtaincd by tevctsing cach altct'natc
shcct in orcler that thc sharp cdge of tlìc outer coffugatiolì shall, in all cascs, lic
inwar.cls into thc otttcr hollorver of thc corlugation in thc ncxt sheet lvhich givcs
rr ncut tirrish lo lhc joinl.
814,2.t1. Wherevcr it is neccssary to cmbcd the roofing shccts into thc
adjoining wall ot gable. thcy shall be insertccl into the nrasonry fol a miuimum
-ornrgation
oi'half ancl providccl rvith mastic fillct or water proofing finish'

814.2.9. Spacing rtf purlins :-Thc purlin spacings shall bc as specificcl attd
shall not cxccctl thc following:

G.u.tge or lhickness Maxinun ttllowable c/c

of thc sheet (in wn..) spucing of purlins (in nelres)

1.25 2.5

l ,00 2.0

0.80 1.8

0,63 t.6

Riclgc purlius shall bc fixcd 75mm. to l00mm from thc apcx of the roof'
Pu¡lins shall ilso bc proviclcd along tl'ìo caves to prcvcnt thc ovcrlapping cntls of
tha shccts from buckiing or lying uncvenly. 'Ihe frcc ovcrhattging of shccts at tho
caves shall not bc morc than 400mm.
814.2.1(\. Riclges aarl /rþ's :-Ritlgcs and hips shall be covercd or suitably
shapccl wìth onc nrm. thick and 0.9mnr' wide galvanìzcd plain stcel shoots with a
mìnimurn lap of 250mm. on cither sidc. Sec Fig. 8l4-l Thcy shall bc secttrcd to

IAPDSS - 201

b-
 1'III] A,P, ST,\NDAIìD SPIiCIFICAI'IONS
thc pLrrlius along with thc roofing shccts, Thc indiviclual lidgc ancL hips picccs
covcrings shall havc a ntinìurunr lap of 150rnm, along tlìc ridgcs, or.hips.
$KETÇH SHOWING THE TYPICAL ARRANGEMENT OR RIDGË
coN N ECTTONS
þzso
À

lFlG. B14.11

,\14.2.11. Vulley 8¡r1le¡s i -Fo¡ thc v^llcy guttcrs plain gaìvauisccl stccl
shccts of llot lcss tlìllì 1nìlrr. thiÇknoss înd 0.9 ntcl.c wictth shall bc t¡sccl. A
minilnurn lap of IS0nrnr. along thc ¡luttcr lcngth and a minimr¡m lop of 250nrm.
un(lcÌ thc rooling shccts on cither sidc oi the gì.rtter shall bc provicied. Sco Fig.
314 ).

FIXING OF VALLEY GUTTER

PLAIN G,I. S-TEEL SI-]EE
1mm. THICK AND g00mm
WIDE

VALLEY RAFTER

lFtc.814.21
814.2.12. W¡nd /ics :--\ryhcrcvct. spccificcl wintl tìcs consisting of 25nrm.
x 6mm. nild stcel flats laid over thc roofiug shcet at thc cavcs may bc provìdccl
ancl scculccl to thc purlins witlr thc samc bclts as usccl for scctLring tllc roof shocts.
J-

s,s. tÌ 1s IìOOFING AND CEII-ING 307

ln wincly locations, such as opcn shcds or vc¡¿rndahs, the Exocutivc Enginecr, shall
also spccify thc n]casures to bc adoptcd to socurc tlrc purlins themsclves to the
rnasonry or othcr parts. (Scc Fig. 814.3)-
SKETCH SHOWING THE METHOD OF FIXING GUTTER & WIND TIE

N WASHER
25mm. X 6mm. f,l.S. FLAT
DIA G,I,J. BOLT AND NUI

PRINCIPAL M,S, ERACKET

ÏO SHAPE TO

lFtc. B 14.31

{114.3. Mcasurement ;-AIl linear measurements shall bc in metres, conect

to 0.01 of a n'ìctrc, tncasurcd flat and not girthed, Areas shall be workcd out in
squaÌe nrctlcs, corrcct to 0.01 of a square metÍo, Ovcrlaps and cutting to shapc of
shects shall bc covcrccl by the net roof arca and not neasured separately. No
dcductions shall be nraclc for opening upto 0.40 square metr.es cach for skylights,
cta.

814.4, llatc :-Thc unit rate shall be per square mctrc of the nct ¡oof ¿ìrca
covcrccl by thc shcets, from top of ridgc to thc cavcs.
Specification No. 815
Roofing with Corrugated Asbestos Cement Sheets
815.1. Matelials :-The corrugatcd asbcstos comcnt sheets shall conform
to SS : 125.

815,2. Laying r

815.2.1. Thc shccts of spccificd class and thickncss shall be laid on thc
roof with a lap of not lcss than l50mm. in lclgth over thc shcet bclow along the
roof sJopc and thc sidc laps shall bc a mininrum of half corrugation and thc laps
shall not open up in the normal wind direction.
815.2.2. Asbcstos ccn]ent corrugated shccts shall bc laid straight at tho
cavcs cithcr from lcft to right or from r¡ght to loft dcpcncling upon the prevailing
dircction of thc wind. If laid fiom left to right (Scc Fig. 815-34) the fi¡st shect
shall be laid uncut, but thc remaining shccts in the bottom row shall have thc top
lcft hand corncrs cut or mitrcd. The sheets in sccond and othcr intermçdiatc rows
shall havc thc bottom right-hand corner of thc first sheat clrt, âll othcr sheets except
 rFII], A.P. S1'ANDARD SPECIFICAI]ONS

thc last shcot sl'ìall havc both tho bottonì right-halìd aorncr and tbc top lcft-hâncl
'l'ho last
corner cut aÌìd thc lâst shcct shall have only thc toP lcf't-hand corncr cttt
or thc top row shcgts shall all havc thc bottom right hancl corncrs cLlt with thc
cxccption of thc last shcet which shall bc laicl uncut, if thc sheats aro laid f'r'om
riglìt to lcft, thc first shall bc laid uncut ancl thc remaining procctlrtrc shall bc
. Fig. 815-38).
rcverscd. (Scc
LÂYING OF SEMI CORRUGATED SHEETS
(Sheets laid from r¡ght to left)
RIDGE
-T
SìDE LAP
E E
E
END LAP. :
"4_ -T-
I
ul
E o
ct E
!_ É Llj
td \
Øul ;>
oi-
f-)
zo
Oo
Ër-
u)o
E
c?
T-
oz
0_<
zT.
å
E LII
l>
cO

EAVES
I
lFrG. 815.381
A = UNCUT SHEET
B = TOP RIGHT HAND CORNER CUT
C = BOTTO¡¡I LEFT HAND CORNER CUT
D = ToP RIGHT HAND CORNER AND BOTTOM LEFT HAND CORNER CUT

815.2.3. Thc mctrc desuibcd in clause 815.2.2 is neccssary to providc a

snug lìt wlìeÌe four shcots mcct at a lap. It is cut from a point l50mm. (or whatever
thc lcngth of the encl lap may be) up thc vertical side of the sheet to a point 45mm.
along thc horizontal eclge, This cutting slrall be donc with an orclìnary wood saw
at sitc.
815,2.4. Thc cnds of all shccts at the eaves shall be supported and thc
sr.rpport shall be placcd as ncâr to thc margin of the sheets as practicable. The
naximum frcc overhang at thc cavcs shall not bc more thc limits specificd in clause
815.2.5 bclow.
815.2.5. Laps:-The shect shall bc laid with a side lap of half corrugation.
(Scc Fig. 815.1), For the normal roof pitches (that is, inclinations greatcr thân or
cqual to 18", thc cnd laps (Sec fig. 815-2) in sheets shall not lcss than l50mm.
--

s.s. 815 ROOIiING AND CF,ILING ]09

roof
For low roof pitchcs (that is, inalinatiorìs lcss than 18") or for nornlal Pitoho(l
i,r positions, thc cncl laps shalt bc inctcascd sìritably Tbc siclc laps shall
"*por",l
o, fni otl pottiUt" Uc shcltuccl from thc prcvailing wincl clilcction' The liee
ov*hang
,n"orur",l as tlrc lcngth ofthe sheot from its lowc¡ cdge to thc cclltlc of
ot
"ou"r,'
iho bolt holes shall not mote ihan 300mm. for 6mm thick shcets aucl 400mm 1or

7mur. thick shccts

LAYING OF SHEETS
(Sheets laid from right to left)

E
E

;5

E
E
E
*5
:
I
tu
t I
E

EAVES

rFrc 8153Ar åvÊilH88',l8tJi:H"

A = UNCUT SHEET
B = TOP RIGHT HAND CORNER CUT
C = BOTToM LEFT HAND CORNER cUT
D = TOP RIGHT HAND coRNER AND BOTTOM LEFT HAND CoRNÊR
CUT

Whcrever four corne¡ s of shccts ovcrlap, two of thom shall bc nitrcci in thc
mannct describe<l in olaLrss 815.12.2 and 815.2.3 in order to sccutc a pcrfctf 1ìl'
815.2.6. 'J'bolts or'U'bolts or galvanizetl stccl coach scrcws of atlcast
8mm. sizc ancl conforming to IS : 730-19ó6 or IS : 1120-1975 or IS : 3007, part
I, 1964 oL as specificd byihe Executive Enginecr, shall be fittcd with a galvanizctl
steel washer oi 25,rn,, cliameter ancl l.6mm. thickncss, over a bituminous washcr
 310 TI.IE A,P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

of 35mm, dianctcr and l.5mn, thickncss and offlat or suitflblc shape to fit thc
outcr facc thc slìgcts ancl iuscfcd through holcs which arc not punclrecl but arc only
<lrillcd in thc crowns ofthc corrugations, Thesc holcs shall not be larger thân 2lnm.
ovel thc diâlnctcr ofthc bolts uscd for fixing. One bolt or screw sh¿rll bc usecl o¡r
cach sidc of thc sidc laps. See Fig. 815.1. Nuts or scrcws slÌall bc tightencd Ìightly
at first and then fully tightened whcn a dozen or morc shccts have bccn laicl. On
no account shall, thc fixing sÇre.ws or thc nuts or fixing bolts, bc scrcwotl.clown
too tightly arc care shall bc takcn not to dçflçct tho shcots at the intcrnrecliatc purlins
in all attcmpt to makc the shcets bcar on such purlins. Light scrcwing also safcguards
thc roofìng âgaiÍìst any uncxpcctcd ntovemen{s in tlÌe structutc undcrncath.

DETAILS OF SIDE LAP

TYPE HOOK BOL-T
G.I, NUT
FLAT WASHER
BITU¡/INOUS FELT WASHER

.{-- WIND DIRECTION

lFrG.815.11

DETAILS OF END LAP

FELT WASHER

Jinlmurn

G.I. FLAT WASHER

C, SHEET

¡,,I.S, ANGLE PURL

[FrG, 815.2]

815.3. Spacing of Purlins :

. 815.3.1. All purlins shall be in onc plane and shall bc propcrly anchorecl
to the supporting stntctu¡c. Thc spacing of thc purlins shall be airangecl to suit the
standard lcngths of shects but shall not cxceed thc following :
s.s. 817 ROOIIINC AND CEII,INC

I)iste ce belwea plu li ce lfti,\

7'hickne.s:: ol she,'l in tnn
For roof covering Ì;'or ,;icle clqdcling
¡t1 melte,t ¡ netres

6 1.4 L',7
7 1.6 1,9

815,3.2. Ridge purlins shall bc fixecl 75mm, to 115mm. lronr thc apcx of
thc roof, thal is, f't onr thc bolt point.
815,3.3. Adctitional trimmc¡s or briclging shall be uscci bctrvccn pL¡rlins at
all points whcte considarablc rooftlaffic ìs likcly to occur, lbr cxamplc, at acljoiling
vallcy ol box gutters, ìrclow glazilg ancl alouncl chinrncys, vcntilators ol otlìcr
uptakcs.
815.3.4. Whcl a coursc of shccts o1'smallcl length nccessitatin¡¡ closcl
pullìn spacing is lcquirecì to makc up a roof slopc, fhc closcr putlin spâcing slìîll
bc providcd ât eavr;s lathcr than flt ridgcs.
tll5.4. Iìidges and hi¡rs:-Ridgos ancl hips shall l¡e covclcd with suita'bic
A.C. specials, The spcciâls shall bc ol thc san'ìc type ancl trranuthchrrc as thc A.Cl.
shccts, unless othcrrvisc spccificcl.
tìl5.5. Valley guttcls i--Vatley gutters may bc plovidccl as pcl Clarrsc
814.2.1t.
815.6. Embedding of sbccts into thc acljoining wall or gablc nay bc clonc
as pcr Clausc 8)4.2.8,
815.7. Wind ties :-Whcrcvcr specifiecl wincl ties may be proviclccl ìn
oonformity with clausc 8 14.2. 12.

815.8. Thc cnds of all sheots at thc eavcs shall be srpporled ancL thc
suppolts shalJ bc placecl as ncar to thc margin of thc sheets as practicable.
815,9. Measurement :-This shall confirm to clausc 814.3.
815.10. Rate :--Thc unit ratc shall be pcr l0 square mchcs of thc nct loof
atca covclcd by thc A.C. shccts from top of ridge to the 0aycs.
Specification No. 816
Iìoofing with Semi Corrugated Asbestos Cemcnt Shccts
816.1. Thc S.S. 815 apply í toío to this spccification also for all aspccts
of laying and secnring thc shccts, ctc,, cxcopt thît scmi-corrugatccl asbcstos centcnl
shcets shall be usccl in placc of gully cormgatcd asbcstos ccmçnt shÇcts.

Specification No" 8f 7
Italsc Ceililrgs
817,1. Materials :
817,1.1. Ceiling materials are usually available in thc folìorving gcnclal
typcs, in valious sizes, unclcr various trade namcs: (a) Foam plastics, (b) Courprcssccl
312 TI.IE A.P, STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

woo(l pârticlc, woocl ch¡ps or wood wool boarcls, (c) llalcl boarcls, (l) Soft boarcìs,
and (e) Cypsunr.
817.1.2. Alumiuitttl tccs ancl angles, stocl ltooks ancl'J'bolLs slrall bc as

specificcl in thc Tcnder Schcdulc

817.1.3. Thc timber uscd for thc liatlc work ancl beacling shall conform
to SS : 130.

tì17.2. Quality ; -Thc cciling matcrial shâll bc homogctrcous and stablo

in structurc. Thc cxposccl sr¡rf¿tcc shall havc the dcsitccl tcxttllc fraa fiom llaws'
ln casc ol lroa¡cls tbc cdgcs shall bc rcgular ancl snrooth The ccilìrlg nratcri¿ls shall
havo rigiclity an(l structr¡r'al strength and shall bc rcsistant to rats, tcrtÌitcs, whitc
ants, fullgus, irlsccts a¡ìd weather âction. Whcrc roqtlirc(l thcy shall pâss tlcccssary
tcsts for thermal and aooLtstic insulation Propcrtios antl fìrc rosistatlce
817.3. Laying i-Thc false cciling may citlter bc sttspcncìccl lrom or 1ìxccl
against thc bottom of thc rooi The fiantc wotk nray cithcr çorlsist ol'AlLrntirlium
Tccs & Anglcs or of suilablo wooclcn fLarncs, propcrly sccttrctl to thc urrclctsitlc
casc ofsuspcndcd ccilings tlìo hangers shall bc acljustnblc
'Iypical
ofthc roof'. ln thc
arrangcnlont fol laying, fixing arcl jointing are shown in lììgs 8l7 l to 8177'
VIEW SHOWING THE INTERLOCKING ARRANGEMENTS OF
ALLUMINIUM TEES FOR FALSE CEILING

I]OLDING DOWN CLIP

LOCKING

LOCKING
ARRANGE¡¡ENT

DOWNWARD LOCK

817.11
 s.s. 817 I{OOFING AND CEILINC
-
SUGGESTIONS FOR FIXING AND COVERING
CEILING BOARDS JOINTS

lFis. B17.31
ENL-ARGED SECTION OF FIRING FLAT CEILING AT TIE BEAI\,4 LEVEL
cElLiNG I SLIDINIG CoNSTRUCTION

rExpansìon Joint
--:tç-]L).4+484/ Bolt hooked to
LJ-Lll.)-JtJ/--// ^. , cvilins mcmber

WW*Þ#Éffi'
r-ðÉæ
iF,q-ãzsr |äliBff,i'i'+t3
CEILING FOR FLAT ROOF CLAI\,IP

W_-&æffi
ffi^K,'"ffi
ln thc of suspenclccl ceilings on aluminiutn tccs ând anglcs thc laying
casc
of thc panels shîll start fr'orn one corncL of thc framc work. The last pancl shall
not bc sccurcd to facilitate inspcction, dismantling ancl repairing of thc cciling
81?.4. F-inishing :-Wherc rcquircd ccilings may bc finishcd with a suitâblc
water l¡ascd distcmper, or paint, or any othcr trcâtmcnt as spccificcl.
lì17.5. Storage antl ltandling :-The ceiling panels shall bc carricd cclgc
wisc ancl shall not be dloppetl or tllrown dtrring trânsportation. Thcy shall be
stackcd flat unclc¡ covct on lcvcl surfàcc in clry condition and shall not bc allowccl
to comc in contact with water, In case thc panels gct wct accidentally thcy shall
be dried in tlre sun bcfolc use,

817.6. Packing and Mât'l(ing:

tì17.(r.1, Thc cciling pancls shall bc sccurcly packcd antl shall not allow
any nroisturc to cntcr inside the packing.
314 TI'ID A,P. STANDARD SPIìCIFICATIONS

817.ó.2. Each boa¡d shall bc cleally ând pernrâncntly nrarkccl showing thc
followiug infornration :

(n) ManLrfacturcr's nanre ancì trade mark,

(b) Sizes and typcs of pancls.
fll7.7. Measrrement :-'-.All mcasuremonts shall bc in mctrcs, corroct to
0,01 of a mette, Arcas shall bc wor.kect out in square nctros, corrcct to 0,01 of
a sqrLarc ntctrc. Painting Íìnd othcr lìnishing shall bc tncasurcd scparatcly.
8l7.tl. Il¡tc :- Thc unit rrìtc shall bc por one squaro nretre of laiil ceiling
aroa. Paintirg ancl othcr"finishings shall bc pâi(l for sopâratcly in accord¿rncc with
thc rclcvant Standard Spccifications.
-
s.s. 901 PLASTERINC, POINI]NG, COLOUIìINC, ETC

sEcTt0Í\l I
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLASTERING,
P()IN'I'ING, WHITE-WASIIING, COLOUR-WASHING,
DISTI'MPERI}IG A¡{D WATER PROOF CEMEI{T
PÄINTING, ETC.
CONTENTS

sl. SpeciJìcatiott Nante ol Speci/ìcalion Page

901 PlasterirìgGcncral 3r5

902 Plasteri|g with linrc ntortal onc coât, l2tnn],
or 20mrn. thick, inclucling fine tenderiug lr8
q03 Pllstclirrg wi¡h ccmcrrt rnortitr. oltc colr l2lrrrn
or 20¡nm. thick inclucling fìne rcnclcling 319
4. 904 Plaste|ing with ccmcnt mortar 2 ooats 20mnr. thick
with sponge finish 3l9
5. 905 Plastcling with combination moÌtar, onc coat lzn]ltl.
tcndeling
or 2Orrrur. thick, inclucling fine 320
6. 906 Pointing to masonly rvith cclnont mortâr 320
'7. 90'l Poiotiug to rnasonry with SLlrki mortar 322
8. 908 Whitc-washing 322
9, 909 ColoLrr-washing 324
10. 910 Dry distempering 325
I l. 9l I Oil bound distcmpcring 326
12. 912 Water proof ccnrant painting 32j

Specification No. 901

Plastcring * Gencral
901.1. Tcrminology :

901.1.1. Propettie.s :
(it) Ilenclering :---The applicât¡on of plastcr.
901 .1.2. llorkwrnship :

(a) Daubitrg :-Operâtion of filling in hollows in the surface of a

wall with moltal as a prclirnilary plustcring.
(b) Ilackittg :-Thc proccss of making a surface rough by chtsclling
in ordcr to provicle a kcy for plaster work.
901 ,l ,3. Defects :
316 TIITJ A,P. STAND,{RD SPI]CIFICATIONS

(a) (:fttck¡ng '. fhc clovcloprncnt of onc or mo¡c fissures in thc

l)lastor, rìot assignablc to sttuctutâl citr¡sc,
(6) Crøzing :-Thc clcvclopmcnt of series of hair c¡acks on the
fìnishccl sutl'acc, kuown as 'map crazing' whcn jt for¡¡s a haphazarcl pattcm over
thc sulfacc ¡llcotcrl.
901.2. l'r'ograrnmc of worl( in rclâtion to Plastcring :
901,2.1. Constn¡ction opcration suÇlì as construction of masonry, ttìc
c Çascurc l of stcci oolumns alìcl bc¿rnrs with conclctc ctc,, rcquitiDg subscqrrcnt
plastcring, shall bc so programntccl that thcy aro suffioicntly curcd ancl clry to
rcccivo thc plastcr withoLrt subsequcnt (lanì¿tgc to plastor or docoration to tha plâstcr.
901.2.1.1. All scrvice pipcs, concluits, cablcs, cfc,, tlìat îl.e to bc cmbedclccl
rìnrasonry wolk ancl covclccl with plastcr shall bc complctccl ancl suitably protcctcd
agarust couosion, whcrc ncccssaly, bcforc pìastcring is bcgul.

901 .2.2. Operutiorú dur¡ g pklstet i g i ..Whcr.c othe I opcrations arc rcquirccl
to proccc(l sintLrltancorrsly with pììstcring spccial carc shall bc takcn to ltIogriìlnl.tlc
thc lvurì< so as to car¡sc ni¡inrum intcrlbrcncc,
901.2.11. Pl¿stcring opcration shall bc so scheclulcd, as to allorv sufficient
inlcrvtl bctwcclt st¡cccssivc cÒirls
()01.2.4. Opet(tions a./iet pktsteri\g:-- Ca¡e shall bo takcn to cnsuro that
srrbscc¡tLcnt opclations clo not causc (Lamagc to the plastct work.

901.3. Prcparut¡otL o.l the Swîoce I

901.3.1. Rougheu¡lrg t-Tho ¡oughcning of the backgrolLnd improvcs the

boncL ol' plastcr. 'Ì'his is partìculally inportant iu casc of soffits ancl ceilings, A
smooth surfircc shall trc rougbcnccl by wir.e brushìng if it is not hard or by hacking
il it is hard. All joiuts shall bc thoroughly rake(l. Aftor roughcning tìre sLlrfàcc carc
shall bc tal<cn to nroistcrì tlìc srrrfircc sufficicntly bcfor.c plastcring as othcrwjsa thc
ñcshly exposctl surlacc ntay tcncl to atrsorb consiclcr.ablc alnount of watcr' ftom tlìo
plaster. ln casc of spccial backglounds wood lâth, cxpaudecl metal lathing, wirc
nctting, ctc., uray bc fixcd to proviclc kcy to thc plaster.
90l.3.2. Cleqn¡ng:---Thc surlacc to bc plastcrecl shall bc thoroughly blushccì
to ramovc drLst, looso particlcs of mortar ctc,, ol cfUorgsctìcc whcrc it has occurrecl.
90l,.3.3. Døubing i-Dâubing shall be ucccssry whe¡c thc backgroLrnd is
very urìçvcrì and th¿ìt Llncvannoss cannot be maclc up in rcgular coat of plastcring.
Thc ploccss of claLrbing consists in fiìling the holcs and cleprcssions with nìortar
of thc sanrc rnix as pcr thc fìrst coat,
Thc patchcs o[plastcr thus donc arc lcft rorLgh so that thc subsequant co¿rt
of plâstcr would stick to it.
()01.3,4, Wett¡ng: Tho surfhce shall bc wettccl cvcnly [rcfore applying
thc
plastcr. Cârc bc takcn to soc that thc sürfâco is not too dly as this may causc lack
of aclhosion or cxcessive suction of rvatcr frorn the plastcr. A fog-spr.ay nray be
Lrscd lbr this work, As làr' as possiblc thc plastcr work shall bc do¡c unclcr shade.
,-

S.S.9OI PLASTIRING, POINI]NC, COI,OIJIìING, I]TC. 31"1

901.3.5. Control t¡f ctacking: In case of cl¡scotltintrity in back¡ilounds thc

junctìon Whclc
two portiolìs shall bc scparatccl by a noat cut or a groovc trt tltc
such cutting or grooving is not practicable thc plastcr at such locatio¡rs lì]ay lrc
,"intor"",l try prðvicling î suit¡ìblo scrim of jutc ot wire gtttzc ot othcr matclials
as dilcctsd.
901.3.6. C)ontrol oJ sut'.face oazíng : -AdcqLlle timc intclvals shall bc
nroviclccl bctwccn srLcccssiv.'coats so that cach ttndcrgocs a po[tiol1 of its shrirlkagc
lcforc thc ncxt onc is r¡¡licd Crre shall bc ttkcrr to prcvctìt rapicl tlrying olthc
firal or' finishirtg coat
901.4. Mcasulcment : All lineal mcasttrcrncnts shall bc in nìchcs, Çorrcct
to 0.01 of a tnctre ancl ateas, shall bc wolkccl out in rnctros Çorrcct to 0 01 of a
sq.nr, lkrr-jarnbs, soffits, sills, oPenings noi cxccecling 0 5m'zeach in area, cnds
of
joists, bcains, posts, girdcrs, staps ctc, not cxccecling 0 5m'z cach iu atcir' opctrings
;lot cxcccding 3m2 cach dccltrctions ancl additìons shall bc ¡ratle ¡n thc l'ollowirìg
mannct;
(a) No clctluctìons shall l¡c matlc fb¡ cnds of.ioists, bcams, posts, etc, an(1
opcùirìgs not cxccecìing 0.5m2 cach and no adclitiotl shall bc nladc fot tcvcals,
finishing thc plastcr ¡totrncl cuds
¡ambs,ioffìts, sills, ctc,, olthcsc opcnings nor for
of joists, bcarrs, posts, ctc,
(tr) Dcductjons for opcnings cxcccding 0.5 nr'zbut lìot cxccc(Lilg 3¡n2 cach
sh,rll bc nraclc as [o]lows alti uo aLlclitioll shall bc macic fol tevcals, jatnbs, sol'fits,
sills, ctc., of thcse openings :--
(l) Whcn only onc facc is plastered no dcclttctìons shall bc madc'
(2) When botlì faces of wall are plastercd with thc sama plastar
dcductions shall bc made for onc face only,
(3) When two faccs of wall arc plastcrctl with difforcnt plastcrs or
if one f¿ce is plastercd and the othct pointed <lectuctions shall be maclc f¡om thc
plastcr ol poinling on thc sitìc of framcs for doors, windows, ctc, on which thc
width of tcucals is lcss than th¿ìt on thc other siclc, bltt no dcdttctions shall bc macle
on thc othçr sidc.
(c)ln casc of openings of a¡ca abottt 3m? cach clcclttctions shall bc nlacle
for thc openings but jambs, soflits and sills shall bc nc¿rst¡recl
(l) Ceilings shall l¡e mcasLtrcd betwccn tltc walls or partitions (tho
dimcnsÌons after plastcring shatl bc takcn) Cotnices or coves if any shall be
dcclucted ancl ureasured sc¡iaratcly.
(e) Whcrc the beams arc exposed under thc ccilings shall bc measuretl ovcr
bcams àntl thc plastcrccl siclcs of bcams shall be mcasurecl and aclclcd to plâstcrirlg
on ccilings.
(0 Soffits or stairs sh¿|l bc mcasured as plitstcring on ccilings' Flewings
sofñts shall be mcasurcd scparately,
(g) Ribs and rnoultìings on ceilings ancl beatns morc than the thiokncss of
the plaster shall bc measurcd scpârâtoly as for cornices
 ll¡ì TT'IE A.P, STANDAIìD SPECIFICA]]ONS

(h) The mcasur.erncnts of lelghts of wall plastcring shall bc

taken bctween
:fl::: ïìl::1"::^11':.ul,l:llll'
,tftcr prrstcr.irrg .sharr u"i,,r.,,.¡ ,^ir"m the top
3f lo9r,
wlrcrc rhcrc is rro skirrirrg or rio, top il .r.ir,,n, ì" ,ìi" ür'"i irì"'_ì,il
ol it any sha bc ttcrrr¡crcd antl nrc¡surcct sc¡rr.lrcly rtrcir
I:j.lì:,:tll^,:
rcngnrs Dcllrg :t.:]::: Ti".
nìc srrrcrl íìlong thc cxposc(l lìrcc of thc spccilrl
at its ccrrrrc linc_
(i) Si(lcs of pjlrstcß. nrojcctions, ctc., shall bc atlclccl
to the plastcr on
wllls.

nì orr)¡irstcrc(r arcâ and

i;"11,s"
'r'"t ¡ù .ì¿ |:.ï1 'oor"sqthc surfacc' all matctials'
¡çd"uior s' nrclìirlatron
iiiììrl "ii':";ii",:l¡1"ïii:..:hll
;;'i;;*""""'
Specification No. 902
,
Plastcring rvith Lime Mortar, one coat l2mm. or
20mm. thich
including Iine llendering
902.1. AII r.clcvant claLrscs of SS : 901 shall apply,
902.2. Materials :
902.2.1, 'fhe ¡iûìc mor.tíÌr shall conforrn to SS 113 and
shall be of thc
I
spccificd propol.tions,
902.2.2. Limc pufty (scbra) shail conform ro SS
902.3. Prcparation of thc Sr¡rfacc :
902.3.1. This shall confonn to claLrsc 901.3,
902.4. Application of l,imc plâstcr :
902.4.1. Thc mortar used for.plastcring shrll bc
stiff enough to clíng and
hold whcn laid, For cciling thc nrix rs requircrJ
to be stiffer than thar usçd for wa s.
To cnsurc evcn thickncss anci a truc surlacc plastcrcha
l50m¡n x t50mm of rhc rcouir.ccl rhickncss nr
U",,pfii"a in patchcs of
horizon trlty. rnd vcrticalty ovcr rhc cntirc surf¡cc "",ro"i;r; i
,;;; ;crrcs inrcrvals
,";;" ;;;;;;:.
of rhese guiclcs shall bc h.ulv in the plane of finishc,l ptnrr"r:;;f"";;;; Thc surtacc
truty ptumb,
Thc mort,Lr shall thcn bc ap¡licd tó thc ,,ofucc to-t
witl¡ a trowcl. On soffits lhc mortar sh.rll bc hid ;j;;ü;ï;;*" thc guicles
in ioìg- r.n,l* o,,,*,,r,f:i
f'orn thc operator ancl upwards and iìcross on *ollr, po"t "u-"i-ri
ovcrlap^ard sulficicnt prcssur.c shlll l¡e rrsccl ro iorcc
i?o*"t'n,ii'irrno,tur. .t r'
ir inio it,oro,,ei .on,""t *irt,
thc surr-flcc. on srnoorh surhccs. thc nro¡rnr ,¡.ii u"ì"ìii"¿
tro}vel to cnsurc 'clativcry on wirh rhc
adequare bold. The moftâr .fUt U" oppii"A
to i ìIi"kn"r. ,f ightfy
nroÌe thnn thrt spccificLl, usjng a srring srretchcd
thcrr bc br.ought ro ir rruc suriacc by working
out b;il""; tl;;;ìl*, This shall
with a long *åo¿*"îàu, with small
sawing motìon. The surfacc shall ùe perio.ically
across it. Finally the surfacc shall bc ienclcrecl "fr".tia
*ìtï,,,,iing ,rr.,"t
,rnr",1l *i,fl ,rnìì woo¿"n floot. ",1
Over working shali bc avoicled. All corners, urir", "
"nA ¡*"ìtìrs
truly to line with any neccssary rounding or siatt u" brought
"trurnf",ìJg.
902.4.2. lf it is necessarv to snspcnd fhc wo¡k at thc cnd ofthc day it shall
be left in a clean horizontal or vertical linc not
nca¡cr than i;Or;, fr*l any corncr
o¡ ariscs or an,pâ¡apcti tops or on copings, ctc, wf""
,"|",n*"".lnf t1.,. *ort tt
"
 S.S. 904 PLASTET{INC, POINTING, COLOUIìINC. Ë'TC, 319
- cclgcs of thc olcl work shall bc scrapcd clcan nncl trcatcd rvith ljmc putty boforc
thc now plastcr is laicl atljaccnt to it. Aftct tlìe first coat is donc it shaìl bc kcpt
undisturbcd for tho rlcxt 24 hours and thcrcafìcr kept moist ancl lìot pcrnìitted to
dry until thc fìnal rcndcring is applicd.
902.5. Í'inc rcndcring :-Aftcr the plâstar has sufficicntly harclened, lirnc
putty with crcam likc consistcncy shall bc applictl as tlrinly ancl cvcnly as possiblc
and rubbcd to a fìnc condition.
902.6. Curing :-The finishcd surface shall bc kcpt moist for at lcast iì
wcek.
Specification No. 903
Plastering with Ccmcnt Mortar one coat 12mm. or 20mm.
including Finc Rendering
903.1. All lclevant clauses of SS ; 901 shall apply.
903.2. Ccncnt mortal shall confoln to SS : l15 and shall bc of thc
spccificcl proportions.
903.3" Application : Thc plastcling shall ploccctl in accorclancc with
clauscs 902.4,1 ancl 902.4.2 cxccpt that cc¡rìcllt ¡ìroitar shall conform to SS : ll5
ancl of thc specificcl portions shall be usccl instcacl of limc norta¡ ancl thc final
rcndcting shall bc applicrì immcdiatcly aftcrwarcls.
903.4. Irinc rcrrrlering :--Ncat portliìnd cemcnt sltLr.ry with a crcan like
consistcncy is applicd as thinly uniformly as possiblc with a tro\.vcl anrl rubbod
smootlì.
903.5. Curing ;-The surfacc shall bc waterod for a periocl of at lcast l0
days.

Spec¡ficat¡on No. 904

Plastering \ ith Cemcnt Mortar, two coâts 20mm. thicl(
with Sponge l'inish
904.1. All rolcvant clauscs of SS : 901 shall apply.
904.2. Materials :-Comont mo¡tar for tho first coat shall conform to SS
: I l5 an<l shall bc of the specificd proportions, The mortar for the second coat shall
bc madc with fine saud, passing through IS sieves of 150 to 600 ¡nicrons of the
specificd proportions.
904.3. Applicâtion of thc first coat ;-The first coat shall bc laid in
acco¡dancç with SS : 903 cxccpt that comcrìt mortâr l7m¡n. thick shall bc applicd.
Thc surface âfter floating is again rakcd to provide a propcr bond lor the sccond
coat.

904,4. Application of second coât :-,Over the surfacc thus prcparccl and
wlìcn thc sltrfâce is grecn, ccmont nloftar with fine sand as indicâted in clausc 904.2
of thick cream likc consistcncy is applicd with a trowel to a thickncss of 3mrn.
and floatcd with a long woodan float to render the surface truc. Thcn thc entirc
surfaoe is lightly rubbcd witlì wet sponge and then dar¡bcd wìth sponge squeezecl
dry to obtain the rcquilcd finish.
320 THIJ A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

904.4.1. In case it is not possrblc to apply the sccond coat whcn thc first
coat is grccn, thc first coât shall bc curecl for at lcast l0 days before it is pcnritte(l
to dry. Ilclorc thc scconcl coat is applicd thc surf¿ìcc slrall be thoroughly sclubbecì
auC washccl clcan to Ìcrnovc dust r'¡n(lothcr particlos. Thc sutface shall bc tholoughly
wcttcd bclorc applying sccond coat as indicatccl al¡ovc.
904.5. Curing :--'fhc finishcd surfacc bc kcpt wet for a minimum pcriod
ol l0 tlays.
Specification No. 905
Plastcring with Combination Mortâr one coat 12mm. or 20mm.
tlricl< including lîine Rendcring
905.1. All rclcvant Clauscs ol SS ; 901 shall apply.
905.2. Thc plaster shall bc laid and fìnishcd as pcr SS : 902 oxcopt thât
ccr¡cnt liure rnoftar shall conform to SS ; ll6 of thc spccified proportions ìn placc
of limc rnortar,
Specification No. 906
Pointing to Masoru'y with Cemcrt Mortar
906.1. Matcrials :

90(r,l.l, Ccmcnt mortar for pointing shall conform to SS : l15 ancl shall
hc ol tlrc s¡ccifict1 ¡ropoltion.
906.2. Types of pointing :---Pointing shall bc one of thc following types
(Scc Figs, 906-l to 906-3).
(a) Flush pointing, or
(b) Raiscd and cut pointing, or
(") Linc or groove pointing.
LINE OR GROOVE POINTING

fFis. No. 906.21

RAISED AND CUT POINTING

lFig. No. 906.341 IF¡g. No. 906.381

- S,S. 906 PI-ASTERING, POINTINC, COLOUììING, þ]TC, 321

906.3. Preparation of surlace : Thc joints in tho mâsonry shril bc rakccl

out to a dcpth not less than tho width of thc joint or as cli¡cctcd whcn thc mortar
is grccn. Joints arc to bc b¡Lrshcd clcan of clust and loose particles with ¿r stiff b¡ush.
Thc arca shall thcn l¡o washccl and thc joints thoroughly wottod bcfo¡c pointing is
cor)rmcncc(1.

906.4. Àpplication of mortar and finishing :-Thc mortar shall be presscd

into thc rakcd out joints accoltling to tlìo typc of pointing requirecl, 'l'hc morttrr shall
ûot be sprcad ovcr tlìc cornors, eclgcs or sLrface of thc nrasonry, Tlrc poil'ìting shall
thcn bc finishcd with thc propcr tool in thc nanrrcr clesclibccl undcr tlìe rcspcctivc
typcs of pointing in clauses 906.4.1., 906.4.2 and 906.4.3. 'l'hc supclfìuous mortar
shall thcn bc cuf off fiorn thc edgcs ol thc lines and the sLrfàcc of thc masonty
shall also l¡c clcanccl of all mortar. Thc fìnish shall bc such that thc pointing is
thc oxact sizc and shapc stipulated and thc cdgcs arc ncat ancl clcan.
906.4.1. Flush po¡tlti g .-Tl\c moftar shall bc p|essccl into thc joints and
shall bc lÌnishccl off flush ând lcvcl with thc cclgcs of bticks, tilcs or stoncs so as
to givc a srnooth appcarancc. Thc edgcs shall bc ncatly trimmcd with a trowcl înd
strâight cdge, (Scc Fig. 90ó-l).
906.4.2. Il.aised url cut po¡n¡ittg :---Raiscd and cut pointing shall plojcct
fron thc wall facing with ìts cclgcs cut parallcl so as to hava a unilornrly raisecl
band about (rmm. raiscd înd width 1()mn. or morc as diloctcd. Thc pointing shall
be lruishcrl to a smooth but hard surfacc. (Sec Fig. 906.2).
906.4.3. Liue or grcove po¡nl¡fl7:-'lhe joint shall bc initially folmed as
lor flush pointing in clause 906,4,I ancl thcrÌ whilo thc moltar is still grccn as grùovc
of shape and sizc as spccifie(l sball be formccl by running a forming tool along
thc contro line of thc joints, This opcration shall bc continucd till a smooth and
harcl surfacc is obtainccl. In tha caso of coursed rLrbblc or brick nasonÌy tl'ìc vortical
joilts shall also bc finishcd in a similar way. 1'hc vcltical li¡es shall nakc hrrc
right angles at theirjunctìons with thc horizontal lincs and shall not projcct boyond
tlìo sânìe. (Sce Figs, 906-34, 906-38),
906.5. Curing :--The pointing shall bc kept wet for scvcn days. Duling
this period it shall bc suitably protected flom all damagcs.
906.5.1. If the rnortar pcrishes oÌ deterioratcs throLrgh ncglcct olwatcring
ol any othcr dcfault ancl if thc work is lot donc as spccificcl abovc thc pointing
shall bc ¡enrovcd and rcdonc at thc cxpansc of thc contractor.
906.6. Measr¡rement :.-Àll lineal mcasurcmcnts shall bc in mctrcs corrcct
to 0.01 of ametle and arcas shall bc wolkecl out in sq.m, corrcct to 0,01 of asq.m.
For jan.rbs, soffits, sills, opcnings not cxcccding 0.5rn'? eaoh in atca, cncls
ofjoists, beams, posts, girdcls, stcps ctc., not exccccling 0.5m2 cach in alea,
opcnings not oxacocling 3m'zeach dedt¡ctions and aciditions shall bc macle in tlre
following mînner :-
(a) No dcduction slìall bo nradc fol ends ofjoists, bcams, posts, ctc., aÌìd
oÞclìings not cxcccding 0.5m2 cach ancl no adclition shall bc nrade for rcvcals,
janrbs. sof,ñts. sills, ctc.. of thesc opcnings.

IAPDSS - 2l.l
 THË A.P. STÄNDARD SPI]CIFICATIONS

(b) Deductions for openings excecdings 0,5 nr'?but not exceecling 3m2 each
shall bc madc as foÌlows and no addition shall be macle for reveals, jambs, soffits,
sills, etc,, of thesc openings :---
(l) 'ùr'hen both faces of wall are pojntod with the same pointing
dcduction shall be made for one face only.
(2) When two fâces of wall are treated with diffcrent pointings or
if onc face is plastered and tho other pointcd dcduction shall bc madc from the
pl¿rster or pointing on the side of frames for doors, windows, etc., on which thc
wiclth of rcveals is less than that on tho other siclc but no deduction shall bc madc
from plaster or pointing on tho othor side.
(c) In thc casc of openings of area aboyo 3m2 each, deductions shall bc
madc for thc opcnings but jambs, soffits and sills shall be measured.
906.7. Râtc :-The unit ratc shall be per l0 sq.m. of finished work. The
rate shall include erection ancl removal of scaffolding, matcrials and equipmcnt
incidental to completion of thc pointing and dowatering whcrc nccessary till the
nìoftar is set, The rate shall also include labour chargcs for raking out joints,
cleaning, wctting, fillirrg with mortar, trowclling and curing,
Specification No. 907
Pointing to Masonry with Surki Mortar
907.1. Ihe pointing shall be donc and ñnishcd as per SS : 906 exccpt that
thenor1arshall besurki mortarshallconformtoSS:ll4ofthespecifiedpropofiions.
907.2. Measurement :-This shall conform to clauso 906.6.
907.3. Râte I This shall conform to clause 906,7.
Specification No. 908
White-Washing
908,1. Materiâls :
908.1.1. Line:-.Lime used for white-washing shall be frcshly burnt class
'C' Iime (fat limc) and white in colour shall conform to SS : 11l.
908.1.2. l(ater :-This shall conform to SS : 129.
908.1.3. Cum ol glue, sodium chloride and ultra marine blue or indigo
shall bc of approved quality.
908.2. Scâffolding : Wherever scaffolding is necessary it shall be erectcd
in such a way that as far as possible no part of scaffolding shall rest against the
surface to be white-washed. A properly sccured and wcll ticd suspencled platform
nray also be used for white-washing or colour-washing. Wherc l¿dders arc used
pieccs of old gunny bags shall be tied at top and bottom to prevent scratchcs to
thc walls and floors. For white-washing of ceilings propor stage scaffolding may
bo efccted whe rç necessary.

908.3. Prepârâtion of Surlhces :

908.3.1. New surfaces :-The surfacc shall be thoroughly clcaned of all
dirt, dust, moÍar drops and other foroign matter before white-wash is applied.
 S,S. 908 PLASTERING, POINTING, COLOURING, ETC, 323

- 908.3.2. Okl surløce:

908.3.2.1. Olcl surfacc already whitc-washccl or colour-washed shall bc
broomcd to rcmovc all clust and di11. Â.ll loosc scalcs of lime-wash and other forcign
mattc¡ shall also be removed. Whcre hcavy scaling has taken place thc cntirc surfacc
shall be scraPed clean.
908.3.2.2. Old stuftrces spoilecl by stnoke soot:-Thc surlace shall bc
scrapcd with stecl wirebrushcs, or stecl scrapers. T\e surfacc shall thcn be b¡oomod
to renlovo all dtrst and dirt shall bc washcd with clean watcr'
9083.2.3. Oil qnd Grease,t/.,oß :---Oil and greasc spots shall bc renroved
by a suitablc chcmical arcl smooth sttrfaccs shall be rubbcd with witc-brushcs.
908.3.2.4. While cleaning thc surfaca tho unwantcd nails shall be tcmovcd
and all nail holcs, cracks ancl cLcvices fillcd with limc putty or plaster of paris to
make thc surfaccs smooth.
908.3.2.5. All unsound pottions of thc surf¿rcc plastor shall be removecl to
fìrll clcpth of plaster itr rectangular patchcs and plastcred again allel ranking thc
n.rasonry joinls propelly. Such porfions shall bc wcttcd and allowctl to dry and given
rr prcliminirry corl of whitc wash.

908.3.2.6. When whitc washing old surfacc is thc surface is found to be

infcctcd with rnould growth it shall be trcated as bclow :

growth of moukls moss shall be removccl by scraping with stccl brush

^.ny
ancl ammoniacal coppel solution consisting of l5 gm, of coppcr corbonate dissolvcd
in 60 of liquor ammonia in 500 ml. water shall be applied to the st¡rfacc and allowed
to dry thoroughly bcfore applying whitc-wash. An alternativo to ammoniacal coppcr
solutioÌr treatmcnt may consist of 20á sodium penta chlorophcnatc solution in watcr.
908.4. Prcparation of white-wash :
908.4.1, Thc lime shall bc slakcd at site and shall be mixccl and stirred
with about fìve litrcs of water for lkg. of unslaked lime to maks thin crcam. This
shall bc allowed to stand for a period of 24 hours and this shall be scrcened through
a clean coarse cloth. lkg. ofgum dissolvcd ìn hot water shall be added to cach
one conìe of lime cream. About 1,3 kg. of soclium chloride clissolvecl in hot watcr
shall be addctt for every l0kg,of lirnc. Small quantity of ultra-Inarine blue (upto
3gm. pcr kg. of lime) shall also be added to tho last two coats of whitc-wash
solution and the whole solution shall be stirrcd thoroughly before usc.
908.5. Applicâtion of white-wash :

908.5.1. White-wash shall bc appliccl with jutc coir or otlìer similar brush
or other brush to bc spccifiecl number of coats. Thc opcration for each coat shall
consist of a strokc of bc brush given ftom the top to downwards, another fronl
tho botton'ì to upwards (ovcr the first strokc) ancl similarly onc stroke horizontally
froÌn the right and anothcr from thc lcft bcfore it clries. Each coat shall bc allowed
to clry bcfore thc next coât is applicd. For evcry coat of whitc-washing the cntire
surface arca shall be coverecl continuously withou[ lcâving any patches. Thc brush
shall bc dippcd in whitc-wash pressed lightly against thc wall of thc containc¡ and
thcn applicd by lighlly prcssing against the surfacc with ftrll swing of hand.
324 TFIE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

908.5.2. Thc white-washing on cciling shall be done prior to that on walls'

908.5.3. For new work minimum two coats shall bc appliecl so tlìat thc
surface prcsants smooth and a uniform finish through ìvhich tha plastcr does not
show. Tic finished dry stt¡facc shall not show âny signs of cracking and pecling
ancl the whitc-wash shall not come off rcadily with thc hand wherr rubbcd'
908.5.4. For olcl work, after thc surface has bcen prcpared as in clause
'lhcn
908,3.2 a coat of ,¡/hitc-wash shall be applied over the patches and repairs
ona or two or rnote coats of whitc-wash as specificcl shall bc applicd oYor the Qntirc
surfacc.'fhe whito-washecl srtrface shall present a uniform finish through which thc
plaster patchcs do not show.
90E.6. ProtcctiYc lneasurcs :-Surfaces ofcloors, windows, floors, articlcs
of furniturc etc., an<l such other parts of the buikling not to be '¡r'Iìite-washed shall
be protectcd from bcing splashed upon Such surfaces shall be clcancrl of white-
waih splashes if any. This wìll bc done at the expcnsc of the contractor'
901ì,7. Me ¡rsuremcnt :

90tì.?.1. 'lhis shall confortn to clause 901.4.

908.7.2. Colrugatccl strrfaces shall bc mcasutcd flat as lìxcd ancl not giftbcd
Thc quantitics so meaittrcd shall bc incrcasccl by thc followirlg pcrocltagcs an<1 thc
resultants shall bc includcd with thc gcneral arcas:
(a) Corrugatcd stecl sl'ìcets
(b) Colmgatc<l asbestos shects
(c) Scmi-corrugatcd asbcstos cemcnt shcets-10%.
908.8. Rate :-This shall conform to clauso 901,5
SPecification No. 909
Colour Washing
909.1. Materials :

909.1.1. Limc, w¿ltor and gum etc., shall conform to clause 908 1'
909.1.2. Mineralcoloars :-Shall bc of approvcd quality and not affccted
by lime.
909.2. ScâtTolditrg :-This shall conform to clausc 908 2.
909.3. Preparation of Surfhccs :-This shall conform to clause 908 3
909.4. Pleparation of colour-wash :-sufficicnt qttantity of colour-wcsh
enough lor thc aomplctc job shall bc prcpared in one operation to avoid artd
cliffcrcnce in shatlc, This basis-whitc-wash solution shall bc prcparccl in ¿rccordance
with clausc 908.4. Mineral colou¡s shall bc addcd to thc white-wash solution
909.5, Applicâtion of colour-wâsh :-Thc colour-wash shall be applicd
in accortlance with the proceclure given in clause 9085.1. For colour-washing on
new works, aftu the sLtrface has been prepared as in clausc 908 3 1, the first primary
coat shall bc of white-wash and thc subsequcnt coats (minimum two) shall be of
- S,S. 9IO PLASTERING, POINTING, COLOURTNG, ETC. 325

colollFwash and thc antire surfaco shall prcsont a smooth and uniform fìnish To
start with o.lm2 of the prepared su¡facc shall be colour-washed with the first coat
of white-wash and subsequent coats of colour-wash solution in full number ofcoats
ancl the shadc so obtained shall bc examined befors thc cntirc work of colour-
washing is takcn up on hand. Small arcas of coloLrr-wash will appear lighter in shade
than whcn thc salne shacles are appliccl to largo surfaccs.

909.5,2, For colour-washing an olcl work, after thc surfacc has bccn prepared
as in clat¡so 908.3.2 a coat of colortt-wash shall bc applicd for tlìe pafchçs înd
repairs. Then thc specifie<l numbcr of coat of colottr-wash shall be a¡lplied ovcr
thà cnti¡c surface, Thc colour-wash st¡rfacc shall prcscnt a uniform colour shaclç.
No primary coat is ncedcd for old surfacc bearing colour of the same shaclc.
909.5.3, On surfaccs requiring a changc of colour, aftcr the surfacc ltas
bccn prcparctl as in clause 909.3.2 two coats of whitc-wash shall bc applicd bcfbrc
application of spccified nunbcr (minimum two) of coats of colour-wash of the ncw
shadc.
909.6. Protcctive nlcîsuÌes :--This shall conform to clîuso 908.6.

909.?. Measurerncnt : 'lhis shall confotm to clausc 908.7.

909.8. Rate :-l his shall confbr¡n to claLrsc 908 8
Specification No' 910
DrY DistemPering
910.1. Matcriâls :

g10.l.l . D¡slemper '.'-Dry distcnlPcr of approved makc, colout and shade

shall be uscd.
910.2. Scaffolding :-This shall conform to clâusc 908.2.

910.3. Pr€parâtion of Distemper :

910.3.1. Thc dry distemper shall be stirred slowly in clcan water using 6
clccilitres (0.6 litre) of water per kg. of distemper or as speoificd by the makcrs.
Warm water shall be prcferably be used. It shall bc allowed to stand for atlcast
30 minutes beforo,use. The mixturc shall be wcll stirrcd beforc arcl duting usc to
maintain an cvcn consistcncy.
910,3.2. Distempcr shall not be uscd in larger quantity than is actually
required for onc day's work.
910.4. Preparation of Surface :

910,4.1. Before ncw work is distempercd tho sulfacc shall be thoroughly

b¡ushed frec from mortar clroppings and other foreign matter and sand-papcrccl
smooth. Now plastcr surfaccs shall bc allowed to dry for atlcast ollo month aftcr
curing bcforc applying distcmpcr.
910.4.2. F'or thc old surfacc which had earlier bccn distcmpererì, tlrc surfacc
shall be cleanetl from grcasc, dust, etc. 'Ihc flakings ofthe prcvious coatings if any
shall bc taken off. All crack holes and surfacc dcfccts shall bc rcpaìred with gypsum
and alloweil to set hard ancl then sancl papcrcd smootlt and wipcd clean But in
 TI.'IE A,P. STANDARD SPECIF'ICA'I]ONS

case thc sì.trfaccs a¡c coloured or white-washed, thc \¡r'âsh shall be removecl thoroughly
first,
910.5. Priming coat :-Whcrc prescribed a primary coât of whiting shall
bc applied over thc <lry surface. Thc whiting consists of ground white chalk
clissolved in sltfficiont qì.rantity of warm watcr thoroughly stirrcd to form a thick
slurry which shâll thcn be scrcencd thr.ough a clcan coarse cloth. Two kgs. of gum
and 04. kg. ofcopper sulphate dissolvecl scparately in hot watcr shall be addcci for
çvcry cu.llì. of slurly which shall then bc dilutcd with watcl to thc consistencv of
nilk. The whiting so prcpared is lcacly for use as a priming coat. Thc prinring ioat
when clry shall bc rr¡bbcd as clean ancl smooth as possiblc, No white-washin! coat
shall be usccl as primiug coat for distempcr.
910.6. Application of Distcmper :
910.6.1. In the case ofnew vr'ork thc trcatmcnt shall consist ofa priming
coat as in clause 910.5 followed by the application of two or more co¿ìts of
clistcrnpcr as spccificd till thc surfacc shows an cycn colour.
910.6.2. F-or ok1 wo¡k thc surfhce preparcd as dcscribccl in clausc 910.4.2,
shall be applicd onc or tvr'o coats of clistempcr as specifÌccl till thc surfacc ¿ìttains
an even colour.
910.ó.3. Thc cnti¡c srìrface shall bc coatcd with tha mixturc unifornrly with
proper clisteurpcl brushcs in holizontal strokcs followccl irnmecliatcly by vertical
stÌokcs which togctheÌ shall constitutc one coat, 'I'hc subsequent coats shall bc
applicd only afler thc previous coat has dried. Thc finishecl surface shall bc cven
ancl t¡niform ancl shall how no bnrsh marks.
910,6.4. Enough clistempcr shall be rnixcd to finish one room at a t¡mc.
Thc application of a coat in cach ¡oom shall be finishcrl in one operation and no
work shall bc startcd in any room which cannot be compJetcd the same day.
910,6.5, After cach day's work thc brushes shall bc washe<l in hot watcr
ancl hungdown to clry, Old brushes which are clirty or cakccl with clistempcr shall
not bc usccl.

910.7. Protective mc¡tsur.es :-This sball conform to clarrse 90g.6.

910.8. Measr¡rcment :-This shall confolm to clause 90g.?.
910.9. Ratc :-This shall conform to clausc 908.g.
Specification No. 911
Oil Bound Diste mpering
911.1. Materials :
_ 9ll.l.l. Oil bound distem.pe¡ :--Oil bound washable distempcr ofapprovecl
makc, colour and shadc shall bc usecl,
911.1,2. Printer;-Thc primer wherc uscd on nclv work shall be ccmcnt
primer or clistempcr primcr. Thcse shall be ofthc samc make as oil bound distcmper.
911.2. Scaflblding :-{his shall conform to clausc 90g.2.
)-

S.S, 9I2 PLASTERING, POINTING, COLOURING, ETC' 32'7

911.3. Preparation of surface :-Oil bound distemper shall not be applied

of thc wall plaster' Tho preparation of su¡face
within six months óf thc complotion
shall conform to clausc 9104.
911.4. APPlication :
911.4.1. Príner coQl primer coat shall bc with distcmper printer
"---Thc a b¡ush on a clean'
or ccment primer. The distemper primer shall be applied with
ir" ,n¿ troottr surfacc. Horizontál strokes shall bo givcn first and ve¡tical strokes
¡rnmcd¡atcly aftcrwards. 'Ihis cntiro operation slìall constituto one
Jtrått Uc,,pptica
f¡. tu.fo"" shall be finishccl as uniformly as possìble leaving no brush marks'
ür¡uff U" allowed to dry for at lcast 48 hours bcfore oil bound distemper is applicd
"uìi.
911,4.1.1. For old wo¡k no primet coat is necessary'
911.4.2. D¡stenPU Coqt :
911.4.2.1. For ncw wo¡ks after the primer coat has dricd for atlçast 48
hours, the surfaoc shall bc lightly sancl-papered to make it -smooth for rcceiving
itr" Airr"rnp", taking carc not to rub out the priming coat All loose particles
shall
ü" Ourt"¿ iff aftcr-rubbing Ono coat of distcmpcr propcrly diluted with thinner
t*ot", or other liquid as itipulatc<l by the manufacturer) shall be applied with
ùrr.,|n"s; ¡n tlotitontál strokcs followed immcdiately by vcrtical strokcs
which together
constitutc ono coat.
g11.4.2.2. Thc subscquent coats shall be applied in the samc way Two or
coat to obtâin
moro coâts of distcmpcr as specified shall be applied over the primer
an evcn shade.
g11.4.2.3. A timeinterval of atleast 24 hours shall be allowcd between
consecutive coats to Permit the propcr drying of the preccding coat
911.4.3. For old work the distcmper shall be applied over the prepared
surface in the same manner as in new work. One or more coats of distemper
as

specifiecl shall be applied to obtâin an even and uniform shadc'

9t1.4.4. l50mn double bristled clistcmper b¡ushes shall be used After

each day's work brushes shall be thoroughly washed in hot!r'ater with
soap solution
ond huíg do*n to dry. Old brushes whiih are dirty and caked with distemper shall
not be used on the work.
911.5. Protective mcâsures :-This shall conform to clause 908 6'

911.6. Meâsurement :-This shall conform to clause 908'7'

911.?. Rate :-This shall conform to clause 908 8
SPecification No' 912
Water Proof Cement Painting
912.1. Materials :

912.1, L The water proof cement paints shall be of approved make' colour
and shade.
912'2. Scaffolding :-This shall conform to clause 908 2'
 328 TI-IE A,P, STANDARD SPECIIìICATIONS

912.3. Preparation of mix :

912.3.1. Water proof calnent paiut shall bc mixcd in such quantities as can
bc uscd up wifhin an hou¡ of its nrixing as otherwisc mixturc will sct ancl thickcn
affccting flow and finish. Watcr proof ccmcnt paint shall be mìxccl with watcr in
two stages. 'l'hc first stagc shall comprisc of two pads of water proof coment pàint
ând onc paú of watcr stirred thorougly ancl allowecl to stancl får 5 ntiuutes. Caro
shall bc taken to a(ld thc water proof cenrent paint graclually to tho ìvatcr and not
vice,ver$a, The sccond stage shall comprisc of atlding furihcr onc part of .watcr
to thc mix and stirring thoroughly to obtain a liquid of wor.kable ancl unifo¡rn
co¡rsisto'rcy. In âll casçs the manafactLrror's instructions shall bc followcd
mcticLrlously.
912.3.2. The lids of ccnent paint drunrs shall bc kcpt tighrly closcd whon
not in usc, as by cxposurc to atmosphcrc tlìc cemont paint ripidþ bccotros air sct
duc to its hygr.oscopic qualitics.
912.4. Prepîration ol sr¡r.face :

912.4.1. F'or ncw work, the surt'¿rcc shall bc thot.oLrghly clcanecl of all
mortal dropings, dir1, dust, algac, greasc and othel forcign nrafìcr by brushing ancl
washing, Thc surfacc shall be thoroughly wettecl with clðan water bcforc thc watcr
proof cemcnt paint is applicd.
912.4.2, In the casc of olcl comcnt paintcd work all loosc piccos ¡ìnd scâles
shall bc ¡cnovcil and tbc sur.fhcc shall be clcancd of all clit, dusi, algac, oil, etc.,
by btrshing and washing, Pitting in plastcr shall be maclc good aná a coât of watcl
proof ccmcnt paint shall be applied over patchcs after wetting them thoroughly,
912,5. Application:
912.5,1, The solution shall be applic<t on the clean ancl wottecl surface with
brushcs o¡ spruying machinc. Thc solution shall bc kcpt well stirrcrl during
the
pcriocl ofapplication. It shall bc applicd on thc surface which is on thc
shaclv sirle
oi the builcling so that thc direct hoat of thc sun on the surface is avoidei The
mcthod of application of water proof cement paint shall be similar to oil bound
clistcmpcr. 'l-hc complctcd st¡rface shall bc watcrcd after thc day's work.
912.5.2. Tha scÇoud coat shall bc applied aftar the first coat has sct for
atlcast 24 horlrs. Bcfore application of the sccond or subsequcnt coats fhe surface
of the prcvions coat shall not be wetted.
912.5.3. For ncw work surface shall bo treatcd with two or morc coats of
watc¡ prool ccmcnt paint as specifiecl to get a Lrnifbrm shaclc,
912.5.4. For old wor.k the trcatlnent will be with ons or. two coats ¿ìs
spccificclto gct a uniform shacle,
912.5.5. Water proof ccment paint shall not be applicd on surfacc aJrea<ly
treiìted rvith white-wash, colour-wash, distemper (clLy òi oil bo'nd), varnishes
paints, etc. It shall not appliccl in gypsum, wood ¿rnj mctal surfaces, ln caso
of
surlaces arç coloured or whìte-washcd the wash must be removecl thoroughly
first
ancl surfacc troate(l as in clausc 912.4.2 beforc application of cernent piini.
t:a.'

-- S.S. 9I2 PLASTERING, POINTING, COLOURINC, ETC

912.6. Protcctivc Measures :--This shall conforln to clause 90g.6.

912.7, Mcasurement :-This shall conform to clausc 90g.7.
912.8. Rate :-This shall conform to clausc 908,8.
 TIIE A,P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

sEcTloN 10
STANDÂRD SPECIFICATIONS FOR WOOD WORK
CONTENTS

SpeciJication Name of Spec¡Jìcatio Pãge

l. t00l Woocl Work Coneral 330

2. 1002 Doo¡s, Wìntlows, Vontilators, Warclrobes and

Cup-boards, ctc. 339

3. 1003 Frame Work for Roofs 353

4, 1004 Woodon PÍÌrtitions 356

5. 1005 Wall Panclling 356

6. 1006 Wooder.r Railing 356

SPecification No' 1001

Wood Work
1001.1. Scopc :-This spccificatioll covers thc diffcrcnt typcs of tìmbe¡
an<l othcr wood bascd materials and thcir use in building, etc
1001.2. TerminologY :

lOOl.2.1. Bark:-The covering or rind of treo outside thc wood (See Fig'
1001.1).
CROSS SECTION OF LOG
lFig. 1001 .1

f001.2.2. Battern :-A piece of sawn timber, dimensions of which do not

excecd 50 mm, cither in brcadth or thickness.
1001.2.3. Baulk:-A piecc of sawn timbc¡ whose cross-seotional dimensions
excced 50mm. in onc direction and 200mm in other direction.
-- s.s. l00l wooD woRK 331

1001.2,4. Bonding t--Tlìe procoss of uniting two or rnore pieccs of woocl

or voncors by mcans of an adhesive. This proccss is characterjsed by continuity
of thc Lmion ovcl thc wholc of thc arcas of contact.
1001.2.5. Braces ; --f)iagonal membcrs in thc framc work.
1001.2.6. Chatnferirrg :-Bevclling thc sharp edge of a piccc of t¡mber.
1001.2.'7 . Check :-A fine crack,

1001.2,8. C/?Jr Grained timber:-Timher in which thc fibre alignmcnt

dcviatcs from a clilcction parallcl to thc long axis of thc piccc.
1001 .2.9. Cup-boør.¿/ :-Shelved closct or cabinot for storing provisions,
ctc.
1001.2.10, Decø¡ ;-Disinteg¡ atiou of wood tissues câuse(l by fungi or.
othcr micro-organism. (The words "Dotc and Rot" also mcan clecay).
1001.2.11. Dressecl T'it¡tber :--Timber which has bcen sawn aud plannetl
to thc cxact rcqtrircd dimcnsions.
1001.2.12. Durobil¡ty :-lìcsirìtance oflfer-e d by wood to ageûts of nahrral
dcstruction likc irsccts at f'ungi etc., which dctermines its uscful service lifc.
1001.2.13. Face :-Thc botrer sidc of thc plywood panel in any gracle
calling fol a facc anil a back also, cithcl side of a panel \.vhorc tho gracling rules
rlraw no tlistinction bc¡wccn faccs.
1001.2.14. Fibre :-a cornparatively long narrow ccll with closed cncls.
1001.2.15. Frqne work:--Thc framc work is thc structure consisting of
the edge membcrs, diagonal braces and stnÌts that contribute primârily to tho
streugth and the rigidity of the cratc.
100 | .2, I 6. Grcen tiuber :--l'rcshly fcllcd timbcr which has not lost much
of its rnoisturc or timbe¡ whiclr still contain ficc watcr in its ccll cavìtics.
1001.2.17 . lleart-woocl ;-The inner portion of wood in a long or in cut
timbcr which is usually of a da¡ker colour than sap-woocl ancl which is usually
clurablc by nature,
1001.2.18. Harcl-wood :---A conventional term used to denote the wood
gcncrally dcrivccl from b¡.oad-lcavcd treos irrcspoctive of physical properties of
harclncss or strength.
1001.2,19. ./oinls : (Sec Fig. 100-2 - Joints)

_ 1001.2.19.1. Butt-joitlt :--Joint in which two picces of timber ar.c joincd

ond to end or sitlc to side sccurcd by sì.Ìifablc mcthod clepcnding on whether the
Joinf is for lcngthcning or wi<lcning thc wood picces.
1001.2.19.2. Dowel-joínt :-A joint in which dowels or pcgs made on onc
picce arc fittcd tightly in corresporrcling holes madc orì thc otheipiece,

, 1001.2.19.3, Dove-¡a¡l joi t:-Joint

at the comcr of two pieces maclc in
sLrch a way that the notches madcou the onc arc fitted exactly into projectìons
of corresponding size aud shape ma¡le in thc other.
 'I'IIE,\.P. S'IANDAIìD SPECIIIICATIONS

ffi
BUTT JOINI SIDE TO SIDE

DOVETAIL JOINT

Æw::F
/=::-"þ=

LAP JOINT
*

HALVED JOINT

7o

SCARF WOOD

^*"

[Fìs, 1001.2]
JOINTS

1O0l.2.1g.4 llalvett joittl :-.sometimes this word is restrictcd ollly to thc

case whcn tiurbcr is ¡educecl io half-section to â certain lcngth at thc eclge
on both
tlre picccs and thc picces arc lappecl on onc anotlrcr and joined'
-- I
S.S, I()O Vr'OOD WORK 331

1001.2.19.5. Lqpjoint: -A joirrt in whiclì two picccs of timbcr jointccl in

such a way that onc overlaps thc othcr and thc entiÌc srrrfacc may o¡ may not remail]
continuous.
1001.2.19.6. Mitred Jo¡flt:-A joiut, botwccrì two nlombcrs ¿rt an angle in
which thc jointing surfacc ârc cut to colresponding edgcs at the inrrcr scction.
l00l.2.19.'7. Mort¡se qnd Íenon join¡:-*A joint in whìch thc rcc¡uccd cnd
(Tcnon) of onc mcmber fits into thc coffespolcling slot (Mortisc) ìn thc othcr
metnbcr'.

1001.2.19,8, ScqrÍ joínt : A lap joint in which thc cnds ancl cdges arc
lcvcllccl and thc cntirc sulfacc rcmains continuous,
l00l.2.19.9. 'fongue. antl groove jo¡nt :.-A joint ìn whìch a tongLrc is
proviclcd on cclgc of onc nlcnrbet and a corcsponding gloova otr tlìc othc[.
1001.2.20. Ktlot i A. porlion of branch, which h¿rs bccome ernbcctclcd iu
thc woo(l by tlìc sLrbscqucnt g|owth of a tÍcc. Tho cÌoss-scctioù of a knot is usualìy
circulal ol oval in shape antl ìs nrçasu¡ecl taking its mcatì (l¡âmctcr. Knots arc
classilicd as follows.
1001.2.20.1. l)eca1,s¡| çy Ltnso¡tnd k ot :*lt is a knot softer than thc
surroL¡nding woocL bccausc ofclecay. Ifthc decay is aclvanccd, thcre may bc a holc
in thc ccrtro of thc knot and thc sides of thc holc contain inclications of decay.
l00l.2.20.2. Loose qncl hollr¡w knot :-lt is à knot which has fallcll out
ol likcìy to till, lcaving a holc with sides fìee from rlecay.
1001.2.20.3, Live or sou¡¿l knot :-,Liyc or sountl knot is a knot, solid
across its facc ancl exccpt for its own pith, il is atleâst as hard as the surÌouncling
wood to which it is fiünly attachacl, It shows no indication of dccay ancl is usually
clarker in colour than thc sulrounding woocl.
1001.2.21 , Moisturc content :--Thc wcìght of watcr Þre scnt in wood
cxpressccì as iì pcrcentagc of its oven-dry weight.
1001.2.22, lv[or¡¡se :-A hole or slot to recoivc â tanolt o¡ dowcl of
corrcsponding sizc.
l001.2.23. A4oulditrg :*Shaping timbcr to â rcqLrir.cd outline or contour,
1001.2.24. P l¡cle boqrd:-A boartl rnanufactured fron particles of woocl
or othor lignoe ccllulose material for cxarnplc flakes, granulcs, silvers splintcr.s
aggloureratccl formcd and prcssecl togethcr by usc of ân or.ganic bildcr togethcr with
onc oL morc agcltts suclì a heat prcssure, moisturc aDcl a catalyst.
I00I.2,25, Plank:--lt piece of sawn timbcr with thickness nor cxceccling
50lnn. and thc widtlì not lcss thal 100mm. or four timcs the thickncss.
1001,2.26, llnils :-l'lorizontal lììe¡ltbcrs of shuttç¡s of doors, window pancls
or fcncing,
1001,2,27. Ilebate : A recess along thc cdgc of a picce of ti¡nLrer to
rcacivc ânothcr piccc of door, sash or frame,
114 TI II] A,P, STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

1001.2.28. Reeper '.-Dl\ttcr used in rool construction

lOOl.2.29. Sap ,vootl :--Thc outcr layers ofthe log or thc outer c(lgcs in
cut timbcr which are usually lighter in colour than heart wood. Sap woocl of all
spccics of tiurber is sì.lbicct to dccay and dccomposition unless trcâted \'vitll
plescrvative. Sap woocl has llowçvc¡ thc samc mcchanical stlength as heartl wootl'

l00l,2.30. Scantling i A piccc oftimbcr whosc c¡oss-scctional clinensions

cxccccl 50mtn, in botlì the directions and do not exccccl 200 mm'

1001,2,31. Seasoning process involving the reduction of moishtre

:-A
contort in timbar under ¡nore or less conttollccl cotrditions lowalds or to ân nnro!¡rt
suitablc fo¡ tho puryose for which it is to bc uscd This shall be achicvcd eithct
by air seasoning or kiln scasoning.
1001.2.32. ,9úøte:--A partial or completo scparatio¡ì bctwccn thc adjoinings
laycrs ol tissucs.

t001.2.33. Shrinkage : 'fhc rcdLtction in di¡nensions

tâkcs plâce during drying.
1001.2.34. So[t wor.td :-A convcntional te rm trsed to dcnotc the wood
generally clcrivetl from coniferous valiety of woocl like Pine, Dcodar, F¡r, ctc.
Locally availablc sanrplcs of soft wootl arc Anduk, Gutrrpenc, Tabsy Burgu.
1001.2.35. ,Split:-A crâck cxtcrìding fronr onc face to another face.

1001,2.36. Stt'uctut\rl timber :'Jimbet used in lraming and loacl bearing

structurcs.

1001.2.37. Sryle t-A veltical piece of door shutter to which rails are
joined.

l00l .2.38, !'enon :-A tonguc like plojection matle on the end of ir piecc
of timber to fìl into a corrcsponcling mortise.
l00l.2.39. Venecr:-A thin shect of wood of trnifolm thickncss obtained
slicing, rotaty cutting or sawing.
l00l.2.40. Llarp:-A deviation in sawn timbcr from a truc planc surfacc.

1001.3.1. 'f imber :

f001.3.1.1. Quality :-lJnlcss otherwise specilìed, timber r¡secl in wood

work shall bc of approved qua)ity from thc spccics of wood listed in IS : 399 :
1963. (Classification of comnctcial timbcrs and thcir zonal distribution).

Timbcr shall bc well scasonecl, proper clressed, of uniform coloured and

ilurabilily of reasonably slâight grains and shall be from knots, cracks, shakes,
splits, cross grains dccay ancl sapwood, ctc
Rccommendecl specics of wood for certajn selected typcs of woocl work
appcar in Table l00l -4.
 s.s. l00l wooD woRK
-
Table 1001-A
Recommcn(led specics of wood for sclectcd typcs of ìvood work

Type of wood work Reconnended species

¡-amcs of Door, Window, Teak (Tectonogranndis lcnn.) Iì4asal (BIJ

Vcntilator and Cupbaord, Ptcrcarpas nrarsupium Roxb) Nallamaddi
(Tcrrninalia tonìcnlosâ weighte l) Barìduru
(Aclina colclifolia Ffook- F).
Shutters of Door, Window
and Cupboard
(a) Irramc Tcak, Bijasal, Nallamaddi, Bandaru, mango
(Manjifira inclicalinn).
(b) Pancl Teak, Bijasal, Bandam, Mango.
Flarrre work fbr cciling, lìij asal, Nallanraddi, Banclaru, Chinduga
cladding and pañitions (Allizziir ohora tininìa bcnth) Tcak.
Tr.usscs, pLrrlins, raftcrs, B¡isal, Nallamaddi, Chirnanu (Anogeisus latc
beams, posts, çtc. folia wall), Ippa (Madjuca sp Syn, Bassia sp)
Chcnnangi (Lagers tramia parviflóra robx)
Konda tangcdu zylia, xylocarpa tanb)
chinduga, tcak,

Moisture contcnt of timbe¡ used in wood work shall bc close as close as

possiblc, to thc lowcr values laid downin Table l00l-8.
Table 1001-B
Recommendcd values of moisture contcnt in ti¡nber at the
time of asscmbly of fiaming

Recontnenrled rctnge o/ moisture

content (%o)
Type rtf wood work
Coastal Areas Inland areas

1. Framcs of doors, windows, ctc. 16 to 18 pcr cent 14 to 15 per cent

2. Shuttcrs of door', window, etc, 15 to 16 per cent 12 to 14 per cent
3 [ìanc work for cciling, cladding, 16 to l8 pc¡ cent 14 to 15 per cent
etc,

Trusses, purlins, rafters, otc. 25 to 28 per cent 20 to 22 Der cent

1001,3.l.2. Cul s¡zes '.*Cut sizc shall be grouped in terms of width and
thickness or sectional a¡ea as follows;
 .IIIE A.P, STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

(¿t) scctional dimcnsion not exceedilg 50tlm'

Battcn
- Cross
in eithc¡ direction

(b) Plank Thickncss not cxcccding 50mm btrt width

- cxceeding l00mm
(c) Scantling C¡oss sectional dimcnsions cxccecling 50nm but
- not oxcceding 200nTrn, in cither dircctions'
(<1) Bulk Cross sectional <limensions exceeding 5Omm in
- onc dircction ancl 200mm. in othcr dirootion
1001.3.2 Wootl based Ptoduct '

1001.3.2 Plywoocl :-.Plywoocl shall gencrally conform to,JS:303 and

1.
s¡all ¡" oittl¡ee gratlós, namely, Ii W.n. leoiting Watar Rcsistant)
WWll (Warm
upon the atlhcsivc
wìi"r.n*tti.tttl o'n¿ C.w n. (óoh Water Resistant) <lepenclìng
w"¿ f"t U""Jfíg thc vcncerì anrl shall bc of çithcr commcrcial or clccoratìvc
varicly.
Plywoocl lor gcttcral purposes shall bc of six typcs, namely' -Az\'
AB' AC'
on quality of thc two Jàccs' each facc heing of threc
BB, IIC ind CC baied the
C iL both faccs of qtrrlity typa AB shall
[ñàr *Ã"rv A, B an<l rype itratt havc
havc one fatc of quality A and the other of quality IJ and so ou
ply rating antl gradc of plywood
LJnlcss othcrwisc specifìccl tlre thickness,
fbr various applications oi wood work shall be givcn below in Table
l00l-C'
Table 1001-C
Recommended thickness, ply rating åud grade of plywood
for various aPPlications

Åpplicttìons Thickness Plyating

(1) a) a)

Shutter panels :

(i) lntcrior location 9 mm. 5 plv, w.w,R.

l2 mm. 5 plv w.w.R.
15 mm. or 16 mm. 7 plv w.w.R.

(ii) F)rtcrior location 9 mm. 5 plv B.W.R.

l2 mnr. 5 plv B.W.R,
15 mm. o¡ 16 mm '7 ply B.W.R.

Shclving 12 mm. 5 plv c.w.R.

15 mm. or 16 mm 7 plv c.w.R.

Cladding, cciling and 4 mm. 3 plv w.w.R.

p¿rtitions 6 mnr, 3 plv w.w.R.
9 mml 5 plv w.w,R.
- s.s. 1001 wooD woRK 337

1001.3.2.2. Bloch board :

100l,.3.2.2.1. Block l¡oard shall gener.ally corfornì to IS j 1659-1965 and

shall bc of thc fbllowing two graclas :
(i) Gra¿le I :--Exterior gradc of block board mcant for bus boclics,
lailway coachcs fabricatecl houscs ancl whcrc it is likely to bc cxposcd to lìigh
humitlity, rain ctc.
(it) Grade 2 :-lntcrìor graclc of block boar.d ncant for furnitur.c,
partitions, panclling, cciling, ctc.
ti ch of thc gradcs spccifiecl abovc shall l¡e of comntclcial or clecor¿rtivc
varicty,
Thc grâdcs and varietics of block board in gencral usc arc dcsignatcrl, as
bclow.

Grocle and type Synbol

Intcr iol glaclc, commcrcial typc ICOM

Intcrior g|ade, clccorativc typc IDEC
Iixtcriol grade, comrncroial type XCOM
Flxtcrior grade, dccorativo typc XDEC]

'I hc rccommendecl
thickncss for usc ofblock boartl for pancls used for cloor.s,
windows and cupbaord shuttcrs nray bc l9mrn., and for shclving may bc l9utm.-
25mm.
l00l .3.2.3. I'urtitla bo¿rd:
1001.3.2.3.1. Particlc boarcl shall gencrally confor.m ro IS : 3087-1965 ancl
shall ì:c of four typcs ancl designatecl as bclow :

(ù plessecl single laycr board FPS I

(ii) Flat prcsscd thrcc layer boarcl FPTH
(iii) Extrusion pressccl solid boarcl XPSO
(iv) Extrusion prcssecl tubular-corc boarcl XPTC
1001.3.2.3.2. Veneered particlc boald shall gencrally conform to IS I 3097-
1965 and sball be of eight typcs an(l dcsignatecl as bclow
(Ð Intcrior solid colc, general purposc INSOGP
(ii) Intcrior solid corc, clocoratiye INSOI)
(ìii) Intclior tubular core, gcneral purposc INTUCP
(iv) Intcrior tubular core, dccorative INTUI)
(v) Exterior solicl core, gcncral purpose EXSOCP
(vi) ExtcrioL solicl corc, clccorative EXSOD
(vii) Extuior tubular corc, general pulposc ËX'TUGP
(viii) lìxterior tubular core, decorativc EXTUD
[^PDSS - 22]
 TIIE A,P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
Table 1001-D
'Ihc recommend€d typc and thickness of particle boârd
for various aPPlicâtions

Application Type Thickness Face of board

anci kintl <f resin

P¿ìncl inscrts in shutters :

Intcrior Flat press single l2rnnr. or Nakod urea formal

or multi laYer l5-l6mm. dchyde.
Ëxterior Irlat Press single l2mm. or Naked urca formal
or multi laYer 15- l6mm. dchyde.
Panels in wardrobcs Flat press single 15-16or Naked or veneercd
and cupboards layer l9mm. urca formal dehydc.
Pahcls in ceiling Extrusiotr 9mm. or Naked urca formal
partitions & claclding l2mm. dehydc
Shclvcs Extrusion l2mm. or Veneered, urca for-
l5- l6mrn. mal dehydc.

Thickness varics with thc panel size and spans,

Particlc board shall be workcd and prcpared for usc in wood work in
accordancc with l00l,
Whilc using particlc board in wood work guidance shall be taken from thc
appenclix 'A' namely "storage and working of wood particle Board" in IS : 3087-
196s.
l00l.3.2.4. Fibre hqrd board :

1001.3.2.4.1. Fibre hardboarcl shall gencrally conform to IS : 1658-1965

and shall be of thc following three typcs

Type Density kg./cu.m. (r#)

I Medium hard board 480 to 800

2 Normal hard board 800 to 1,200
3 Tempercd hard boarcl 1,200 ancl abovc

1001.4. Workmanship:
. 1001.4.1. Sawing ancl planíng =limber as well as fu¡niture to be used
in woocl work whcn so required, shall bc inspected and passed by the Executive
Engineer at thc sitc of work or at the sitc of manufacture. Rcjccted timber, wood
work or furniturc shall not remain at thc sitc of work. Timber shall be sawn truly
strtright ancl squarc and in the direction appropriate to the roquircmcnt of design
and strength. The scantlings shall be planed smooth and accutate with rebatos,
t---

s.s, 1002 wooD woRK 339

groovcs, rourìdings an(l mouldings as shown in thc drawings or as dircctcd by thc

Exocutivc tìngincor. All machining of timbcr or scantlings for planing shall be donc
beforc any prcscÌvativc trc¿ìtncnt is givcn and not aftcrwÂrds.
1001.4.2. Jointing antl .fi'aníng ;- Unlcss othcrwisc spcci{ìecl all joints
shall bc simplc mortisc ancl tcnon with thc cn(l of tho tcnon exposccl to vicw. All
joints shall fìt closcly ncatly and aÇcuratcly ancl in no casc wedging or filling in
shall bc done. The following principlcs shall be observcd in fornring joints unless
otherwise sPecificd-
(i)
to cr¡t thc joirìts and arrangc tho fîstcning so as not to unduly weaken
thc mcmbcrs of timber they connect ;
(ii) to placc cach abutting surfacc in a joint as ncarly as possible normal
to thc pressr¡re it uray have to transmit ;
(iii) to folrn ancl fìt accuratcly cvcry pair of surfrìcc thàt como in contact;
(iv) joincry work shall bcforc assembly bc passcd by thc Exccutive Enginecr;
(v) all joints shall bc sccurcd with hard wood or corrosion rcs¡sting, star
shapccl mctal pins uot lcss than 7mm. dia.

Iìraming ancl trusting are to be doue accurately in thc bcst possiblc manner
rusing all ncccssary iron tics, strap bolts, holcl fasts, nails, trinails, spikcs, scrcws,
otc., as pcr tho drawings or as d¡rected by the Exccutivc Enginecr. Driving in the
sorcws with a harnn'ìel is prohibite(l âncl corrcçt size holcs shall bc dlilled bcforc
inscfiing the scrcws.
1001.5. Finishing :-Thc junction of all frame works, rafters and other
woocl wo¡ks with masonry shall bc neatly finishod with pointing or plaster as the
casc n'ìay bc so as to ñt into thc grooves, if any lcft in the rvood work for this
purposc, Thc exposed wood work shall bc finished in aocordancc with the relevant
spaÇifications ol A.P.S.S. under Scctìon l2 with onc coat of primer and two coats
of oil paint of approved colour and shaclc or with Frcnch polish or varnish as nay
bc specified.
Thc faces of all timbcr in contact with or cmbcclded in masonry shall bc
wcll painted with two coîts ofhot boiling tar in accordance with A.P.S.S. No. I206
or gìvcn any othcr approvçd treatnìcnt.
Specification No. 1002
Doors, Wintlows, Ventilators, Wartl Robes ând Cup-boârds, ctc,
1002.1. All rolcv¿nt clâusos of l00l shall apply.
1002.2. Scope :-This specification lays down the requiroments regarrling
material, design, construction workmanship finish and inspection of doors ancl
windows, ctc., using timber, plywood, particle board, lipped block boarcl and
asbcstos ccmcnt pancls.

lt does not cover the doors and windows for ìndustrial ¿ìnd other spcci¿ìl typc
of builclings such as work-shops, garages, godowns, etc.
340 TIII] A,P, STANDAIID SPF]CIFICATIONS
1002.3, tìI'âmcs lbr tloors, ìvindolrs, ventilators, lvard-robs antl cup-
borirds, ctc.
1002.3. L Slz¿s und t.ypes :-Thc sizes and lypcs of franes of doors,
winclorvs ancl vcntilators shall be as shown in Table 1002-A soon with Fig.l002 l

ÉLl
7 DT/S 20
m
8 DT/S 20
m El ntL
ll-,l
t0 DT/s 20
6ws13 gwr13 1:

l- 17s0 -l
ls0t-
-f-[
2rs0
tiil
IlL
,;
r Llll I [_[]
1B WR 13
2.1 DTIS 22 Width of each panel 510 mm 24 WO 15
wtNDows
DOORS
-19901- -.1 1190 l-

ll dincnsions in Millirnctcrcs
-lss0l-
E
6V6
trlv
10 6
VËNTILATORS
E
'12 V6

[Fig. 1002.1]
TIMEBER DOORS, WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS

1002.3.2. Designafiolr :'-Þ-Íames of doors, winclows and ventilators shall

be dcsignatccl by syrnbols clenoting their width, type and hcight in that oldcr ancl
in the followiug nanner,
l4/¡dth :-lt shall bc indicated to by tho numbçr of ¡nodulcs in thc width of
opening.
Types :-ll shall bc indicated by thc following l€tters of thc alphabot.
D Door l'-Double shuttcÌ
P-Two pancls
V-Vgntilatol R-Three pÂncls
S-Single shuttcr Q-Four panels
Weighl :-_It shall bc indicated by thc nunber of l00mm modtrles in thc
height of opcnìng,
Exuuple :--11 DT 20 should nlcan a framc of a tlouble shuttcr door w¡th
a witlth ol ll modulcs (1090mm.) and height of 20 modules (1990)
1002.3.3. Combi¡ration of frâmcs of l)oors, Windoìvs and Ventilators
: Whcn frames of cloors and windows ate combinccl with those of wìndows and
vcntilators, thcy shall be dcsignatcd in the following manner :
,-

s.s. 1002 WOOD WORK 341

Exanple :--(l) 6 V!/S l0/ I 1 DT 2016 WS l0 means 1 I modulcs widc and

20 modules high doublc shuttcr door frame combinecl, on its two siclcs, with two
sìlglc shuttcr, windows 6 modulcs wide ancl l3 moclules high.
Unless othcrwisc specificcl thc sizcs ofscantlings for framcs ofdoors, windows
rnd ventilators shall conform to thc reqì.Liremcnts spccificd in Table 1002-A subject
to î gcncral tolerallce -l- 3mln - 2mm.
Table 1002-A
Sizcs of scantlings for lïames of doors, windows and ventilators

Sc{ultil¡ gs
Descript¡on Size of openhg
in tnodules Itidth in Depth in
n1 1. h1111.

A. l)oors 7 DT/S 20 50 '75

8 DT/S 20 50 75
l0 D't/s 20 50 100
12 D1'/S 22 65 100
B. Windows 6MS 13 50 75
9 WT 13 50 '15
13 wT 13 50 100
18 WQ 13 65 100
24 WQ 15 65 100
C. Vcntilators 6V6 50 65
10v6 50 6s
12v 6 65 75

1002.3.4. Construction ond fix¡ng i

1002,3.4.1. Thìs irem shall bc car¡ied out in conformity with lS :4021-
1967 (clause 4) with clove tail or mortise and tenon joìnts.
1002.3.4.2.1. When ventilator is included in the door or window frame full
length for thc total height shall be Uscd. Thc unrebatecl edges ofthc frarne in thc
opening shall be lounded or beaded uniformly unless othor types of mouldilg or
gtoovos arc shown otr thc drawings,
10023.4.2. Thc frames shall be erected in position and held plumb with
strong supports fro¡n both sides. llold fasts shall be cmbccldcd firmly in C.C. beds
as specificd. The shutters shall be fixed later. Frames shall havc dovc tail or tenon
and mortise joints.
1002.3.4.3. Thc trrìlìsom shall bc through-tcnonctl into the rnortiso of thc
jamb posts to the full width of thc jamb Þost and the thickness of thc teno¡ì shâll
be not less than l5 mm, Tho tonons shall be closely fitting into thc mortiscs and
pinncd with corrosion resisting, star shaped metal pins not lcss than 7mm. dia. or
wìth woodcn dowcls not less than ?mm. dia. The sizc of tlìc rcbato in franrcs for
 THil 1\.P. STANDARD SPDCIFICATIONS

housing thc shuttcrs shall bc ftonr 32 to 35 x 12nìm cxccpt when a flush tloor
shuttar of clifTercnt thickness is intcndecl to bc used.
1Q02.3.4.4. Unlcss othcrwisc specified thc franrc shall have thc satne finish
as thc shutlers.
1002,3.4.5. While lìxing door frames witltotrt sills, the vcrtical monbcr
shall buricd in thc flool to a mirrimum of lOmm depth
The rkror framcs without sills bc provicled with tcnrporary woodctt bracìngs
bctwccn thc stylas ât thc sill lcvcl whjch shall be withclrawn after fixing in position.
1002.3.4.6. Bcforc fìxing itr position, tlto framcs shall bc inspccted an<l
passccl by thc I'lxccutivc lJnginccr. Priming coat shall bc applied befotc thc framcs
nr" fi^",i in position. All Poltions of untroatad timber abuttilìg against or cmberìtlcd
in masouy ór concrctc shall bc paintccl with boiling coal ta¡ l:eforc bc placcd ìn
position, lü placc ol- coal tar ttsc of approved prcservativc may be permittod'
-[hc lrancs shall thcrl bc
¡rlacccl in proper position an<l sccured to thc
strlrctrrro with iron hold fast or any othcr mcclia as pet dlawings or as directetl by
thc Ëlxccutivo Enginccr.
1002.3.4,7, Frune work for cu¡t boatcls :-Thc scctional climcnsion of
francs shall 75ntm, x 50mtn. in casc of cttp boarils cqual to door heights. and 65
x 32mm. in case of smallçr cup boards, with a stanclarcl rcbatc of 32mm. whcrevcr
shuttcrs aLc to l.)c uscd.
1002.3.4.8. Ilold Jìtsts :'---A mininum number of thrce hold fasts shall be
hxe<l to cach post of thc ctoor frame, onc at thc ccntre point ancl thc other tvr'o
at 300mur. fiom the top and thc bottom of thc framc. Two hold fasts to cach post
of the winclows and ventilator frames, shall bc fixed at quader points of thc f¡ame.
The holcl fasts shall bc fixetl in suitable block of cemcnt concreto. Thc mild stecl
hold fasts shall bc of thc sizc 300 x 400 x 5mm. of lhe 'Z', shapc anrl cach shall
have two holcs clrillecl in for fixing counter-srtnk lcad scrcws. Each holcl fast shall
*
be fixccl with two mild steel screws of not less than 35mm 5mm, For wittclow
fiamos, two hold fasts as above shall bc fixcd to each post of frams.
1002.4. Shuttels for doors, windows, Yentilators' wardrobes and cup
boards:-
1002.4.1. Shutter ftrunes :- {he recommendcd sectional dimensions of
scautlìngs of shuttcr fiamcs aro given in Table 1002-8.
Table 1002-B
Reconrmendcd Scctions of frame scantlittg in rnlll

llinclow ctnd Ward-robe

Cot ponenls Door SlNlte| Yenlílator and cupboønl
slulter sltullet'

Stylcs 75 x 32-35 65 x 32-35 50x32

'fop rail '15 x 32-35 65 x 32-35 5Qx32
- s.s, t002 wooD woRK
Bottom rail 100 x 32-35 65 x 32-35 50x32
Lock rail 100 x 32-35 50x 32
lntomcdiatc rail 50 x 32-35 50 x 32-35 5Ox32
Tolerauce -L 2mnr, in larger dimensions and j lmm. in the smaller climensions.

The stylcs and rails shall bc properly and accurately mottiscd and tenoncd.
Thc cnd styles arcl all raìls of shuttors shall bc made out of one piece only.
Wherc morc than one picce of timbcr is used the joint shall be madc with a
continuous tongue arÌd groove gluctl togcther and reinforced witlì nÌst proof metal
dowels or lreadless pins not loss than 35mm. langth at rcgular itrfervals nol nrorc
thârì 200mm. apart. Jointed picccs of timbe¡ shall be of onc spccies only.
Thc stylcs and rails shall be grooved on the inncr faccs fot thc panel inscrts
to fit in.
1002.4.2. Shulter parels :-Materials for shutter pancls, for tloors, windows,
ward-¡obcs ancl cupboarcls shall be as pcl Tablc l00l-A and l00l-C.
1002.4.3. Timber .Sl¡¿rfr¿ru :-T¡rbcr for panelling shall be fronr the
recommerrdecl specie ofwood and shall be kiln scasouccl, unlcss otherwise specified.
The shuttcrs shall be of any of the following types :
l. Plain panclled shutters,
2. Bevellcd panellcd shutters.
3, Ledged, btaced and battencd shuttors,
'fhosa shuttcrs are recommended both for doors and for intcrior ancl exterior
locatìons.
1002.4.3.1. Plaín pønelled shull¿/-r :-Thc direction of the natural g¡ain of
wood shall bc the direction in which thc long dimension ofthe panel will run The
minimum width of each panel shall bc l50mm. and the minimum thickness l2mm..
Panels shall bc insertcd to tho extent of lOmm. in the grooves made inside the style
and rail framc on all the four sides.
1002.4.3.2. Bavelled panelled shutfers '.-The planks used for bevelled
pancls shal have a minimum width of 200mnl. and minimum thickne ss of l5mm.
Bcvclling or chamfering shall be done at the outer edgcs of cach panel so as to
achieve a thickness of 10mm. at the cnd, to suit the groovc made in the style and
rail frame on all the four sides,
Thc edge shall be beadcd, grooved or moulded as specified. The panel, or
fitting into the shuttcr frame, shall show its bevclled facc towards the outer sicle
of thc door or winclow and shall be raised by a minimum of 2 mm The inside
facc of the panel shall be flat.
1002.4.3,3, Ledged, bracecl and battened shulters:--The battens used shall
havc a thickness of 25mm. width of cach being not lcss than I50 mm. Unless
otherwise specified, all battens in a shutter shall be of equal width The top, bottom
and middle ledges of thc shutter shall bç 150 x 30mrn For windows, thc battçns
 I'LIË] A P- STANDA.RD SPI]JCI ìiIC]ATf ONS

shlll bavc a thickncss of 29nìm. and wicltlì not lass than 75rnm. Thc lcclgcs shall
be of 75 x 25nrnr. sizc. Thc b¡'accs shall be fixcd as shown in thc dlawing ân(l
shall bc of thc san'ìc scction as that of the ledges. The lcclgc shall bc 3Onìnì. sholtcl'
in lcngth than the width of the shutter, altd fixed across the shuttor in such a way
as to bc sholt by 15mm. ât thc outcr cncl of thi or¡tcr lnost battcns. Thc top an(l
boltolll lcclgcs sball be ñxcd l5mm. f¡rrnr tlìc top an(l boltonr cnds of thc shuttcr.
The braccs shall bc notchcd into tho lodgos ancl cach battcn shall bc fixcd at cvcry
uossiug with Icdgc ancl bracc, with â na¡l 65mm. long which shall tbcn bc clcnchccl
at tho cnd. Tho batton shall ìn adclition bc rcb¿rtcd togcthcr with lOmm of rcbatcs
all along tlreir lcÌrgth, cxcopt the end trattcn which shall havc moulclccl ecìgcs on
thc front lìcc. Thc shutter shall bc fixed in the framc with the lcdgcs ancl braccs
showing on thc outside facc of thc cloor or window.
Thc shuttcls shall bc fixcd to the franìc with 'T' strap hingcs scrcwccl to
thc lcdgcs. (Scc Fig. 1002.2 & 1002,3).

DOOR WITH LEDGED BRACED AND BATTENED SHUTTERS

lFis. 1002.21

1 t

OU]SIDE SECTION ON AB
 s.s, 1002 wooD woRK
-
WINDOW WITH LEDGED BRACED AND BATÏENED SHUTTERS
lF¡s. 1002.31

' \\\
'i\1"
/':' \.{.-
/,.OUTSIDE\.
'\r---.
*.<:/
SECTIONAL RAN ON CD -.-t$

1002,4.4. Plywootl and particle board panels Jor rálllerr :-Pancl inserts
shall be sct in tho groovos or corrcsponding width and l2mm. dcpth madc in thc
stylc and lail ofthe shuttor. ln thc casc ofcupboards and wardrobcs plyrvood pancls
with woodcn lipping alround may thcmselvcs bc uscd as a shuttcr. Lipping shall
be of thc same quality of wood as used for sbutter, stylc ancl rails and shall bc
6nrm. thick. Lipping shall be glucd with rcsin to thc plywood or parficlc board and
thc pancl shall bc scourcd to thc framo with continuous hisgc,
1002.4.5. Flush tlpe shutlers :-"fhc flush tloor shuttc¡s are generally
manufacnucd by cliffetcnt firms and thc clepartmcnt purchases their produce whcrever
flush doors shuttcrs arc to bc fixcd in a builcling.
Thc flush door shuttcrs shall bc of the following typos an(l shall conform
to thc ISS notcd against oach :
L F'lush-door shuttcrs solid-crore typc :
346 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

(a) Plywoocl facc panels IS : 22Q2 (Part-l) l-l 1973.

(b) Particlc board facc panels IS :2202 (Part-II)-1966'

2. Flush door shutters with cellula¡ and hollow-core type :

(a) Plywoorl face panels IS : 2l9l (Part-l) 1973.

(b) Particlc board face panels IS : 2l9l (Part-ll¡1966.

1002.4.6. Gl¿zed shuttqs .

1002.4.6.1 , Gktss :

1002.4.6, I .1. Thc glass shall have uniform thicknessand shall be free from
air holcs, bubblcs, scratches, flaws and specks and other defects. The following shall
be the specification for differcnt kinds of glasses gcnerally ttsecl.

1002.4.6.1.2, .Transparent sheel Gla.vs :

1002.4.6.1.2.1. Thc shcet glass shall conform to IS: l76l-1960 and shall
havc the following thickness as shown in Table 1002-8.
Table 1002-G

Size of Glass Panes Maximum required thickness

Upto 600mm, x 600 nrm, 3mm.

From 600mrn. x 600 mm to 900mm. x 900mm. 4mm.

F'rom 900mm. x 900mm. to 1200mm. x 1200mm 5mm.

For panes above 900mm, x 900 thc thickness shall be as fixecl by the
Executive Engincer.
1002.4.6.1.2.2. Tolerance:-[n measuring the thiÇkness of glass panels
tolerance shall be pormitted as per Table 1002-F,
Table 1002-D
Toleranccs

Thíckness Tol¿,.rance thickness mnt

2.00 to 4mm plus and minus 0.2

s.00 plus and minus 0.3

1002.4.6.1.3. Obscured G/øss :-This type of glass transmits light so that

the vision is partially or almost completely obscured. Plane rolled or doublc rolled,
figurecl, rolled ribbed fluted, forsted glass on one ot both sides arc principal types,
The ribbcd or flutcd type of glass shall be used when more diffused types of lighting
is desired that can bc obtainad with other types of obscurecl glass. The type atrd
- s,s. 1002 wooD woRK 34'l

thicknoss of glass shall be as mentioned in the item or specified wìth drawings,

or as ditected by thc Exccutive Engineet.
1002,4.6.1.4. llired Glass:-ln this type of glass wirc netting is cmbedded
in a sheet glass. Elcctrically welded l3mm. georgian square mesh or 22mm. hexagonal
mcsh is insc¡tcd during rolling. The thickness of glass shall not be less than 6 mm
unless otherwise specified.
1002.4.6.1.5. Putty=1he putty to be used for fixing thc glass in wooden
frames shall conform to lS : 419-1967. Th€ putty may be coloured to suit thc colou¡
of door or window, etc.

1002,4.6.2. Glazing :-Glazillrg shall be of good glass panes not lcss than
3mm. thick, ancl in accordancc with the sizcs given in Table l00l-E or as specified.
The glass panel shall bc cut as to fit slightly loosc in the rebatos of sashes. ln doors,
winclows and vontilatois of bath ancl W.C. translucent glass panes or louvcrs shall
bc usecl. Thc panes shnll be flixod with the plain facc on the outer sidc. Supcrior
glass panes such as shect glass, plate glass, pin-head glass etc., shall be uscd where
so specificd, Glass panes shall bc fixcd by woodcn beading having rnitrcd joints
A thin layer of putty slrall be appliecl betwcen glass panes and sesh bars and also
between glass panes pas and the beading. Putty shall be preparecl by mixing onc
part of wþitc lead \vith threc parts of finely powderecl chalk and adding boiled
linseed oil to the mixture to form into a stiff pastc. Putty shall conform to IS :
419'11967 and shall be coloured to suit the colou¡ of wood wo¡k.
Whcre clry glazing is specificd, glass shall bc hclcl in place by rnoulcled
wooden fillets fixed with brass screws. Round the end of thc glass and between
thc glass and wooden fillet a picce of chamois wash leather o¡ fclt shall be inscted
to act as a cushion,
Class panes shall not be inserted in the frame until the latter has bcen primed
and preparecl foi painting to prevont the oil being drawn out of the putty.
Clazing shall not be considered completed unless all stains and marks have
bcçn removed from the surface of the glass.
1002.4.7 . Fixtures and lastenings :-All fixtures and fastcnings shall unless
otherwiso spccificcl bc of rnild steel, brass or aluminium alloy and shall comply
with relevant IS Specification as given below :
lS : 204-1974 Specification lbr Tower Bolts.
IS : 205-1966 Specificâtion for non-ferous mctal but hingcs
lS : 2Q6-1973 Specificiìtion for fce and Strap hinges
lS : ?-07-1967 Spccification foÍ Gato and shlrttcr lìooks and eyes.
lS : 208-19'12 Specifìcalion for Door handlcs.
tS : 281-1973 Specification for sliding cloor bolts, mild stecl for use
with Pad locks.
IS : 362-1975 Specification for parlìamcnt hinges.
IS : 363-1970 Specification for hasps and staples.
348 TFIE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

Unless otherwisc spccified cloot, window, ward-robc ancl cllr'\/';.r'd shutters

shall be provided with fittings and furniture as shown in thc r .' wing tablc :
Table 1002-E
Recolnmended lìittings and Furnitur€ fbl ,or Shuttcrs

Port¡cLtlers of /ittitlgs and fitrn¡lure 'lwo leal Síngle leaf

Ilutt hingcs with suitable slottcd Çounter sunk head

scrcws confornring to lS : l34l-1970 l25nrrn. long
with 50mm. screws
Tower bolts conforming to IS : 204-1974 top towor
bolts (300mm. long with 25mm. screws) 2
(ii) Bottom tower bolts l5Omm. long with 25mm.
sctgws I
Alclrop I
Door hanclles confbrming to IS : 208-1972 2
(where aldrop
not used)
Wincl cleats or other approvctl typc of leaf. stoppcrs 2

Table 1002-F
Rccommcnrlcd Fittings and Furniture for Window Shutters

Par!Ìculars of fttittgs and furniture Single leøJ More lhqn

tlpe I leaf/per leaf

BìJt hingcs with suitable counter sunk head scrcws

confornring tò IS : l34l-1971, l00mm. long with
50mm. screws (fol sidc hung and top hurg window)
Tower boll conforming to IS : 204-19'74- Top towel
bolts 150mm. long with 25mm. screws
Bottom towar bolt with 25mm. screws
Wind cleats or other approvcd typo of leaf stoppers

Table 1002-G
Rccommended Fittings ard Furniturc for Cupboards and Wardrobes
Shùttcrs

Butl hinges as per dctails for window shrttters 2 pcr leaf

Door handles I No. leaf
Sliding latches I No. leaf
Any approvccl type of locking arrangcmont 1 No. leaf
 s.s. 1002 wooD wol{K 349
-
The size, design ancl linish of tl'ìc lixturc shall bc as shown on drawings or
as directcd by the Executive Enginecr. Samples of all fixhrrcs and fastcnings to
be uscd shall bo got apptovod by tha Exccutivc Enginecr antl dcpositcd in his officc
for refercnce.
All
fixturcs shall bc securely fixcd to thc joincry. Any of thc fixturos
damagcd during fixìng shall bc ¡emovcd and ncw oncs fixcd in thcir place ancl thc
surfacc of joinery made good wherc affectecl at the contractors' cxpense.
Thc lock rail of cloor shuttcrs wherc ¡rrovidcd shall bc so placcd that its
ccntre line is at a hoight of 750mm. from thc bottom of thc shuttcr.
Unlcss othcrwisc spccificd cach lcaf of thc door shall bc hung oalcfully so
as to rnovo frccly and fitted accurâtely with threc butt hinges, ono at thc canlrc
and the othet two at 200mm, from the top ancì thç bottonì of thc shutter. Ilach
window shuttcr shall bc fixcd to its frame with two butt hinges ât quârter points.
F,aclì vcntilator shuttc¡ shall be fìxccl eithc¡ to its franìc with two butt hi[ges ât
top rail or suspcndcd on a suitablc pcg stay in thc ccntrc of f¡amc.
Whcrc parliamcnt hingcs arc to bc uscd, thc door or window fiamc shall
bo fixcd so that thc shuttcr will fold back parallcl to thc wall, lcaving 5mrn.
clearanoc.
A mctal slcevc or othcr suifablc dcvice shall bc providcd, whele thc cnd of
thc bolt antcrs brick, stonc corlcrcto, ctc.'Ihese shall be fixed flush with the surface
and cementecl or onhe¡wise sccured whcLe thc bolt entors tho wood. Mortisc platcs
sct flush with the surface shall be use<l ovcr the holcs, Butt ancl similar hinges shall
be counte¡sunk flush with thc leaf edge ancl woocl framc,
1002,4,8. Il/eki mesh, expandecl melal dn¿ Fly proof mesh panels :

1002,4,8.1. Wekled steed wire fobric (wekled nesh) :

1002.4,8,1 .1. Generql :-Wcl(lecl stecl wirc fabric shall consist of a series
of longitudinal ¿rncl transversc cold drawn steel wiros (as drawn or galvanisccl)
aranged at right angles to each othor and welded togothcl at all thc points oi
intcrsection. The fabric shall generally conform to the requiremcnts of IS : 4948-
1974.
1002.4.8.1.2. Pattern :-Slandatd pattcrns used in square or oblong meshes.
The common sizcs of meshes are givcn in Tablcs 1002-H,
Table 1002-H
Mesh sizes and Wire Sizes commonly used

,s/. Mesh size nonùnl pitch of I)iameler oJ wíre

w¡re nn. way mtn,

Ì 20 2.00
2 25 2.00
3 50 2.50
4 75 3.15
350 TFIE A,P, STANDARD SPECIFfCATIONS

Oblong neslt

.9/. LongitudinaL Transverse Long¡ludínal Trunsverse

tnm mlll,

5. 50 25 2.5 2.5

75 z5 3.15 3.1 5
6.

7. '75 50 3.15

1002.4.8.2. Expøncled metal steel sheet (Expanded metal jalee) :-ExPandod

metal stcel sheet (Expánded metal Jalee) shall generally conform to 1S 412-1962'
Thc expaudecl meìal sheet shall bc free from flaws, joints, stands, laminations and
other hàrmful effects. It shall have a suitablc protoctive treatmcnt to prevcnt corrosion.
It shall be specified in terms of both shofi-way mesh ancl long-way mesh Table
1002-J shows thc properlies ancl dimensions of expanded mstal sheets for
general
numoscs,
"------------ Dima"-oti¡ Largcst
Size of of strands strancl &
mesh (Nominal) size of sheots

l. 25 75 J.25 2.24 4.564 5.82 2.5 4.85

2. 25 '75 3.2s 1.60 3.262 4.16 2.5 4,85

3. 25 75 3.25 .1.25 2.548 3.25 2.5 4.8 5 2.5 x 3.75

&.
|.25x 3.75
4. Z0 60 3.25 3.15 8.023 10.23 2.5 3.7 5 2.5 x 3.75
5. 20 50 3.25 3.15 8.023 10.23 3.7 5 3.7 5 2.5 x 3.'7 5
6. 20 60 3.25 2.24 s.709 7 .28 2.50 3.7 5 2.5 x 3.75
8.
t.25 x3.75

7. 20 50 3.25 2.24 5.709 7 .25 3.'ì 5 3.7 5 Do.

8. 20 60 3.25 1.60 '4.0'78 5.20 2.50 3.7 s Do.

9. 20 50 3.25 L60 4.078 5.20 3.7 5 3.7 5 Do.

10. 20 60 2.50 1.25 2,447 3.12 2.50 4.75 Do.

11. 20 50 2.50 |l25 2.447 3.12 3.'t5 3.7 5 Do.

12, 12.5 50 3.2s 1.60 6.525 8.32 2.50 3.00 2.50 x 2.75
&.
l.25 x2.75

13, 12.5 40 3.25 L60 6.525 832 3.',7 s 3.00 Do.

14. lz.5 50 2.50 1.60 5.019 ó.40 2.50 3.00 Do.

 s.s, 1002 wooD vr'oRK
-
15. 12,5 50 2.50 t.25 3.921 5.00 2.50 3,00 Do.
16. 12.5 40 2.50 t.25 3.92t 5,00 3;7 5 3.00 Do.
t7. 12.5 50 2.50 1.00 3.t37 4.00 2.50 3.00 Do.
r8. 12.5 40 2.50 t.00 3.t3'1 4.00 3.'15 3.00 Do.

t002.4.8.3. llíre cloth (Fly proof mesh) :

1002,4.8.3.1. The wire cloth shall generally conform to lS : 1568-1970.

1002.4.8.3.2. 'Iho wirc used in the manufachrrc of thc wire cloth (Gauzc)
shall be of brass, bronze, mile steel, aluminium alloy or plastic Specihcation for
the mato al and for protection covering on the wire, where rcquired, shall bc as
given by the Executive Engineer.
1002.4.8.3.3, The wire used in the manufacturc of the wire gauze shall be
well drawn, frec from scales, inequalities, splits, etc., of circrtlar cross-section and
of uniform ductility throughout its lorìgth to avoid hard lumps or soft spots in the
finished wire gauze.
1002.4.8.3,4. Unless otherwise specifiecl thc size of thc opening shall be
about lmm. and tho thickncss ofthe wire unless otherwise spccificd shall be not
less than 0.5mm.
1002.4.8.3.5. The wire gauze shall be rcgularly woven with a trumber of
equally spaced parallel wires in both warp and weft dircctions to produce uniform
squarc meshes or openings. The wire gauze shall be prope y secured by one or
more wires on both the edges.
1002.4.8.3.6. Crimping of wires may be done, where neccssary to facilitate
construction and to minimise djstortion of aperturcs,
1002.4.8.4. Fixing:
1002.4.8.4.1. Unless otherwise specified, the expanded metal or weld mesh
shall be cut in one piece to the required size and shall be flrxed on to the frame
with staples over which wooden hcading shall be fixed with sc¡ews.
1002.4.8.4.2. Where fly proof mesh is used, the wire gauge shall be bent
at right angles in the rebates of styles and rails, and turned back and fixed tight
with tack nails to th€ two faces of the rebates. Over this wooden heading shall be
fixed with brade or small screws. The space between the beading ând the ¡obates,
wherc tho wìrc gauze is bent shall be nearly finished with putty so thíìt the cnd
of the wire gauze shall not be visible.
1002.4.9. M.S. Bqrs, Flqls and Grills fxed in Frømes for windows, etc i
1002.4.9-1. M.S. Bars, M.S, Flats and M.S. Grills shall be fixed as per
detailed drawings or as directed by the Executive Engineer.
1002.4.9.2. Where M.S. Bars are to be fixed in wooden framcs of window
etc., through holes shall be drilled in the frame and the bars shall bc passed in to
the frame from one side to the other and these shall be of correct length to fit flush
with the outside of the frame at both ends. Where M.S. Flats are provided along
352 TTIE A.P. STANDARD SPTJCIFICATIONS

with thc bârs, thc lbfl]]er shall be inscrted into thc frama to a dcpth of not lass
than 25nn. at either end, The ba¡s shall be passcd through thc holcs drilled in
tho flâts.
C¡ills shall bc fabricatcd as per design ancl fixecl to thc framc by round-
hcarlc<l bolts and nuts in ncw work and by wood scrcws in olcl work,
1002.4.9.3. M.S. Bars ald flats if provicled shall be finished with tÌvo coats
of painl of approvcd coloul ancl shacle ovel a priming coat in accordancc with thc
lelevant specifications of Scctiou 12. All iron work insertccl in the woo<l work or
to be eml¡eddod in masorrry shall l¡e trcatcd bcforc e¡cction with two coats of hot
ooat as par S.S.No. 1206 or with bituminous pâint as pcr S.S. No. l2l5 or any
othcr anticorrosivc paint as may be specificd, M.S, Bars or flats wharovcr fittcd
to flamcs shall bc given thc fir'st coat ofpaint bcforc thc framcs ale fixcd in position
ancl thc rcmaining coats after the liames are fixcd.

1002.5. Measurement :

1002.5.1, All lincar lncasurcmonts shall be in metres, corrcct to 0.01 oî

a mctrc. All area shall bc workecl out in squarc motrcs, corract to 0.01 of a squarc
mohc. All volume shall bc workcd out in cLrbic trrctres, correçl to 0.001 of a cubic
metrc.

1002.5.2. Only thc overall dimcnsions of doors, windows, vcntilators,

walchobcs ancl cu¡t-boarcls after'fixing fr¿rmcs antl shuttels ¿rncl finishcd in accordance
witlì this sÞacification shall bo mcasurecl.

1002.5,3. Whcre shutters arc moasured separately, they shall be measured

in closecl position including the rebates of thc framc. Overlaps of shuttc¡s shall not
be measurccl. All shuttcrs shall be mcasurcd net as fixed without anv allowancc
fcrr joints, mouldings, ctc.

1002,5.4. Where the drawings show a wooden throshold plate for a door
opening on to a verandah, thc floor level of the room and not of thc verandah shall
bc the point of measurement for the height of'thc door.
1002.5.5. M.S, Bars and flats shall be measurcd in runuiug motres, corroct
to 0.01 of a motro scpalâtely for different diamctres and the wcight workccl out
in tonnos, corrcct to 0.001 of a tonne. Crills shall bc mcasured out to out including
thc framo work.
1002.5.6. Whcre f¡ames are to be measurcd scparately, they shall bc
measured il numbcr according to their sizes or according to theit aroa.
1002.6. Ratc :

1002,6.1, Thc unit ratc for paymant for door, window, yentilator, wardrobes
antl cupboard shall be per numbcr of pcr sq.m,
1002.6.2. Unless othcrwise specificd, the rate shall includc sawing, planing,
tuoulcling, jointing framing and fixing in position, charnfering and glazing in
accordance with the drawing or as directecl by the Executive Engineer. Unless
othelwise spccified the rate shall also include all fastcnings, fittings and fixtures.
 WOOD WORK 353
s.s. 1003

1002.6.3. M.S. B¿rs, flats and grill shall be paid for per 100kg'
1002.6.4. Wherc framcs are to bc paid for separately the rate shall bc per
sq.m.
1002,6.5. Whcrc shutters íuc to bc paid for separately the rate shall bc per
sqm
SPecification No. 1003
Frame Work for Roofs
1003.1. ,\ll rclçvant clauses of SS : l00l ancl 1002 shall apply'
1003.2. Timber for frame work for ¡oofs shall generally be from the
spccies rccommentlccl in Tabtc l00l-A scasoned timber shall bc
userl with
prcs!'rv¡rlivc tlcltnìcnt whcrcvcr ncccsslry.
1003.2.1. The truss members, joints and fiìstenings shall be in accordance
with cùawings. A fu1l soalc layout of tlìo tmss on n stritably prcparecl levcl surfacç
shall be uscd to cnsuro acÇulatc assctnbly.
1003,2,2. Thc ttusses shall be calcfully hoisted and stayecl in trtrc position
till built in or otherwise securcd with bolts, hoklfasts, purlins ot othcr connccting
mcmbcrs, 'Ihe trusscs shall be fixcd on templates or cemant concfote
betl blocks'

1003.2.3, Thc portion of truss members abutting against or cmbetìtlcd in

masonly or concrcte shall bc paintecl with builcling coal tar or bituninous or rcd
bearns, walls
lead paínt beforc bcing placccl in position. Junctions of rafcrs, purlins,
plnt"., shall Uc suitìbly trcatcd. All mctal fastenings shall be protected against
corrosion"t".,by approvod treatmcnt.
Note :--Thc Timber Enginecring Branch of Forest Rcscarch lnstitutc, Dehra
Dun, has clevelop'cd thc theory and practice of Timber Engincering in this cortntry
to such an cxtenì that effectivc spans upto 35 metres havc bccn exacutcd in wood
and furlhcr cletails antl <lesigns óan be obtainod fiorn lhern ln thesc dcsigns,
the
clinrensions of individual picies of timber used arc usually very small Rails, bolts
antl 4iscs and ¿owcls are uied as connectors in the lengthening
joints. The constnrction
oftrusses (above ? metros span) is of tho tvr'in-chord type (in rospect of the prircipal
.aftcrs and tie beam of thc truss) aÌìd thc tcnsion and compression membcLs are
plovidccl as a web betwecn chords.
1003.3. Othcr mcmbers of sloping roofs :
1003.3.1. Connton rafters:_-Common raflers shall be fixed at spccifìecl
as possible
clistances or as tliròctcd by tlìo Exccutivc Engineer' They shall as fär
bc in ono continuous length from riclge to cavcs They shall bc slightly notched
to fit into thc purlins ancl notched and nailed to the wall plates nurl thcir lowQl
onds. At tho uppcr encls thc common ¡aftcrs shaìl bc lappecl and spikecl h thc case

of va¡andalt ,àof the tops of common rafters, shall bc secured to thc

"ovcrings, it
wall platc laitl in the wall and not mcrcly built into
l(\03.3.2. Purlitts and purlinc/eø1r :--Purlins shall be fixed at specifiecl
distances or as clirectecl by the Exccutive Engineer' They shall be in thc
greatest
lengths procurable, They s'hall bc scarfcd togathcr, wherovcr necessary immccliately

l^I,DSS - 2ll
 TI.IE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

above tho plinc¡pâl raftcrs of thc truss on which thc ends rcst. They shall bc sccurcd
in position by clcats, clcats prepared to thc requircd shape sball bc spikctl on to
thc principal raftcr or housed in it. All thcsc atc shown in Figs, 1003 1 & 1003 2

KING POST TRUSS

lFig. No. 1003.1l

NOTE :-WOODEN WALL PLATES UNÞER TIE BEAI\,IS MAY BE USED

BUT CUT STONÊ BED PLATES OR CC BEDS ARE PREFARABLE

QUEEN POST TRUSS

f Fig. No. 1003.21

TILE MANGALORE PATTERN

CUT S-ÍONE IRON PLATE

BED PLATE WITH BOLTS

1003.3.3. Ri(lge:-ln the casc of king post truss roof, thc riclge piece shall
be held in position by slotting the heacl of the king post ln thc casc of quecn post
-
s.s, 1004 wooD woRK 355

ñss thc riclge piecc shall be supported over the joint of exte¡clcrs of principal
riclgc
t'o-t"tr on¿ ifialiUe spitccl on to ìhcm. ln casc there arc no end.trusses'.the
ri"lf-i" t"pp"rrc¿ oi a tcmplate over the masonry and secured to it Vidc Figs
1003.1 and 1003.2
lóOl.l.+. ttip rcrrÎer ancl valley rofters :-Ìd'ip ancl valley rafter shall abutt
nouinrt n,i,i bc spiked tã thc ritlgc board. they shall be continous ovc¡ the wall
;i;ì;.;J r";t",i to it by notchiñg and nailing and tcrminated at thc
eaves boarcl

1003.3.5. Jack rafter.t :--Jiìck raftcrs shall hl¡vc one crrl iìgainst tho valley
of hio raftcrs. In thc casð of hip rtl'lcrs, thc jack laltcrs sh¡rll bc continuous ovcr
itr" *"ll ptut" and tcrminatc rt tlÌc oaves board ln the casc of vallcy raftor' thc
the ridge board At both
i,t"f, t"ft"fu shrll bc spal]tìecl bctwccrì the valley rafters ancl
;n.ls it shrll bc sccttrcd by spiking
1(\03.3.6. I{all pktles :-Where pnrlins, post platos, ridgcs, etc, rcst directly
on thc walls contimtotis wall plates or clctached wall plates (templates) shall
be
to thc walls as directed by the
itouia"a. fftc wall plates shall be securcly fastcned
Exccutive Enginect.
1Q03.3.1. Post'pkttes (bressuneets) :-They shall have the samc wiclth as

rhc oosrs anrl shull bc conncc¡cd to thc posts s shown in thc tlrrwings Thc cotntlton
bc sccurcly ñxcd lo thc fìost-Plrtcs by notching or wilh stccl
inftio tft"ft knÙc-
slraps bctweon thc post-platcs and the common rafters'
Specif¡cation No. 1004
Wooden Partitions
1004.1. All relevant clauscs of SSs : 1001 and 1002 shall apply'
1004.2. Frame work
1004.2.1. þ'r(tme :--The lrrame for partitions shall consist of a rigid
aûangemcnt ofvertical mcmbers callcd stucls and horizontal membcr called noggings'
àiioË"i¡.a sizcs joincd togctlìor at given spacings and jointod at top to the head
ri""l at bottom to the itill piece either by mofiisc and tonsÒn joints or by lap
"n¿
flt" hcacl picce shatl bc of bigger scction that the head picce Whers doors
i""io
'or
windows arc requircd to bc provided in partitions, the mcmbers franring the
opcnings shall be of adequatc sections.
1004.2.2. Panels :

1004.2.2.1. Panels may cousist ofA C. sheets, plywood, glass panels, wooclen
olanks. woocl-basetl products or any other approved materials Panels shall bc fitted
lnriJ" tfr" frrmes in groovcs or in robatcs with beading or fitted over the framcs
on both the sidcs.

1004.2.2.2. Pancls shall be fixed by woodcn scLews or bolts antl nuts or

beading with nails and putty as may be specified
1004.2.3. Fíxing:-(i) The frames shall bc fixed to thc side walls by taking
the Head antl the sill pleccs ínto the sidc walls to a depth of 75mm to l00mm'
o, uii"rnoti*ty whe¡e the framçs are to be fixccl to RCC membors they shall be
fixecl by using suitable brackats or çlcats, etc., (ii) tho frame shall in addition be
Ij""ur",| ,o the proof and/or floor at spccified intervals using suitablo cleats' o¡ by
any other approvcd methods.
 356 THE A,P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

Specification No. l00S

Wall panelling
1005.1. AII rçlevanr clauscs of SSs : 1001 and 1002 shall apply,
1005.2. Thc frame wo¡k shall be fabricatccl in accordance with the drawings
or as directed by the Executive Enginecr. It shall bc screwed to wooden plugs fixãcl
in the walls or securcd to the walls by any other approved mcans.
1005.3. The pancls shall then be fixecl to the frâmc wo¡k with countersunk
screws ancl finished as may be spccified.

. 1005,4. Cornices skirtings shall be done to thc sizes and shapes as shown
in the drawings or as diroctcd by the Ëxecutivc Engincer.
Specif¡cation No. 1006
Wooden Railing
1006.1. All rclcvant clauscs of SS : l00l shall. apply.
1006.2. Construction of hnntl railing :

_ 1006.2.1. Thc hand railing shall bc moulcled antl shaped to thc dimcnsions
and slopcs as shown in the drawings, or as clirectccl by the Exccutivc Engineer,
The railing shall bc secured to the newcls, posts, tcíps of baluste¡s o¡ grill work
as thc.oâse may bc with joints, gr.oovcs, ,"rc*, oi clamps as directðt1
by the
Executìvc Enginccr.
1006.2.2. The railing shall follow thc inclinarion of fhç stairs, rising lnorc
. ..
rapidly over tho naüow ends of the winders than over thc full width rectà'ngular
treats.

. 10.0623,. In wìnding stair ccscs. the hand railings shall also be requirccl
to wind in order that its cross section may be normal ú the stairs while iising
simultaneously following the lâteral curves.
1006.2.4. Hantl rails may preferably be provided with wreaths wherever
.
thcrc rs iì change in the dirccrion of rhe flight of stairs.
1006.2.5. Railing shall be jointed along the length ìvith dowellecl butt
joints,
1006,2.6. On thc wall side the hand rail may bc rigidly fixed to thc wall
and it shall be at thesame leyel as the hand rail on the ;he; side.
1006.3. Mcasurement :
1006.3.1. Thc wooden hancl railing shall bc mcasured in running mctres,
correct to 0.01 of a metre.
1006,4. Ilate :
1006.4.1. Hand railing shall bc paid pcr running metre.
100ô.4.2. The ¡ate include all sawing, planing, moulding, jointing, fixing
and finishing, ctc., for the complete work in aìcorda-n"c with ñis speciicarionl
- s.s. 1101 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK 357

sEcTloN 11

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL

STEEL WORK
CONTENTS

Page
s¿ Specirtc(tlion Name of Specífcalíon
No.
357
1. 1101 Materials
2. llOZ Steel work in single section of R S Joists' Flats'
358
Tees, Angels and Channels, etc'
3. 1103 Steel wo¡k Reveted and bolted in buillup
- 3s9
section trusses and Framed Work
4. 1104 Steel work (welded) in bilt-up sections Trusses
367
and Framed Works
373
5. 1105 Miscallneous Steel Work Collapsible steel shutters
316
6, 1106 MS. Steel Sliding Shutters
379
7- 1107 M.S. Sheets Doors
381
8. 1108 Rolling Shutters
382
9. 1109 ClamPs for ceiling Fan'
' SPecification No' 1101
Mâterials
specified'
1101.1. Steet :-All structural steel sections, unless otheÏwise
ll01-A'
,fruU.å"iot to the standard quality steel as specihed in the Table
Table 1101'A

Appl¡cation Type of Steel -IS ; No.

s/,
No.

1. Rivetted, bolted or single section and Mild 42-S.

welded steel work where structures âle nol
IS : 226-1962
subjcted to dynamic load Thickness of
member not exceeding 20mm.
Structures subjeci to dynamic loading
Fusion St. 42-W.
quantity steel IS :2062-1962

For seneral Þurpose such as door frames' Mild ste€l St. 32-0
IS: 1977-1969
windîw frames, window bars' grills, steel
gates, hard railing, builders hard-ware,
fencing post & tie bals, etc.
 TI.IE A.P, STANDARD SPECTFICATIONS

Stn¡cturos not subjectod to dynamic loading Milcl Steel s¡, 42-0

olhcr rh n wintl lotls such as phtlorrn roofs. IS : l9?7-1969
Ioot ovcr bridgcs. office buildings, transmis-
sion towcrs, factory sheds,where welcling is
not cmployed and str[ctures not in carth-
quake zoncs.

ll0l.l.2. All finished stcel shallbewell and cleanly rollccl to the dimensions,
scctions and weights specifìed or rcquirccl subject to permissible toleruncc:rs gìvcn
in IS; 1852-1962. It shall bc fi.ee fronr clacks, surface llaws, larninations, iough
and imperfect cdges and all othcr harmful defbcts.
I101.1.3, Steol scctions shall be well protccted against exccssive nrst and
scaling as per SS : 127. The decision ofthe Exeoutivc Engineer regarding rejecting
any steel section on account of cxcessive rust and scaling shall bc final ona UinOin!
on the contractor.
ll0l.2. Rivets :-Thcsc shall conform to IS : 1929-1961 and IS
1962.
1101.3. Black bolts :--.Thcse shall conf'orm to IS : 1363_196?
110t.4. Pr€cision and semi-precision bolts :-These shall conform to
IS : 1364- 1967

Specification No, I 102

Steel work in single section of R.S. Joints, Flats, Tees,
Angles and Channcls, etc.
1102.1. Straightening, Shaping to form and Cutt¡ng :_The stcel scctions
as specified or required, shall be straightened and cut, square ãnd to corract lcngths
and measured with a steel tape. The cut ends cxposed to vicw shall be'finislhecl
smooth, No two pieces shall be welded o¡ otherwise jointcd to makc up the roquircd
length of a member.

_ All straightening and shaping to form, shall be done by pressure and not
by hammering. Any bending or cutting shall be carricd out in such a manner as
not to impair thc strength of the metal,
1102.2, Painting :-Before hoisting, stcel work shall be thoroughly cleanecl
of- rust, loosc scâles, dust etc., and given onc coat of red oxide paint ãf appr.oved
quality, ovcr surfaces inaccessible after placing in position, two coats of rccl oxide
paints shall bc applied. Painting shall not be donè to steel work tìll it has been
inspected by the Executivc Engineer, unlcss otherwise permitted.
1002.3. Iloisting and placing in þosit¡on :-Stcel work shall be hoistcd
and.placed. in position carefully, without any clamage to itself anil other building
work and injury to work-men. Whe¡e necessary mechanical applianccs sLrch as
lifting tackle, winch, ctc., shall bc used.
1002.4. Measurement :-Finished sections shall be measurecl in running
metre correct to 0.01 of a metcr and tlìeir weights calculated on the basis on whicìi
 s.s. I 103 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK 359
- table if the
iãI *ppti"tì to the contractor, by the clepartment' or fom standard
stcel is arranged by the contrâctol
required for all
1102.5. Râte :-Rate includes cost of labour and materials where single
thc work
,fr. O"rä1.¿ u¡out This will includc only stcel
"o.rr,lã"î anrl no two mcmbors are jointecl together.
It will oxcludc the stcel
,".riJ", "r" usccl
work' where riveting' bothing or
îàr['in u"iru"p sections, trusses andbefrãmcd per kg or tonnc as specified in schedule'
i"iåì"g it ì"""1'""¿ Th" uni' shall
'ut"
SPecification No' I 103
sections' trusses ând
Steel Work Rivcted and boltcd in built-up
framed work
.1103'1. Laying out :-Stccl structure shall be laid out on a levcl platform
on drawings or_as directed by
t" nrr ,i"rc ìr¿lã'iurÏ ,i"" o, in parts, as shown
;;;;;;;;t"; Engin""r' A steel tape shall bc Lrsed for mcasure¡ncnts Wooden
stccl tcmplíìtc shall bc mrde to concspond
;;oì"* i;t; tã lqmm. thick. or mctalholes shatl be marked ¿ìccuratoly on thom
as wcll as platc and rivet
"ì"i ^",tlU.,
ãîäìrììì"¡. i¡" *rnplatei shall be laicl on thc stoel membcÏs' and holes for riveting
also be markcd
il;;i;il .nrt on t¡"t The cncls of thc stcol members
of
shall
anchor bolts shall be
the position
i;;"îìtin;: irt"'iãt" "r 't""1 colu-ns and
carefullY set ont
1103.2. Fabricâtion:-
1103.2.1. Straightening, Shaping to lorm antl cutli'Ìg t-'
1103,2.1.1. This shall conform to SS : 1102 1'

llo3,2.|'2.Allstiffenersshallbeformedbypressurcandwherepracticablc,
the metal shall not be cut and wclded in making these

shop drawings giving

1103.2.1.3 In major works o¡ where so specified'
of the component parts of tho Sttucture
"^-.1"r. ;nCn.-ation for.ìhe fabrication rivcts' bolts or wclds' shall
ï:iliffi lilffiit^.',vp". 'i'", L""gth and details ol approvcd by the Exccutive
h^ ^r¡n¡rcrt in :ì(lvancc of tnc aciuai fabrication and
nlrãã.rivcts' and wel<ls'
äåÏ;:'ìt;'.;;;;; ;i.ìT i"d'';;" the shop and
with'borts
paint with thc
;ü:"'ì;¿i ñ'il; ;ñ;i;"
oì'iinlttv
'nu't"à
or stencilrcd
i,i"ntiti"ution marks as givcn in the shop drawings'
ends so as to provide full
1103.2.1.4' Tie bars shall be thickened at othcr
off to meet their nofmal
affective section at the threads .nã lr"or"rry Þpcred
section.
in the fabrication of various
1103.2.1.5. Great accuracy shall be observetl
those can ¡t \vithout bcing undulv^packed' strained
'll"-b";;,-;;ìit;; "t""t¡i"¿ true ind free from twist' kinks'
or forced into position ald wheri"Uìiit-up' ttrutt be
buckles or oPcn joints
ll03.2 2 Assenbling:
||03.2.2'1'Assembledandclampcdproperlyandtightlysoâstoensure
members All stiffeners
lapping of th" 'tutfut"t of tttt àifferent
"1"r" ^i"u]"g "i
 TTITì A.P. STANDARD SPNCIFICATIONS

shall bcar tighlly both at top and bottom without bcing clrawn or cat¡lked, Thc
âbì.ltting.joints shall bc cut or drcssod truo ârìd strâight, and fittod closc together.
1103.2.2.2. Web splice plates and lìllcrs undc¡ stiffencrs shall bc cut to fit
within 3mm. of flange anglos, vide Figs. ll03,l, 1103,2 and 1103.3. Web platcs
of girders which have no cover platcs shall havc thcir ends flLrsh with the top of
angles forming the flangos, vide Fig. 1103.3 unless otherwisc rcquirecl. Thc wcb
platcs, whcn spliccd, shall havç clearancc of not more than 6mm. (Vi<le Fig.
I103.3).
ERECTION OF STEEL SECTIONS ERECTION CLEARANCES
AND WEB SPLICING

Clearance of
Packing Plate &
Plange Angle
not more than
3mm.

SECTION at A.A.

lFis. No. 1103.11 [Fig. No.

1103.2,2,3, The erection clearance of cleated ends of members connecting

stoel to stecl shall preferably be not greater than l.5.mm. vide Fig. t103.4. The
ercction clea¡ancc at the ends of beams without wcb cleats shall not be more than
3mm. at each cnd (Vide Fig. 1103.5) but whcrc for practical roasons, greater
clcarance is necessary, suitably dcsigncd seating shall be provided.
1103.2.2.4. Pin and rollcrs shall 1103.2.2 can bc accurately turncd to
guage. These shâll b€ straight smooth and free from flaws. The roller bearing shall
be provided with adcquatc arrangenrant of holding the girder or tfuss resting on
it from lateral displaccment.
1103.2.2.5. Expansion bed plates shall be planed t¡ue and smooth, The
planning of bed plates shall be done in the direction of movomcnt of the girder
or truss resting on it.
- s.s. r r 03 STRUCTURAL S'TT'EL WORK

EREGTION OF STEEL SECTION

(Not to Scate)
lF¡9. No

r
Flush vw¡th top ISO METRIC VIEW
b Plate

$
Section at B.B.
362 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

COLUMN AND BEAM GONNEGTION

(With fìange cleats)
Erection clearance of clealed Erection clearance of beam
beam & column
& column without web column
not ìo exceed 3mm

Erection clearance tl.5mm.

PLAN at A.A.
lFis. No. 1103.51
lFig. No. 1103.41
'1103.22.6. Column splices and butt joints of-struts
and. compresslon
shall be accuratelv machined
ãn to' ti'ess transmission
-","b;;;p;;à;;golver "onto"t
the wholc ,""tion. ln column caps and bases, the onds of
^rä'î1"*ïin"¿ ânglcs' chãnnels' etc ' after rivcting
Ïl#";";;,h* *ìil.t ttt" ottu"ttt¿ gussets,that the-parts connccted' butt against cach
;;;ä;t;"h?li ;; accuratcly
:'iffi'ä',il;tt* of contact' connecting angles or. channels shall be
;;i;¿.'na"hin"d"'o
in position *i'tt g"ut accuracy so that they are not unduly
i"iü","¿'"t¿-pr*ed
rcduccd in thickncss by machining'
shall be machined or ground
1103.2.2.'1 The ends of all bearing stiffencrs
to fit tightly both at top and bottom
ll03 2.3 Making holes :

1103 2 3 1 411 holes shall generally

bc drilled to the'requircd size and at
provided it is donc 3mm'
,t'" ,"ouiä-oooiion. sub-punchinglshall bc pcrmittcd-
;;'i;;i;;,* ancl reamcd thcrcaltcr to lhe rcquircd size'
be larger by 0 4 to 0 6mm'
1103.2'3.2 Holes for rìvets and black bolts shall
t¡* tft"'"á*ì""f ,fiu*"tt' of rivets or black bolts deponding upon the diamcter
of bolt or dvet.
larger by
I 103.2 3.3 lloles for precision bolts shall bc drillcd and reamed
0 2 to ô.3.-. depending upon the diameter of bolts
to be rivet€d together
l1O3'2.3.4 When the number of platcs or sections holcs shall be drillcd
i¡,"o o.*hen thcir total thickn"" i' 90'nt or more'
"^"""¿,
--
s,s. I 103 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK 363

or rgamed in position, after thc members are assemblcd and thc parts firmly helcl
togothcr by clamps. Before riveting or bolting up fìnally, the membcrs shall bc taken
apart and all bu¡rs removed
1103.2.3.5. Holes shall havc their axis pcrpendicular to the surface
borccl
through. Thc chilling or r.eaming shall be free irom burrs, and the holcs shall bc
clean and accurate.
1103.2.3.6. Holes for counter-sunk bolts shall bc maclç in such a manneL
thât thoir hcads sit flush with thc su¡face after fixing.

, . 1.103 2.4, Use of rivets, precísíon l:olts and black óol/s :_Thc work of
fab¡icatio-n including riveting shall be complctcd in thc workshop as fàr as jt
is
practrcablo to do so, Site joining shall bc ãonc with rivcts or pràcision
bolts, or
blackbolts, as shown in drawing or as dirccted by the Executive Engincer,
1103,2.5. Riveting:
Prclininaries before t ivet¡ g:--Thc parts asscmbled for riveting shall
.(a)
bo ìn close contact with oach othar, and thc bcaring stiffeners shall bear
tightly both,
at top.and bottom, wìthout being drawn o¡ caulked. Mcmbcrs to bc rivetcá,
shalí
br well pirned or bolted and rigidly held togcther whilc riveting. Drifting of
holes
shall bot.be permitted oxccpt to draw thc parts togcther and i-he clrifting tool
so
usecl shall havc its maximr¡ln diamoter not cxceeding the nominal
cliametcr of rivets
or.bolt. Dlifting donc cluring assembling shall not distort the metal or cnlarge
thc
holcs.
(b) Ãivels :*Thc rivets shall havc snap head, l.lat counter sunk head,
rouncled countc¡ sunk_hcad, or pan head (vìde Fig. I103.6)
as shown in the drawin!
ol as.dirccted by the Executivc Engineer, The shãnks of rlvcts shall project
beyonã
the plate surface sufficiently so as to fill the hole thoroughly
and form ihe requirccl
heacl after rcvetting.

(c)_ Process of Rivelrzg :-Riveting shall bedone by hyclraulìc

-
proccss. However,
or pneuntatic
whcrc such facilities are not available, hand riveting shall be
unlcss othcrwisc spccified. The rivets shall be hcated to rcd
ll"ltit't*,
bcrng tirken to control thc ternpcrature of beating so âs
hot, caro
not to bur.n the steel. Rivets
lcss tlìfln lOmm. mry be drivcn cold. Rivets shaÌl be finishcd
:l.ll"T"ji
neaos ru and ot eqlt¡l size. The heads shall l¡e central
ncar, with
on shanks and shall grip
the asscmbled_ mcmbers firmly. All loose, burnt or badly
fonn"a ,ilr"ts *ith eccentric
or dcfficiert heads shall be cut out and rcplacecl. In iutting out
rivets, care shall
be taken so as not to injure the assembled rn"mU"rr.
Cuuttiig unA-,:."upplng ,lrutt
not be permitted.
tosting rivots, a hammer weighing approximately 0.25 kg, shall
be used.
heads of the rivers (spccìally thc mach-inå'head) stratí
*B1lh lc tappia. Slack rÌvets
wrll grve a hollow sound rnd jar,
All rivet heads shall bc paintecl with rccl oxide paint within a wcek of
their
X tng.

1103.2,6. Bolting:
 ):::i
364 TI'IE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
hcxagonal and-of cqual size'
1103.2.6.1 All bolt hcacls and nuts shall be tf"t:'"1:Í''-"3"ui
,p""in"ä á,n",*i¡l" rn' t"':*"a ú"1çt-.1"t1^:::t"",Ï
""rc*
TlliììJiï::Ï."i"ìr"""''''.'i¡""ì l' tnpctccl shall bc-of such lcngth
lhc l¡olts
tt" nuts whcn fixctl in posìtion an.l thesc
il'i.";r;;;" ì;; clcor thr"'"ls t'"vo'ia
lftti" i¡" nuts shall fit in thc thrcaded cncl ol
shall fit in tha holos without ""V
bolts proPellY,
| 103.2.6.2. Whorc turnod and fittcd bolts Ï:.qt"p",t:tl
t" ]:,b:-'ï:l:{ffi
ot rrvcts' pc¡mrssru" "' "- ""*-;;; ü"ìi*"' '¡"r that*t:i:",i'.lii,l1;ï","*Jil
tho nut' whe' tightcned'
"r,*",',]'J"',*"'í'"":ii;"il;;J';;
bc provirlccl with wrshcrs rot lcss t, e-it trtt"t, so
¡¡, L^r+ ,r^^^r-n
shall i:ii;::Ïi,iJì;ïil;äilt
ïfi not Dear.olr ;itn"' lort rop"*c *1'r'"ï'l'ii:.:J"^";1il
"""ít""u"¿
-,ocl¡erc châtl bc o¡oviclect
*tt*"i The threacletl po'tion of the
bearing on
for all heads ancl nuts
itre parts bolted togethcr' Thc faces of bolt
bolt shall nol bc within thc tUictncss oi mîchinc finished'
fr".¿t'ì"i ""it "uutting ag¿tirìst '*l rn"t"ü"t' shall bc
rcmovcd or becoming
1l0326,3Wherc therc is tisk of the nuts boing
these shall be sccurçcl from slackening
loose ciuc to vibration or revetsal of J"sstt' down of th'cads'
iïü"'"*"ãil""r.tti,, r,p'ine *o'b";' "'oss cutting o' hammcring
.lir""t",l by thc Ëxccutivc Enginccr'
"i bolt shall b€ the <lislanco from tho
1103.2-6.4 The nominal lcngth of the
unclcr siclc of the hcacl to t¡" fu't¡"i "n¿
of the shank The nominal diatnete¡ of
abovc tho sffcwed thrcads
the bolt shall be the cliamcter at tho shank
M'S' RIVETS (Not to Scale)
lFig No l 103 61

Length requ¡red to
remainìng head
Shank ta¡l
d- Effective diameter
D - Nominal diameter

SNAP HËAD

þ1.50 .d þ1.50
.,li F- r.oo {
þ r.so +{ F 1,50 +1

w
IA
Flat counter sunk head
m B*ffi
Round counter sunk head Plan head
s,s. r 103 S'IRUCTURAL STEEL WORK 365

I 103.2.6.5. Bolts, nuts and washers, shall bc thoroughly clcaned

and dipped
in doublc boiled linseed oil, before usc.
1103.3. floisting and Ercction :

1103.3.1. General :
1103.3,1.1. Shop et.ection:-Bcfore rlìe steel work is desÞatchcd to thc
site, it shall be tcmporarìly shop crcctcd for inspccfltn by the Execirtivc Ëngineer
to check the accuracy ofthc fabricated. matcrial. [n casc oi p.\.r5 ,lrillcd or puirchccl
to stcel jigs with bushcs res'lting all similar parts being inter changcable, ihc steel
work may be shop electcd in such position as dircctcd by tlìe Ëxocutivc B¡,Ëisccr.
I103.3,1,2. Stecl work shall be hoisted and erccted in position carefully,
without any <larrages to itsólf, othcr builcling work ancl injury to workmen, Thc
mcthod of hoisting and eloction proposed to be adopted by thc contractor shall bc
got approvcd from the ExecLrtivo Engineel. The approval of the Ëxccutive Engineer
howcver, shall not relieve the contractor of his rcsponsibility for the work beilg
carricd out in a safe and propcr mannor without unduly stressilg the varioui
members. Ptopcr plant such as dcrricks, lifting tackles, winches, ropcs, etc., shall
bc uscd.

F'¡amcs shall be liftcd at such poi¡rts that thcse are not liablc to bucklc or
clcfotm or bc uncluly strcsscd. The stccl wo¡k may be erectcd in suitablc units as
may be directcd by tho Exccutive Engincer. During erection, thc stcol work shall
bc securcly bolted o¡ ofhcrwiso fastcncd and when ncccssary, tcmporarily braccd
to providc for all loads to bc carried by the structura during erection including thcse
due to crcction equipment and its opcrations. The stecl work shall be plaiecl in
propcr position as per approved drawings. No riveting or pcnlanent boliing shall
bc down until proper alignmcnt has been obtained. But the structure or thì part
of it placed in position, shall bc secu¡ed against ovor turning or collapse by suitible
moans,

1103 .3 ,2. Trusses :

I103.3.2.1. These shall be lifted only at nodes, Tlìc trusscs abovc 12 metrcs
shall not be slung at tho apex, as it will develop compression strcsses in tho bottom
tic menbcr. It shall be liftcd by slinging at two mid points of raftcrs, which shall
be temporarily braced by a woodcn mcmber of a suitablo scction. Aftor the trusses
are placcd in position, purlins ancl wind bracings shall be fixed as soon as possible.

1103.3.2.2. Thc end of the truss which faccs thc prevailing wintls shall be
fixed with holding down bolts and the othor end kept free io move.-ln casc of small
trusscs of spiìns say upto l2 metres thc free end of the truss shall be laid on lcacls
shect or steel as per design ancl thc holes for holding down bolts shall bc macle
in thc fonn of oblong slots, so as to pcrmit the frcc nìovements of thc truss cnd.
F-or largc spans, the frce end of the tmss shall be proviclecl with suitable rocker
and roller bcaring.
1103.3.2.3. In sheds open at the sides, thc trusses shall bc strongly bracecl
togetheÌ by wind bracings both on the slopc and al thc tie lcvcl so as to securc
them rglinst the effect of galcs.
 TFIE A,P, STANDAIì.D SPECIFICATIONS
drawings truly vcrlical
1103.3 2.4. The stcel columns shall be erectecl as perprolrerly fxed,with tho
*irh th;';";;;;"ry cross bracing.t".,-un¡ tr,".u*" rhall bc
as rho casc mrv bc'
äÏ#ñä;¿,"'uv .""ttir anchor bolts' ctc '
åas¿s :-Anchor trolts shall bc
1103 3.3 Hotding down bolts an(l coluún
is bcing poured with a woodon
p!tt"'tut' *hil"
pfu."¿'in'ii" "on"t"t"
"on"r"i.
tcmDlatc clamping thcir tops to kcep
thcm in position ancl with a.75mm x 75mln
which illows thc anchor bolts to plav ror
;ì;#:;'il;iä";;:;ip. ",i."¿ thcÀ aftcr inititl sct of concrctc
liii'ü*""i. ä. ir'i'il"ì *oul¿ or pipc shall bc arcmovcd
sloping chrnncl lcrrling to thc sitlc
-;^ -^".^" t.ft dround anchor bolts shall huvc
basc plate to allow the spaces bçins
:Ï,,ìl'i".'il,;i';; oì it't" un¿.tti¿" ofthethoposition along with the-column fooling'
Ir"ri"¿'uf,". the basc plato is fixcd in
of monar I : 2 ( I Ccmcnt
är"""it ti"ri rr", r.inlðr. ot¡"t*it" specified, çement
: Two coarse sand.),
shall not be carried
1103.3.4 Bectding of colttmn, stanchions etc :-Betlcling
conncctod togother'
out untit'tfte J""t *ort nã. l""tt finully levclled,
plumbcd
-and
and a''ljustccl to bring thcm in
il; ;;;;;;t ,-h^ti te supportecl on stecl wcdgòs not bo dono until sufhcient
rir,'r.¡. for *uttl storicd birildings, the bcrlcling shall lcvelled and
iffi;;;;'b"*; r"^ãtrtt or ,ian"hions havc becn properlv linccl'
in position. The basc platc shall be
.r".¡"¿ nn¿ atleast bca-ms of two floors lixerl to plLrmb thc
Ï"".1*î.ä;i;;;;J ;t M. wcclgcs antl adjustócl whcrc.ncccssarv
j5mm shall then bc prcssurc grouted
;;ffi;;. ii. gaps un<ler t'he base piates upto
wilh ncar ccmcnt.
Incaseofsmallcolumns,ifpcrmittcdbythcEXecutivcEngìnecr,thccolumn
pedestal. The anchor
¡or" rt oil ù" ¡oot"cl on the thick cËment grouion thc concrcte_ nocessary'
u"ii ¡"f* in the base plate may bc madc about l2 to 25mm largcr.thananchor bolts
to the
i"frìr *""f¿ allow for ìhe adjuittncnt of the base plate rolative
pipes or wooden moulds
*frrcn n""¿ not thereforc bó surroundecl by cylindrical
IlO3.3.5.Extensio¿:-Whenextendingorremodellingexistingstfucturc,
measurements beforo new
tlrawirrgs of existing síucture nlust be chccked by actual
work is takcn on hand
are placed
lll3.3 6 Paint¡ng :-Before the mombels of the steel structure
innositionortakcnoutoftheworkshop,lhcscshallbe¡aintcdasgiveninSS in
:" t¡"ll be a¡¡iicrl aftcr all thc membcrs arc {ixecl
ìtt" luriu"", shuu be thoroughly cleanedìnd dried before applying
'liö;;:'d;ö""i'.""o
p"ritlãlnäry.
thc specified Paint.
1103.37. Inspecl¡on dnd Test¡ttg 1

all ¡easonable
I13.3.7.1. The Exccutive Enginecr shall havc frcc access. at
tir", to i¡or" pu,t, of m¿nufacturcr's íork which rre concemcd with the fabrication
himself
;ú;;;;i;";k *d shall be afforcled all reasonable facilities for satisfving
-i;ri"",i""
,i.i'irr" is bcing undertaken in accordancc with this spèpification.
be made at the
11033.7.2' Unlcss spccifie<l othcrwisc inspection shall
be conductccl so as Iìot to interferc
nlace of manufacture plior to dospâtch and shall
'fi;il;;iñt,h thå opclation'of the work lf any structute or part of structurc
it shall be liable to rejection No
;; f'*.t;;1 to cornply with the specifications,
J-

s.s. 1 104 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK 367

ofthc structurcs oncc rcjcctcd shall be resubmittcd for test cxcopt

structure or'ÞaÌt
incases where the Exccutivc Enginecr consicler thc dcfcct is rcctifiablc.
Dcfects
which rnay appcar during fabrication shal be macre goocì witrr thc consent of thc
Executivc Enginccr.
1103 3 7.3. AII gauges and tcrûprrtcs neccssírry to
s.tisfy the Execrtiyc
Enginccr shall bc supplicd by thc mrnufacturo. f¡c Éx"cutiuc Énginccr
nray rt
his cliscretion accopt test ccrtificate. funrishcd by any othcr authority
approueA by
him ancl the cost of such tcst shall bc bornc by thc -nnuç"",ur"ì-
1103.3.8.
Meqsurement .-F,aÇh mcmber of thc stcel shxcture, dõ fixed,
shall nreasurcd in running ntctre colroct to 0.01 of ¿r met¡e ancl the w"igftü
_bc
câlculatcd o¡ì tho basis on which stcel is supplicd to the contractor by thc Departm-cnt,
or from stâùdard tables, if thc steel is arranged by thc contractoi. The nåt wcighi
ofthc cleats, brackcts, packing picces, rivct-heads, bolts and nrrts, clistancc_pìccics,
separators,. gusscts and fish plates etc., shall be added to the wcight of the rcsicctivé
itcms. In tivctcd work the wcight of rivct heads, cxccpt in the ùsc of countcr_sunk
rivets shall be adclcd. No doduction shall be maclc iol r.ivets or bolt holcs.
1103,3.9. Rate :-Thc rate shall incluclc thc cost of m¡ìtcrials and labour
involvcd in all the operatious describccr abovc. Thc unit ratc shalr bc por kg./to'nc
as specifíed in thc schcdule,

Specification No. 1 104

Steel Work (welded) in built by Scctions-Tmsses and Framecl
Works
1104.1. Structural Stecl :-All structurâl stccl shall conform to SS :
l10l.l,
1104.2, Laying out :-This shall conform to SS ;l103,1.
1104.3. Fabrication :
Stroighte ing shaping to for cu ing ancl assembling :_The
^ ,_1104.3,1,
Specification I103.2.1. and SS : 1103.2.2 shait holct gooa"as far.as applicablc except
that thc words "riveted or boltcrl" shall bc rcad asì'wclded" an¿ ilol", shall
oniy
be made lor the bolts uscd for tcmporary fastening as shown in clrawings,
1104.4. Ercction :-This shall conform to SS : 1103.3 except that while
erecting a wcldccl structurc, adequate nreans shall bc employcd for temporary
fastcning thc nrembers together and bracing the frame woik until the joints are
wolded. Such means shall consist of crection bolts, tack welding or othei positive
dcvices irnp^arting
.sufficient strength and stiffness ro rcsist all iernporary wcights
and iateral forces including wind, Owing to thc small numbcr ol
bolts, orclinirity
cmployed for joints which a¡e to bc welderl tcmporaÌy support of hcavy girders
carrying columns shall be specially attencled. Differ.ent måmbers which sliall be
fillet wclded,.shall be brought into, as close contact as possible ancl thc gap due
to_ faulty workmanship or incorrect fit up shall not exceìd
l.5mm.. If s"faiation
of l.5mm. o¡ morc occurs locally, the sizc of fillet wcld shall be incrcased at such
position by ân amount equal to the width of the gap.
 THË A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

1104.5' Welding :

ll} 5l ScoPe :

conform to IS:816-1969'
I l04.5.l.l All wckJing shall gcnerally
be donc by. clcctlic trc- ploccss Gas
1104.5.1 2. Wclding shall gencrally
*"r,¡,rg ,îoìì b" ,"sortccl to using. onvac"tyl.n"
fl"t" with spccilic prior approval
(;í¡ wcl(lirlg shait not howcvcr bc pcrmittcd for structural
of thc tsxccttrivc l:nginccr'
stcal work.
bc w-cltled along with the
cds wclding requires hcating of thc mcmhcrs to
strcsscs in thc wcltlcd nrcmbcrs
welcling r:od nna i! tit"ty to croate tcmpcr turc to these
i*"ìri""t tft"fl thcreforc bc taken to avoicl tlistortion of thc mcnrbcrs due
tcnìpgraturcs stresses
the slrop drawings which
1104,5.1.3. Thc work shall bc donc as shown ìn
.h^ll tha dctails of thc joint to bc wclclctl' typc of welds' shop and
"1;;;;j"Ji;"tc
iiï:';"*it;i, ;;ii;';ct" tvp" or "t""t'o'tcs be ttsc<l svmbol for wclcling
to on plans

nni ,ftop ,trn*ingt shall be accolding to lS:813-1961

1104.5 14. As fàr as possiblc cvcry cffo*
sh¿ll bc mrìdc to limit thc
*"l,iin; thai must bc rlolìc ¿rftcr thc strtlcturc is clcctctl so
ls to ¡voitl thc imprÙPcr
dìfficult positions on scaffolding
;;iäffi iil; i;itï"if to u" ,ton".tn" tu hcights ancl

otc.

1104 5.2. Types ol wekling:-Wclcls uscd for jointrng structural rncmbc¡s

.r" g"t""rfiv ãf t*í typ"t and kiown as butt wclds ancl fillct wclds
Spccial type of wclds as slot wclcls etc sball bc used where so specified'
'
is likc a triangle'
1104,5.2.1 Fittel weltl:-The cross scction of fillet wcld
on¿ it is ,,rlcl to join two stlrfaccs norrnally
at right angle to oach other' This type
rhan any other rvps ând
äi *ïrii rl""*J i,"fc ffequcnrly in st¡uctural connections
i.,,r"ì u n thc form of isosceles trianglc Tha f,illct welds shall bc continuous ot
intcrmiltcnt as spccifictl in thc dcsign
1|04'5'2'2.Buttweltls:-Thcscarcclassifie<laccorclingtothemethodof
shall be fillcd or chiscllecl
srovinr: or preparing of tlìo basa metal The mctal piccos
-r"quit",l
iu rh" shrpc lor butl wclding al thc throat'
1104'6. Welding cquipment and el€ctrodes :
be of the best
1104.6.1. Plqnt ;-The wekling plant aDd equipmcnt shall
type and shall be approvecl by the ExcÇutivo Enginccr'
may be uscd' through
Eithcl direct or altenlating currcnt (but not both kinds)
provitlccl to cach ilrc. and so situaled
out the whols of thc work An antmctc¡ shall bc
the opeTator'
tl.,ut Engince' can check easily thc currcnt.being used,by
i¡" g^."utiu"
with portablc currcnt regulíìtor lo cnabl€ him to adjust
i""ft'*"f ¿ti tn"f f be Jupplicd
his work Qualificd
Ihn welriius cuncnt within th" rfpLovctl limits without lcaving
rncl thcv shilll have bcc¡.trnincd and shall
:il;;:';ili';;;'filf"a to'
'i"raing of lS : 814-lq74 "Codc of
bc tcslc{l iìltcr cvcry thrcc ntonths rts icr prouisions
pro"tl"" fo, training ancl tsstilìg of Mctal arc welclers"
F-
i:::

s. s. 1 104 STIìUCTTJRAI, STEEL WoRK 369

1104.6.2. Electrodes:-Th€ elcctrodcs rcquirecl for metal arc welding shall

be covcred clcctrodcs and shall conform to IS : 814-1974, P-l and P-ll. "Covcrcd
electrodcs for mctâl arc woldirrg of St|uctural Stecl".
I104.ó.2,1. Types oJ'covering : This shall conform to IS : 815-1974.
Thc nraxinrunr tlia. of clcot¡odes for wclding any work shall bc as unclcl
unlcss othcrwisc sDccificd.

Max. Dia. of eleclrodes

Average thick ess of plute oÍ sect¡ott to be usecl

Lcss than 5nrm. 3.2 mm.

5nìm, upto but not inclrrding 8mm. 4 mrn,
8mm. upto but not inclLrdirrg 10mrn. 5 mm.
lOrnn. upto bLrt not including l6rnrr 6 mm,
16mm. ancl over 9 mm.

1104.7. Making holcs :--[n welded st¡uctr¡r'c holcs arc nccessary for selvice
bolts requiled druing oroction.
These holcs shall be madc as spcoificd in para 1103.2,3 for rivets and black
bolts, Thc lìolcs in thc various scctions shall bc filled with punches aucl wcklcd
prop€rly to form a complcta soction,
1104.8. Preparation of surlaces :-Su¡faccs which are to be welded
togcther, shall be frec from loosomill scalc, rust, paint, grease or other forcign
mattcr, A coating of boilcd linsccd oil shall bc pormittod,
1104.9. Assembly for rvcltling : Bcfore wekling is commcncccl, the plates
shall first bc brought fogethcr antl fìrmly clamped or spot welded at spccified
distancc, This tcmporary conncction has to bc strong enough to hold thc parts
accuratcly in placc without any disturbance.
1104.10. Precautions ;-All operations connected with welding and cutting
equipment shall conform to thc sâfoty requirements givcn in IS:818-1968 for
"Safety Requirements and llcalth P¡ovision in Electric and Gas Welding and Cutting
Opcrations".
1104.11. Operâtions and Workmanship ;-
I 104,I l.l. Welds shall be madc in thc flat position whencver practìcable.
ll04.1l.2. Arc lcngth, voltagc and amperagc shall be suited to the thicknoss
of material, typc ol groovc and other ci¡cunrslances of the work,
ll04.l1.3. Frceclom of movcmcnt of one member of thc joint shall bc
allowcd wherever possible. Whercver joints shall be weldecl allowancc shall be
made fo¡ the movçment of o¡rc competent to the order of 1,5mm,,
1104.11.4. The sequence of welding shall be such tlìat where possiblc the
nembcrs which offcr thc grcatcst rcsistancc to comprossion a¡e welded filst.

IAPDSS - 24]
3',70 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECTFICATIONS
welde d
1004.1 I .5. Process of welding :-The elcctrodc nranipulation during
shall be sL¡ch as to ensure the following :

(i) The base metal is in a fuscd state whcn the filler metal makes contact
with it.
(ii) The filler mctal doos not ovcr flow upon âny unfused basc metal
(iii) The base metal is not undcr-cut along the wcld edges'
(iv) 1hc following mctal floats thc slages, the oxicles-and thc gas bubblesis
to thc ììrífacc, behind thã advancing pool' Irr câsc any of thcse requirements
,r"ii"f""Ui" by manipulation, tho curient shall bc acljusted or the electrode size
changed.
a way
(v)Each time the arc is started the elcctrode shall bc movcd in such
point is assurcd At the completion of
that thc íusion of base metal at the starting
o iun tt't" movoment the clectrode shall be slowed clown to fill the arc cratcr'

(vi) After cvery inte uption ofthe arc cxcapt at completion of a tun' the
to fill the cratcr;
n," ,hnil ú" re-startcci oî the previous clcposit and then movcd back
àì-.ìi"ir olt"rnntlu" technique shall bc used as will cnsttrc completc filling of thc
the new ancl old deposits and the basc rnctal
;;"i;t, complete fusion between
";
pãtt and resulting in continuity-of weld' Before welding opcration
"i'ri"
i, "fj**,ion
i,rr tracts of slag shall be rcmoued fron,' rhc deposit, by chipping if
;;;til onä tn" ocpotit anà'the atljoining bascmetal shall be writc brushed
""riirrc,"¿, and
only-to succcssive laycrs'
i,, all points. The reqLrirements shall apply not
"f"*"J
¡"t ui.o to suå"essiu" beats ãnd to the over-lapping area wherever a
jqnctìon is
mada on starting a new clectrodc.
Thc welds shall be free f¡om cracks, discontinuity in welding and othcr
(vii)
defccts'such as (i) under-size, (ii) over size, (iii) under-cutting, and
(iv) over-cutting
ioìt,. of lìlíet welds vide Fig. (a), (b), (c), (<t) of Fig l104-l and Fig (i)' (ii)
"ur"
and (iii) of the 1104.1 in the case of butt welds

(viiì) All defective welds which shall be considcred harmful to tho structural
strength shall be cut out and re-welded
(ix) ln case of weldecl butt joints in steel oflhickness upto 5.0mm the weld
joint shalí be examincd for radiogiaphic examination as described in lS : ll82-
196't .

Finished welds and a jacent parts shall be protected with cleaned

(x)
boiled ìinseed oil and after all slag has becn rcmovcd'
(xi) Wekls and acljacent parts shall be painted after thc same are approved
by thc Executive Engineer.
1104.12. Inspection ând testing of welds :-lnspection and testing shall
be as untler :

(l) Visual inspection,

(2) Bend testing,
(3) Tensile testing,
(4) Magnetic particle, radiographic tasting
=

s.s. 1 104 S'|IìUCTURAL STEEL WOI{K 371

TYPICAL BUTT AND FILLET WELDS

(Not to Scale) É

BUTÍ WELD

r----=w----1
'ì

DEFECTS IN BUTT WELDS

OEFECTS IN BUTT WELDS

"""'t"
(i) under cutting

-ãr->
*------<-::jz--
(ii) Over lapping

(iii) Over size

Over lapping

[Fig. No. 1104.1]

The increase in cross sect¡on
between 46mm and 49.5mm fille'1.

1104.12.1. Visual ínspection :

lactor-I. Dimension of weld deposit :--'Ihe dimension of the weld shall
bc checkcd.. The sizo of thc weld shall be a specified ancl it may bc slightly over
but not under.
3',12 THE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

liactor-2. Shape of proJìle :-The profilc of thc wcld is affccted by thc

position of the joint, but it shall bo Lrnìform. In the câsc of butt a¡rd conrer welds
the profile shall bc slightly convox ancl in the case of fillet weld it is usually slightly
concavc.

factor-3. L/ni/ornity of surface :-Thc height and spacing of the ripplcs

shall be uniform these being indicativc of thc quality of workmanship.
Fâctor-4. Degree of tuder-crl¿ :-Under-cutt¡ng is unrlcsirrble. The weld
joint shall be frec fronr undcr cut but slight intcrmittent occurrences may bc
disregarded.
[actor-S. St oothness of joints wherc welding is recorntended '.-Thc
joints in thc weld run wherc welcling has bcen rccommendccl, shall bc as smooth
as possible ancl shall show on ¡rronounced hunrp or crater in thc wcld surface.
Fâctor-6. Þ'reedon frotn surfoce defects :-The surfacc of thc wekl shall
be frcc from porosity, cavitics and burnt on scale,

f'actor-7. Pe eh'atio beqcl in bult welds:-A slight pcnctration bcad shall

bc prcscnt and it shall bc reasonably unìform in width and appaarancc. Intcrmittcnt
occì.rffencas of lack of penetration bcad may bc disrcgardcd.
Inspcction of weld lractures :-lnspcction of wolcl fracturcs give information
conccrning dcgrcc of fìrsion, dcgree of root ponctration, gas cavities and quality
ol welcl mctal.
Þ'actor-8. Degree of Fusion :-Fì.rsion shall bc complctccl over the whole
a¡ça of tho joint surfacc.
Factor-9. l)egree of root penelralion, Butt and Fillet welds :-The dcfects
are most likcly to occur at thc root of thc welcl and in this position they are liablc
to havc the maximum effcct in reducing thc strongth ofthc welcl, A closc cxamination
of thc root shall, thcrcfore, bc made. In butt wclds the porìetration shall cxtend to
tho undcrsidc of tho platcs producing a ponetration bead of the ght size. In fillct
welds with good root penetration thc metal shall reach the comer.
Fâctor-l0, Gas cevities and Jlux entratnpmerls :-Unless they are causecl
by the use of unsuitâblc matcrial, they aro attributable to thc quality ofworkmanship,
the desirecl result being to achievo uniform appcarancc and frecdom from cavities
and flux, entrampments (where flux is used). ln fusion wclding of mild steel, cast
iron ancl aluminium where neutral flame is used, and in fusion welding of brass
or braze welding of case iron where oxiclising flamc is used, in currcnt welding
tcchniquc may result in rough, porous, dìscoloured ancl lustrelles âppearance in the
ffactLlro,

Note :-In case of lìsion wekling or non-firsion welding of cast iron is

isolatecl below holes or concent¡ation of pìn holes in the wcld mctal shall bc
regarded as grounds for rejçction but isolated pin-holcs shall not bc so regardcd.
1104,12.2. Bend testing (or ductility) :-The elongation shall bo not lcss
than 30 percent for stress relieved wolds and not loss than 25 pcr ccnt for non-
strcss relieved welds,
EF "---

s.s. 1105 STRUCTURAL STEEI, WORK 373

11O4.12.3. Tensile testing i-(Rcduocd scction tcnsilc tcsting) : The tensile

strength shall bc not less than that minimum of the specificd tcnsilo rango of thc
prrcnl Inctrl.
1104.12.4. Magnet¡c pqrticle ønd Rødio gr'øphic lesl :---This shall bc done
trs givcr in IS:5354-1969 and lS: l182-1967 respcctivcly.
1104.13. Inspection and tcsting :--This shall conform to SS : 1103.3.7.
1104,14. Measùrement ;-This shall conforllr to SS : I103.8 excopt that
wcight of welding material shall not be addcd in the weight of members tor payrncnt
anrl nothing oxtra shall bc paid fol making and filling holes for tcmporary fastcniug
of ¡rembcrs du¡ing eroction before wclding.
,1104.15, Ratc :--Tlìe rate shall include the cost of all labour and matcrials
involved in all the opcrations described above. The unit for paymcnt shall bc tonne
as spacificd in thc schcdulc.
MISCELLANEOUS STEEL WORK
Specification No. 1105
Collapsible Stecl Shutters
1105.1. General :-Collapsible stcal shutters shall bc of approvc<l
nranufaoturc and shall bc fàbricated flom mild steel ssctions. Typical sketches of
collapsible gatc are given in Figs. 1105.1 and 1105.2.
Note I :-In tube to tùbc branch joints, both butt and fillet welds appear
in jo¡nt, fillets being at the Çrefclìos,
Note 2 t-lll casc of non-fusion of welding of cast iron the joint shall show
satislactory pcnctration and adhcsion.

1105.2. Collapsiblc gates :

I 105.2.1. Thcse shall consist of double or single collapsible gates dcpending
on thc size of thc opening. These shall consist of vcrfical double channels each
20 x l0 x 2rnm. (provisional at l00mm. centrcs braced with flat iron diagonals
20 x 5mm, and top and bottom, rails of T. Iron 40 x 40 x 6mm. at 3.5 kg./m.
with 38mm. (provisional) dia. steel pullcys or ball bearings in cvery fourth double
channcls, unless otherwise specificd.

I105,2.2. 'Wherever collapsible gate is not provided within thc opening and
is fixcd along the outer surface T. iron at tho top may be replaced by feat ilon
40 x lOrnm,.

I105.2.3. The collapsible gate shall be providecl with necessary bolts and
nuts, locking arrangement, stuppers and handles. Any special settings like springs,
catches, locks, etc., shall be so specified in the description of the stem whcro so
required.

1105,2.4. Thc gate shall open and close smoothly and casily.
 1I IE A,P, S'I'ANIJARD SPËCIFICATIONS

TYPICAL SKETCH OF COLLAPSIBLE STEEL GATE

hold
fast etc, to wall

,-H-{---UHX' - lox4ox6mm
r
Pulley or 32mm. Ball Bearing Fixing Boll

rl4scm¡'4- opËNtNc ____--l4bcjn.|+. DETAILEDSECTTON

OPEN FRONT ELËVATION

OPENING
DETAILED PLAN
-
s s 1105 S'TRUCTURAL STEEL WOI{K

TYPIGAL SKETCH OF COLLAPSIBLE STEEL GATE FOR LIFT

(Not to Scale)
lFig. No. 1 105.21

38mm. DIA BALL BEARING

FLAT IRON HANGER

FIXING WITH
HOLD FAST
ETC. TO
L

FLAT IRON
20mm. x

:f
OPEN FRONT ELEVATION CHANNEL
376 TFIE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

1105.3. Fixing :

1105.3.1. T-lron râils shall bc fixed to tbe floor and to thc lintcl at top
by mcans of anchor bolts enboddcrl in ccment concletc of floor and lintol. Thc
anchor bolts shall be place<l approximatcly at 450mm. centres âltcr.natively in thc
two llangcs of thc T-iron. Thc bottom runncr (T-iron) shall bc embeddcd in thc
floor and proper grove shall be lormed along the nrnner for thc purposc. Thc
collapsiblc shutte¡ shall bc fixcd at sides by fixing the cnd double channcls with
T-iron rails and also by hold fasts bolted to tho end doublc channel and fixocl in
thc masonry of thc sidc walls on the othc¡ sidc,
1105.3,2. Ill casc thc collapsiblc shutte¡ doos uot roach thc lintel, beam or
slab lcvcl, a Tec section suitably designed nray bc fixccl at thc top, embcclclcd in
masonry and providccl witlr lìccossiìry clamps and rollc¡ arrangement at thc top.

I105.3.3. All thc adjoinìng work darnaged in fixing of gate shall be madc
good to lnatch thc existing lvork.
1105.4. Pâinting : All thc membcrs of the collapsiblc gatc inclucling T-
ir<ln shall bc tlroroughly clcancd off rust, scales, dust, etc., and givcn I prinring
coat of rcd oxi<les before fixing thcm in position,
1105.5. Mcasuremcnt r'.-The hoight of thc gatc shall be measur.ecì as thc
lcngth of thc doublc channcls. Thc blcadth shall bc mcasurecl from outsido to
outsidc ol thc doublc channcl fixcd at ends of tho gatc. Tlìc height and bleadth
shall bc mcasured corrcct to 0.01 of a nretre ancl thc arca shall bc workecl out in
sq.m. uorrcct to 0.01 of íì sq.m.
1105.6. Râte :-The rate shall includc thc cost of matcrials and labour
involved i¡ all thc operations clesc¡ibed above. The unit rate ofpaymcnt shall be
per squara mctrc.
Specification No. 1 106
M.S. Steel Sliding Shuttcrs
1106.1. Gcnerâl : Thcsc shall bc manufacturcd l¡om milcl steel as per
clrawings and spccifications. Necessary dctails offâbrications arc shown in Figs.No.
I106^l and I106-2.
1106.2. M.S. Sheet Sliding Shr¡tters :

110ó.2.1. Thcsc shall bc doublc or single lcaf shuttcrs as specified. Thc

shuttcrs shall bc fabricated ol spccificd size of M.S. angle iron frame diagonally
bmcccl with thc same size M.S. anglc and rivetcd togather with (mìnimum) 3mm,
gus$ct plate at junctiorì to forru a rigid flame. M,S. sheet of lmm. thiokncss or.
as spccificd shall be fixcd to tho liarno with rivcts, or welds as approvcd by the
Executivc Engineer. Thesc shall also be provided with top and bottom guiclc rails
of anglcs o¡ Tlrons of specificcl size. Unless otherwisc specifiecl 25mm, dia.
pullcys/or ball bearings shall bc provided over, guide rail at the bottom ancl gLride
block with stecl pulleys at thc top. Tho shutters shall also bc providecl with locking
arrangcmcnts, handles, stoppcrs, held-fasts ând othcr fittings as may be spccificd.
- s.s. I 106 STIIUCTURAL STEEL WORK

M.S. SHEET SLIDING SHUTTER

(Not to Scale)
PULLEY 25mm. D¡A
N¡,S. CHANNEL 40 x
ANGLE 40 X 40 X 6mm, -_D

M.S. Sheet
1mm. thick

Gussel Plate M.S Channel M.

3mm. th¡ck 40 x 40 x 6mm
SECTION ON AB

[Fis, No. 1 106.1]

1106.2.2. The guide rails shall be sufficiently long and continued along tho
wall on both ends so that the sliding shutters can rest against thc walls, giving full
opening whcn so requircd.
1106.3. lixing :

.
I I 06.3. 1 Thc guide rails shall be fixed to the floor by means of anchor
bolts embcddcd in thc Çcment conclcte. The stcel section at the top shall bc suitably
supported from the walls. Two channel sections shall be suitably fixcd vcrtically
below thc cxtremc clamps in the wall and floor, to avoid thc shutter from going
out of thc suppo¡ts at, top and bottom. A suitable clamping arrangcment shall be
provided at either end of the opening to avoid tho shutters from rolling back into
the opening.
 THE A,P, STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

lFis. 1 106.21

/.

Angle lron
40x40x

2mm. Gap
Max.

LS. sheet
mm thick

M.S,
Channel

Pulley or ball bearing

25mm. dia,

40x40x6mm.
PLAN DETAILS AT Y
s.s. 1 107 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK 379

1106.3,2, All thc adjoinirrg wotk damaged in fixing shall be naclc goocl

to match thc existing work,

1106,4. Painting :-This shall confolm to SS: I1054.
1106.5. Measuremcnt :
1106.5,1. Thc hcight of tbc slìuttcr shall be mcasurecl from outsi(lc to
oLrtsiclc of thc guicle rail and wiclth outsidc to outside of shutter including thc vcrt¡câl
ch¿nncls on sidcs.
1106,5.2. Thc hcight ancl width shall bc ncasurccl corrcct to 0.01 of a
nìctrc au(l thc arca shall bc workcd ot¡t in sq n'r' colrcct to 0 01 of a sq m
1106.6. Ratc ;-Thc râtc shall includc lhc cost of m¿rterials ancl labortr
involvccl in aìl thc opcrations dcsclibccl abovc, lt also includcs thc cost of thc fi'lll
lcngth of guiclc lails. Thc unit ratc shall bc pcr sqtriuc mctrc
Spec¡fication No. 1 107
M.S. Shect Doors
I107,1. Gcncral :-Thcsc sltall bc ¡u¿rnufactttrecl as pcr cltawings and
spcoifications. Ncccssiìrv dctails of fabrications, ctc. for a typical door of 2400 x
2400mnr, arc given in Figs. 110'1.1 & l,1072.
TYPICAL M.S. SHEET ÞOOR 2400mm. & 2400mm.
(Not to Scale)
lFis. 1107.21
5
I

t\4. s. Sheet lmnl

thick

Angle lron
40x40x6mm.
fixêd
with rivets
(Alternative
type of cleal)

plate 3.mm. th¡ck

Locking angle cleals

lron
S.
40x40x6mm. î;8;lJBi!*".",,*.ffiAN oN AB
 3 ¡t0 TFIt] A,P, STANDAIìD SPT'CIFICA'I'f ONS

TYPICAL M,S SHEET DOOR 2400mm. & 24o0mm.

(Not to Scale)
Nr.S. Sheel lmm th;ck

Pintle íxed
bolt and nuts

M.S. Angle
t, 40x40x6mm.
E N¡.S. Flat
50x6mm,

AI a

f¡xed

l. 3.00rnm. thick gusset Rivets

with rlvets
(Alternat¡ve
type of cleat)

lFig. 1107.21
þ-- * 2400mm -----ùt
OUTSIDE
Gusset plale
3.mm. thick
--
¡/.S. Sheet lrnm lhick
angle cleats

M.S. flat. C.C. Block

30xGmm 150x150x200mm.

PLAN ON AB
1107.2. M.S. Shcct Garâgc Doors :

I 107.2. L
Thesc shall be providecl as cloul¡le leaf shuttcrs unless o rerwisc
spccified. 'fhc shuttcr.s shall bc firbricatcd f¡.om M.S. frame of 40 x 40 x ómm.
size
anglc ol as spccified and two cliagonal l¡raccs of the san.rc scction as shown
in
Irig ll07 1 unlcss otlrcrwisc specificcl. The franrc shalr bc riveted ancr or wckrcd
at tho junctions. Whclcvcr r.iveting is tlone 3.00mnr. (minimum) gLrssct
¡rlatc shall
bc plovidcd at thc junction. M.S. slÌcot of lmm. thiòkncss or ai specihed, shall
be fìxccl to thc fiantc with rivcts ol welcls as approvccl by thc Exccutivc Enginecr.
1107.2.2. Altcrnativoly thc diagonal bracing may be replacecl by onc
holizontal and two c¡oss tlats 30 x r)mm, as sho*n irr-Ì.ig. iroz.z unl"rs othcrwìsc
spccificd.
1107.2,3, Thc outer framc shall bc pr.ovicled with clcats madc of flat ir.on
of Soction 40 x lOmm. and bcnt in the shapc of anglc clcats with onc arrn l50mm.
long and thc othcr arm 50mm. long and fixcd to tñc anglc iron franìÇ of thc door
s.s. 1108 S'IRTJC'I. TJRAI, STTiEI- WORK 3RI

witlr two 12mm. dia. bolts a¡cl nuts. lior doors upto 2,40 mctrc hoight, two angle
clcats per shuttel shall be providccl,
110'1.2.4. the clcat shall have a vertical leg of l50mn. which shall bc
flxccl with fiatne and horizontal leg of about 5Onrnr, which shall be provitlecl r,vith
a holc of 24mm. dia. ancl fixcd in thc projoctcd pin of the pin clamp.
1107,3. Fittings and l¡ixing :
1107,3.1. Thc shutter shall be fixed to thc wall nrasonry, with lbur pin
clamps (pintlcs) whcrc thc hcight of thc shuttor is upto 2,40 nì. Each pin clanìp
shall consist ol 50mn, x 6mm. llat ilon 450¡rm, long bent and lorkcil a[ onc cnd
and providcd with 20mm. diamctlc, M,S. pin on thc othc¡. The pin shall bc firurly
rivctcd ol wel<lccl to thc pin clamp, thc othcr cncl of which shall be cmbcdcled in
masonly by mcars of ccmcnt couc¡ctc block 400 x 200 x 200mrn. of 1 : 2 : 4
mix (l ccntcnt : 2 coalse sancl : 4 gradcd stonc aggrcgatc 20mm. noninal sizc).
It shall bc so p¡acc(l that tha bottom pin shall facc Lrpwards ancl top pin clownwíìlds,
jì ordcr that tlìc gatc may not be rcnroved by lifting over pirs.
1107.3.2. Onc hook with cyc 450rnnr. long of l0nrn. diamctrc shall bc
plovidcd for cach slluttcr to kccp it lìxerì in opcn position. Thc hook shall bc fixocl
in wall nrasonry with wooc{cn block and thc cyc shall bc lìxcd on 6rnrn, thick M,S.
platc as staplc and fixcd itl thc shuttcr framc with rivct or wcld.
1107.3.3, A ccmcnt concrote block l50m x l00m x 200mnt in I :2:4
nrix (l ccnrcnt : 2 coarsc sÍìrìcl : 4 gradcd stouc îggrcgatc of20nm. nomiual sizc)
shall bc cmbcddccl in thc flool rt junction of two slìutters so that tho door shuttcr
o¡cns oniy outsi<lc ¡rnd not insidc.
1107.3.4. Thc shuttcrs shall also bc provided with lockings arrangcmcnts
antl two handlcs of the shape and pattern as apploved by thc Exccutivc Engineer,
1107.4. Pairrting :-This nlay bc douc as pcr SS : 1105,4
I107.5. Measurement :-Thc wiclth an(l height of shuttars shall bc mcasurctl
corrcct to 0.01 of a metrc and the alea shall bc rvorkcd out in sq.n, correct to 0.01
of a sq. rn.

1107.6. Rate :-Tho Ìate shall include thc cost of material and labour
involvcd in all thc opetations dcscribcd ¿bovc, Nothing extra shall be paid for
Çerncnt concrcta blocks or wooclcn blocks nor anything dcductcd lor these from
the rnasonry of wall. Thc unit rute shâll be per square ntetrc.
Specif¡cation No. 1108
Rolling Shutters
1108.1. Gcneral :
Rolling shuttcrs conlplcte with acccssorics shall bc
obta¡ned flonr a firm as spccìficd lìonr a firm of repute. Thcsc shall bc suitablc
fbr fixing in thc position as specificd i.c., outsidc or insidc on or bclow lintel or
bctwccn jambs of thc opcning. Thc cloor slìall bo cithcr push and pull typc or.
opcratccl with chair ancl crank device supplied by the firm. Shuttors upto l2 square
mctrcs shall bc ofpush and pull type and shuttcrs with an arca ofovcr l2 squarc
mctrcs shall goncrally be providecl with rcduction gaar opcratccl by mcchanical
 THIì A,P, STANDARD SPECIIIICATIONS
bcurings arc spccificcl
clcvicc with chain or hancllc, For easy opcratiott, in casc batl-lhcsc
shall bc paicl lor
*,tt-purtt and pull type liorn 900 tá liOtt squarc mctres
scpatatclY,
1108.2. Rolling Shntt€rs :

with 80nm'
110t1,2,l, Thcse shall consist of 125¡nm thick or as specifìctl
with an
rr¡,S. toifs of U"rt qtrality milcl steel shect machinc rollctl and straightcned
togathcr throtrghout
lif""tiu" tridg" rlcpth of l6mrn.. Lakhs shall bc intcrlocked
lJngth ina joincd togethc¡ at thc entl with cnd locks Thcsc shall
bc
tl
"l, ""ii'"orì spccially tlesigned pipe shafts'
mountod
'thc sPring
I108.2.2. The springs shall be of coilecl typo of bcst quality
shall bc manufacturcd ftäm ústcd high tcnsile spring stcel
wire or strip of aclequate
ai spring pipc shalìs' ctc shall
tirüg,-rt i" ¡ii""ll thc shuttsrs in positions The '
bc sripponcd on slrong mil(l stccl or mallcablc ciìst irol) brückcts'
jointless and of
1108.2.3. Both tbe sidc guiclcs and botton'ì rail shall be
singlc piecc of Plcssad stecl.
1108.2.4. Top oovcr of shaft, spring ctc, shall be of thc sârnc
mí¡tarials
¿s that of lath and exha payment shall be madc for this'
1101ì.3. Itixing ;

ll0s.3.l.Bracketsshallbefixcdonthelintolorunclcrthclintelasspccificd
slrall thcn bc
rvith raw plLrgs ancl sc¡cw bolts, etc The shaft along with the spling
fixcd on thc brackcts.
thc side
1108.3.2. Thc lath partition (shuttcr) shtll bc hicì on grottnd ancl
thcn bc
gui,f" Junn.ft shall be bound with it with ropes, ctc Thc shuttcr shall
v/ith bolts and ntLts Thc side
iiu""¿ in ooritlon ancl top fixccl with suspension shaft
to the walls through the platc
i¡i"ì"it l"¿ thc oovcr frarne shall thcn bc fixed of stccl
lJJ"¿ ,t thc guiclcs These Plates and bracket shall bc fixed by mcans holts shall bc
r"r.* U"io and" raw plugs driìled in the wall' Thc plates and scrcw
invisiblc Fixing shall bc clone aocuratcly
i" plastel tå mãkc their location
";""lot
i" o *otL*un likc manner that tho opcration of thc shutter is casy ancl smooth
shall bc
ll08'4' Mcasuremcnt :-The actual arca of thc rolling shuttcrsmeasurcd
shall bc
workcd out in square metres corlect to 0 01 of a sq m' The width
¿, ì¡" *idttt of the shuttcr including portions hiclclen in the guiclc cltannels and
ìì"itî, J.li .*sured as the lengtñ of thc shutter from, the bottom of the locking
U"
pluä to thc top of tho laths incltrrìing portions abovc the opcn¡ng'
Widths and heights shall bc measured correct to 001 ofa
motre'

1108.5. Rate :-Thc rate shall include tl'ìc cost of matcrials and
labour
¿cscribecl abovc çxccpt for top covçr' ball bcarings'
inuotuJin all thc opcrations,
.chain paid for
,",i.".¡."i""r dcuicc of and crank operations, which shall be
separately. Thc unit ratc shall bc per square motla
Specil¡cat¡on No' I 109
ClamPs for Ceiling Fans
ll09.l. ClamPs
 s,s, I 109 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK 3II3

- I 109. I . I . Fan clamp shall bc fixcd during the laying of RCC slab with thc
shapc-l as shown ìn Fig. 1109.1. This shall bc madc of |(rmm. dia MS. bar bc
to shape. Thc over all height of tlte clanrps shall bc made to suit the depth ofthe
slab.
TYPICAL DESIGN OF M.S. FAN CLAMPS
(Not to Scale) fop of slab
l.-' 200mm. *l**

Reinfolce-
ment

'100mm
Exoosed looo shall be

16mm. Dia T
Where Fan Clamp ¡s to be fixed during laying of R.C,C. Slab
[Fis. No. 1109.1]
I109.1.2, Fan clamp for bcams shall bc shown in Fig. I109.2. lt shall bo
similar to thc abovo except that its hoight shall bc greater dcpcnding on thc dcpth
of thc bcam cttt' Note :-Fan damp shalt be ptaced ¡n pos¡tion such that
¡ts projection arms are in the line of length of beam.

Where Fan Clamp is to be f¡xed during laying of R.C.C" Beam

[Fig. No. 1 109.2]
3 tì4 TI.IË A.P. STANDARD SPECIF'ICATIONS

1109.2. ltixing of clâmps in slabs and bca¡ls :-llolcs for inserting thc
Exccutivc
fàn clamps in thc posiìions shown in the drawing or as irìstructod by the
Ensineei shall bc m¡clc in thc shtLttcring after thc latt€r has bccn fixcd in position'
Áä"r rt""l rcitrtorcctncnt is ticú, fan clanrps shall be fixcd with thcir loops truly
vertical ancl at thc corroct ctcpth from thc unclcrside of thc slab or bcâm and tho
planc of thc loops shall bc tmly parallcl or at right anglcs to. tbc lincs of walls
is clirectccl by thc Iìxcctttivc Engineer in thc case of slabs ancl parallcl to linc of
bcams in thó case of the lattar' Thc arms and thc loop shall bc ticd to thc
¡cinforccmcnt, citìrcl clircctly or through Ctttpicces of M S bals with attncaled
stcclwirc. Thc clamps shall neithcr be clisttrrbed otrt of position clttting concrctitrg
nor shall thcy bc bcnt out of shapc whctr shuttcring of slabs or boanls
is renrovccl

Thc exposccl portion of loops of the clamp shall bc givcn two or more coats
of paint, incluclilg priming coat, of rl,ocl" ot oldercd by thc llxccutivc Erlginccr'
1109.3. Me asurcmcnt :-Clanlps shall bc countcd in numbc¡s
thc cost of labour
1109.4. I{âtc :--Thc ratc pcr fart clamp shall inclutlc 'fhe
and nratcrials involvccl in all tha opcrâtions clcsclibed abovc unit ratc shall
bc pcr ttturbcr.
- S,S, I2OI PAINTING AND VARNISIIINC 385

sEcTloN 12
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PAINTING AND
VÀTTNISHING
CONTENTS

SI. SpeciJicutiort Nanc of Specificttìon Page

N¿s,

l. 1201 Painting - GcDcral 385

2. 1202 Removing old paint with patcnt paint rcmover 389

3. 1203 Removing old paint with caustio soda soltrtion 390

4. 1204 Rcmoving old paint,¡/ith blow lamp 390

5, 1205 Painting witlì wood prcsorvatiYc 390

6. 1206 Coal tarring 39r

7, 1207 Painting priming coat on wood, iron or plastered surfaces 391

L t 208 Painting with ready mixcd paint 393

9. 1209 Painting of G.l. shccts with reacly mixed paint 394

10. t2l0 Sp|ay painting with flat wall paint on ncw work
including priming coat 394
t1. 12|| Spray painting with flat wall paint on old work 395
12. l2l2 Painting with synthctic cnamcl piìint 396
13, 1213 Painting with aluminimum paint 396

14. l2l4 Painting with acid proof paint 397

15. l2l5 Paint with anti-corrosive bitunrastic paint 397

16. t2t6 Wall painting with plastic cmulsion paint 397

I7. l2l7 Varnishing 398

t 8. 1218 Oiling with raw linsecd oil 401

19. t2t9 Wax polishing with rcady made wax polish 401

20. t220 Painting cast iron rain ìvatcr, soil, wastc and vcnl
pipes ancl fittings including coat 402

21. l22l Lcttcrs with pa¡nt 403

22. 1222 Frcnch polishing 403

SPecification No. {201

Painting - Gcneral
1201.1. lVlatcrials :-Paints, oils, vamishes, ctc., of aPproYed make shall
il
be usccl. Approvecl paints, oils or varnishes shall be brought to the sitc of work

[ÂPDSS - 25]

i,
!-
 TFII] A,P. STANDA,RD SPECIFICATIONS

in thcil oligirral containcrs in sealed conclition, 'I'he materials shall be brought itr
at â tir'ì10 in adcquatc quantitias to suflìcc for thc whole work oÌ atleast fbr a
lolthnight's work.
1201.2. Conrnencing of work :

1202.2.1. Parntilrtg shall not bc startcd rtÀtil the Exectttivc Enginccr has
inspactccl thc itcms of work to bc paintcd,

1202.2.2. P'àit'tting cxccpt the priming coat shall gcncrally bc takcn on haucl
only aftel all othcr builtlcr's work is practically. finished.
1201.3. Preparation of surfacc :

1201.3.1. Thc surlacc shall be thoroughly cleanccl and dustetl. All rust, dirt,
scales, srnokc and grcasc shall be tholoughly lctnovccl bcforc pailìtìng is staltcd.
In thc c¿ìsc of old paìntccl surfaccs tho olcl paint shall bc rcmoved by any mcthocl
specìficcl in SSs :1202, 1203 ancl 1204. Wherc a patont paint lcrnovcr is rtsed fo¡
rcmoving ol(l paint tlìc surfacc shall bc washccl down with mincral tLtrpelline to
rcrnove all tlaces of paraffÌn wax which fort¡s onc of thc ingrctlicnts of Patcllt paint
rcrnovcr ancl which il kcpt in place will provcnt tho paint from drying. The prcparecl
sruface shall lrave ¡cccivccl thc approvnl of thc Excoutivc Engincer after inspcction
bclorc f¡rinting is cornurcnccd.
1201.4, Application ; -Bcforc pouring into smirller containc¡s fol trle thc
pailt shall bc stirrccl thoroughly in its container. Whcn applyirtg also thc paint shall
bc continuously stirred in the snrallcl containcrs so that its consistcncy is kcpt
uniform.

1201,4.1. The painting shall be done evcnly ând smoothly by means of

clossing and laying off, thc lâtcr in tha direction of the grain of wood. Thc crossing
aucl laying ofÏ cotrsists of covcling thc alca over with paint, brushing the surlacc
harcl for thc fìrst timc ovcr anrl thcn brushing rìlternatcly in oppositc dircctjons two
or thrcc tin'rcs ancl thcn filally brushing lightly in a clìrcction at right ânglcs to tho
samc. ln this proccss no brtLslt urarks shall bc left aftcr thc laying off is finishccl.
Thc frLll proccss of crossing ancì laying olf will constihrte one coat.
1201.4.2. Wherc so stipulatcd the painting shall be <lonc with spray. Spray
machinc usccl nay bc (a) high prcssurc (srnall air aperture) type or (b) a low
plcssurc (ìargc ail gap) type, clepencling on thc naturc and locatiotr of work to bc
carricd out. Skillcd and cxperienccd workmen shall be cmployed for this class of
work. Paints uscct shall bc brought to the rcquisitc consislcncy by adding a suitablc
thinncr.

1201.4.3. SpLaying shall bc dore only when dry condition prcvails.

1201.4.4. Dach coat shall bc allowed to dry out thoroughly ancl lubbcd
srnooth bcfore tlìc ncxt coat is applied. This shall bc facilitatcd by thorough
vcntilation.
1201,4,5, Each coat cxceÞt tho last coat shall be lìghtly rubbed down with
sand papcr or finc pumicc stonç and dust clcancd ofl beforc thc next coat is l¿rid.
 S.S. 12OI PAINTINC AND VARNISÉIING 387

- 1201.4.6. No lelt over paint shall be put back into the stock tins Whcn
not ir'ì uso tlìc containcrs shall be kept propelly closccl.
1201,4.7. No hair marks from the brush or clogging of paint pucldlcs in
thc coïnets of panels, anglcs of moulding etc., shall be lclt on the work.
1201.4.8. In paiuting doors and windows tlìc putty round thc glass pancls
shall also be p¿intcd carc bcing takcn to sec that no Point stains eto., arc lcfl on
thc glass. Tops of shuttors ¿rntl surfaces in similar hidden locations shall not bc lcft
out in painting
1201.4.9. ht painting stecl work spccial carc shall be takcn whilc painting
ove¡ bolts, nuts, rivcts, overlaps, etc.
1201.5. Brùshcs atrd Containcrs :-Aftcr work, the brushcs shall bc
completcly cleaned of paint and linseecl oil by rinsing with turpcntinc. A brrtsh on
whióh paint has <lried up is ruincd and shall on no account bo uscd fbr paìnting
work. The containcrs whan not in use shall be kcpt closecl ancl ficc fïom ai¡ so
that paint does not thickcn and shall also be kept safc frorn dust Whcn thc paint
has trccn usctl, thc containors shall be washcd with turyantinc and wipcd dry with
soft clcan cloth so that thcy are clean atrd can be usccl again
1201,6. PI'ecautions :-All fiuniture, fixturcs, glazitrg, floors etc, sh¡ll bc
protectccl by covcring and stains, smeals, splashings, if any shall lre rcmovccl and
iny damagc done shall bc macle good by the contractor at his cost
1201.7. Mcasuremcnt :

l20l-7.1. All inner measurcmcnts shall be in n'ìetros, corrcct to 0 01 of a

mctlc, All arcas shall be worked out in sq. m. correct to 0.01 of a sq m,
1201.7.2. Small articles not excccding l0 square decimetres (0.1 sqm) of
painted surfaccs whelc not in conjunction with similar painted work shall be
cnunìeràtcd.
1201,7,3. Painting upto l50mm. in width or in girth and not in conjunction
with simila¡ paintcd work shall be given in running metres
1201.7.4. In nreasuring painting, vamishing, oiling, ctc, ofjoìneLy and
stccl work etc., tho coelficicnts as in following table shall be uscd to obfain a¡ca
payable. Thc cocfficients shall bc applied to thc tÌrcas mcasurecl flat (and not
girthed) in all cases.
Table 1201-A
Tablc of coefficients to bc applied over arcas of tliffcrent surfaces
to get cquiyalcnt Plain areas

.9/.No Descriplíon of work lvl ul t i ply i ng Co -e|Jìcients

I Battc¡'ì of cloors and windows, Ir/, (for cach sidc)

2 Pancllcd cloors ancl windows lrl, (for cach sidc)
3 Ilon barrccl doors r{, (fol each side)
4 lron barred dools with battcn and shcct, l7l, (for each sidc)
388 TFIE A.P- STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

5. Batton windows with iron bars |,/ (for cach side)

6. Vcnctian windows lv., (for cach side)
7. Vcnctìân windows with iron bars 2 (for each side)
8, Glazcd windows with iron bars I (for each side)
9. Glazcd windows with iron bars t¡ (for cach sidc)
10. Glazecl shutters (measured over shuttcrs only) /, (for each side
11. Pancllc(l or framcd and braccd <loors, windows etc, l'lu (for cach sidc)
12, Lcdged ancl bracccl ot lcdgcd, battc¡ed and braced
cloors winclows, etc, lt/r (for cach sidc)
13. Flush dools, ctc. 1 (for cach side)
14. Trellis (or Jaffri) work onc way or hvo way 2 (for painting all
ovcr)
15. Calvcd or cnriched work 2 (for cach sidr:)
16. Weathcr boarding 2 (for cach sidc)

17. Wood singlc roofing lY, (for each side)

18. Boardirrg with covcr fillcts and rnatch boarding. t'l.ro (for cach sidc)

19, Titlc ancl slatc battcning tlu (for painting all

ovcr)
2-0. Plain shcctc(l steel cloors or windows t% (for cach sidc)
21. Fully gllzcd or guuzccl stccl rloo¡s and windows ,/,(for cach sidc)
22. Corrugate shceted stecl doors or win<lows l,ln (for cach .sidc)
23. Collapsiblc gatcs 1t/, (for painting all
ovcr)
24. Rolling shutters of intc¡locked laths. t'/4 (for cach side)
25. Expanded mctal, harcl drawn steel wire fabric of
approvcd quality, grill work and gratings in guard
bars, balustrades, railings ancl partitions (for painting all
over)
26. Opcn palisaclc felcirrg and gates including standard,
bmces, rails, stays, etc. in tinber or stecl (for painting all
over)
The height shall bc takcn from tho bottom of the lowcst rail if thc palisades
do not go bclow it or from thc lowcr end of palisâcles if they project bclow
thc lowcst rail, upto thc top of palisades but not upto the top of standards
ifthey atc higher than thc palasidcs,
27. Collugatcd iron shccting in roofs, sidc, cladding, etc. l.14 (lbr cach side)
28. 4.,C. corrugatcd sheeting in roofs, sidc cladding, etc. 1,20 (for caqh side)
29. Semi-corrugated shceting in roofs, side
^.C.
cladding, etc., or Nainit¿ìl pattcrn using plain sheets 1.10 (for each sìdc)
30. Wirc gauzc shuttors including painting of wirc gauzc I (for cach sicle)
- 1202 PAINTING AND VARNISFIING 389
S.S.

1201.8. Rate :

1201.8.1, The unìt râtc shall be per l0 sq.m. of painted arca ancl shalì
incluclc cost of all Ìabour, scaflolcling and materials involved in all the opcratious
clescribccl abovc
1201,8.2. Small articles not cxccecling 0.1 sqm and not in corìjunction
with similar painted work shall bc paicl per each.
I 201 Painting upto l50mn in width or in girth and not in conjunction
.tì.3.
with sìmilar painted wolk shall be pai<l por running matro,
Specificat¡on No' 1202
Removing Old Paint with Patent Paint Remover
1202.1. Paint r¡)mover :
1202.1,1. Patent painl removcrs shall consist of volatile organic liquids
thickcncd with waxcs and other ingrcdients to rctard tlìe evaporation of the liquid
ancl to cnable a substantial layer of rcmovcr to be appliecl to thc sttrface'

1202.1.2. 'fhe paint rcmovcr shall be of spccificd brancl and makc

1202.1.3. lt shall bc free from alkaline mattor and rìon-caustic so that it
can be hancllcd by workmen without irìjury lt shall be of non-inflammable quality
(as far as possible).

1202.2. APPlication :

l2O?..2.1. removcr shall be used wh*e bulning off with blow lamp
P ¿ìnl
is not suitablo. The paint removcr shall be applicd liberally with a brush ancl allowcd
to romain on thc iurface for a periocl of depcnding on thc particular brand of
rcmover used and on the thickness of the paint coating to be removed Whcn the
point film lifts ancl w¡inklcs undcr the action of the telnovcr it shall bc stripped
*ith o rhurp instrument, tf the filnr is not thoroughly removcd, a seconcl coat of
,"*ou", ,r.roy bc applicd if neccssary over such patchcs and then the film thoroughly
scrappccl off.

l2O2:2.2. After rhe surface has been strippcd it shall be washed dow¡ with
mineral turpentinc to remove all traces of paraffin wax, which forms one of the
ingredients of patcnt paint rcrìrovcr and which if lcft in placc will prevent the paint
from drying.
1202.2,3. Tltc cleancd surfacc shall be suitably preparcd for application of
point or other finish.
1202.3. Precâutions :

1202.3.1. WheLe tho paint removcr used is of inflammable typo suitable

procâution against risk of firc shall be taken.
1202.3.2. Ncighbouring paintetl surfaces which arc not to ltc treated shall
bc properly protoÇtccl from contact with paint rcmover.
 390 'TFIE A,P, STANDARD
SPECIFICATIONS

Specification No. 1209

Rcmoving Old paint with Caustic Soda Solution
1203.1. Method :*Caustic soda dissolved in 4g items its volumc of water
shall. bc applied to thc old paint with a brush ancl whcn the paint film lifts ancl
wrinkles it shall bc thoroughly scrapped off in the samc way is in clause
1202.2.
Aftcr thc surfì¡ce has bccn strippccl thoroughly, it shall be rinsecl with scveral
chunges of clcan watcr to ronìovc a traccs of arkari which if alowcd
to remain
t9 spoil the new point applied ovc¡ it. A littlo acetic acicl or vincgar aclcìed
lte.liabJe
to the final changc of rinsing watcr helps to ncutralise any remaining álkali.
1203.2. Precaution :-Caustic soda as its nanc inrplies is a corrosivc
liquid ancl carc shall bo takcn to sce thât no liquid spills ovcr ihc skin or.clothing.
Spec¡fication No. 1204
Iìemoving of Old paint with Blow Lamp
. 1204.1. Thc paint shall bc removcd cither with a blow lamp or with an
air-acctylenc cquipmcnt. Thc flame shall be allowcd to play upon tic paìnt just
cnough to softon it without charring either thc paint or thc bac[gróuncl,
Thc softcned
paint shall thcn be rernovcd with a stripping k;ife following the flamc
as it is movecl
up thc sulfacc.

. .. 1204.1.1. Burning off shall bcgin ât thc botton

shall proceccl upwarcls,
ofa vcrtical su¡.face ancl

1204,2. Prec¡ution :-Removal with blow lamp shall not be clone on

nanow or ca¡vcd under cut su¡faces or where therc is risk áf.lon,oge to neighouring
matelials such as panes in glazed windows.
Specification No. 1205
Painting with Wood preseivative
1205.1. AII rclevanr clauses of SS : l20l shall apply.
'1205.2. Wood prcscrvativc
:

1205.2.1. Oil typc wootl preservativç of approvccl make shall be used.

1205.3. Preparâtion of surface :
1205.3.1. The painting shall bc done only if the su¡face is pcrfectly
clry
to permit good absorption, All dir1, dust or other foreign mattcr shall bc
removcâ
from ths sr¡rlace to be painted, All roughncss shall bc -sand prcparecl and
cleanctl.
1205.4. Appticâtion :

1205.4.1. New work :-The presorvativc shall be appliecl liberally

with a
stout brush and not daubcd with rags or cotton \¡r'asro. It shãll be appliei
with a
pencil brush at the joints of wood work. The first coíìt shall be allowcri
atrcrìst 24
hours to soak in beforc Jhc second (thc final) coat is applied. Thc second
coat is
applied in thc same manner as the first coat. The excess oi prcservative
which docs
not soak into the wood shall be wiped off with a clcan àry piece
of cloth.
- PAINTING AND VAIINÍSIIINC 391
s.s. 120?
nr¿tnner as for
1205.42 Otd worlc :-Thc work shall be done in thc samc'clonc' -
coat shall be
ncw w;;k in clause 1205.4 1 cxccpt thât only onc
SPecification No' 1206
Coal Tarring
1206.1. All rclcvant clausos of SS : l20l shall apply'
1206.2. Materials :

1206 2.1. Co(tl tar .Coal tar of approvcd qutrlity ancl gtade shall bc uscd'
" 'of
gns unslakcd lime has bccrr acldod shall
fn" tn,lioìu"rv litrc of which 200
bc heatccl till it bagins to boil lt tli"tt bc trken olf thc firc an-ll kctoscne oil
ii tfå*lfat thc ratc of I part of kctoscnc oil to 6 to l6
'¡nfi parts ofcoâl
the
;il; ;;lu,;; un,t sti.rc,l thoroughly Thc adclition of linrc is for Prcvcnting
"ã,f*f'r"
coal tiu fl ol¡ rrtnning.
1206.3. PreParation of Sttt fàce :

th¡ìt sand paparing

1206.3.1. lt slrall bc clonc as pcr clattse 1205 3 cxcc¡t
no, n"-"""ä,:y. Wl',"r" iron work is'to bc prinlccl
it shall icctl from scales and
i,
rust bcforc Painting
1206.4. ÀPPlication :

|2(J6'4'l.Newworú:-Thcntixturcshallbcappliedashotaspossiblcwìtlr
o Ur,o1,.ih" .""oncl coat shall U"loppti"a
only altcr thó first cout t¡oroLrghly drìec1
,,.Whcrcoossiblcthcrrti.;lctobc.r¿lrcr]shallbcclippcdinthchotmixturclor.
;i-Jt.,ilit:ï; t".",iiviitt"" bc rtsccl for the first or sccond coat shall be
wilh keroscnc oil
ir,"t o.ro on¿ o tá tit'" pcr sq m rcspectively' Thinning
"ãi'ì"*
shall be suitably done to Qnsurc this
in the samc ¡ranner as for
1206.4.2. Old Llork:--.1'he work shall bc done
arca shall be tlone'
n"* *ol that only orìc coat using 0' 12 litre per sq m of
"*""pt
Specification No' 1207
Painting Priming coat on Wood, Iron or Plastered
Surfaces

120?.1. All rclevant clauses of SS : l20l shall apply

1207.2, Materials :

iron work or plastered shall

1207.2.1, Thc priming coat fot woocl work'
bc as spccificd.
of wotk or rcatly
' l2O'7 Thc priming coat shall be prcparecl at the sitc
22
macle primer of approved make shall bc
used'

1207 23. lf the primer lor woocl work

is to bc mixcd .at sitc it shall bc
doublc boilcd linsccd oil in
,.,r"oor",f f,oÀ a mixturc ofrcd leacl, white leacl ancl
thc'r¡rtio of 0.7kg : 0 7kg : I ìitrc
1207 2 4 Where primer for stccl work
is to bc mixed at sitc it shâll be
turpentinc in thc latio
pr"por"iiirorn o mixtLrrc of r"tl icutl, 'aw linsecd oil antl
of 2.8kg.: I litre:l litrc
 392 THE A,P, STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

1207.2.4. \Nhcre primcr for steel wor.k is to be mixecl at site it shall bç

prepalcd f'lom â mixture of rccl lcad, raw linseed oil and turpcntine in the ratio
of 2,8kg.: llitre:l litre,
l2O7,2,5. The specifications for thc basc vchiclc and thinncr for mixed on
site printers shall bc as follows:
(a) Ilthùe lead:-Thc white lcad shall be purc and frec fron) adultcrants
likc barium sulphatc and whiting.
(b) Red leqcl :-_Tltis shall bc in powdcr from and shall be frce from
adultcrants likç brick dust ctc,
(c) Raw linseed oil :-Raw linseed oil shall bc lightly viscous but clear
and of ycllowish colour with light browntinge, Its specific gìavity at a tcmperature
of 30 "C shall betwee¡r 0.923 and 0.928. Thc oil shall bc mcllow and swcet to the
tastc with vcry Iittle srnell, Thc oir shall bc of sufficiently matur.eri quality. oil turbid
or thick with acid and bittcr taste aùd rancid oclour ancl which remains stickv fo¡
a considcrablc time shall bc rejectod. The oil shall be of approvorl brand,
(d) Double boiled liuseed ot,l :-This shall bc nrore visious than thc raw
oil, havc dccpc| colour and spccific grâvity betwccn 0.931 and 0.945 at temporature
of 30 "C, It shall dry with a glossy surfacc. Thc oil shall be approvecl brancl.
(") Turpent¡ne:--Mincral turpantine, that is, petrolcum distillatc which has
th,e samc ¡atçof evaporation as vegctable turpcntinc (clistillate product of oleo¡esh
of conifcrs) shall bc uscd. It shall have no grcâse or other resìduc when allowed
to evaporatc.

1207 ,2.6. All the abovc materials shall be of approvcd make and brought
to site in their original packings in sealed condition.
1207,3. Preparâtion of Surlhcc :
1207.3.1. LVoorl work :

120'7.3.1.1. The wood tvork to be painted shall be dry and free from
moisturc. The su¡faces shall bo thoroughly cleanecl. All un"lr"n.r, shall bc rubbed
down smooth with sand paper and shall bc well dustcd. Knots if any shall bc
covcred with prcparation of red lead made by grinding red lcad in watcr ind mixing
with strong gluc-size ancl used hot.
1207.3.1.2. The surface treatcd for knotting shall be clry before painting
is applied- After a priming coat is applied the holes ind indentation o-n the surface
shall be. stoppcd witlì glazier's putty or wood putty. Stopping shall not be clofle
beforc th_c priming coat is applied as the wootl will absorL'th; oil in the stopping
and thc latcr is therefore liable to crack.
- 1207.3.2, Iron qnd steel work :*-All rust and scales shall be rcmoved, by
scrapping or by brushing with steel wi¡c brushes. Hard skin of oxide formcd on
the surface.of wrought iron during rollirrg which bccomes loosc by rusting shall
be removcd, All dust and dirt.shall bc thoroughly wiped away from thc surface.
lf the surface is wet it shall be dried before priming-coat is undertakcn.
-
s.s. 1208 PAINTING ÂND VARNISIIING 393

1207.3.3. Plqstered sutface :-Thc surfacc shall bc painted al'tsr it has

curecl and dricd complctcly. Trial patchcs of prirner shall be laid or intctvals and
where drying is satisfactory painting shall be takcn up. Bcforc primcr is applicd
holes and undì.rlations shall be filled uÞ with Þlastor of pairs ancl rubberì smooth
Whc¡c it is proposed to rtse enamel paint the pliming coat shall not be applicd
earlier thanl2 months aftcr Plastering in ordcr that thc evaporatiorì ofwatcr insi<l0
thc wall is not impeded.
1207.4. Application :-Thc primcr shall be applied witlì blushcs workcd
wcll ilto thc surfttcc and spreacl evcn and smooth. The painting shall bc clonc by
clossing aud laying off as dcscribed in clause 1201.4.1
Specification No. 1208
Paiuting with Ready Mixed Paint
1208,1. All rclav¿ìnt clauscs of SS ; 1201 shall apply.
12011.2. Paint :-Ready mixecl paints shall be of approvcd brand attd make
and of spccilicd shaclcs.
120[t.3. Prcparâiion of surfacc :

1208.3.1. New wood work:-This shall coÌìform to clauscs 1207.3.1.1. and

1207.3.1.2.
1208.3.2. New iion and sleel work'.-This shall conform to cllusc 1207.3.2.
1208.3.3. New plastered sutÍ(tce:-This shall conform to clausc 1207.3.3.
1208.3.4. OId wootl work i-lf thc okl paint is sound and firm and its
removal is considered unnecessary thc surface shall bc rubbed down with pumice
stonc after it has been cleaned of all smoke and grease by washing with lime and
rinsing vr'ith water ând drying. All dust and loosc paint shall be complctcly removed.
Thc su¡facc shall then be washed with soap ancl wate¡.
1208.3.4, L If thc okl painted surface is blistered or flaked badly old paint
shall bc complctely removed as spccificd and such rcmoval shall bc paid for
sepalatcly. Floles and cracks if any shall be stopped with glazicr's putty or wood
putty.
1208.3.5. Old iron and steel work:-11 the old paint is sound and firm
it shall bc rubbed with wire b¡ushes antl
and its rernoval is consi<lere<l unneccssary
any loosened paint taken off. All dust shall then be thoroughly wiped away.
1208.3.5.1, If the old painted surfacc is in bad condition and blistcrecl ancl
flakecl thc old paint shall be completely removed as spccified and st¡ch ¡cmoval
shall be paid for separately.
1208.3.6. Old plastered sutface:-lf tho old paint is firm and sound it shall
be cleanecl of grcasc, smoke, etc., and then all dust, dirt and loosc paint rcmoved
as specified in clause 1208.3.4.

1208.3.6.1. If thc old paint is ba<lly blistered and flakcd it shall bc completcly
rcmovecl as specifiecl in clause 1208.3.4.1.
394 1-IID A,P. S'I'ANDAIìD SPECIFICATIONS

1208.3.6.2. If beforc painting, îny portionof thc wall shows signs of

dampncss, thc c¿ìuscs shall bc invcstigatcclald thc damp sruficc shall be propcrly
hcatcd. Such tlcatmcnt shall bc paìd for scparatcly. A thin coat of white lead il
so leqLrilcd shall bc appliccL on thc wct or patchy portion of thc surface bcfbrc
painting is undcrtakon ancl this shall tre paicl cxtra,
1208.4. Application : This shall confornr k¡ clausc i201.4. Tho nt¡nrbc¡
ol coats to bc givcn shall bc as specifiecl in thc rìcscliption of thc itcm.
Specification No. 1209
Painting of G.I. Shcots with lleady Mixcd Paint
1209.1. All lclcvant clar¡scs of SS : l20l shall apply.
1209.2. Paints r-Rcady mixcd paint of approvccl brancl ancl make ân(l of
thc spccificcl shadc shall bc Lrscd.

1209.3. Preparation of Surtace :

1209.3.1. New work :-Thc painting of ncw G.l. shccts shall not usually
lrc clotrc till
the shccts havc wcathcrcrl for ¿rborLt a ycar. Whcu ncw shccts arç to
be pâintcd bcfolc they have weathclcd tlìcy shâll be trcatc(l with a nroldant solLrfion
plcpalcd by rnixing 38gnr. of coppcr âcctiÌto irì a litre oI soft rvatcl or 13gnr. ol
llydrochlolic acjd in a solLrtion of l3gnr. cach of coppcr chloridc, coppcl nìtratc
a¡tl anrnonium chloridc clissolvcd iu a litrc of soft wate¡, This qì.tantity of solution
is srLfficictt lor about 235 sq.rn. to 280 sq,rrr, ofarca ancl is appìiccl for ensuring
propcr aclhcsion of point. The painting with thc mordânt solLrtion shall bc pairl ibr
sc¡raratcly,
1209,3.1.1. Bcfore painting rvcathc¡ccl G,l. shccts rusty patchcs shall bc
complctely clcanecl with coarse cnlcry papcr and bnrsh. All grcasc rnarks also shall
bc rcnrovcci nncl thc surlàcc washccl ancl clriccl ancl rustcd surfacc shall bc touchcd
wìth lcady rrixccl paint of rcd lcacl.

1209.3.2. Old ryo¡*:--{fthc old paint is filn and spuncì it shall bo clcancd
of grcasc, smokc, etc. Thc surfacc shall thcn bc rubbcd clown wìth sancl pnpcr aucl
clustccì. l)usty patchcs sha)l bc cleancd up and touchcd with lcd lcad.
1209.3,2.1. If the old paint is blistelecl and flakcd it shall bc complctccl
lcrrovecl as specified. Such rcmoval shall bc paid for scparatcly.
1209.4. Application :-Thc numbcr gf coats to bc appliccl shall bc as
specifiecl in thc description of itom. In casc of corrugatccl G.l. shccts thc cròì,¡r'ns
of the cornrgations shall bc paintccl first and whcn thcse gcf driccl thc gcncriìl aoat
shall be given to ensurc uniforrn finish ovcr thc cntirc surfacc witlìout thc crowns
showing sigus of thinling. 'l'hc sccond or adclitional coats shall bc applicrl r.vhcn
the previous coat has clriccl.
Specification No. '121 0
Spray Painting with Flât \ âll Pâint on Nety Work
iucluding Prirning Coat
1210.1. AII rclevant classes of SS : l20l shall apply.
s.s. l2l I PA.INTING AND VARNISTIING

1210.2. Matcrials :- Thc prirning coat shall corrsist of "l)istcmpcring

Primcr" or "Ccrucut Ptimcr" as specificcl in thc dcscription of thc itcm ancl shall
bc approvccl btan<ì ancl makc.
I 2I 0.2.1 . Thc flat wall paint shall bc of approvcd bland and makc ancl of
thc spccìfiecL shadc.
1210.3. Prepalation ol surfhcc lbr pÌint¡ng coat I Thc sLrrlacc shall bc
pleparccl as spccificd in clausc 910.5.
1210.4.,4.pp1icîtion I

1210.4.1. Prinrcr cr¡ai '. . '1'hç specifictl primcl shall bc pairtccl ol spraycd
ovcr thc serfaoc in an cvctt a¡rcl t¡tlifbrnl laycr' Whcrc ncw walls iìrc Paintc(l thc
primcr coat shall bc a cerrtcut pritner. Whcn walls lrc Paintcd l2 months al'ter
oonplction cljstclnpcr' ¡rrirncl shall suffìcc
1210.4.2. Puinting : WIìen thc surfacc is dry thc splay paintirrg rvith thc
rvall paint in t¡nil'ornt and cvcn laycrs shall bc tlonc to tlìc requircd trutnbcr of coats
Each coat shall l¡e allorvctl to dry ovcrrìight ând Iightly rubbccl with vcly fìnc gradc
of sancl papcr urcl loosc particlcs brttshccl ofl bclbrc thc ncxt coat is sptayccl
l2(Jl.4.2.1. ff, ¿ìl-lcr thc fin¡l coal of wall pairtts ìs appliccl, tltc st¡rfìcc
obtainccl is not upto thc ntatk cluc to dclcctivc wotknranship ftlltlìcr ollc or lìlorc
coats as rcquilctl shalJ bc givcn aftcr lLrbbing clown thc surfacc ancl tlusting ofï all
loosc partrclcs to obtâ¡n a smooth ancl cvcn finish aDd no cxtta payment sltall bc
rnacle fot this.
1210.4.2.2. lf thcptitrcrorwall paint gcts thickcncd cluling thc applicatiotr
it slÌâll bc thinncd suitably with the thinncr rcco¡'tlncndecl by tlìc mantrfacturor.
1201.4.2.3. Atlcquatc vcntilation shall bc proviclcd to disporsc spray fttmcs.
F'ilancnts and floor shall bc protcctccl from tlrc spray
Specificat¡on No. 121 'l
Spray Painting with llât W¿ll Paint on Old Work
121 1.1. All rcÌcvatrt clattscs ol SS :1201 shall apply.

1211,2. l'aint: This shall conlbrm to clause l2ll,2.l.

1211.3. General :--Whcrc thc olcl paint is in sound condition rcncwal shall
bc carriccl ouf as givcn in clauscs 1211.4 to l2l L5. Othcrwise the old paint shall
be conrpletely stlippcd ancl sprây pitillling shall bc carriccl out as now work. Such
removal shall bc paid f'or separ¿ìtcly.
1211.4. Preparation ofsu¡face :-jfhe sutfàce shall bc rvashecl to rolllovc
chrst ancl cli¡t. A rnilcl cletclgent solutiotl likc soap watcr shall bc trsctl fbr washing
ancl thc sullacc shall also bc rubbcd down lightly with abrasivc papcr whcn clty
Any patchcs appcaring on tlrc surfacc shall fitst be touchcd up with a coat of pâint.
Thcsc shall l¡c allowecl to dry and thcn rtrbbcd down lightly,
l2ll.5. Application :-Thc pâint shall then bo appliecl with spraying
machinc irr a uniform and evcn laycr'. A sccond coat shall bc app)iecì whcrc
spcoifictl but only aftcr thc first coât is complctcly clry ancl harcl.
 1ì'IË A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

Specification No. 1212

Paitrting with Synthetic Enamel Paitt
1212.1. All relevant clauscs of SS : 1201 shall apply.
1212.2- PÃitrt i Synthetic enamcl paint of approvcd brand of fir'st class
quaìity and of thc spccificd shade shall bc used fo¡ thc top coat. An undcrcoat to
natch with top coat as rccommended by the ntanufacturer shall bc used.
1212.3. Prepârâtion of surf¿cc :
l2l?-,3.1. New r'vorlr :-This shall conform to'clausc 1108.3,
1213.3.2. Old Work:---Wh(rc thc cxisting pailìt is firm and sound it shall
be clcanccl of groase, smokc, ctc., and rubbcd with sand papcr to rcnrovc all loose
paint ancl loosc palticles dusted off. All patchcs antl cracks shall thcn bc trcatcd
with stopping ancl filler prepalcd with thc spccifiod paint, Thc surfacc shall again
bc ¡Lrbbccl and nradc smooth ancl uniform.
1212.3.2.1. lf the olcl paint is blistffcd and fìakcd it will be neocssâry to
complctcly rcnrovc thc sanre as spccificd. Such rcmoval shall be paid for scparîtcly.
1212.4. Applicâtion :

1212.4.1. New work :-Thc numbcr of coats including thc tnclucoat shall
bc as stipulatecl in thc clcscription of itcrn.
1212.4.1.1. (Jntlercoat :,-,Orìc cort of the spccifictl paint of thc clcsircd
shade suitccl to thc shaclc of the top coat shall applicd and allowecl to dry overnight.
It shall be rubbed ncxt clay with the fincst gradc of wet abrasive papcr to cnsuro
a smooth and evcn surface free fron brush ¡narks and all loose particles dustcd
off.
1212,4.1.2. I'op coats i-Top coats of paint of the specificd shadc shall
bc applicd aftar thc undercoat is thoroughly dry. If aftcr thc final coât is applic<l
thc surfacc obtaincd is not upto the mark cluc to dcfcctiye workmanship furthcr
onc or molo coats as rcquirecl shall be givcn after rubbing down thc surface and
dusling of all loosc particles to obtain a smooth and cvcn finish and no extrtr
paymcut shall bc maclc for this.
1212.4.2. Old worlrs :-The numbcr of coats as stìpulâted in thc item shall
be applied with the spccificd paint. Each coat shall l¡c allowecl to clry and rubbcd
down smootlì with very finc wet âbrâsive papcr to goi an cven glossy surfacc, If
however thc sLrrfaco obtaincd is not sâtisfâctory due to defcctivc workrnanship addi-
tionâl coats as requircd shall bc applied to get corroct finish without extra payrncnt.

Specification No. 1213

Painting with Aluminium Paint
1213.1. All relevant clauscs of SS : 1201 shall apply.
1213.2. Pâilt r-Aluminium paint of approvcd b¡ancl and make shall bc
used. The paint comcs in compact dual containcrs v/ith tho pâste and the mcdit¡m
separately, Thc two sball bc mixecl togethcr to propcr consistçncy bcfor.c usc,
S-S. 1216 PAINTING AND VARNISI'IING

1213.3. Preparât¡on of surlhcc :

1213.3.1. New sleel v'ork :-All rusl and scales shall bc removed by
sand paper'
scraping or brushing witlì stccl wire brushcs ancl then smoothelccl with
The sì.rrfaco shall be thorotrghly cleancd of dt¡st.

1213.3.2. New corrugøted G.I shttets:-This shall conform to clauscs

1209.3.1 and 1209.3 1 1
1213.3.2. Okt s¡eel work or corrugatetl G l sheels:-This shall conlorm
to clauscs 1209.3.2 ancl 1209 3'2'1.

1213.4. Application :-The number of coats to bc applìcd shall bc as

sriDulatod in thc clcicriptioD of thc itom Each coat shall be allowccl to dry
for 24
irái,rr rn¿ lightly rubb;d down with frne gradc sirnd paper and cluste<l bcforc the
is" apflicd. The finishecl surfacc shall prcscnt an evcn and uniform
n"*t
"oot
appearalìcc.
1213.4,1. As thc Aluminittm pastc is likely to settle in thc çontaincr carc
applied
shall bc takcn to frcqucntly stir the paint during use Thc paint shall also be
antt laitl off quickly as thc sttrfacc is othcrwisc not casily fìnished'

Specification No. 1214

Painting with Acid Proof Paint
1214.1. All Lelcvant clattses of SS : l20l shall apply
1214.2. Paint:-Acid proof paint of approvcd b¡and and make and of thc
spccificd shade shall bc uscd
1214.3. Preparâtion of surt'ace :-This shall corloÍm to clause 1208 3'
1214.4. Application :-This shall confornr to clausc 12074
SPecification No. 121 5
Painting w¡th Anti-corrosive Bitumastic Paint
1215.1. All rclevant clauscs of SS : 1201 shall apply.
1215.2. Paint :-Anti-corrosive hitumastic paint of approved brand and
make shall bc uscd,
1215.3. Prcpâration of surlace :--This shall conform to clause 1207 3'
1215.4. Application :-This shall conform to clause 12084 The drying
tine botwccn consecutivo coats shall bo not less than 3 hours
Specification No. 1216
Wall Painting with Plâstic Emulsion Pailtt
(Plastic cmulsion paints arc not suìtablc lor application on cxtcrnal surtàces
of wooà ancl i¡on ancl surfaces which arc liable to heavy contlensation and arc to
be usccl generally on nlasonry or plastered surlaces).
1216.1. All relcvant clauses of SS : l20l shall apply
 .IFIÈ]
A.P. STANDAIìD SPECTIICATIONS

1216.2. P¡ìint :-Plastic cmulsion paint of appl.ovc(l braud ancl tnakc of

thc spcciñcd shaclc shall l¡c uscd,
1216.3. Preparation of surface :
1216.3.1. New ryork ;-,This shall conform to clausc 910.4.
1216.3.2. Olcl vvt¡r& ¡-This shall conform to thc relcvant portions ofclausc
1208.3. Thc surfacc bcfolc application ofpaint shall l¡c fìattcnccì wcll to gct thc
proper flat vclvoty finish aftcr painting.
1216.4. Application :
1216.4.1 , New wot k t- Tl.rc rììrmbcr of coâts shall bc as stipr¡latcd in thc
item. The paint shall be applicd in thc Lrsual marrner rvith brush or roilcr..I.hc paint
drics by cvaporation of the water. contctìt and as soon âs thc watcr has çvaporatcd
tho ñ¡m gcts harcl ancl thc ncxt coat can be applied. Thc timc of drying variòs fronr
onc hour on absolbcnt su¡fàccs to 2 to 3 hours on non-absorbe¡rt sur.faccs. Thc
thinning ol cmulsion shall bc ¡lone with watcl and not with tu¡.¡)çnfinc. Thinning
with watcr will bc particularly lequircd l-or tlrc unde¡.coat which is applicd on th"o
absorbcnt srrrlacc, The quantity of thiultcr to bc aclcletl shall bc pcr nranufacturcr.'s
instlr¡ctions. 'l'hc surl'acc on finishing shall prcsent a flat vclvcty snrooth finish. If
aftcr thc ñnal coat is appliccl thc sLrr.facc obtaiucd is not upto tho mâÌk duc to
tlcfoctivc workmanshìp firrthcr ono or nìorc coats as requirccl shall be givcn aftcr
lubbing down thc surfacc and clusting of all loose particlos to obtitin a snìooth and
cvcn finish anrl no cxtra pây¡tìent shall bc madc lor this,
1216.4.2. Okl work .,The number of coats to bc applicd shall bc as
specificd in thc dcscription of the item. Thc application shall bc as spccificd in
clausc 1208.4 cxÇept thât thinning with water will not normally be réquirecl.
1216.5. Precâutions :

121ó.5.1, OId brushes ifthey arc to be used with omulsion paints shall be
complctely clried of turyentine or oil paints by washing in warnr soap vr'atcr, Brushcs
shall be qLrickly washed in watcr immcdiatcly aftcr use and kept immcrscd in watcr
tluriug break periods to prcvent thc paint from hartìening on the b¡ush.
1216.5.2. In the prcparation
.bâsa puttics of walls for plastic ernulsion painting no oil
shall be uscd in filling cracks, holes, ctc. Thesc shall ba fillod with
plastcr of paris and rubbed smooth.
1216.5.3. Splashcs on the floors etc., shall be clcancd out withoüt delay
as they will bc difficult to remove after hardcning.
1216.5.4. Washing of surfaces treated with cmulsion paints shall not bc
rlonc within 3 to 4 wcoks of application.
Spec¡f¡cation No. 1212
, Varnishing
1217.1. Material :

121'7.1.1. l/arnishing :-Varnish shall bc of the spccified typc ancl shall

-
conform to thc following relcvant IS Stanclards. products oarìying I.S.i. ccrtiñcation
mark shall bc preferred,
s.s. l2l7 PAINTINC AND VARN f SIIINC

lS : 337-1975 Spccificatiou for varrtish finishìng, intetior'

IS : 338- 1952 Spccification for varnish ttndercoating, cxtcrior natur¿¡l rcsiÛ'
IS : 339-1952 Spccifioation for varnish undercoating, cxtcrio¡ synthetic
rcsi¡r.

1S : 342-1952 Spccification f'or varnish, Acid rcs¡sting.

IS : 347-1975 Specification for vamish, shellac for gcncral purposes
lS : 524-1968 Specification fol varnish finishiug, cxtcrior synthctic
IS | 525-1968 Spccification for varnish fìnisbing' cxtcrior antì gcncral
purposcs.

l2l7,2. Prcpanfio¡r of surface :

l2l'7 New l/o¡l¡ :--Ncw woocl work to bc varnishcd shall bc plannccl

.2.1,
snooth. Knots shall lrc cut to a slight dcpth. Cracks and holcs shall bc clcancd of
as fbllows'
clust. Thc knots, cracks, ctc., shall thcn bc fillcd in with wood putty rrìado

1211.2.1.1. On a piccc ofwood say 200nlnr. x l5Olnm on thc face antl

on thc sides wlìcro cross grâins appoar a sll)âll quantity of gltrc-sizc shall bc poLrrecl
ancl thc surfacc scra¡rcd with thc cclgc ol a finc carpcntcr's chiscl Finc saw clust
shall bc rnixccl with thc gluc and tha stiff pastc tht¡s formccl shall l¡c usccl fot thc
filling.
.2. 'fhe fillings whcn clry shall bc rtrbbcd clown with iì c¿uPcnter's
121'7.2.1
filc then thc clttiÌc surfiìca shall bc rtlbbed clown perfcctly sntooth with (necliunt
ancl
graincd ancl finc) santl papcrs and wipe<l with dly clean cloth so that it presonts
ã uniforur appcarancc. In no case shall and papers bc rubbed across thc grâins as
in this case óvcn thc fincsl marks will bc visible whcn thc varnishing is applied'
1217.2.2. Okl work .-If thc old vamishcd surfacc is firm and sound it
shall be clcaned of grcase ancl dilt with turpentinc and thcn rrrbbed with wet sand
papor urìlil thc surfacc is clcan and smooth. lt shall be driecl ancl wipcd clean with
à ioft cloth, Knots, holes and cracks shall bc fillcd as in clattsc l2l7 2 l. The cntirc
surfacc shall thcn be rubbed down smooth with sancl paper and wipecl clean.
1217.2.2.1. If thc old vatnished surface is pcclcd or crackcd thcn it will
bc necessary to removc the ont¡¡c sutfacc as specifiecl and sr'rch removal shall be
pairl for scparately, Furthcr the varnishing itsclf shall havc to bc donc like new wo¡k
and shall bc paid for.as such.
121?.3. Sizing and Trarsparcnt wood fìllcl coat : Thc surface shall
then bc troatad with cithct gltrc-sìzing or with transport wood filler coat ¡s stipulated
in thc clcscliption of item,
l2l7 .3.1. Sizing :-Whcn sizing is stipulatcd a coat of thin clean gluc-size
shall be appliecl hot on thc su¡facc. Whcn dry the surfacc shall bc rubbcd down
smooth with sancl papcr ancl cleanecl. It shall then bc given another coat of gltlo-
sizc nearly col¡l ancl allowecl to cìry. Thc sizcd wood work shall again bc rubbed
down smoothly with finc sand papcr ancl clcanecl The surfacc shall bc pcrfcctly
clry and all dust shall be removed not only fiont tlto surfacc but also fronl thc cdges
and joints bcforc varnishing is commcnccd lf the wood work is to be staincd thc
400 ]'FII] A.P. STANDARD SPËCIFICATIONS

staiuing colour shall bc mixcd with thc seconcl coat of tlìe sizc which mLrst bc
applicd cvcnly and quìckly keeping thc colour on thc flow. Any joining up with
wolk a)rcacly clry will show badly. Thc objcct ol application of thc glLre-sizc is to
seal thc polcs in wood to prcvcnt absorption of thc oil in the varnish.
1217.3,1.1. Cluc-sizing is inadvisablc on floors, table tops and othcr
horizontal surfaces IìkcJy to carry wet housc-lrold rLtcnsils which arc likcly to disturb
thc siza coatings and thus cxposc bare woocl. Whcrc glue-sizing is omitted to bc
donc tho ratc for thc work shall be suitably reduccd.
121i.3.2. Ápplicat¡on oÍ ttaìtspat etlt tvoctd lller:-Wherc instcatl of gluc-
sizing, transparcnt woocl fillcl application is stipulatecl in thc itcm thcn thc surfacc
pteparcd as in clausc 1217.2.1 shall bc given an application of thc filler with brush
or rag in such a way that thc filler fills up all thc pores and inde¡rtatiols ancl lcvcls
up tlrc srrrfacc. lt shall bc âllowcd to rfty lor 24 hours. Then it shall bc cut iìnd
rubbed with cmcry papor so that the surfacc of wood is laid bare with thc fillcr
only in the porcs and crcviccs of the wood.
1217.4. Application of Varnish :-
121'1.4.1. New llork :-The number of coats to be applicd shall bc as
stipulâtecl in thc clcscription of item. Thc urìdcrÇoat shall bc with a flatting varnish.
This dries lrard and brittlc and whcn cut and rubbed down to producc a snìooth
surfircc crhanccs the gloss of the finishing varnish, The top coat shall bc given
with spccificcl type of Iìnishing varnish.
1217.4.11. The varnish shall bc applicd liberally with a full brr¡sh and
sprcacl cvcnly with shoft light strokes to avoid frothing. If the work is ve¡tical the
va¡nish shall be crosscd and rccrossed ancl then laid off, The above proccss will
constitutc one coat. If thc surface is horizontal varnish shall be workccl in cvery
dircction with light quick strokes and finished in one definite diroction so that it
will set wìthout showing brush marks. While laying off excess varnish shall be
sÇrappo(l out of the brush.
l2l7 .4.1.2. Rubbing clown ¿nd flatting the surface shall ie done afrer each
coat cxccpt thc final coat with fine sand papcr. The work shall be allowed to dry
away from draughts and damp air. The finished su¡facc shall thon present a uniform
appcarancc and fine glossy surfacc free fiom streaks, blistcrs, etc.
121'7.4.1.3. Any varnish left over in the small container shall notbepoured
back into the stock tin as it will render thc lato¡ unfit for use. Special var.nishing
brushes shall bc uscd and not ordinary paint brushcs. B¡r¡shcs shall bc pcrf€ctly
c1can.

l2l'7.4.2. Old wori :-This shall conform to clausc 1217.4. I as far as

âpplicablc varnish for exccpt tlìât thc ooats to be applicd shall be with the stipulatcd
type of finishing coat.
1217.5. Other detriils :-This shall conform to the ¡elevant clauscs of SS :
120 t,
1217.6. Measurement :-This shall conform to clâuse 1217.7.
l?"17,7, Ratc :-This shall conform to clausç 1201.8.
 s.s. I 2 l9 PAINTINC AND VARNISFIING 40 I

- Specification No. 1218

Oiling with Raw Linsectl Oil
l2l8.l. Matcrials :

12l8.1.1. O¡l :--This shall conlornr to clausc 1207.2.5.(c).

1218.2. PrcparatioD of surlace :

1218.2.1. New ø,orlr ;--This shall colform to olatLsc 1217.2.1 cxcopt that
no sizing shall l¡c tlouc on thc prcpared sttrfacc.
1218.2.2. Old wc.¡rlc '.-Thc woocì wo¡k shall bc clcancd of all snokc and
grcasc by sand papcring ol by washing with lima and watcr. Thc sutfacc shall thcn
bc washccl with soap ancì watçr ancl complctely thicd.
1218.3. Application :

1218,3,1. New vvorlc '.-._The numbcr of co¿ìts to bc applicd shall bc as

stipulatccl in the dcscription of itcm. Thc oil shall bc appliccl frecly with btushcs
(not Ìâgs) and sprcad ovcnly ancl smoothly ultil no nrote oil is absorbcd. Eacl¡
strbscquent coat shâll bc applicd aftcr thc prcvioLts coat is thoroughly driccl ancl in
aoy casc rìot bcfore 24 hours of application of first coat. Work al'tcr completion
shall not bc patchy ancl sticky to thc touch and shall prcscnt a rtnilot¡n appcalancc.
1218.3.2. Okl ¡,ork :-This shall conform to clausc 1218.3.1,
l218.4. Othcr details :--This shall co¡rform to tha rclevant clauscs of SS :

1201

121t1.5. Measurement :--This shall conform to clarrsc 1201.7.

1218.6, lìate : This shall corfbrnì to clause 1201.8.
Specification No. 1219
Wnx Polishirrg with Readymade Wax Polish
1219.1. Matcrials :-The wax polish shall bc of approved quality.

1219.2. Preparation of surlhce :

1219.2.1. New wort :-This shall confoun to clat¡se 1217.2.1 .

1219.2.2. Old work:--Thc wood work shall be clcancd of all suroke and
glcasc by washing with soap in lukc warm watcr and complctcly dricd. Thcn it
shall bc preparcd smooth as in clausc 1217.2.2.

1219.3. Âpplication :

1219.3.1. Netv wc¡r'lc : The polish shall be applictl cvcnly with a clean soft
pad of cotton cloth in such â way that the su¡facc is cornpletely ancl fully cover.cd,
Thc surface is thcn rubbed continuously with a pad n.ìâde up of cotton lint wrapped
in n.urltilaycrcd piccc of cloth for half an hour. Whcn thc st¡rfacc is quitc dry a
socond coat shall be applied in thc sarnc manncr and rubbccl coutinuously for onc

IAPDSS - 261
 TTIE A.P. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

hour or L¡ntil thc surfacc is dry. Thc final coat shall thcn be applied and rubbed
for two hours (morc if neccssary) until thc surfacc has assumed uniform finish and
is clry showing no signs of stickincss. The final polish depends largely on the
amount of rubbing which shall bc continuous and with uniform pressurc with
fiequent changcs in the direction.
1219.3.2. Old work '.-The polish shall bc appliecl in the same manner as
specified in clausc 1219.3.1 for the final coat on ncw work. ln this case one or
two coats shall be applied as necessary to gct uniform finish instead of thrco coats
in the case of ncw work,
1219.4. Othcr details :-This shâll conloÌm to the relcvant clauscs of SS :

t201.
1219,5. Me¿¡surcment :-This shall conform to clausc 1201.7.
1219.6. Râtc :-This shall conform to clause 1201.8.
Specificat¡on No. 1220
Painting Cast Iron Rain Water, Soil, Waste and Vent Pipes and
Fittings including Priming Coat
1220.1. Paints :
1220.1.1. Priner :-The primer whcrc neccssary shall bc of approved
quality ancl makc.
1220,1,2. Pa¡nt :-Paint shall bc anti corrosivc bitumastic paint or other
type of paint as specified in thc dcscription of the item.
1220.2. Preparation of surfacc :
1220.2.1. New work :---lhis shall conform to clause 1207.3.2.
1220.2.2. Old worÅ :-This shall conforn to clausc I208.3.5.
1220.3. Application :
1220.3.1. New work :*Thc nunìber of coats of pâinting ovcr thc priming
coat slìall be as stipulatcd in thc dcscription of the item. Tho application of paint
ovcr priming coat shall be carlied out as pcr spocification for application of the
¡clovant quâlity of paint in new work.
1220.3.2. Old work:-This shall conform to clause 1208.4.
1220.4. Othcr dctâils :-This shall conform tq thc releviìnt clauses SS :

1201.
1220,5, Measureme ut :-All linear measurement shall be in nìetrcs, correct
to 0.01 of a metre, This shall bc taken over the finished time of pipc including
specials, ctc. Pipcs of diffcrcnt boats shall be measurccl and paid for separately.
Specials and fittings such as holdcr-bat clanrps, plugs, etc,, shall not bc mcasured
sepalately.
1220.6, Ratc:-The unit rate shall be per running mcr¡c which shall
jncludc the cost of all matcrials and labour involved in all the operations dcscribed
abovc irrclucling painting of all specials and fittings.
s.s. 1222 PAINTING AND VARNf SHING

Specification No. 1221

Lettering with Paint
l22l.l. Paiú:-Paint of approvcd quality shall bc uscd.
1221.2. Lettcring :-
1221.2.1. New work '.-The lcttcrs and figurcs shall bc of sizc and stylc
specifiecl. 'fltcsc shall be stcncillcd or clrawn in pcncil and got approved bcforc
painting. They shall bc finishcd neatly. Two or morc costs of paint shall bc appliccl
till unifonn colour ancl lcquirccl finish a¡e obtained.
1221.2.2, Okl Ìvol-,t :-Painting shall bc clonc ovar tha cxisting lettors and
shall accuratcly follow thcir lines ancl curvcs. ODe or nìore coats of paints shall
be applied till a unifornr colour and lcquircd finish âre obtainc(I.
1221.3. Measulement : Mcasurcn]cnt shall be takcn in tc¡ms of vartical
hcights of lcttcr in mnl. punctuations. Thc lcttcr height shall bc measurcd colrcct
to lomm.. Dots, dashcs, punctuations and othcr sirnilal narks or lines shall not be
mcasurecl fot paymcnt.
1221.4. Ratc :-Thc unit ratc shall bc pcr lOmn, hciglìt of lcttcr or figurc
ircspcctivc ofthe styla ofthc lcttaring ancl shall includc thc cost ofall labour and
materials involvctl in thc opcrations.
Specification No. 1222
I'rcnch Polishing
1222,1. Frcnch Polish :-Frcnch polish of approvcd quality shall be userl
and shall conlorm to IS:348-1968.
1222.2. Prep^r^tion of Surface :

1222.2.1. New work :-This shall conform to clausc 1217.2.1.

1222.2.2. Old worÈ :-This shall conform to clausc 1217.2.2.
1222,3. Applicâtion :

1222.3.1. New work '. The numbcr of coats of polish to bc appliccl shall
be dcscribecl in tho item. A pad made up of cotton lint wrappcd in a mLrltilayercd
piecc of cloth shall bc usctl to apply the polish. The pad shall be noistcncd with
polish and rubbcd hard on the wood on a serìcs of overlapping circlcs applying
the mixture spalingly but uniformly over thc entire area to givc an cven levcl
surfacc. A trace of linsced oil on the facc of the pad facilitates this opcrâtion. The
surfacc shall be allowcd fo dry and thc remaining costs applicd in thc samc way.
To finish ofT the pad shall be covcrcd with a frcsh piccc of clcan finc cotton clotll
slightly dampencd with methylatod spirit and rubbcd lightly and quickiy with
circular motions. Thc finisherl surfacc shall havc a uniform tcxture and high gloss,
1222.3.2. Okl work :--This shall conform to clause 1222,3,1 as fal as
applicablc.

1222,4, Other details ;-This shall conform to the relevant clauscs of SS

1201.
 TFIE A.P. S'I'ANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

1222.5. Measuremcnt :-'l'his shall conforn to clausc 1201.7

1222.6, R¿te:-This shall conform to clause I201.8.